Home

Netgear Gs728tp User's Manual

Contents

1. To configure a DHCP pool 1 Select an existing DHCP pool to update or select Create from the Pool Name field and configure the DHCP information the following table describes Field Description Pool Name For a user with read write permission this field would show names of all the existing pools along with an additional option Create When the user selects Create another text box Pool Name appears where the user may enter name for the Pool to be created For a user with read only permission this field would show names of the existing pools only Pool Name This field appears when the user with read write permission has selected Create in the Drop Down list against Pool Name Specifies the Name of the Pool to be created Pool Name can be up to 31 characters in length Configuring System Information 47 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Type of Binding Specifies the type of binding for the pool e Unallocated e Dynamic e Manual Network Address Specifies the subnet address for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool Network Mask Specifies the subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool Either Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Network Prefix Length Specifies the subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool Either Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify th
2. Field Description Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed Querier Status This value indicates whether the interface is a MLD querier or non querier on the subnet it is associated with Querier IP The address of the MLD querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached Querier Up Time The time in seconds since the MLD interface querier was last changed Querier Expiry Time The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires If the local system is the querier this will be zero Wrong Version Queries Indicates the number of queries received whose MLD version does not match Received the MLD version of the interface Number of Joins Received The number of times a group membership has been added on this interface Number of Groups The current number of membership entries for the selected interface in the cache table Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD routing interface statistics Routing 323 MLD Groups ProSafe M5300 Switch To display the MLD Groups page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt MLD Groups MLD Groups MLD Groups Search By Interface x Gi L O 5 z Source Interface Last Reporter Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Version 1 Host Timer Group Compat Mode Hosts Source Address Expiry Time Field Description Interface In
3. Managing Device Security 377 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Current Number of SSH Sessions Displays the number of SSH connections currently in use in the system Keys Present Displays which keys RSA DSA or both are present if any Host Keys Management Use this menu to generate or delete RSA and DSA keys To display the Host Keys Management page click Security gt Access gt SSH gt Host Keys Management Host Keys Management RSA Keys Management None Generate RSA Keys Delete RSA Keys DSA Keys Management None Generate DSA Keys Delete DSA Keys Host Keys Status Keys Present Key Generation In Progress To configure the SSH host key information 1 Host Keys Management None is the default selection 2 Use Generate RSA Keys to begin generating the RSA host keys Note that to generate SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 3 Use DELETE RSA Keys to delete the corresponding RSA key file if it is present DSA Keys Management None is the default selection 5 Use Generate DSA Keys to begin generating the DSA host keys Note that to generate SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Use DELETE DSA Keys to delete the corresponding DSA key file if it is present 7 Click APPLY to start to download the Host Key file Note that to download SSH key files SSH mu
4. Notification of Compliance 526 ProSafe M5300 Switch GPL License Agreement GPL may be included in this product to view the GPL license agreement go to ftp downloads netgear com files GPLnotice pdf For GNU General Public License GPL related information visit http support netgear com app answers detail a_id 2649 Notification of Compliance 527 Index Numerics 802 1X 359 387 389 example configuration 518 A access control ACL example configuration 511 ACLs 435 authentication 802 1X 386 518 enable 16 port based 386 RADIUS 359 SNMP 16 TACACS 364 Auto VoIP Configuration 134 C certificate 375 compliance 525 Configuration 802 1X 387 389 Access Control Lists 435 Access Profile 384 Access Rule 385 Class 343 346 Community 87 CoS 332 Differentiated Services 339 DNS 40 Dual Image 496 Dynamic Host 42 Global 159 IGMP Snooping 158 LAG 184 MAC Filter 397 Management Access 372 Policy 348 Port Security 399 Port VLAN ID 125 RADIUS Global 360 Secure HTTP 373 SNTP Server 38 Standard IP ACL Example 513 STP 143 TACACS 364 Trap 89 VLAN 120 VLAN example 510 CoS 332 D defaults CoS 512 DES 16 Device View 13 DiffServ 339 DNS 40 download from a remote system 490 E EAP 466 F file management 495 firmware download 490 G GARP 132 GMRP 132 guest VLAN configuration 520 GVRP 132 H help HTML based 12 HTTP 372 management interface access 9 secure 372 usin
5. ProSafe M5300 Switch The TACACS folder contains links to the following features e Configuring TACACS on page 364 e TACACS Server Configuration on page 365 TACACS Configuration The TACACS Configuration page contains the TACACS settings for communication between the switch and the TACACS server you configure via the inband management port To display the TACACS Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt TACACS gt TACACS Configuration TACACS Configuration TACACS Configuration Key String Connection Timeout To configure global TACACS settings 1 In the Key String field specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS communications between the Managed Switch and the TACACS server The valid range is 0 128 characters The key must match the key configured on the TACACS server 2 In the Connection Timeout field specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to establish a TCP connection between the Managed Switch and the TACACS server 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 If you make any changes to the page click APPLY to apply the new settings to the system TACACS Server Configuration Use the TACACS Server Configuration page to configure up to five TACACS servers with which the switch can communicate To display the TACACS Server Configuration page click Sec
6. Supported Switch The following table describes information in the Supported Switch table When preconfiguring a new stack member the Switch Index identifies the type of switch that is being added to the stack Field Description Switch Model ID The model number of the supported switch Switch Index The index assigned to the supported switch Configuring System Information 28 ProSafe M5300 Switch Loopback Interface Use this page to create configure and remove Loopback interfaces A loopback interface is a logical interface that is considered to be always up To display the Loopback Interface page click System gt Management gt Loopback Interface A screen similar to the following displays Loopback Interface Configuration Loopback Interface Type Loopback Interface Type IPv4 x IPv4 Loopback Interface Configuration Loopback Primary IP Primary IP Subnet Loopback Interface E CA r m S 2 2 2 C 255 255 0 E 255 255 255 0 Up To configure a loopback interface 1 In the Loopback Interface Type field select whether the interface is an IPv4 or IPv6 loopback interface The configuration fields vary based on the interface type 2 For an IPv4 loopback interface configure the following a In the Loopback ID field select the loopback ID number b In the Primary Address field input the primary IPv4 address for this interface in dotted decimal notation c In
7. Default Settings 507 ProSafe M5300 Switch Default Settings 508 Contiguration Examples This appendix contains information about how to configure the following features e Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs on page 509 e Access Control Lists ACLs on page 511 e Differentiated Services DiffServ on page 514 e 802 1X on page 518 e MSTP on page 521 Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs A local area network LAN can generally be defined as a broadcast domain Hubs bridges or switches in the same physical segment or segments connect all end node devices End nodes can communicate with each other without the need for a router Routers connect LANs together routing the traffic to the appropriate port A virtual LAN VLAN is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some basis other than geographic location for example by department type of user or primary application To enable traffic to flow between VLANs traffic must go through a router just as if the VLANs were on two separate LANs A VLAN is a group of PCs servers and other network resources that behave as if they were connected to a single network segment even though they might not be For example all marketing personnel might be spread throughout a building Yet if they are all assigned to a single VLAN they can share resources and bandwidth as if they were connected to the same segment The resources of other departments can b
8. ProSafe M5300 Switch Virtual Link Configuration Use the Virtual Link Configuration page to define a new or configure an existing virtual link To display this page a valid OSPFv3 area must be defined via the OSPFv3 Area Configuration page To display the Virtual Link Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Virtual Link Configuration Virtual Link Configuration OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration Iftransit Delay Interval Use Area ID to specify the Area ID portion of the virtual link identification for which data is to be displayed The Area ID and Neighbor Router ID together define the virtual link Use Neighbor Router ID to specify the neighbor portion of the virtual link identification Virtual links may be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area Use Hello Interval to specify the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds Use Dead Interval to specify the OSPFv3 dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from
9. Received Datagrams Reassembly The number of IPv6 fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this interface Note that this counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments Routing 208 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Datagrams Successfully Reassembled The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled Note that this counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors etc Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms notably the algorithm in RFC 815 can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments Datagrams Forwarded The number of output datagrams which this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations In entities which do not act as IPv6 routers this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity and the Source Route processing was succe
10. 8 Use Idle Timeout to enable Logout once idle time out is reached seconds If the attribute is 0 or not present then use the value configured for the captive portal 9 Use Max Bandwidth Down to specify the maximum rate Rate in bits per seconds at which a client can receive data from the network O indicates use global configuration Range 0 536870911 bps Managing Device Security 432 10 11 12 13 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Max Bandwidth Up to specify the maximum rate Rate in bits per seconds at which a client can send data into the network 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 536870911 bps Use Max Output to specify the number of octets the user is allowed to transmit After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 4294967295 Use Max Input to specify the number of octets the user is allowed to receive After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 4294967295 Use Max Total to specify the number of bytes the user is allowed to transmit and receive The maximum number of octets is the sum of octets transmitted and received After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates to use the global limit Range 0 4294967295 Captive Portal Trap Flags Use this page to configure whether or not SNMP traps are sent from the Captive
11. Click the orange bar to display the available ports and select the port s you to include in the outbound filter Packets with the MAC address and VLAN ID you selected will be transmitted only out of ports that are in the list Destination ports can be included only in the Multicast filter 2 To delete a configured MAC Filter select it from the menu and then click DELETE 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 If you make changes to the page click APPLY to apply the changes to the system MAC Filter Summary Managing Device Security 398 ProSafe M5300 Switch MAC Filter Summary Use the MAC Filter Summary page to view the MAC filters that are configured on the system To display the MAC Filter Summary page click Security gt Traffic Control gt MAC Filter gt MAC Filter Summary MAC Filter Summary MAC Filter Summary MAC Address Source Port Members Destination Port Members D3 02 F1 93 B3 01 1 1 0 9 1 0 16 1 0 17 The following table describes the information displayed on the page Field Description MAC Address The MAC address of the filter in the format 00 01 1A B2 53 4D VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the filter Source Port Members A list of ports to be used for filtering inbound packets Port Security Port security which is also known as port MAC locking allows you to limit the num
12. Description IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP re assembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors etc Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received lpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity lpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be e g because their Don t Fragment flag was set lpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity IpRoutingDiscards The number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which the entity received Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages which the entity received but determined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter P
13. F 1 0 1 128 20000 Enabled 80 01 Oday 0 hr 0 min 29sec Enable Forwarding Master C 1 0 2 128 o Enabled 80 02 0day 0hr 0 min 29sec Enable Disabled Disabled F 1 0 3 128 0 Enabled 80 03 0 day 0 hr 0 min 29 sec Enable Disabled Disabled L 10 4 128 o Enabled 80 04 Oday 0hr 0 min 29sec Enable Disabled Disabled l 1 0 5 128 0 Enabled 80 05 0day 0 hr 0 min 29 sec Enable Disabled Disabled C 1 0 6 128 o Enabled 80 06 0day 0hr 0 min 29sec Enable Disabled Disabled F 1 0 77 128 0 Enabled 80 07 0 day 0 hr 0 min 29sec Enable Disabled Disabled O 10 8 128 o Enabled 80 08 0day 0hr 0 min 29sec Enable Disabled Disabled 1 0 9 128 0 Enabled 80 09 0 day 0 hr 0 min 29sec Enable Disabled Disabled Configuring Switching Information 153 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure MST port settings 1 Use MST ID to select one MST instance from existing MST instances 2 Use Interface to select one of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the selected MST instance 3 Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance The port priority is set in multiples of 16 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15 it will be set to O If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and 2 16 1 it will be set to 16 and so on 4 Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected MST instance It takes a
14. Radius Attribute 4 Mode Disable Enable The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured see RADIUS Server Configuration on page 361 The switch supports up to three configured RADIUS servers If more than one RADIUS servers are configured the current server is the server configured as the primary server If no servers are configured as the primary server the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server To configure global RADIUS server settings 1 In the Max Number of Retransmits field specify the value of the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server The value of the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted The valid range is 1 15 Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS max retransmit and RADIUS time out If multiple RADIUS servers are configured the max retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted A retransmit will not occur until the configured time out value on that server has passed without a response from the RADIUS server Therefore the maximum delay in receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of retransmit times time out for all configured servers If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt all user interfaces will be blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response 2 Inthe Timeout Duration field specify
15. Routing 296 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Routing Interface Configuration To display the IGMP Routing Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Routing Interface Configuration IGMP Routing Interface Configuration IGMP Routing Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS All GoTo Interface _ uso Last Last Start Start Admin Query PETIR ED Member Member Interface Robustness Query Query Mode Interval Response Query Query Interval Count Time Interval Count E v3 25 00 3 0 E 1 0 1 Disable a 1 0 2 Disable v3 125 1 0 3 Disable v3 125 1 0 4 Disable v3 125 1 0 5 Disable v3 125 1 0 6 Disable v3 125 1 0 7 Disable v3 125 To configure an interface for IGMP 1 2 Use the check boxes associated with the Interface field to select each interface to configure The same settings are applied dot all selected interfaces Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of IGMP on the selected interface The default is disable Use Version to enter the version of IGMP you want to configure on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 3 and the default value is 3 This field is configurable only when IGMP interface mode is enabled Use Robustness to enter the robustness value This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If you expect the subnet to be lossy you should enter a higher number for this parameter IGMP is robust to robus
16. Select the check box next to the port to configure Select multiple check boxes to apply the same settings to each selected port Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all ports Configure or view the settings e Admin Mode Enable or disable the ability of the port to deliver power e High Power Indicates whether the port supports High Power Mode e Max Power Shows the maximum power in Watts the port can provide e Port Priority Determine which ports can deliver power if the total power delivered by the switch crosses a certain threshold The switch may not be able to supply power to all connected devices Priority is used to determine which ports can supply power When ports have the same priority the lower numbered port is given a higher priority The possible priority levels are Critical highest priority High and Low e High Power Mode Select the power up mode for the port e Disable A port is powered in the IEEE 802 3af mode Default e Legacy A port is powered using high inrush current which is used by legacy powered devices PDs with a power requirement greater than 15W from power up e Pre 802 3at A port is powered in the IEEE 802 3af mode initially and switched to the high power IEEE 802 3at mode before 75 msec Use this mode if the PD is not performing Layer 2 classification or if the switch is performing two event Layer 1 classification e 802 3at A port is powered in IEEE 802
17. 0 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 o fee o ie o i o o fen o fee o Ie o Managing Device Security 418 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Interface The untrusted and snooping enabled interface for which statistics to be displayed MAC Verify Failures Number of packets that were dropped by DHCP Snooping as there is no matching DHCP Snooping binding entry found Client Ifc Mismatch The number of DHCP messages that are dropped based on source MAC address and client HW address verification DHCP Server Msgs Received The number of Server messages that are dropped on an un trusted port Click CLEAR to clear all interfaces statistics Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest statistics IP Source Guard The IP Source Guard IPSG feature helps protect the network from attacks that use IP address spoofing to compromise or overwhelm the network The source ID may be either the source IP address or a source IP address source MAC address pair You can configure e Whether enforcement includes the source MAC address e Static authorized source IDs The DHCP snooping bindings database and static IPSG entries identify authorized source IDs IPSG can be enabled on physical and LAG ports If you enable IPSG on a port where DHCP snooping is disabled or where DHCP snooping is enabled but the port is trusted all IP traffic received on that port is
18. 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface L o GO General General General General General To configure the port mode for ports 1 2 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces From the Port VLAN Mode menu select the mode to apply to the selected port s The modes are as follows e General The port is in general mode and is not a member of the private VLAN e Promiscuous The port belongs to a primary VLAN and can communicate with all interfaces in the private VLAN including other promiscuous ports community ports and isolated ports e Host The port belongs to a secondary VLAN and depending upon the type of secondary VLAN can either communicate with other ports in the same community if the secondary VLAN is community VLAN and with the promiscuous ports or is able to communicate only with the promiscuous ports if the secondary VLAN is isolated VLAN Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Managing Device Security 409 ProSafe M5300 Switch 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration Use this page to map host ports to primary and secondary private VLANs To display the Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Private VLAN gt Pri
19. 3 Use OSPFv3 Inter to specify the OSPF v3 inter route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 4 Use OSPFv3 External to specify the OSPFv3 External route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255 5 Click APPLY to update the switch with the configured information 6 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Local Local preference Routing 215 ProSafe M5300 Switch Tunnel Configuration ProSafe software provides for the creation deletion and management of tunnel interfaces These are dynamic interfaces that are created and deleted via user configuration ProSafe support configured IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels to facilitate the transition of IPv4 networks to IPv6 networks With configured tunnels the user specifies the endpoints of the tunnel Tunnels operate as point to point links Tunnels can be created configured and deleted from this page To display the Tunnel Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Tunnel Configuration Tunnel Configuration Tunnel Configuration Tunnel IPv6 iret mode mia Unreachables aids seas nan hdc apa itis Mio 6 in 4 configured Enable Enable 2001 db8 2eb0 Sdff fe91 f8b5 32 S Source Address pees Destination Address Interface Link Status ne Enable 192 168 3 10 CJ 192 168 3 23 Down To configure an IPv6 tunnel 1 Use Tunnel ID to sele
20. Access Profile Configuration Access Profile Name administrators Activate Profile Deactivate Profile V Remove Profile Packets Filtered Profile Summary Rule Type Service Type Source IP Address Mask Priority Permit Secure Telnet SSH 192 168 12 0 255 255 255 0 1 To create an Access Profile 1 In the Access Profile Name field specify the name of the access profile to be added The maximum length is 32 characters 2 To activate an access profile select the Activate Profile check box You cannot add rules to an active profile 3 To deactivate an access profile select the Deactivate Profile check box Managing Device Security 384 ProSafe M5300 Switch 4 Toremove an access profile select the Remove Profile check box The access profile should be deactivated before removing the access profile 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 6 If you make changes to the page click APPLY to apply the changes to the system The Profile Summary table shows the rules that are configured for the profile as the following table describes Field Description Rule Type Identifies the action the rule takes which is either Permit or Deny Service Type Displays the type of service to allow or prohibit from accessing the switch management interface e SNMP HTTP e HTTPS Source IP Address Displays the IP Address of the
21. HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Admin Mode Disable Enable SSL Version 3 Disable Enable TLS Version 1 Disable Enable HTTPS Port 443 HTTPS Session Soft Timeout Minutes 60 HTTPS Session Hard Timeout Hours 24 Maximum Number of HTTPS Sessions 16 Authentication List HttpsListName To configure HTTPS settings i Use HTTPS Admin Mode to Enable or Disable the Administrative Mode of Secure HTTP The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Disable You can only download SSL certificates when the HTTPS Admin mode is disabled Use SSL Version 3 to Enable or Disable Secure Sockets Layer Version 3 0 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable Use TLS Version 1 to Enable or Disable Transport Layer Security Version 1 0 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable Use HTTPS Port to set the HTTPS Port Number The value must be in the range of 1 to 65535 Port 443 is the default value The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Use HTTPS Session Soft Timeout Minutes to set the inactivity time out for HTTPS sessions The value must be in the range of 1 to 60 minutes The default value is 5 minutes The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Use HTTPS Session Hard Timeout Hours to set the hard time o
22. Initialize Not Assigned FALSE Default Port Based Initialize Not Assigned FALSE Default _ Port Based Initialize Not Assigned FALSE Default Port Based Initialize Not Assigned FALSE Default N A Port Based Initialize Not Assigned FALSE Default Port Based The following table describes the fields on the Port Summary page Field Description Port Specifies the port whose settings are displayed in the current table row Control Mode This field indicates the configured control mode for the port Possible values are e Force Unauthorized The authenticator port access entity PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized e Force Authorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized Auto The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server Managing Device Security 393 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Operating Control Mode This field indicates the control mode under which the port is actually operating Possible values are e ForceUnauthorized e ForceAuthorized Auto e N A If the port is in detached state it cannot participate in port access control Reauthentication Enabled This field shows whether reauthentication of the supplicant for the specified port is allowed The possible values are true
23. IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options etc IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity This count includes invalid addresses e g 0 0 0 0 and addresses of unsupported Classes e g Class E For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address lpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination In entities which do not act as IP Gateways this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity and the Source Route option processing was successful IpIlnUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does n
24. Number of Routes Prefix Next Hop Next Hop IP fi Prot I Pref IPv6 Prefix Length rotoco eiaa idit reference To view the IPv6 route table 1 Use Routes Displayed to choose from e Configured Routes Shows the routes configured by the user e Best Routes Shows only the best active routes e All Routes Shows all active IPv6 routes 2 Click REFRESH to update the page with the most current information Field Description Number of Routes Displays the total number of active routes in the route table IPv6 Prefix Displays the Network Prefix for the Active Route Prefix Length Displays the Prefix Length for the Active Route Protocol Displays the Type of Protocol for the Active Route Next Hop Interface Displays the Interface over which the Route is Active For a Reject Route the next hop would be a NullO interface Next Hop IP Address Displays the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the Active Route Preference Displays the Route Preference of the Configured Route Routing 203 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Basic link you can access the following pages e IPv6 Global Configuration on page 202 e IPv6 Interface Configuration on page 204 e Pv6 Prefix Configuration on page 206 e IPv6 Statistics on page 207 e Pv6 Neighbor Table on page 212 e Pv6 Route Configuration on page 214 e IPv6 Route Table on page 203 e IPv6 Route Preferences on page 215 e Tunnel Configuration on page
25. ProSafe M5300 Switch OUI Based The OUl based Auto VoIP feature helps provide a classification mechanism for voice packets that include OUI bits so that they can be prioritized above data packets in order to provide better Quality of Service QoS From the OUI based link you can access the following pages e OUI Based Properties on page 136 e OUI Port Settings on page 137 e OUI Table on page 138 OUI Based Properties Use this page to configure the VLAN ID for the Auto VoIP VLAN When the switch identifies voice traffic based on the presence of an OUI the traffic is placed in the VLAN specified on this page and assigned the selected 802 1p priority value To display the OUI Based Properties page click Switching gt Auto VoIP gt OUl based gt Properties QUI Based Properties OUI Based Properties VoIP VLAN Id OUI based priority To configure OUI based Auto VoIP properties 1 From the VoIP VLAN ID menu select the VLAN used to segregate VoIP traffic from other non voice traffic All VoIP traffic that matches a value in the known OUI list gets assigned to this VoIP VLAN 2 From the OUl based priority menu select the 802 1p priority used for traffic that matches a value in the known OUI list If the Auto VolP mode is enabled and the interface detects an OUI match the device assigns the traffic in that session to the traffic class mapped to this priority value Traffic classes with a higher value are generally used f
26. Relay TACACS UDP port 49 packet e tftp Relay TFTP UDP port 69 packets e time Relay time service UDP port 37 packets e Other If this option is selected the UDP Port Other Value is enabled This option permits a user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value 4 Use UDP Port Other Value to specify a UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535 5 Click ADD to create an entry in UDP Relay Table with the specified configuration 6 Click DELETE to remove all entries or a specified one from UDP Relay Table The following table describes the UDP Relay Global Configuration fields Field Description Hit Count Show the number of UDP packets hitting the UDP port UDP Relay Interface Configuration To display the UDP Relay Interface Configuration page click System gt Services gt UDP Relay gt UDP Relay Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays UDP Relay Interface Configuration UDP Relay Interface Configuration Server UDP Port Hit a ric wae Use Interface to select an Interface to be enabled for the UDP Relay 2 Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x x x x format 3 Use UDP Port to specify UDP Destination Port The following ports are supported e DefaultSet Relay UDP port 0 packets This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating a Relay server e dhcp Relay DHCP UDP port 67 packets e domain Relay
27. Search By Interface GO PEER BERN Neighbor Up Expiry IP Time hh mm ss Time hh mm ss Field Description Interface The interface on which neighbor is displayed Neighbor IP The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry Up Time The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor will be aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest PIM SM neighbor information Routing 307 ProSafe M5300 Switch Candidate RP Configuration The settings on this page are valid for PIM SM and do not apply if the PIM mode is PIM DM To display the PIM Candidate RP Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM SM gt Candidate RP Configuration PIM Candidate RP Configuration PIM Interface Selection Interface PIM Candidate RP Configuration croup Address Group mask O To configure a candidate RP 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed 2 Use Group Address to specify the group address transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 3 Use Group Mask to specify the group address mask transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 4 Click ADD to add a new Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router 5 Click DELETE to delete an extant Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router Routing 308 ProSafe M5300 Switch BSR Candidat
28. Select the Unit ID of the stack member to add 2 Select the switch model number of the new unit from the Switch Type field 3 Optionally specify the Switch Priority to select whether you want this unit to become a management unit in preference to another unit The default value for this setting is undefined If the preference level is set to zero then the device cannot become a management unit A higher value indicates a higher priority the maximum value is 15 4 Use the Management Status field to indicate whether the selected switch is the stack master a normal stacking member or the standby unit A standby unit takes over the stack master responsibilities if the stack master becomes unavailable 5 Click Add to add the preconfigured unit to the stack Configuring System Information 72 ProSafe M5300 Switch To change the settings for an existing stack member 1 Select the check box next to the stack member to configure 2 If desired specify a new unit ID for the stack member in the Change to Switch ID field The renumbering process causes the unit to reload 3 Specify the switch type priority or management status from the available fields 4 Click Apply to save the changes to the stack member Note f you configured a new unit number for an existing stack member you are asked to confirm the change Click OK to continue or Cancel to retain the original settings 5 Click Delete to remove the selected unit from
29. Specifies the number of Replies DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Reconfigurations DHCPv 6 Relay forward Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Relay forwards DHCPV6 Relay reply Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Relay Replies DHCPv6 Relay The DHCPVv6 Relay Agent allows for various sub options to be attached to messages that are being relayed by the local switch to a DHCPv6 server The DHCPV6 server may in turn use this information in determining an address to assign to a DHCP V6 client To display the DHCPv6 Relay Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Relay A screen similar to the following displays DHCPv6 Relay Configuration DHCPVv6 Relay Configuration 1 2 LOOPBACKS All Go To Interface Admin Relay Destination IP CJ Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Oa 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 Configuring System Information 66 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the DHCPv6 Relay information for one or more interfaces 1 Select the check box associated with each interface to configure or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same configuration to all interfaces In the Admin Mode field specify the DHCPv6 mode to configure DHCPv6 Relay functionality DHCPv6 server and DHCPV6 relay functions are mutually exclusive In the Relay Interface field specify an inter
30. Src IP Mask Specify the IP Mask in dotted decimal notation to be used with the Source IP Address value Src L4 Port Specify a packet s source layer 4 port as a match condition for the selected extended IP ACL rule This is an optional configuration The possible values are DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range Dst IP Address Enter an IP address using dotted decimal notation to be compared to a packet s destination IP Address as a match criteria for the selected extended IP ACL rule Dst IP Mask Specify the IP Mask in dotted decimal notation to be used with the Destination IP Address value Dst L4 Port Specify the destination layer 4 port match conditions for the selected extended IP ACL rule The possible values are DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range This is an optional configuration Service Type Select a Service Type match condition for the extended IP ACL rule from the pull down menu The possible values are IP DSCP IP precedence and IP TOS which are alternative ways of specifying a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header however each uses a different user notation After a selection is made
31. Stacking PoE SNMP LLDP ISDP Timer Schedule Device View Master Full Stack View 1 NETGEAR PROSAFE M5300 52G POE DEER EA EB OTE ORO ROP RR AE PA Pe a RO ei ma aie aie ale alle ole eae Port Configuration mj Cable Test Port Detailed Statistics Por Summan Satstes Double VLAN Tunneling Spanning Tree Port Configuration Spanning Tree Port Configuration Status VLAN Port Configuration GARP Port Configuration Port Security Interface Configuration Port Security Static Port Security Dynamic Port Security Violation Status IP Interface Configuration Port Access Control Configuration Port Access Control Statistics MVR Interface Configuration REFRESH If you click the graphic but do not click a specific port the main menu appears This menu contains the same option as the navigation tabs at the top of the page Device View Master Full Stack View NETGEAR PROSAFE M5300 52G POE Seem BES EO GR AO AO AO RD A Ae ae a ae a A aOR ais a 1 DE L Routing Auto VolP Advanced gt Je he ah hee whee che hee cle che ale oS iscsi Security STP Monitoring Multicast Help Address Table Index Ports gt gt gt gt Maintenance MVR gt gt LAG Getting Started 15 ProSafe M5300 Switch Help Page Access Every page contains a link to the online help which contains information to assist in configuring and managing the switch The online help pages are cont
32. overflow Isdb overflow Disable Enable Isdb approaching overflow Disable Enable retransmit packets Disable Enable virt packets Disable Enable state change To configure the trap flags 1 Use Authentication to enable or disable activation of authentication failure traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled 2 Use Link Up Down to enable or disable activation of link status traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled 3 Use Multiple Users to enable or disable activation of multiple user traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled This trap is triggered when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time either via telnet or the serial port 4 Use Spanning Tree to enable or disable activation of spanning tree traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled Configuring System Information 90 ProSafe M5300 Switch 5 Use ACL to enable or disable activation of ACL traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled 6 Use PoE to enable or disable activation of PoE traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is enabled Indicates whether PoE traps will be sent 7 Use DVMRP to enable or disable activation of DVMRP traps by selecting the corresponding radio button
33. policy type Unknown Bit Status Specifies the unknown bit associated with a particular policy type Tagged Bit Status Specifies the tagged bit associated with a particular policy type Configuring System Information 106 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Inventory Information Specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version of the remote device Firmware Revision Specifies Firmware version of the remote device Software Revision Specifies Software version of the remote device Serial Number Specifies serial number of the remote device Manufacturer Name Model Name Specifies manufacturers name of the remote device Specifies model name of the remote device Asset ID Specifies asset id of the remote device Location Information Specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port Sub Type Specifies type of location information Location Information Specifies the location information as a string for given type of location id Extended POE Specifies if remote device is a PoE device Device Type Specifies remote device s PoE device type connected to this port Extended POE PSE Specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port Available Specifies the remote ports PSE power value
34. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Multicast Datagrams Transmitted ICMPv6 Statistics Total ICMPv6 Messages Received ICMPv6 Messages With Errors Received ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Received ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Received Routing 207 ProSafe M5300 Switch To view statistics for an IPv6 interface select the interface with the information to view from the Interface menu When the selection is changed a screen refresh will occur causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port IPv6 Statistics Field Description Total Datagrams Received The total number of input datagrams received by the interface including those received in error Received Datagrams Locally Delivered The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user protocols including ICMP This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Header Errors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6 headers including version number mismatch other format errors hop count exceeded errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options etc Received Datagrams Discarded Due To MTU The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface Received Da
35. 0 27 Down 0 28 Down o m a m NNNN Be ew o o fa o ia o ia o aaa a a Gee eee 0 0 0 0 0 oO 0 0 0 0 o o 0 0 o o 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 o fe o fey o Fao o fe fe o feo To configure the mode of the stack ports 1 Select the check box associated with the unit and port to configure 2 From the Configured Stack Mode field select the operating mode e Stack The port connects to the stack port on another stack member This is the default value e Ethernet The port operates as a standard switch port that receives and transmits network traffic 3 Click Apply to apply the new settings to the system 4 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click Refresh to update the screen with the current information The following table describes Stack Port Configuration fields Field Description Unit ID Displays the unit Port Displays the stackable interfaces on the given unit Slot ID Displays the slot Id in the format unit slot Type Displays the type of stackable interfaces on the given unit XFP SFP Adapter Displays the Name of the XFP SFP Adapter Running Stack Mode Displays the run time mode of the stackable interface Configuring System Information 75 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Link Status Displays the link status UP DOWN of the port Link S
36. 22 lt 13 gt JAN O3 23 19 99 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1948147584 traputil lt 614 1745 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTIO 0 Unt 1 Slot O Port 22 lt 13 gt JAN O3 23 19 8 10 27 34 2 1 TRAPMGR 1940147584 traputil c 614 1744 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 lt 13 gt JAN 03 23 19 58 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1940147584 traputil c 614 1743 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTIO 0 Unt 1 Siet O Port 22 lt 14 gt JAN O3 23 10 43 10 27 34 2 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_instell_cortrol c 2026 1742 5 Autoinstall Waring for retry Smet lt 14 gt JAN O3 23 10 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 3523 1743 4 ONCE option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 21 20 lt 14 gt JAN O3 23 00 43 10 27 34 52 3 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_contrel c 2026 1740 45 Autolnatall Waiting fer retry tment lt 14 gt JAN 03 23 00 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_contrel c 3523 1739 4 OHCP option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 21 20 lt 14 gt JAN O3 22 50 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 2026 1735 4 Autolnstall Waiting for retry tenet lt 14 gt JAN 03 22 50 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_contrel c 3523 1737 DHCP option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 11 20 lt 14 gt JAN 03 22 40 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 2026 1735 Autolnatall Waiting for retry tenenut lt 14 gt J
37. A screen similar to the following displays MVR Configuration MVR Configuration MVR Running Disable MVR Multicast Vlan f e MVR Max Multicast Groups 256 MVR Current Multicast Groups 0 MVR Global query response time 5 MVR Mode compatible x 1 Use MVR Running to Enable or Disable the MVR feature The factory default is Disable 2 Use MVR multicast to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data will be received All source ports belong to this VLAN The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4093 The default value is 1 Configuring Switching Information 173 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Definition MVR Max Multicast Groups Displays the maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports MVR Current Multicast Groups Displays current number of the MVR groups allocated 3 Use MVR Global query response time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP 4 reports membership on a receiver port This time applies only to receiver port leave processing When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port the switch waits for the default or configured MVR querytime for an IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group membership The value is equal to the tenths of second The range is from 1 to 100 tenths The factory default is 5 tenths or one half Use MVR Mode to specify the MVR mode of operation The factory default is compatible Advanced From the Advanced link
38. Advanced gt Tracking Configuration VRRP Tracking Configuration Routing Interface VRRP Interface VRRP ID vo s E E VRRP Tracking Interface Configuration Tracked Interface Tracked T ked Priority Decrement Interface Interface State CC 1 0 11 FALSE VRRP Tracking Route Configuration Tracked Route Tracked Route Prefi Tracked Route Prefix a a gael bea Priority Decrement Reachable To configure VRRP tracking settings 1 Use VRRP ID and Interface to select one of the existing Virtual Routers listed by interface number and VRRP ID 2 Use Tracked Interface to select a routing interface which is not yet tracked for this VRRP ID and interface configuration Exception loopback and tunnels could not be tracked 3 Use Tracked Interface Priority Decrement to specify the priority decrement for the tracked interface The valid range is 1 254 default value is 10 Use Tracked Route Prefix to specify the Prefix of the route 5 Use Tracked Route Prefix Length to specify the prefix length of the route 6 Use Tracked Route Priority Decrement to specify the priority decrement for the Route The valid range is 1 254 Default value is 10 7 Click ADD to add a new tracked interface or tracked route to the VRRP 8 Click DELETE to delete a selected tracked interface or tracked route Field Description Tracked Interface state The state of the tracked interface Reachable Th
39. Committed Rate Kbps loss Policing Outbound Priority Medium x Configuring Quality of Service 340 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the switch using the DiffServ Wizard 1 Use Traffic Type to define the DiffServ Class Traffic type options VOIP HTTP FTP Telnet and Every 2 Ports displays the ports which can be configured to support a DiffServ policy The DiffServ policy will be added to selected ports 3 Use Enable Policing to add policing to the DiffServ Policy The policing rate will be applied 4 Committed Rate e When Policing is enabled the committed rate will be applied to the policy and the policing action is set to conform e When Policing is disabled the committed rate is not applied and the policy is set to markdscp 5 Outbound Priority e When Policing is enabled Outbound Priority defines the type of policing conform action where High sets action to markdscp ef Med sets action to markdscp af31 and Low sets action to send e When Policing is disabled Outbound Priority defines the policy where High sets policy to mark ipdscp ef Med sets policy to mark ipdscp af31 Low set policy to mark ipdscp be Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e DiffServ Configuration on page 341 DiffServ Configuration Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria The filtering criteria is defined by aclass The processing is defined by a policy s attributes Policy attribut
40. Dropping Drop a packet upon arrival This is useful for emulating access control list operation using DiffServ especially when DiffServ and ACL cannot co exist on the same interface Marking IP DSCP or IP Precedence Marking re marking the DiffServ code point in a packet with the DSCP value representing the service level associated with a particular DiffServ traffic class Alternatively the IP Precedence value of the packet can be marked re marked Marking CoS 802 1p Sets the three bit priority field in the first only 802 1p header to a specified value when packets are transmitted for the traffic class An 802 1p header is inserted if it does not already exist This is useful for assigning a layer 2 priority level based on a DiffServ forwarding class i e DSCP or IP Precedence value definition to convey some QoS characteristics to downstream switches which do not routinely look at the DSCP value in the IP header Policing A method of constraining incoming traffic associated with a particular class so that it conforms to the terms of the TCS Special treatment can be applied to out of profile packets that are either in excess of the conformance specification or are non conformant The DiffServ feature supports the following types of traffic policing treatments actions e drop The packet is dropped e mark cos The 802 1p user priority bits are re marked and forwarded e mark dscp The packet DSCP is re marked and forwarded e
41. E 1 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable To configure global DAI VLAN settings 1 2 VLAN ID Select the DAI Capable VLANs for which information has to be displayed or configured Use Dynamic ARP Inspection to indicate whether the Dynamic ARP Inspection is enabled on this VLAN If this object is set to Enable Dynamic ARP Inspection is enabled If this object is set to Disable Dynamic ARP Inspection is disabled Managing Device Security 422 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Use Logging Invalid Packets to indicate whether the Dynamic ARP Inspection logging is enabled on this VLAN If this object is set to Enable it will log the Invalid ARP Packets information If this object is set to Disable Dynamic ARP Inspection logging is disabled 4 Use ARP ACL Name to specify a name for the ARP Access list A VLAN can be configured to use this ARP ACL containing rules as the filter for ARP packet validation The name can contain up to lt 1 31 gt alphanumeric characters 5 Use Static Flag to determine whether the ARP packet needs validation using the DHCP snooping database in case ARP ACL rules don t match If the flag is enabled then the ARP Packet will be validated by the ARP ACL Rules only If the flag is disabled then the ARP Packet needs further validation by using the DHCP Snooping entries The factory default is disable DAI Interface Configuration To display the DAI Interface Con
42. Firmware Version Version of the PoE controller s FW image Power Status Indicates whether the PoE capability is on or off Nominal Power Indicates the nominal amount of power the switch can provide to all ports Threshold Power Shows the amount of power the system can consume before the system will not provide power to an additional port Consumed Power Shows the total amount of power currently being delivered to all ports PoE Port Configuration Use the PoE Port Configuration page to configure per port PoE settings To display the Advanced PoE Configuration page click System gt Services gt PoE gt Advanced gt PoE Configuration A screen similar to the following displays the screens have been edited to show all fields PoE Port Configuration PoE Port Configuration 3 All Admin High _ seta romer Hoda Power ager Power Limit Limit m Mode Type mw Cis 1 Enable 802 3at 3 0 2 Enable Yes 802 3at 3 0 3 Enable Yes 802 3at 3 0 4 Yes 802 3at 3 0 5 Yes 802 3at 3 0 6 Yes 802 3at 0 Gaa Detection Timer cops Fault ipa Class arse Voltage Current Power Temperature Status Volts ma mw C None Searching No Error Unknown 36 Searching No Error Unknown 36 Searching No Error Unknown 36 Searching No Error Unknown 41 Searching No Error Unknown 38 Searching No Error Configuring System Information 84 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure PoE Port settings 1
43. Flow Control Support IEEE 802 3x Head of Line Blocking Prevention Maximum Frame Size Auto MDI MDIX Support Auto Negotiation Advertised Port Speed Broadcast Storm Control Port Mirroring LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table Address Aging DHCP Layer 2 Relay All ports are unlocked None configured Disabled Disabled Disabled None None Enabled Disabled 1518 bytes Enabled Enabled Maximum Capacity Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 300 seconds Dynamic Addresses Disabled Default Settings 506 Table 3 Default Settings continued ProSafe M5300 Switch Feature Default Default VLAN ID 1 Default VLAN Name Default GVRP Disabled GARP Timers Leave 60 centiseconds Leave All 1000 centiseconds Join 20 centiseconds Voice VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN Disabled RADIUS assigned VLANs Disabled Double VLANs Disabled Spanning Tree Protocol STP Enabled STP Operation Mode Optional STP Features STP Bridge Priority Multiple Spanning Tree Link Aggregation LACP System Priority Routing Mode IP Helper and UDP Relay Tunnel and Loopback Interfaces DiffServ Auto VoIP Auto VoIP Traffic Class Bridge Multicast Filtering MLD Snooping IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Querier GMRP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Disabled 32768 Enabled No Link Aggregation Groups LAGs configured 1 Disabled Enabled None Enabled Enabled 6 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
44. Forwarded message responses can overload network resources and or cause the network to time out The switch measures the incoming broadcast multicast unknown unicast packet rate per port and discards packets when the rate exceeds the defined value Storm control is enabled per interface by defining the packet type and the rate at which the packets are transmitted The Storm Control folder contains links to the following features e Storm Control Global Configuration on page 412 e Storm Control Interface Configuration on page 413 Storm Control Global Configuration To display the Storm Control Global Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Storm Control gt Storm Control Global Configuration Storm Control Port Settings Global Flow Control IEEE 802 3x Mode Disable Broadcast Storm Control All Disable Enable Multicast Storm Control All Disable Enable Unknown Unicast Storm Control All Disable Enable The following four control radio buttons provide an easy way to enable or disable each type of packets be rate limited on every port in a global fashion The effective storm control state of each port can be viewed by going to the port configuration page e Global Flow Control IEEE 802 3x Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the radio button The factory default is disabled e Broadcast Storm Control All Enable or disable the Broadcast Storm Recovery
45. It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the LSA flooding as compared to the Designated Router Other Designated Router Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router The identity of the Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Designated Router is identified here by its router ID The value 0 0 0 0 means that there is no Designated Router This field is only displayed if the OSPF admin mode is enabled Backup Designated Router The identity of the Backup Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Backup Designated Router is identified here by its router ID Set to 0 0 0 0 if there is no Backup Designated Router Number of Link Events Local Link LSAs This is the number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state The number of opaque LSAs whose flooding scope is the link on this interface Local Link LSA Checksum The sum of the checksums of local link LSAs for this link Routing 245 ProSafe M
46. Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason Accounting Server Configuration Use the RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for one or more RADIUS accounting servers on the network To access the RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt RADIUS gt Accounting Server Configuration Accounting Server Configuration Accounting Server Configuration A ti S IP x mm 168 10 100 radius1 1813 Enable Statistics o Malf d Accounting Tri Accounting Accounting Accounting pea Bad Pending EE Unknown Packets Server p Requests Retransmissions Responses g Authenticators Requests Types Dropped Responses 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 10 100 0 00 0 To configure the RADIUS accounting server 1 In the Accounting Server IP Address field specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting server to add 2 In the Accounting Server Name field enter the Name of the accounting server to add In the Port field specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the RADIUS accounting server authentication The valid range is 0 65535 If the user has READONLY access the value is displayed but cannot be changed 4 From the Secret Configured menu select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS
47. Target Name Shows the name assigned to the Target Initiator Name Shows the name of the initiator Up Time Show time that has elapsed since the session was created Time for aging out in Seconds Shows the time in seconds left before the session is set to expire ISID Initiator Session ID Shows the unique identifier an initiator assigns to the session endpoint When it is combined with the iSCSI initiator name it provides a unique name in the world for the SCSI initiator port Initiator IP Address Shows the Initiator IP Address Initiator TCP Port Shows the Initiator TCP Port number of one of the connections between the Target and initiator Target IP Address Shows the IP Address of the Target Target TCP Port Shows the Target TCP Port number of one of the connections between the Target and Initiator Configuring Switching Information 142 ProSafe M5300 Switch Spanning Tree Protocol The Spanning Tree Protocol STP provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges STP also provides one path between end stations on a network eliminating loops Spanning tree versions supported include Common STP Multiple STP and Rapid STP Classic STP provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops For information on configuring Common STP see CST Port Configuration on page 3 148 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to e
48. The list includes other as an option for the remaining values Source Prefix Length This is a valid Source IPv6 Prefix to compare against an IPv6 Packet Prefix is always specified with the Prefix Length Prefix can be entered in the range of 0 to FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF and Prefix Length can be entered in the range of 0 to 128 Configuring Quality of Service 347 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Source L4 Port This lists the keywords for the known source layer 4 ports from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the unnamed ports e Destination Prefix Length This is a valid Destination IPv6 Prefix to compare against an IPv6 Packet Prefix is always specified with the Prefix Length Prefix can be entered in the range of 0 to FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF and Prefix Length can be entered in the range of 0 to 128 e Destination L4 Port This lists the keywords for the known destination layer 4 ports from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the unnamed ports e Flow Label This is a 20 bit number that is unique to an IPv6 Packet used by end stations to signify Quality of Service handling in routers Flow Label can be specified in the range of 0 to 1048575 e IP DSCP This lists the keywords for the known DSCP values from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values 5 Match Criteria Disp
49. These can be selected or unselected for re configuring the association of VLANs to MST instances 2 To delete an MST instance select the check box next to the instance and click DELETE 3 To modify an MST instance select the check box next to the instance to configure update the values and click APPLY You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch For each configured instance the information described in the following table displays on the page Field Description Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Time Since Topology Change The time n seconds since the topology of the selected MST instance last changed Topology Change Count Number of times topology has changed for the selected MST instance Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance It takes a value if True or False Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for this MST instance Root Portldentifier Po
50. Use Internal VLAN Allocation Base to specify the VLAN Allocation Base for the routing interface The default base of the internal VLAN is 1 to 4093 2 Use the optional Internal VLAN Allocation Policy field to specify a policy for the internal VLAN allocation There are two policies supported ascending and descending VLAN Configuration To add or remove a VLAN 1 Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN Identifier for the new VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 2 Use the optional VLAN Name field to specify a name for the VLAN It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks The default is blank VLAN ID 1 always has a name of Default 3 Click ADD to add a new VLAN to the switch 4 Click DELETE to delete a selected VLAN from the switch Field Description VLAN Type This field identifies the type of the VLAN you are configuring You cannot change the type of the default VLAN VLAN ID 1 it is always type Default When you create a VLAN using this screen its type will always be Static A VLAN that is created by GVRP registration initially has a type of Dynamic When configuring a Dynamic VLAN you can change its type to Static Configuring Switching Information 121 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages VLAN Configuration on page 120 VLAN Membership on page 122 VLAN Status on page 124 Port PVID Configuratio
51. address is in IPv6 global or link local address format Use IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length to add the IPv6 prefix and prefix length to the IPv6 network interface The address is in global address format Use EUI64 to specify whether to format the IPv6 address in EUI 64 format Default value is false Click ADD to add a new IPv6 address in global format 9 Click DELETE to delete a selected IPv6 address IPv Network Interface Neighbor Table Use this page to view information about IPv6 neighbors the device has discovered through the network interface by using the Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP To display the IPv6 Network Neighbor page click System gt Management gt Network Interface gt IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table A screen similar to the following displays IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table Neighbor Last IPv6 Add MAC Add 1Pv6 address macaddress Jismi gantor Updated The following table displays IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table information Field Description IPv6 address The Ipv6 Address of a neighbor switch visible to the MAC address The MAC address of a neighbor switch network interface Configuring System Information 33 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description IsRtr True 1 if the neighbor machine is a router false 2 otherwise Neighbor State The state of the neighboring switch e reachable 1 The neigh
52. e DHCP e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port Once you have established in band connectivity you can change the IP information using a Web based management To access the HTTP Configuration page click Security gt Access gt HTTP gt HTTP Configuration HTTP Configuration HTTP Configuration HTTP Access Disable Enable Java Mode Disable Enable HTTP Session Soft Timeout Minutes 60 HTTP Session Hard Timeout Hours 24 Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions 16 Authentication List HttpListName Managing Device Security 372 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the HTTP server settings 1 Use HTTP Access to specify whether the switch may be accessed from a web browser If you choose to enable web mode you will be able to manage the switch from a web browser The factory default is enabled 2 Use Java Mode to enable or disable the java applet that displays a picture of the switch at the top right of the screen If you run the applet you will be able to click on the picture of the switch to select configuration screens instead of using the navigation tree at the left side of the screen The factory default is disabled 3 Use HTTP Session Soft Timeout Minutes to set the inactivity time out for HTTP sessions The value must be in the range of 1 to 60 minutes The default value is 5 minutes The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed 4 Use HTTP Session Hard Timeout Hours to
53. e Private Group Configuration on page 404 e Private Group Membership on page 405 Private Group Configuration Use this page to create private groups and to specify its mode To display the Private Group Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Private Group gt Private Group Configuration Private Group Configuration Private Group Configuration Pgroupl community To configure a private group 1 Use Group Name to enter the Private Group name to be configured The name string can be up to 24 bytes of non blank characters 2 Use the optional Group ID field to specify the private group identifier If not specified a group id not used will be assigned automatically The range of group id is 1 to 192 3 Use Group Mode to configure the mode of private group The group mode can be either isolated or community When in isolated mode the member port in the group cannot forward its egress traffic to any other members in the same group By default the mode is community mode that each member port can forward traffic to other members in the same group but not to members in other groups 4 Click ADD to create a new private group in the switch 5 Click DELETE to delete a selected private group from the switch Managing Device Security 404 ProSafe M5300 Switch Private Group Membership Use this page to configure the ports that belong to the existing private groups To display th
54. gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Prefix Configuration IPv6 Prefix Configuration IPv6 Interface Selection Interface 1 0 1 IPv6 Interface Configuration Inv6 Prefix Prefix Length Valid Life Preferred Onlink Autonomous Current P ene LAS Time ae ae To configure IPv6 address information for an interface 1 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured When the selection is changed a screen refresh will occur causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port All physical interfaces are valid 2 Use IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length to specify the IPv6 prefix with prefix length for an interface 3 Use EUI 64 to specify 64 bit unicast prefix Use Valid Lifetime to specify router advertisement per prefix time to consider prefix valid for purposes of on link determination Valid lifetime must be in the range 0 to 4294967295 5 Use Preferred Lifetime to specify router advertisement per prefix time An auto configured address generated from this prefix is preferred Preferred lifetime must be in range 0 to 4294967295 6 Use OnLink Flag to specify selected prefix can be used for on link determination Default value is enable This selector lists the two options for on link flag enable and disable 7 Use Autonomous Flag to specify selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration Default value is disable This selector lists the two options for autonomous flag enable and disable 8 Click A
55. gt NSF Summary A screen similar to the following is displayed NSF Summary NSF Summary Admin Status Enable z Operational Status Enable Last Startup Reason Power On Time Since Last Restart 2 days 1 hrs 54 mins 30 secs Restart In Progress No Warm Restart Ready Yes Copy of Running Configuration to Backup Unit Status Current Backup Configuration Age 0 days 0 hrs 31 mins 52 secs NSF Support on Unit 1 Enable 2 Enable To configure NSF 1 To enable or disable NSF on the switch select the desired option from the Admin Mode field When enabled the stack selects a backup unit to receive checkpointed data from applications on the management unit 2 Click INITIATE FAILOVER to start a warm restart On a warm restart the backup unit becomes the management unit without clearing its hardware tables on a cold restart hardware tables are cleared Applications apply checkpointed data from the former management unit to the backup unit as the original management unit reboots If the system is not ready for a warm restart for example because no backup unit has been elected or one or more members of the stack do not support nonstop forwarding the command fails with a warning message 3 Click APPLY if you have updated the NSF Admin Status If you want the switch to retain the new setting across a power cycle you must perform a save Configuring System Information 78 ProSafe M5300 Switch 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the ch
56. known address combinations Security is more integrated and network configuration is simplified yet more flexible IPv6 can coexists with IPv4 As with IPv4 IPv6 routing can be enabled on physical and VLAN interfaces Each L3 routing interface can be used for IPv4 IPv6 or both IP protocols running over L3 for example UDP and TCP do not change with IPv6 For this reason a single CPU stack is used for transport of both IPv4 and IPv6 and a single sockets interface provides access to both Routing protocols are capable of computing routes for one or both IP versions From the IPv6 link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 201 e Advanced on page 204 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e IPv6 Global Configuration on page 202 e Pv6 Route Table on page 203 Routing 201 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Global Configuration Use the Global Configuration page to enable IPv6 forwarding on the router and to enable the forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams To display the IPv6 Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Basic gt Global Configuration IPv6 Global Configuration IPv6 Global Configuration IPv6 Unicast Routing Disable Enable Hop Limit 0 ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval 1000 ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size 100 To configure global IPv6 routing 1 2 Use IPv6 Unicast Routing to globally enable or disable IPv6 unicast routing on the entity Us
57. the interface ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received by the interface ICMPv6 Group Membership Query Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Group Membership Response Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction Messages Received The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received by the interface Routing 210 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Total ICMPv6 Messages Transmitted The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted Due To Error The number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable Messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Transmitted Number of ICMP destination unreachable communicati
58. with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE 802 3 section 8 2 1 5 10BASE5 and section 10 3 1 4 10BASE2 These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms Fragments Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length with ERROR CRC excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Undersize Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length with GOOD CRC excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Alignment Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with a non integral number of octets Monitoring the System 462 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets Overruns The total number of frames discarded as this port was overloaded with incoming packets and could not keep up with the inflow
59. you can access the following pages MVR Group Configuration on page 174 MVR Interface Configuration on page 175 MVR Group Membership on page 176 MVR Statistics on page 176 MVR Group Configuration To display the MVR Group Configuration page click Switching gt MVR gt Advanced gt MVR Group Configuration A screen similar to the following displays gt MVR Group Configuration MVR Group Configuration Use the MVR Group IP to specify the IP Address for the new MVR group Click ADD to add a new MVR group Click DELETE to delete a selected MVR group Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Field Definition Status Displays the status of the specific MVR group Members Displays the list of ports that participate in the specific MVR group Configuring Switching Information 174 MVR ProSafe M5300 Switch Interface Configuration To display the MVR Interface Configuration page click Switching gt MVR gt Advanced gt MVR Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays MVR Interface Configuration MVR Interface Configuration 1 All Go To Interface C GO Interface Admin Mode Type Immediate Leave Status Cii W i 0 1 Disable none Disable ACTIVE InVLAN 0 2 Disable Disable INACTIVE InVLAN 0 3 Disable Disable ACTIVE InVLAN 0 4 Disable Disable INACTIVE I
60. 0 0 i i 0 0 0 oO o 0 0 oO 0 oO oO o o o 0 Authenticator 0 0 0 0 i a fe ee Authenticator Authenticator 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Authenticator fem fe o fal o o 0 0 o 0 0 o Authenticator Ef The following table describes the EAP statistics displayed on the screen Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e To clear all the EAP counters for all ports on the switch select the check box in the row heading and click CLEAR The button resets all statistics for all ports to default values e Toclear the counters for a specific port select the check box associated with the port and click CLEAR e Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics Field Description Port Selects the port to be displayed When the selection is changed a screen refresh will occur causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port All physical interfaces are valid PAE Capabilities This displays the PAE capabilities of the selected port EAPOL Frames Received This displays the number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator EAPOL Frames Transmitted This displays the number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator EAPOL Start Frames This displays the number of EAPOL start frames that h
61. 0 seconds The factory default is 20 centiseconds 0 2 seconds An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port Use Leave Time centiseconds to specify the time to wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry in centiseconds This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service Enter a number between 20 and 600 0 2 to 6 0 seconds The factory default is 60 centiseconds 0 6 seconds An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port Configuring Switching Information 133 ProSafe M5300 Switch 6 Use Leave All Time centiseconds to control how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be deregistered Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain registration The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1 5 LeaveAllTime The timer is specified in centiseconds Enter a number between 200 and 6000 2 to 60 seconds The factory default is 1000 centiseconds 10 seconds An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port 7 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 8 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Auto VolP Configuration The Auto VoIP automatically makes sure that time sensitive voice traffic is given prior
62. 1 to 65535 The default is 40 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to specify the OSPFv3 Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second Use Retransmit Interval to specify the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds Click ADD to add a new virtual link to the switch Click DELETE to remove the specified virtual link from the switch configuration Routing 275 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Neighbor State The state of the Virtual Neighbor Relationship State The state of the interface e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router by monitoring received Hello Pac
63. 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 2 e 100 90 80 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 3 e 100 90 80 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 4 e 100 90 80 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 5 e 100 90 80 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 6 Valid Range is 0 to 100 in sixteenths of the overall device queue size In the WRED Drop Probability field specify the packet drop probability for the current drop precedence level Default value is 10 Valid Range is 0 to 100 Click APPLY to update the switch with the configured values Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Quality of Service 338 ProSafe M5300 Switch Differentiated Services The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services DiffServ support that allows traffic to be classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per hop behaviors Standard IP based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service Best effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion although there is no guarantee that it will During times of congestion packets may be delayed sent sporadically or dropped For typical Internet applications such as e mail and file transfer a slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable Conversely any degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with st
64. 165 Configuring Switching Information 158 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Snooping Configuration Use the IGMP Snooping Configuration page to configure the parameters for IGMP snooping which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access the IGMP Snooping Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Configuration IGMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Snooping Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Multicast Control Frame Count 0 IGMP Router Alert check Disable Enable Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping VLAN IDs Enabled for IGMP Snooping To configure IGMP Snooping 1 Use the Admin Mode Enable Disable radio button to select the administrative mode for IGMP Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Use the Unknown Multicast Filtering Enable Disable radio button to select the unknown multicast filtering mode for the switch The default is disable The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics on the page Field Description The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU Multicast Control Frame Count Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for IGMP Snooping Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU The number of data frames forwarded by the
65. 216 IPv6 Interface Configuration Use the Interface Configuration page to configure IPv6 interface parameters To display the IPv6 Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration IPv6 Interface Configuration IPv6 Interface Configuration 1 2 All DHCPv6 Stateless Address Routing Admin Operational Interf IPv6 Mod Se eS ee 1 0 1 Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable uso Duplicate Adv i A th A Address x Adv NS Adv Reachable Adv Managed past al nid ae Destination Link Detection Interval Interval Interval Config Fla 9 ee Unreachables State Transmits Flag s 9 CE O O 1800 Disable Disable Disable Enable Link Up 1800 Disable Disable Disable Enable Link Down 1800 Disable Disable Disable Enable Link Down 1800 Disable Disable Disable Enable Link Down 1800 Disable Disable Disable Enable Link Down Routing 204 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure IPv6 interface information 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured or displayed All physical interfaces are valid Use IPv6 Mode to enable disable IPv6 mode When IPv6 mode is enabled interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address In this case an EUI 64 based link local address is used This selector lists the two opt
66. 3 103 When a tagged packet enters a port the tag for that packet is unaffected by the default VLAN ID setting The packet proceeds to the VLAN specified by its VLAN ID tag number If the port through which the packet entered does not have membership with the VLAN specified by the VLAN ID tag the packet is dropped If the port is a member of the VLAN specified by the packet s VLAN ID the packet can be sent to other ports with the same VLAN ID Packets leaving the switch are either tagged or untagged depending on the setting for that port s VLAN membership properties A U for a given port means that packets leaving the switch from that port are untagged Inversely a T for a given port means that packets leaving the switch from that port are tagged with the VLAN ID that is associated with the port The example given in this section comprises numerous steps to illustrate a wide range of configurations to help provide an understanding of tagged VLANs VLAN Example Configuration This example demonstrates several scenarios of VLAN use and describes how the switch handles tagged and untagged traffic In this example you create two new VLANs change the port membership for default VLAN 1 and assign port members to the two new VLANs 1 In the Basic VLAN Configuration screen see VLAN Configuration on page 120 create the following VLANs e AVLAN with VLAN ID 10 e AVLAN with VLAN ID 20 In the VLAN Membership screen see VL
67. 5 Click REFRESH to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch 6 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 7 If you make changes to the page click APPLY to apply the changes to the system Configuration changes take effect immediately Managing Device Security 406 ProSafe M5300 Switch Private VLAN The Private VLANs feature provides Layer 2 isolation between ports that share the same broadcast domain In other words it allows a VLAN broadcast domain to be partitioned into smaller point to multipoint subdomains The ports participating in a private VLAN can be located anywhere in the Layer 2 network Each subdomain is defined represented by a primary VLAN and a secondary VLAN The primary VLAN ID is the same for all subdomains that belong to a private VLAN The secondary VLAN ID differentiates subdomains from each another and provides Layer 2 isolation between ports of the same private VLAN Private VLANs are typically implemented in the DMZ for security reasons Servers are not supposed to communicate with each other but they need to communicate to a router through which they are connected to the users Such servers are typically connected to host ports and routers are attached to promiscuous ports Then if one of the servers is compromised the intruder cannot use it to attack another server in the same network segment The sam
68. 7 debug level messages SysLog Configuration To access the SysLog Configuration page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Sys Log Configuration Monitoring the System 471 1 Syslog Configuration Syslog Configuration Admin Status Local UDP Port Messages Received Messages Relayed Messages Ignored Host Configuration ProSafe M5300 Switch Disable Enable 514 1 to 65535 1752 0 0 E Host Address Status Severity Filter OOO E Use Admin Status to enable disable logging to configured syslog hosts Setting this to disable stops logging to all syslog hosts Disable means no messages will be sent to any collector relay Enable means messages will be sent to configured collector relays using the values configured for each collector relay Enable Disable the operation of the syslog function by selecting the corresponding radio button Use Local UDP Port to specify the port on the local host from which syslog messages are sent The default port is 514 Specify the local port in the text field Field Description Messages Relayed The count of syslog messages relayed Messages Ignored The count of syslog messages ignored Trap Logs This screen lists the entries in the trap log The information can be retrieved as a file by using System Utilities Upload File from Switch To access the Trap Logs page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Trap Logs Monitoring the System
69. 8 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable To configure per interface PIM settings 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM in the router The default is disable 3 Use Hello Interval secs to enter the time in seconds between the transmission of which PIM Hello messages on this interface The valid values are from 0 to 18000 The default value is 30 4 Use Join Prune Interval secs to enter the frequency at which PIM Join Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface The valid values are from 0 to 18000 The default value is 60 5 Use BSR Border to set BSR border status on the selected interface 6 Use DR Priority to enter the DR priority for the selected interface The valid values are from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 1 Field Description Protocol State The state of PIM in the router either operational or non operational IP Address The IPv4 address of the selected PIM interface Designated Router The Designated Router on the selected PIM interface Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface Routing 306 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM Neighbor To display the PI Neighbor page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM gt PIM Neighbor PIM Neighbor PIM Neighbor
70. ACL gt Basic gt Binding Table MAC Binding Table MAC Binding Table ACL Sequence A E 1 0 5 In Bound MAC ACL macACL 1 0 9 In Bound MAC ACL macACL 1 The following table describes the information displayed in the MAC Binding Table To delete a MAC ACL to interface binding select the check box next to the interface and click DELETE Field Description Interface Displays the interface of the ACL assigned Direction Displays selected packet filtering direction for ACL ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction ACL ID Displays the ACL Number in case of IP ACL or ACL Name in case of MAC ACL identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface and direction Sequence Number Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction Advanced The Advanced folder contains links to the following features IP ACL on page 442 IP Rules on page 443 IP Extended Rules on page 445 IPv6 ACL on page 449 IPv6 Rules on page 450 IP Binding Configuration on page 453 IP Binding Table on page 454 IP Binding Table on page 454 Managing Device Security 441 ProSafe M5300 Switch IP ACL An IP ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additi
71. Address field The factory default is IPv4 4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Seer Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 5 Use Remote File Name to enter the name of the file you want to download from the server You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 6 Use User Name to enter the user name for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file will be sent This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected 7 Use Password to enter the password for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file will be sent This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected 8 The last row of the table is used to display information about the progress of the file transfer HTTP File Upload To display the HTTP File Upload page click Maintenance gt Upload gt HTTP File Upload HTTP File Upload HTTP File Upload File Type Archive e Image Name image1 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want retrieve the CLI banner file e Startup Configuration Specify configuration when you want
72. BootP server 4 lf the network configuration protocol is None use Default Gateway to specify the default gateway for the IP interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 For DHCP or BootP configuration protocols this field shows the default gateway assigned to the network interface has by the DHCP or BootP server 5 Use MAC Address type to specify whether the burned in or the locally administered MAC address should be used for in band connectivity If the MAC address type is burned in the Burned In MAC Address field shows the hardware address assigned to the device by the manufacturer 6 Ifthe MAC address type is Locally Administered use Locally Administered MAC Address to configure a locally administered MAC address for in band connectivity instead of using the burned in universally administered MAC address Enter the address as twelve hexadecimal digits 6 bytes with a colon between each byte Bit 1 of byte 0 must be set to a 1 and bit 0 to a 0 in other words byte O must have a value between x 40 and x 7F 7 Use DHCP Vendor Class Identifier to specify whether to set a value for DHCP option 60 in the DHCP requests that the DHCP client on the switch broadcasts to network DHCP servers Option 60 the Vendor Class Identifier VCI can help identify the device to the DHCP server which allows the server to include additional information in the DHCP response Configuring System Information 31 ProSafe M5300 Switch 8 Use
73. Broadcast Packets Transmitted Transmit Packets Discarded Most Address Entries Ever Used 417 2217432 22325 14468 7750 107 0 12897472 17263 15964 1291 Address Entries in Use Maximum VLAN Entries Most VLAN Entries Ever Used Static VLAN Entries Dynamic VLAN Entries VLAN Deletes Time Since Counters Last Cleared 0 day 5 hr 22 min 57 sec The following table describes Switch Statistics information Field Description ifIndex This object indicates the ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with the Processor of this switch Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the processor excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received Without Errors The total number of packets including broadcast packets and multicast packets received by the processor Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address Configuring System Information 24 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Receive Packets Dis
74. CANCEL Navigation Tabs Feature Links and Page Menu The navigation tabs along the top of the Web interface give you quick access to the various switch functions The tabs are always available and remain constant regardless of which feature you configure When you select a tab the features for that tab appear as links directly under the tabs The feature links in the blue bar change according to the navigation tab that is selected The configuration pages for each feature are available as links in the page menu on the left side of the page Some items in the menu expand to reveal multiple configuration pages as the following figure shows When you click a menu item that includes multiple configuration pages the item becomes preceded by a down arrow symbol and expands to display the additional pages Getting Started 11 Configuration ProSafe M5300 Switch System Information gt Switch Statistics gt System CPU Status gt Slot Information gt Loopback Interface Page Link gt Network Interface IPv4 Network Configuration IPv6 Network Configuration IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table gt Time gt DNS gt SDM Template Preference Pages Configuration and Monitoring Options The area directly under the feature links and to the right of the page menu displays the configuration information or status for the page you select On pages that contain configuration options you can input informa
75. CP User Configuration page the screen refreshes and you can add a new user to the Local User database To display the Captive Portal User Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP User Configuration CP User Configuration CP User Configuration Edit Password Password Confirm Password Disable onana 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 id Idle Pan Max Bandwidth SERIE Max ect Max mm id Timeout 1 User ID identifies the name of the user 2 Use User Name to enter the name of the user Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters User names once created cannot be changed modified 3 Set Edit Password to Enable only when you want to change the password The default value is Disable 4 Use Password to enter a password for the user The password length can be from 8 to 64 characters 5 Use Confirm Password to enter the password for the user again 6 Use Group to assign the user to at least one User Group To assign a user to more than one group press the Ctrl key and click each group New users are assigned to the 1 Default user group by default 7 Use Session Timeout to enter the number of seconds a user is permitted to remain connected to the network Once the Session Timeout value is reached the user is logged out automatically A value of 0 means that the user does not have a Session Timeout limit The valid range is 0 to 86400 seconds and the default value is 0
76. CPU VLAN Ids Enabled For IGMP Snooping Displays VLAN Ids enabled for IGMP snooping Configuring Switching Information 159 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Use the IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page to configure IGMP snooping settings on specific interfaces To access the IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Interface Configuration IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface GO j Fast Grou P t ary p n Max Response oe Leave Interface Membership Expiration i ode Time secs Admin Interval secs Time secs Mode A Ci 0 1 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 260 10 1 0 3 Disable 260 10 1 0 4 Disable 260 10 1 0 5 Disable 260 10 1 0 6 Disable 260 10 1 0 7 Disable 260 10 1 0 8 Disable 260 10 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Will To configure IGMP Snooping interface settings 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP Snooping for the switch from the pull down menu The default is disable 3 Use Group Membership Interval to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait for a report for a parti
77. Click ADD to add a new administratively scoped boundary 5 Click DELETE to delete the administratively scoped boundary selected Routing 312 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Multicast The in the ProSafe M5300 switches support IPv6 multicast routing From the IPv6 Multicast link you can access the following pages e Mroute Table on page 313 e Pv6 PIM on page 314 e MLD on page 321 e Static Routes Configuration on page 329 Mroute Table This screen displays contents of the Mroute Table in tabular form To display the Mroute Table page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt Mroute Table Mroute Table Mroute Table Group Source Incoming Outgoing Up Expiry RPF Protocol Flags Time hh mm ss Time hh mm ss Neighbor Field Description Source IP The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the Group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry Group IP The destination group IP address Incoming Interface The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source group arrive Outgoing Interface s The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source group are forwarded Up Time hh mm ss The time in seconds since the entry was created Expiry Time hh mm ss The time in seconds before this entry will age out and be removed from the table RPF Neighbor The IP address of the Reverse Path Forwarding neighbor Pr
78. Common Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Common Area Configuration Common Area Configuration OSPFv3 Common Area Configuration Area I rt mpo External Border p Area ID i Summary Routing Router LSAs Count E a 0 0 0 0 Import External LSAs 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Click ADD to configure the area as a common area 3 Click DELETE to delete the common area Field Description External Routing A definition of the router s capabilities for the area including whether or not AS external LSAs are flooded into throughout the area SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a cha
79. Configuring System Information 63 ProSafe M5300 Switch 5 Inthe Preferences field specify the preference value used by clients to determine preference between multiple DHCPv6 servers The values allowed are between 0 to 4294967295 The default value is 0 6 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 7 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch DHCPv 6 Bindings Information To display the DHCPv6 Bindings Information page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPV6 Bindings Information A screen similar to the following displays DHCPv6 Bindings Information DHCPV6 Bindings Information Search By Binding IP le E Go Client Prefix Prefix Expiry Valid Prefer i Client DUID owe eas Interface Client DUTD Prefix Length Type Time Lifetime Lifetime The following table describes the DHCPv6 Bindings Information fields Field Description Client Address The Client s IPv6 address Client Interface The interface number where the client binding occurred Client DUID The client s DHCPv6 unique identifier Prefix The IPv6 address leased to the client Prefix Length The IPv6 mask length Prefix Type The type of prefix associated with this binding Dynamic Manual Expiry Time The number of seconds until the prefix associated with
80. DAI as the sender IP address in ARP packet or target IP address in ARP reply packet is invalid Invalid addresses include 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP multicast addresses class E addresses 240 0 0 0 4 loopback addresses 127 0 0 0 8 Number of valid ARP packets forwarded by DAI Dropped Number of invalid ARP packets dropped by DAI Click CLEAR to clear the DAI statistics Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest DAI statistics Managing Device Security 425 ProSafe M5300 Switch Captive Portal The Captive Portal CP feature allows you to block wired and wireless clients from accessing the network until user verification has been established You can configure CP verification to allow access for both guest and authenticated users Authenticated users must be validated against a database of authorized Captive Portal users before access is granted The database can be stored locally on the switch or on a RADIUS server The Captive Portal folder contains links to the following features e Captive Portal Global Configuration on page 426 e Captive Portal Configuration on page 428 e Captive Portal Binding Configuration on page 430 e Captive Portal Binding Table on page 430 e Captive Portal Group Configuration on page 431 e Captive Portal User Configuration on page 432 e Captive Portal Trap Flags on page 433 e Captive Portal Client on page 434 Captive Portal Global Configuration Usi
81. DNS UDP port 53 packets e isakmp Relay ISAKMP UDP port 500 packets e mobile ip Relay Mobile IP UDP port 434 packets e nameserver Relay IEN 116 Name Service UDP port 42 packets e netbios dgm Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server UDP port 138 packets e netbios ns Relay NetBIOS Name Server UDP port 137 packets Configuring System Information 58 ProSafe M5300 Switch e ntp Relay network time protocol UDP port 123 packets e pim auto rp Relay PIM auto RP UDP port 496 packets e rip Relay RIP UDP port 520 packets e tacacs Relay TACACS UDP port 49 packet e tftp Relay TFTP UDP port 69 packets e time Relay time service UDP port 37 packets e Other If this option is selected the UDP Port Other Value is enabled This option permits the user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value 4 Use UDP Port Other Value to specify UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535 5 Use Discard to enable disable dropping of matched packets Enable can be chosen only when a user enters 0 0 0 0 IP address Discard mode can be set to Disable when user adds a new entry with a non zero IP address 6 Click ADD to create an entry in UDP Relay Table with the specified configuration 7 Click DELETE to remove all entries or a specified one from UDP Relay Interface Configuration Table The following table describes the UDP Relay Interface Configuration fields Field Description Hit Cou
82. False False Supported Card Card Model Card Type Card Descriptor GSM7328S 0x563040d1 GSM7328S 24 GE 4 TENGIG GSM7352S 0x563040d2 GSM7352S 48 GE 4 TENGIG GSM7328FS 0x563040d3 GSM7328FS 24 GE 4 TENGIG GSM7328Sv2 0x563140d1 24 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Stackable Managed Switch with 2 10G SFP ports GSM7352Sv2 0x563140d2 48 Port Gigabit Layer 3 Stackable Managed Switch with 2 10G SFP ports GSM7228PS 0x563140d3 24 Port GE L2 Managed Stackable PoE Switch with 2 10GE SFP ports GSM7252PS 0x563140d4 48 Port GE L2 Managed Stackable PoE Switch with 2 10GE SFP ports M5300 28G 0x1320000 ProSafe 24 port Gigabit L2 with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 28G3 0x2320000 ProSafe 24 port Gigabit L3 with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 28G POE 0x3320000 ProSafe 24 port Gigabit L2 PoE with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 28GF3 0x4320000 ProSafe 24 port Gigabit Fiber L3 with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 52G 0x5320000 ProSafe 48 port Gigabit L2 with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 52G3 0x6320000 ProSafe 48 port Gigabit L3 with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 52G POE 0x7320000 ProSafe 48 port Gigabit L2 PoE with 10 Gigabit Stacking Supported Switch Model ID Index Preference GSM7328Sv2 1 1 GSM7352Sv2 GSM7228PS GSM7252PS M5300 28G M5300 28G3 M5300 28G POE M5300 28GF3 M5300 52G M5300 52G3 M5300 52G POE Slot Summary The following table describes information in the Slot Summary table Field Description Slot The slot number Status Ind
83. Ga acted od SS Ge WA nce 472 Event Oieee deraan ls eee uae Coed oe eae eS 474 PERSISUCM LOGS crans irar Gmina ea ORLA ERA ald de ORES dhe 476 Port MINOnNG s 2 t ocaec ocungs rI Era TOR ERTO anced 477 Multiple Port MITONG 5 2 2ta ace nseri Saute a aad teirra Rad acai Ra 477 SHOW ers os tata a naa Sid oe SAO OS S AES E ham eee 479 BASIC EEEE g ahaa E TEE aay cigs alte vrais aod ban Ria ene A 479 AWAM 5 5 c0 dct he dena Sard aed tienen ra REEE 480 Chapter 8 Maintenance Save COMIQUIALOM 5 2 2 4 0 508 2 Bit dese i Pda wae CS wd omen 483 Save COMIQUIAUON ocs 2 2ci0 ton ea inar Etita ode bala td 483 Auto Install Configuration 2 2 2 24000 lt 0 25006 2cenrebesddees bees 484 RESOL cht dade ca dae does Beau ied dee Oh Usted eae Widens 485 Device REDOOU sga 6 050542 ber wd deed ceed ediedsd a8 hana eke 485 Factory Default seer ceive need ease ned gal Rekers ae 486 Password RCS CU acd mieie a a eg 1d ED R ne E i R EA 486 Upload File From SWOR as64244 2 tanka thane ia e a a a a 487 File Upload a a cacianinaats mise ea ahs ahs ae a tos Ga aa eaea 487 ATIP Pile Uploads 12 0 i 20 2 eecaca ae aesclieedereoaaaaadd 488 USB File Upload esitar rrt nAIRE RAEN uaa NELESI 489 Download File TO SWICK 240 0 454 2045 44404 2454 00440 225408 4R6 490 Pile Download tece caches sks doom bd Bh ale RO A OA 490 HTP File D wnload 65 3 4 205 b6e Caw ede oe ohne nade E 492 USB File DOWMOAGs ssaa sea a aan o gambia dal Asi Ga EE wal ese 494 File M
84. Generation Status Displays whether SSL certificate generation is in progress Certificate Download Use this menu to transfer a certificate file to the switch For the Web server on the switch to accept HTTPS connections from a management station the Web server needs a public key certificate You can generate a certificate externally for example off line and download it to the switch To display the Certificate Download page click Security gt Access gt HTTPS gt Certificate Download Downloading SSL Certificates Before you download a file to the switch the following conditions must be true e The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory e The file is in the correct format e The switch has a path to the TFTP server Managing Device Security 375 ProSafe M5300 Switch Certificate Download Certificate Download File Type SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File Transfer Mode TFTP iw Server Address Type IPv4 m Server Address 10 27 9 99 Remote File Path projects fastpath amyc Remote File Name netgear_0710 stk To configure the certificate download settings for HTTPS sessions 1 Use File Type to specify the type of file you want to transfer e SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File SSL Trusted Root Certificate File PEM Encoded e SSL Server Certificate PEM File SSL Server Certificate File PEM Encoded e SSL DH Weak Encryption Pa
85. ISDP gt Advanced gt Statistics A screen similar to the following displays ISDP Statistics ISDP Statistics ISDP Packets Received ISDP Packets Transmitted ISDPvi Packets Received ISDPvi Packets Transmitted ISDPv2 Packets Received ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted ISDP Bad Header ISDP Checksum Error ISDP Transmission Failure ISDP Invalid Format ISDP Table Full ISDP IP Address Table Full The following table describes the ISDP Statistics fields Field Description ISDP Packets Received Displays the ISDP packets received including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets ISDP Packets Transmitted Displays the ISDP packets transmitted including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets ISDPv1 Packets Received Displays the ISDPv1 packets received ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted Displays the ISDPv1 packets transmitted ISDPv2 Packets Received ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted Displays the ISDPv2 packets received Displays the ISDPv2 packets transmitted ISDP Bad Header Displays the ISDP bad packets received ISDP Checksum Error ISDP Transmission Failure Displays the number of the checksum error Displays the number of the transmission failure ISDP Invalid Format Displays the number of the invalid format ISDP packets received ISDP Table Full ISDP Ip Address Table Full Displays the table size of the ISDP table Displays the table size of the ISDP IP address table Conf
86. Link Aggregation trunk Look at the LAG screens for more information Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode Link Status Indicates whether the Link is up or down iflndex The iflndex of the interface table entry associated with this port Port Description This screen configures and displays the description for all ports in the box Configuring Switching Information 182 ProSafe M5300 Switch To access the Port Description page click Switching gt Ports gt Port Description Port Description Port Description 1 2 LAGS All Go To Port PortList Se a a Bit Offset a 1 0 1 connects to connects to RTR3 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 2 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 3 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 4 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 5 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 6 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 7 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 8 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 9 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 10 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 1 0 11 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F2 oon oun ff w Nh oon nuk wN 1 Select the check box associated with each Port to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all ports 2 Use Port Description to enter the description string to be attached to a port It can be up to 64 characters in length 3 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes 4 Click APPLY to update the switch with the values you entered If you want the switch to retain the new values across a power cyc
87. List networkList e Enable Authentication List enableNetList m To configure the SSH client settings on the switch 1 Use SSH Admin Mode to Enable or Disable the administrative mode of SSH The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Disable 2 Use SSH Version 1 to Enable or Disable Protocol Level 1 for SSH The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable 3 Use SSH Version 2 to Enable or Disable Protocol Level 2 for SSH The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The default value is Enable 4 Use SSH Session Timeout to configure the inactivity time out value for incoming SSH sessions to the switch The acceptable range for this value is 1 160 minutes 5 Use Maximum Number of SSH Sessions to configure the maximum number of inbound SSH sessions allowed on the switch The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed The range of acceptable values for this field is 0 5 6 Use Login Authentication List to select an authentication list from the pull down menu This list is used to authenticate users who try to login the switch 7 Use Enable Authentication List to select an authentication list from the pull down menu This list is used to authenticate users who try to get enable level privilege 8 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest SSH Sessions
88. Management gt Network Interface gt IPv4 Network Configuration A screen similar to the following displays IPv4 Network Interface Configuration IPv4 Network Interface Configuration IP Address 10 27 34 61 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 27 34 1 Burned In MAC Address 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Locally Administered MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 MAC Address Type Burned In Locally Administered Current Network Configuration Protocol None Bootp DHCP DHCP Vendor Class Identifier Disable Enable DHCP Vendor Class Identifier String Management VLAN ID Interface Status The network interface is the logical interface used for in band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch s front panel ports The configuration parameters associated with the switch s network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed To access the switch over a network you must first configure it with IP information IP address subnet mask and default gateway You can configure the IP information using any of the following e BOOTP e DHCP e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port Configuring System Information 30 ProSafe M5300 Switch Once you have established in band connectivity you can change the IP information using any of the following e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port e Terminal interface v
89. Membership LAG Membership LAG ID Lagi LAG Name h LAG Description Admin Mode Enable Link Trap Disable x STP Mode Enable Static Mode Disable Hash Mode Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 To configure LAG Membership information 1 Use LAG ID to select the identification of the LAG 2 Use LAG Name to enter the name you want assigned to the LAG You may enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters A valid name has to be specified in order to create the LAG 3 Use LAG Description to enter the Description string to be attached to a LAG It can be up to 64 characters in length 4 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is disabled no traffic will flow and LACPDUs will be dropped but the links that form the LAG will not be released The factory default is enable Configuring Switching Information 186 10 11 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Link Trap to specify whether you want to have a trap sent when link status changes The factory default is enable which will cause the trap to be sent Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the LAG The possible values are e Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG e Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG Use Static Mode to select enable or disable from the pull dow
90. Mode to select the administrative mode for IGMP Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Use Querier IP Address to specify the Snooping Querier Address to be used as source address in periodic IGMP queries This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent 3 Use IGMP Version to specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries IGMP queries 4 Use Query Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier The Query Interval must be a value in the range of 1 and 1800 The default value is 60 5 Use Querier Expiry Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed The Querier Expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300 The default value is 60 Field Description VLAN Ids Enabled For IGMP Snooping Querier Displays VLAN Ids enabled for IGMP snooping querier Configuring Switching Information 164 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration Use this page to configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network To access this page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Querier VLAN Configuration IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration Querier Operational 2 z e 2 Last Last Election Querier VLAN Operational Operational i a Max VLAN
91. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol independent of any other protocol The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value When there are multiple routes to a destination the preference values are used to determine the preferred route If there is still a tie the route with the best route metric will be chosen To avoid problems with mismatched metrics i e RIP and OSPF metrics are not directly comparable you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols To display the Route Preferences page click Routing gt Routing Table gt Advanced gt Route Preferences Route Preferences Route Preferences Local Static 1 Use Static to specify the static route preference value in the router The default value is 1 The range is 1 to 255 2 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 3 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Local This field displays the local route preference value Routing 192 ProSafe M5300 Switch The IP folder contains links to the following web pages that configure and display IP routing data e Basic on page 193 e Advanced on page 197 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e IP Configuration on page 193 e Statistics on page 194 IP Configuration Use this menu to configure routing parameters for th
92. OSPF v3 interface has changed its state or an error has occurred Virtual Events The number of state changes or errors that have occurred on this virtual link Neighbor Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred External LSA Count The number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database Sent packets The number of OSPFv3 packets transmitted on the interface Received packets The number of valid OSPFv3 packets received on the interface Discards The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet Bad Version The number of received OSPF v3 packets whose version field in the OSPF v3 header does not match the version of the OSPFv3 process handling the packet Virtual Link Not Found The number of received OSPF v3 packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non backbone area and the OSPFv3 header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone but OSPFv3 does not have a virtual link to the packet s sender Area Mismatch The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the area ID in the OSPF v3 header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface Invalid Destination Address The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet s destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not th
93. Oa n r hat a E bee ed e ENDE 518 802 1X Example Configuration 0000000 eee eee 520 MSUP eere abot eddie ehiweeddawed bedhead aimee Gee a a E we 521 MSTP Example Configuration 000000 u amie 523 Appendix C Notification of Compliance Index Getting Started This chapter provides an overview of starting your NETGEAR ProSafe M5300 Switch and accessing the user interface This chapter contains the following sections e Switch Management Interface on page 9 e Web Access on page 9 e Understanding the User Interfaces on page 10 e Interface Naming Convention on page 17 Switch Management Interface The switches in the NETGEAR ProSafe M5300 family contain an embedded Web server and management software for managing and monitoring switch functions M5300 Series devices function as simple switches without the management software However you can use the management software to configure more advanced features that can improve switch efficiency and overall network performance Web based management lets you monitor configure and control your switch remotely using a standard Web browser instead of using expensive and complicated SNMP software products From your Web browser you can monitor the performance of your switch and optimize its configuration for your network You can configure all switch features such as VLANs QoS and ACLs by using the Web based management interface Web Access To access the M5300
94. Reset The Reset menu contains links to the following options e Device Reboot on page 485 e Factory Default on page 486 e Password Reset on page 486 Device Reboot Use the Device Reboot page to reboot ProSafe To access the Device Reboot page click Maintenance gt Reset gt Device Reboot Device Reboot Device Reboot Reboot Unit No Save prior to reboot Don t save prior to reboot To reboot the switch 1 Use Reboot Unit No to select the unit to reset Select all to run reset for all units 2 Select the Save prior to reboot radio button and click the APPLY button to reboot the switch Prior to reboot the unit the current configuration will be saved first 3 Select the Don t save prior to reboot radio button and click the APPLY button to reboot the switch This option permits the user to reboot the unit without saving the current configuration Maintenance 485 ProSafe M5300 Switch Factory Default Use the Factory Default page to reset the system configuration to the factory default values Note If you reset the switch to the default configuration the IP address is reset to 192 168 1 1 and the DHCP client is enabled If you lose network connectivity after you reset the switch to the factory defaults see Web Access on page 9 To access the Factory Defaults page click Maintenance gt Reset gt Factory Default Factory Default Factory Default Check this box and click APPLY below to retur
95. Router Priority The OSPF priority for the specified interface The priority of an interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255 A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network Neighbor Interface A Unit Slot Port identifying the neighbor interface index Index Routing 249 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description State The state of a neighbor can be the following e Down This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation It indicates that there has been no recent information received from the neighbor On NBMA networks Hello packets may still be sent to Down neighbors although at a reduced frequency e Attempt This state is only valid for neighbors attached to NBMA networks It indicates that no recent information has been received from the neighbor but that a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor This is done by sending the neighbor Hello packets at intervals of Hello Interval e Init In this state a Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor However bidirectional communication has not yet been established with the neighbor i e the router itself did not appear in the neighbor s Hello packet All neighbors in this state or greater are listed in the Hello packets sent from the associated interface e 2 Way In this state communication between the two routers is bidirectional This has been assured
96. Series management interface open a Web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the address field You must be able to ping the IP address of the M5300 Series management interface from your administrative system for Web access to be available If you did not change the IP address of the switch from the default value enter 192 168 1 1 into the address field ProSafe M5300 Switch Accessing the switch directly from your Web browser displays the login screen shown below 28 NE TGE A R ProSafe 24 port L3 re Stackable GE Switch with L3 Routing Understanding the User Interfaces ProSafe M5300 software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods e Web user interface e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e Command Line Interface CLI Each of the standards based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the components of the ProSafe M5300 software The method you use to manage the system depends on your network size and requirements and on your preference The Web Management User Guide Web Management User Guide describes how to use the Web based interface to manage and monitor the system Using the Web Interface To access the switch by using a Web browser the browser must meet the following software requirements e HTML version 4 0 or later e HTTP version 1 1 or later e Java Runtime Environment 1 6 or
97. System gt Management gt Time gt SNTP Global Configuration SNTP Global Configuration SNTP Global Configuration Client Mode Disable Unicast Broadcast Port 123 1 te Unicast Poll Interval 6 to 10 Broadcast Poll Interval 6 to 10 Unicast Poll Timeout 5 1 to 30 Unicast Poll Retry 0 to 10 Time Zone Name Offset Hours Offset Minutes SNTP Global Status Version 4 Supported Mode Unicast and Broadcast Last Update Time Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 UTC 0 00 Last Attempt Time Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 UTC 0 00 Last Attempt Status Other Server IP Address Address Type Unknown Server Stratum 0 Reference Clock Id Server Mode Reserved Unicast Server Max Entries Unicast Server Current Entries Broadcast Count Configuring System Information 35 ProSafe M5300 Switch SNTP Global Configuration SNTP stands for Simple Network Time Protocol As its name suggests it is a less complicated version of Network Time Protocol which is a system for synchronizing the clocks of networked computer systems primarily when data transfer is handled via the Internet 1 Use Client Mode to specify the mode of operation of SNTP Client An SNTP client may operate in one of the following modes e Disable SNTP is not operational No SNTP requests are sent from the client nor are any received SNTP messages processed e Unicast SNTP operates in a point to point fashion A unicast client sends a request to a designated server at its
98. The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP Multicast group address on the selected interface Up Time The time elapsed since this entry was created Expiry Time The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry will be aged out Version 1 Host Timer The time remaining until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMP version 1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface When an IGMPv1 membership report is received this timer is reset to the group membership timer While this timer is non zero the local router ignores any IGMPv2 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 1 Version 2 Host Timer The time remaining until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMP version 2 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface When an IGMPv2 membership report is received this timer is reset to the group membership timer While this timer is non zero the local router ignores any IGMPv1 and IGMPv3 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 2 Routing 299 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Compatibility This parameter shows group compatibility mode v1 v2 and v3 for this group on the specified inte
99. The factory default is disabled 8 Use PIM to enable or disable activation of spanning tree traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled 9 Use the options under the OSPFv2 Traps heading to enable or disable activation of specific OSPF traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled This field can be configured only if the OSPF admin mode is enabled 10 Use the options under the OSPFv3 Traps heading to enable or disable activation of specific OSPF v3 traps by selecting the corresponding radio button The factory default is disabled This field can be configured only if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled 11 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 12 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Supported MIBs This page displays all the MIBs supported by the switch To access this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Supported MIBs The following screen shows some but not all of the supported MIBs SNMP Supported MIBS Status a RFC 1907 SNMPv2 MIB The MIB module for SNMPv2 entities RFC 2819 RMON MIB Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base HC RMON MIB The original version of this MIB published as RFC3273 HC ALARM MIB Initial version of the High Capacity Alarm MIB module This ve
100. To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient select the check box next to the recipient change the desired fields and then click APPLY Configuration changes take effect immediately To delete a recipient select the check box next to the recipient and click DELETE Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring System Information 89 ProSafe M5300 Switch Trap Flags Use the Trap Flags page to enable or disable traps When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch a trap message is sent to any enabled SNMP Trap Receivers and a message is written to the trap log To access the Trap Flags page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Trap Flags The following screen shows some but not all of the SNMPv1 v2 trap flags Trap Flags Trap Flags Authentication Disable Enable Link Up Down Disable Enable Multiple Users Disable Enable Spanning Tree Disable Enable ACL Disable Enable Captive Portal Disable Enable DVMRP Disable Enable PIM Disable Enable OSPFv2 Traps errors authentication failure Disable Enable bad packet Disable Enable config error Disable Enable virt authentication failure Disable Enable virt bad packet Disable Enable virt config error Disable Enable Isa lsa maxage Disable Enable Isa originate Disable Enable
101. Total Received Packets Not Forwarded Local Traffic Frames A count of valid frames received which were discarded i e filtered by the forwarding process The total number of frames dropped in the forwarding process because the destination address was located off of this port 802 3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half duplex mode Unacceptable Frame Type The number of frames discarded from this port due to being an unacceptable frame type VLAN Membership Mismatch The number of frames discarded on this port due to ingress filtering VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN table is being modified or if the VLAN has not been configured Multicast Tree Viable Discards The number of frames discarded when a lookup in the multicast tree for a VLAN occurs while that tree is being modified Reserved Address Discards Broadcast Storm Recovery The number of frames discarded that are destined to an IEEE 802 1 reserved address and are not supported by the system The number of frames discarded that are destined for FF FF FF FF FF FF when Broadcast Storm Recovery is enabled CFI Discards The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set and
102. Tree Protocol 4 4 1 o 52eawdd isco ea dks OS aii BA doars seas 143 Baiser eo raGrades aa had ween hated wate o meee 143 Advanced scans dal anaes iiai a abe a AVE aed wane e Reed a 145 MUlIGAStss cence oeeecacsedemianeta diese eehe ene se Hea ehaeed 156 IDB sop oo ets Ss cs esas as a hm O pars ce a nee Ne eats ok does 156 IGMP SNOOP escient nitie Cee dedeah hee odie deme tes 158 MLD SNOGPING 43 24 2020 c0004204080a04de nose doadd ee 167 MYR CONMIGO iy 0225 n ARENE EE satay niga EEA 173 BaSe eaaa a hd 2 eho Seah Tee E EE 173 PROVANCEG onarena e TOE ea E A 174 Address Table 3204 4 4204 5 24 8452400464 640 40954 0640400H4n oe 177 BASIC uaaa oaa mic aha At alge adie E E E ETE 177 AdVANCEO 65 0s eso eo ea Ea ee hbase Oe eR eee 179 POMS 2 5 died hod Sard Se ka rhdiae Ea OM ae aoe Ae eee Rs Bees eae 181 Port COMMQUIAUON 2 2 203244 epee ene tet Auda reed etre eee 181 POR DESCHPUOM ais aie cada dae adds da Rood mda dA Bese Qaeda A 182 Link Aggregation GroupS 2 3 200 6e80s bee bs eee eee ee Deedes bes 184 ProSafe M5300 Switch LAG Configurati n 4 i24 0 122 beeen eetdanetatethad danced 184 LAG Membership 220 cece eee eee eee 186 Chapter 4 Routing ROUNO Table 3 6 554 55 cue angi cade caida enthh ad ba mn RADERNA 189 BASIC crerc ted pated ten ane ene ane Beas debgides oa ees 4 190 PAONANGCOG gsi 2 85 anaes Rbk d Sidi s aeawad dado G ais Ranch Sed hah Ana 192 E EE dese bherse Hehehe oACkES Reed tea EE 193 BASIC E
103. _Device Device Id EP j Entry Device ay Hold Advertisement Last Software Interf Add c bil Platf ID sec iiai eide oe Time Version Changed Version Time 2AD20555000AA 1 0 1 10 27 34 55 Router GSM7248V2 0 8 15 2 Days 05 11 49 8 0 1 4 2AD20555000AA 2 0 1 10 27 34 55 Router GSM7248V2 0 45 155 2 Days 05 11 49 8 0 1 4 Configuring System Information 111 ProSafe M5300 Switch The following table describes the ISDP Neighbor fields Field Description Device ID The device ID of the ISDP neighbor Interface The interface on which the neighbor is discovered Address Displays the address of the neighbor Capability Displays the capability of the neighbor These are supported e Router e Trans Bridge Source Route Switch e Host IGMP e Repeater Platform Display the model type of the neighbor 0 to 32 Port ID Display the port ID on the neighbor Hold Time Displays the hold time for ISDP packets that the neighbor transmits Advertisement Version Displays the ISDP version sending from the neighbor Entry Last Changed Time Displays the time since last entry is changed Software Version Displays the software version on the neighbor Configuring System Information 112 ISDP Statistics Use the ISDP Statistics page to view information about the ISDP packets sent and received by the switch ProSafe M5300 Switch To display this page click System gt
104. after entering overflow state the router should wait before attempting to leave overflow state This allows the router to again originate non default AS external LSAs If you enter O the router will not leave Overflow State until restarted The range is 0 to 2147483647 seconds Use External LSDB Limit to specify the maximum number of AS External LSAs that can be stored in the database A value of 1 implies there is no limit on the number that can be saved The valid range of values is 1 to 2147483647 Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the default metric if one has already been set or blank if not configured earlier The valid values are 1 to 16777214 Use Maximum Paths to configure the maximum number of paths that OSPFv3 can report to a given destination The valid values are 1 to 4 Use AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to configure the auto cost reference bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates default metrics for the interface The valid values are 1 to 4294967 Use Default Passive Setting to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces Configuring this field overwrites any present interface level passive mode setting OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces but does advertise attached networks as stub networks Routing 260 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description ASBR Mode Reflects whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disab
105. and it is not in DHCP snooping binding database To enforce filtering based on MAC address other required configurations are e Enable port security globally e Enable port security on the interface level IPSG Port Security can t be Enabled if IPSG is Disabled The factory default is disabled IP Source Guard Binding Configuration To display the IP Source Guard Binding Configuration page click Security gt Control gt IP Source Guard gt Binding Configuration IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Static Binding Configuration Interface MAC Address VLAN ID IP Address Filter Type a Dynamic Binding Configuration MAC Address VLAN ID IP Address Filter Type Managing Device Security 420 ProSafe M5300 Switch Static Binding Configuration Interface Selects the interface to add a binding into the IPSG database Use MAC Address to specify the MAC address for the binding Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN from the list for the binding rule Use IP Address to specify valid IP Address for the binding rule Click ADD to add IPSG static binding entry into the database Click DELETE to delete selected static entries from the database aon Ye eS The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows the following information Field Description Interface Displays the interface to add a binding into the IPSG database MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the binding entry VLAN ID Displays the
106. are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Line The line password will be used for authentication e Enable The privileged EXEC password will be used for authentication e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list Click ADD to add a new login list to the switch Click DELETE to remove the selected authentication login list from the configuration The delete will fail if the selected login list is assigned to any user including the default user for system login You can only use this button if you have Read Write access The change will not be retained across a power cycle unless you perform a save Enable Authentication List Use this page to configure the enable access methods for Privileged EX
107. are displayed Field Description Authentication List Displays the authentication list which is used by 802 1X Managing Device Security 388 Advanced ProSafe M5300 Switch From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e 802 1X Configuration on page 389 e Port Authentication on page 390 e Port Summary on page 393 e Client Summary on page 396 802 1X Configuration Use the 802 1X Configuration page to enable or disable port access control on the system To display the 802 1X Configuration page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Configuration Administrative Mode VLAN Assignment Mode EAPOL Flood Mode Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode Monitor Mode Users Login Authentication List Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Disable e admin ie defaultList dotixList To configure global 801 1X settings 1 Use Administrative Mode to select one of the options for administrative mode enable and disable The default value is disable 2 Use VLAN Assignment Mode to select one of the options for VLAN Assignment mode enable and disable The default value is disable 3 Use Users to select the user name that will use the selected login list for 802 1x port security 4 Use Login to select the login to apply to the specified user All configured logins
108. are displayed on the page Command Log Configuration To access the Command Log Configuration page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Command Log Configuration Command Log Configuration Command Log Configuration 0 Admin Status Disable Enable 1 Use Admin Mode to enable disable the operation of the CLI Command logging by selecting the corresponding radio button Monitoring the System 470 ProSafe M5300 Switch Console Log Configuration This allows logging to any serial device attached to the host To access the Console Log Configuration page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Console Log Configuration Console Log Configuration Console Log Configuration Admin Status Disable Enable Severity Filter Error v 1 A log that is Disabled shall not log messages A log that is Enabled shall log messages Enable or Disable logging by selecting the corresponding radio button 2 Severity Filter A log records messages equal to or above a configured severity threshold Select the severity option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field These severity levels have been enumerated below e Emergency 0 system is unusable e Alert 1 action must be taken immediately e Critical 2 critical conditions e Error 3 error conditions e Warning 4 warning conditions e Notice 5 normal but significant conditions e Informational 6 informational messages e Debug
109. arriving at the ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress port s in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port This process is also used for cases where a trusted port mapping is unable to be honored such as when a non IP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value To configure global CoS settings 1 Use Global to specify all CoS configurable interfaces The option Global represents the most recent global configuration settings 2 Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface Configuring Quality of Service 332 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Global Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Global Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is trust dot1p e untrusted e trust dot1p e trust ip dscp Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Interface Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is untrusted e untrusted e trust dotip e trust ip dscp Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch If you change any of the settings on the page click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages CoS Configuration on page 332 802 1
110. assignment Configuration Examples 516 ProSafe M5300 Switch DiffServ Example Configuration To create a DiffServ Class Policy and attach it to a switch interface follow these steps 1 From the QoS Class Configuration screen create a new class with the following settings e Class Name Class1 e Class Type All For more information about this screen see Class Configuration on page 343 Click the Class1 hyperlink to view the DiffServ Class Configuration screen for this class Configure the following settings for Class1 e Protocol Type UDP e Source IP Address 192 12 1 0 e Source Mask 255 255 255 0 e Source L4 Port Other and enter 4567 as the source port value e Destination IP Address 192 12 2 0 e Destination Mask 255 255 255 0 e Destination L4 Port Other and enter 4568 as the destination port value For more information about this screen see Class Configuration on page 343 Click APPLY From the Policy Configuration screen create a new policy with the following settings e Policy Selector Policy1 e Member Class Class1 For more information about this screen see Policy Configuration on page 348 Click ADD to add the new policy Click the Policy1 hyperlink to view the Policy Class Configuration screen for this policy Configure the Policy attributes as follows e Assign Queue 3 e Policy Attribute Simple Policy e Color Mode Color Blind e Committed Rate 1000000 Kbps e Committed Burst Si
111. by this switch since the most recent reboot The number of Learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of Virtual LANs VLANs allowed on this switch Most VLAN Entries Ever Used The largest number of VLANs that have been active on this switch since the last reboot Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created statically Dynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created by GVRP registration VLAN Deletes Time Since Counters Last Cleared The number of VLANs on this switch that have been created and then deleted since the last reboot The elapsed time in days hours minutes and seconds since the statistics for this switch were last cleared Click CLEAR to clear all the counters resetting all switch summary and detailed statistics to default values The discarded packets count cannot be cleared Configuring System Information 25 ProSafe M5300 Switch System CPU Status Use this page to display system CPU status and utilization information To display the System Resource page click System gt Management gt System CPU Status A screen similar to the following displays System CPU Status CPU Memory Status Total System Memory 513736 KBytes Available Memory 58356 KBytes CPU Uti
112. characters RADIUS Use this page to configure global settings for the Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADIUS feature The device includes a RADIUS client that can contact one or more RADIUS servers to provide additional security for the network The RADIUS server maintains a user database which contains per user authentication information The switch passes information to the configured RADIUS server which can authenticate a user name and password before authorizing use of the network RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for e Web Access e Access Control Port 802 1X The RADIUS folder contains links to the following features e Radius Configuration on page 360 e RADIUS Server Configuration on page 361 e Accounting Server Configuration on page 363 Managing Device Security 359 ProSafe M5300 Switch Radius Configuration Use the Radius Configuration page to add information about one or more RADIUS servers on the network To access the Radius Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt RADIUS gt Radius Configuration Radius Configuration Radius Configuration Current Server Address 192 168 10 100 Number of Configured Authentication Servers 1 Number of Configured Accounting Servers 0 Number of Named Authentication Server Groups 1 Number of Named Accounting Server Groups 0 Max Number of Retransmits 4 Timeout Duration secs 5 Accounting Mode Disable Enable
113. click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM gt Interface Configuration PIM Interface Configuration PIM Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS All Go To Interface GO Admin Protocol IPv6 Join Prune BSR r Designated Neighbor Interf Hello Int i DR P it Mode State Prefix Length E eae ac Interval secs Border eee sf Router Count 60 1 0 1 Disable Non Operational 30 Disable 1 0 2 Disable Non Operational 30 60 Disable 1 0 3 Disable Non Operational 30 60 Disable 1 0 4 Disable Non Operational 30 60 Disable 1 0 S Disable Non Operational fe80 2eb0 Sdff fe91 f8b7 60 Disable 1 0 6 Disable Non Operational 30 60 Disable To configure IPv6 PIM interface settings 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM DM for the selected interface The default is disable 3 Use Hello Interval to enter the number of seconds between PIM hello messages transmitted from the selected interface The default value is 30 Valid values are from 10 to 3600 Field Description Protocol State The operational state of the PIM protocol on this interface IPv6 Prefix Length The IPv6 Address Prefix and the Length of the selected interface Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface Designated Router The designated router on th
114. client that may or may not originate management traffic Mask Displays the subnet mask associated with the IP address Priority Displays the priority of the rule The rules are validated against the incoming management request in the ascending order of their priorities If a rule matches action is performed and subsequent rules below are ignored Click REFRESH to update the page with the most current information Access Rule Configuration Use the Access Rule Configuration page to configure the rules about what systems can access the ProSafe M5300 Web interface and what protocols are allowed To access the Access Rule Configuration page click Security gt Access and then click the Access Control gt Access Rule Configuration link Access Rule Configuration Access Rule Configuration a E Permit Secure Telnet SSH 192 168 12 0 255 255 255 0 Before you create access rules make sure e An access profile exists e The access profile is deactivated To configure access profile rules Managing Device Security 385 ProSafe M5300 Switch 1 To add an access profile rule configure the following settings and click Add e Rule Type Specify whether the rule permits or denies access to the ProSafe M5300 management interface e Select Permit to allow access to the management interface for traffic that meets the criteria you configure for the rule Any traffic that does not meet the rules is den
115. configuration until the APPLY button is pressed e PAE Capabilities This field selects the port access entity PAE functionality of the selected port Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant e Periodic Reauthentication This select field allows the user to enable or disable reauthentication of the supplicant for the specified port The selectable values are true and false If the value is true reauthentication will occur Otherwise reauthentication will not be allowed The default value is false Changing the selection will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed e Reauthentication Period This input field allows the user to enter the reauthentication period for the selected port The reauthentication period is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when reauthentication of the supplicant takes place The reauthentication period must be a value in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 3600 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed e User Privileges This select field allows the user to add the specified user to the list of users with access to the specified port or all ports e Max Users This field allows the user to enter the limit to the number of supplicants on the specified interface Click INITIALIZE to begin the initialization sequence on the selected
116. configured pool will be delegated to the client Use the Prefix Delegation Configuration page to configure a delegated prefix for a pool At least one pool must be created using DHCPv 6 Pool Configuration before a delegated prefix can be configured To display the DHCPVv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPVv6 Server gt DHCPV6 Prefix Delegation Configuration A screen similar to the following displays DHCPVv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration To configure the Prefix Delegation information 1 Use Pool Name to select the Pool Name 2 Specify the Prefix and Prefix Length of the delegated IPv6 prefix in the appropriate fields 3 In the DUID field specify the client s unique DUID value 4 In the Client Name field specify the client s name which is useful for logging or tracing only It may be up to 31 alphanumeric characters Configuring System Information 62 ProSafe M5300 Switch 5 In the Valid Lifetime field specify the valid lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix The values allowed are between 0 to 4294967295 6 In the Prefer Lifetime field specify the preferred lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix The values allowed are between 0 to 4294967295 7 Click ADD to add a new delegated prefix for the selected pool 8 Select the check box associated with a prefix delegation and click DELETE to remove the delegated
117. deliver the data in a timely fashion although there is no guarantee that it will During times of congestion packets may be delayed sent sporadically or dropped For typical Internet applications such as e mail and file transfer a slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable However any degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with strict timing requirements such as voice or multimedia Quality of Service QoS can provide consistent predictable data delivery by distinguishing between packets that have strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS capable network With this in mind all elements of the network must be QoS capable If one node is unable to meet the necessary timing requirements this creates a deficiency in the network path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised There are two basic types of QoS e Integrated Services network resources are apportioned based on request and are reserved resource reservation according to network management policy RSVP for example e Differentiated Services network resources are apportioned based on traffic classification and priority giving preferential treatment to data with strict timing requirements managed switch switches support DiffServ The DiffServ feature contains a number of conceptual QoS building
118. dropped depending on the admin configured IPSG entries The IP Source Guard folder contains links to the following features e IP Source Guard Interface Configuration on page 420 e IP Source Guard Binding Configuration on page 420 Managing Device Security 419 ProSafe M5300 Switch IP Source Guard Interface Configuration To display the IP Source Guard Interface Configuration page click Security gt Control gt IP Source Guard gt Interface Configuration IP Source Guard Interface Configuration IP Source Guard Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Geaa Interface IPSG Mode IPSG Port Security 1 0 1 Disable Disable 1 0 2 Disable Disable 1 0 3 Disable Disable 1 0 4 Disable Disable 1 0 5 Disable Disable 1 0 6 Disable Disable To configure interfaces for IPSG 1 2 Select the check box associated with each interface to configure To apply the same settings to all interfaces select the check box in the header row Use IPSG Mode to enable or disable validation of Sender IP Address on this interface If IPSG is Enabled Packets will not be forwarded if Sender IP Address is not in DHCP Snooping Binding database The factory default is disabled Use IPSG Port Security to enable or disables the IPSG Port Security on the selected interface If IPSG Port Security is enabled then the packets will not be forwarded if the sender MAC Address is not in FDB table
119. e eee 280 BASIC cari teehee arent Sap cebu wlth e A A EEA 280 AGNANCCG aphid boas tans does ee aye et eared dal pale ki al gi 282 MUNICAS ate ene E ENT her eke dir Peete ener denote 286 Mroute Table ee cessie ira ved eta bb e 287 Multicast Global Configuration a na saaa eee eo tededdw beens 288 Multicast Interface Configuration 0 0 2 0 0 0 eee eee 289 DVMIRPs c c 4a ctauia ninnats aa Wma patella Re EEN E EEA 290 IGMP aw eeewiriad eee exh edie ene eae td ee eae eae 296 PlMinscamiteg sag ae aaa aac E gecedeserddecn S ss 304 Static Routes Configuration s a saaa aaaea 311 Admin Boundary Configuration 0 0 0000 ee 312 IPY MUlICASts ro 4 00 cotex t det eden EEEE yaw eee ee 313 Nros Ta DIGs 3 cc hited ee outed tatty dnb E EE 313 PYS PIM cee Sided ere e ee bere doer wed deeb et ebe aR 314 MOD a ies arora a ak dein fata cht sh a a a aa st Rant donde ane te eek dah a 321 Static Routes Configuration s a saaa aaaea 329 ProSafe M5300 Switch Chapter 5 Configuring Quality of Service Class of SENICE ecn 4 200464 490440 264 49 045 0 044020 0Rna0804 391 ASIC aiaa a od gaa gels can ae hag Wh Geil ae E da cenghaitalcn beds esate 332 AOVANCEG esas eek os RRS SRA CARRS Be ber ated Oa ae ead 333 Differentiated ServiceS 0 0 0 eee 339 DiffSem WIZalGs lt amp 4 24 9 4 244 5 24 840 6 Rag REE Hew G DOSE re aeEaS 340 BOSC asean sd al oni i aaa a aaa ane ener Apal duets fh Geese ida 341 Advanced oe cto ole s
120. entry in the binding database Lease Time Displays the remaining Lease time for the Dynamic entries Click CLEAR to delete all DHCP Snooping binding entries Managing Device Security 417 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Persistent Configuration DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration Store Local Remote Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote File Name 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters Write Delay 300 15 to 86400 seconds 1 Use Store to select the local store or remote store Local selection disable the Remote objects like Remote File Name and Remote IP address 2 Use Remote IP Address to configure Remote IP Address on which the snooping database will be stored when Remote is selected 3 Use Remote File Name to configure Remote file name to store the database when Remote is selected 4 Use Write Delay to configure the maximum write time to write the database into local or remote The range of Write Delay is 15 to 86400 DHCP Snooping Statistics To display the DHCP Snooping Statistics page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Statistics DHCP Snooping Statistics DHCP Snooping Statistics 1 2 LAGS All DHCP Server M Interface MAC Verify Failures Client Ifc Mismatch K Aaii Received
121. for a port Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue position Before traffic in a lower queue is sent it must wait for traffic in higher queues to be sent Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch If you make changes to the page click APPLY to apply the changes to the system IP DSCP to Queue Mapping Use the IP DSCP to Queue Mapping page to specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding DSCP value To display the IP DSCP Queue Mapping page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt IP DSCP to Queue Mapping IP DSCP to Queue Mapping Interface Selection Interface 0 1 iv IP DSCP to Queue Mapping SS ee ee eee DSCP DSCP DSCP DSCP o 1 16 oim 32 2 48 3 1 1 f 17 ofm 33 2 49 3 2 a 18 o 34 2m 50 3 3 lil 19 ofm 35 l2 lv 51 3 v 4 a m 20 oim 36 2 x 52 3w ema 0 omn SP o 6 1 9 22 oly 38 2 54 3m 7 ai 23 ow 39 2i 55 3 s 0 24 aim 40 2x 56 BM 9 o 25 1 x 41 2 I 57 3 10 oly 26 1 42 2 58 3 11 ofm 27 1m 43 2 v 59 afm 12 om 28 w 44 2 60 BE 13 o a 29 1x 45 aly 61 3 14 o w 30 1 46 2 Iv 62 3 v 15 oly 31 1m 47 2 63 3 Configuring Quality of Service 334 ProSafe M5300 Switch To map DSCP values to queues 1 Use Interfac
122. gt User Configuration page 2 To enable authentication select an Authentication Protocol option which is either MD5 or SHA 3 To enable encryption select the DES option in the Encryption Protocol field Then enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric characters in the Encryption Key field 4 Click APPLY To access configuration information for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 click System gt SNMP gt SNMPvt1 v2 and click the page that contains the information to configure Getting Started 16 ProSafe M5300 Switch Interface Naming Convention The ProSafe support physical and logical interfaces Interfaces are identified by their type and the interface number The physical ports are gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the front panel You configure the logical interfaces by using the software Table 2 describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch Table 2 Naming Conventions for Interfaces Interface Description Example Physical The physical ports are in unit slot port format where unit is the stack ID of the switch s otis the slot ID always 0 for physical ports and port is the port ID which starts at 1 and is identified on the front panel of the switch 1 0 1 Port 1 on stack member 1 2 0 23 Port 23 on stack member 2 Link Aggregation Group LAG LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are only used for bridging functions ch1 ch2 ch3 and so
123. in tenths of watts Source Specifies the remote ports PSE power source Priority Specifies the remote ports PSE power priority Extended POE PD Specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port Required Specifies the remote port s PD power requirement Source Specifies the remote port s PD power source Priority Specifies the remote port s PD power priority Configuring System Information 107 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Remote Device Inventory A screen similar to the following displays LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory Management Software g MAC Address System Model Address Revision 1 0 1 10 27 34 55 C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 2 0 1 10 27 34 55 C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 The following table describes the LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory fields Field Definition Port Specifies the list of all the ports on which LLDP MED is enabled Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system MAC Address Specifies the MAC Address associated with the remote system System Model Specifies model name of the remote device Software Revision Specifies Software version of the remote device Configuring System Information 108 ProSafe M5300 Switch ISDP The Industry Standard Discovery Protocol ISDP is a proprietary Layer 2 net
124. in the queries that are sent Time by the Snooping Querier Configuring Switching Information 172 ProSafe M5300 Switch MVR Configuration IGMP snooping helps limit multicast traffic when member ports are in the same VLAN however when ports belong to different VLANs a copy of the multicast stream is sent to each VLAN that has member ports in the multicast group MVR eliminates the need to duplicate the multicast traffic when multicast group member ports belong to different VLANs MVR uses a dedicated multicast VLAN to forward multicast traffic over the L2 network Only one MVLAN can be configured per switch and it is used only for certain multicast traffic such as traffic from an IPTV application to avoid duplication of multicast streams for clients in different VLANs Clients can dynamically join or leave the mutlicast VLAN without interfering with their membership in other VLANs MVR like IGMP Snooping allows a layer 2 switch to listen to IGMP messages to learn about multicast group membership From the MVR Configuration link under the Switching tab you can configure the MVR settings From the MVR Configuration link you can access the following links e Basic on page 173 e Advanced on page 174 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e MVR Configuration on page 173 MVR Configuration To display the MVR Configuration page click Switching gt MVR gt Basic gt MVR Configuration
125. is Archive 2 Use USB File to give a name along with path for the file you want to upload You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Maintenance 489 ProSafe M5300 Switch Download File To Switch The switch supports system file downloads from a remote system to the switch by using either TFTP or HTTP The Download menu contains links to the following options e File Download on page 490 e HTTP File Download on page 492 e USB File Download on page 494 File Download To display the File Download page click Maintenance gt Download gt File Download File Download File Download File Type Archive Image Name imagel ie Transfer Mode TFTP e Server Address Type _IPv4 i Server Address 0 0 0 0 Remote File Path Remote File Name 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to transfer e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to upgrade the operational flash e Image Specify the code image1 you want to download e Image2 Specify the code image2 you want to download e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want a banner to be displayed before the login prompt e Configuration Specify configuration w
126. is connected An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected LSA Type The format and function of the link state advertisement One of the following e Router LSA A router may originate one or more router lsas for a given area Each router lsa originated in an area describes the collected states of all the router s interfaces to the area e Network LSA A network Isa is originated for every link having two or more attached routers by the designated router It lists all the routers attached to the link e Inter Area Router LSA This type describes a prefix external to the area yet internal to the autonomous system It is originated by an Area Border Router e AS External LSA This LSA type describes a path to a prefix external to the autonomous system and is originated by an Autonomous System Border Router e Link LSA A router originates a separate Link lsa for each attached link It provides router s link local address to routers attached to the link and also inform them of a list of IPv6 prefixes to associate with the link e Intra Area Prefix LSA A link s designated router originates one or more intra area prefix Isas to advertise the link s prefixes throughout the area A router may originate multiple intra area prefix Isas for a given area to advertise its own prefixes and those of its attached stub links LS ID The Link State ID identifies the pie
127. it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the IP ACL are specified created using the IP ACL Rule Configuration menu To display the IPv6 ACL page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IPv6 ACL IPv6 ACL IPv6 Configuration Current Number of ACL 4 Maximum ACL 100 IPv6 ACL Table eve act a oa or E ipw6ACL i IPv6 ACL 1 IP ACL is the IP ACL ID or IP ACL Name which is dependent on the IP ACL Type IP ACL ID must be an integer from 1 to 99 for an IP basic ACL and from 100 to 199 for an IP Extended ACL IPv6 ACL Name string includes alphanumeric characters only The name must start with an alphabetic character 2 Click ADD to add a new IP ACL to the switch configuration 3 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected IP ACL from the switch configuration Field Description Current Number of ACL The current number of the IP ACLs configured on the switch Maximum ACL The maximum number of IP ACL can be configured on the switch it depends on the hardware Rules The number of the rules associated with the IP ACL Type The the ACL type basic IP ACL with id from 1 to 99 and Extended IP ACL with id from 100 to 199 Managing Device Security 449 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Rules Use these screens to configure the rules for the IPv6 Access Control Lists which is created using the IPv6 Access Control List Configuration screen By default no specific value is in e
128. licenses that exist on the switch License Status Indicates whether the license is active or inactive If a license is inactive a license should be purchased and downloaded to the switch The license is not activated until the switch reboots Description A description of the license key status If the license is inactive this field provides information about why it is inactive License Features Use the License Features page to view information about the features on the device that require an active license To display the License Features page click System gt License gt License Features A screen similar to the following displays License Features License Features RTR_DISC OSPF RIP IGMP MCAST PIMDM DVMRP PIMSM VRRP Configuring System Information 44 ProSafe M5300 Switch Services From the Services link you can access the following pages e DHCP Server on page 45 e DHCP Relay on page 53 e DHCP L2 Relay on page 54 e UDP Relay on page 57 e DHCPV6 Server on page 59 e DHCPV6 Relay on page 66 DHCP Server DHCP is generally used between clients and servers for the purpose of assigning IP addresses gateways and other network settings such as DNS and SNTP server information From the DHCP Server link you can access the following pages e DHCP Server Configuration on page 45 e DHCP Pool Configuration on page 47 e DHCP Pool Options on page 49 e DHCP Server Statistics on page
129. load the firmware into the memory CPLD Version The version of the software for the Complex Programmable Logic Device CPLD Serial Number The serial number of this switch AC The status of the internal AC power module Remote Indicates the status of the Remote Power Supply RPS The status has three possible values e Not Present RPS bank not connected OK RPS bank connected e FAIL RPS is present but power is failed PoE Version Version of the PoE controller firmware image MAX PoE Indicates the status of maximum PoE power available on the switch as follows e ON Indicates less than 7W of PoE power available for another device e OFF Indicates at least 7W of PoE power available for another device e N A Indicates that PoE is not supported by the unit Click REFRESH to refresh the system information of the switch Configuring System Information 23 ProSafe M5300 Switch Switch Statistics Use this page to display the switch statistics To display the Switch Statistics page click System gt Management gt Switch Statistics A screen similar to the following displays Switch Statistics Statistics ifIndex Octets Received Packets Received Without Errors Unicast Packets Received Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Packets Received Receive Packets Discarded Octets Transmitted Packets Transmitted Without Errors Unicast Packets Transmitted Multicast Packets Transmitted
130. management unit the value is set to Od 00 00 00 Restart In Progress Indicates whether a restart is in progress A restart is not considered complete until all hardware tables have been fully reconciled Warm Restart Ready Indicates whether the initial full checkpoint has finished Backup Configuration Age Indicates the time since the running configuration was last copied to the backup unit Configuring System Information 79 ProSafe M5300 Switch Checkpoint Statistics Use the Checkpoint Statistics page to display information about the protocol and routing data that the management unit shares with the backup unit To display the Checkpoint Statistics page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt NSF gt Checkpoint Statistics A screen similar to the following is displayed Checkpoint Statistics Checkpoint Statistics Messages Checkpointed 40 Bytes Checkpointed 11924 Time Since Counters Cleared 2 days 1 hrs 55 mins 8 secs Checkpoint Message Rate 0 000 msg sec Last 10 second Message Rate 0 0 msg sec Highest 10 second Message Rate 1 3 msg sec Configuring System Information 80 ProSafe M5300 Switch The following table describes the fields on the Checkpoint Statistics page Field Description Messages Checkpointed The number of messages sent from master unit to backup unit Bytes Checkpointed How much data has been sent from master unit to the backup unit Time Since Co
131. message and change the state to PROBE Probe A reachability confirmation is actively sought by resending neighbor solicitation messages every RetransTimer milliseconds until a reachability confirmation is received Last Updated Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable Routing 213 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Route Configuration Use this page to configure static IPv6 routes To display the IPv6 Route Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Static Route Configuration IPv6 Route Configuration Configure Routes i z Next Hop IPv6 Next Hop IPv6 i ides is ec To configure a static IPv6 route 1 2 Use IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length to enter the Network Prefix and Prefix Length for the Configured Route Use Next Hop IPv6 Address Type to specify if the Next Hop IPv6 Address is a Global IPv6 Address or a Link local IPv6 Address or a Static Reject IPv6 Address If the Next Hop IPv6 address specified is a Link Local IPv6 Address specify the Interface for the Link local IPv6 Next Hop Address Select Static Reject from this menu to create a static reject route for a destination prefix No next hop address is specified in that case Use Next Hop IPv6 Address to enter the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the Configured Route Use Interface to specify the unit slot and port number for the Link local IPv6 Next Hop Address This field is enabled only if the Link local is sele
132. neighbor solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295 Use Adv Reachable Time to specify the router advertisement time to consider neighbor reachable after ND confirmation Range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000 Use Adv Interval to specify the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface Default value is 600 Range of maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800 Use Adv Managed Config Flag to specify the router advertisement managed address configuration flag When true end nodes use DHCPV6 When false end nodes auto configure addresses Default value of managed flag is disable Use Adv Other Config Flag To specify router advertisement for ofher Stateful configuration flag Default value of other config flag is disable Use Adv Suppress Flag to specify router advertisement suppression on an interface Default value of suppress flag is disable Use Destination Unreachables to specify the Mode of Sending ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables on this interface If Disabled then this interface will not send ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables By default IPv6 Destination Unreachables mode is enable Field Description Operational Mode Specifies operational state of an interface Default value is disable Routing 205 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Prefix Configuration Use this page to manually configure an IPv6 address for an interface To display the IPv6 Prefix Configuration page click Routing
133. next to the entry and click DELETE To change the hostname or IP address in an entry select the check box next to the entry and enter the new information in the appropriate field and then click APPLY Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring System Information 41 ProSafe M5300 Switch The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name to IP address entries that the switch has learned The following table describes the dynamic host fields Field Description Host Lists the host name you assign to the specified IP address Total Amount of time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table Elapsed Amount of time since the dynamic entry was last updated Type The type of the dynamic entry Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name SDM Template Preference You can use this page to configure the Switch Database Management SDM template that is active after the next reboot An SDM template is a description of the maximum resources the device can use for various features Different SDM templates allow different combinations of scaling factors enabling different allocations of resources depending on how the device is used In other words SDM templates enable you to reallocate system resources to support a different mix of features based on your network requirements To access this page c
134. number does not include newer instantiations of self originated LSAs Routing 236 ProSafe M5300 Switch Common Area Configuration The OSPF Common Area Configuration page lets you create a Common Area Configuration once you have enabled OSPF on an interface At least one router must have OSPF enabled for this web page to display To display the Common Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Common Area Configuration Common Area Configuration OSPF Common Area Configuration Area External Border Area LSA Routing Router Checksum Import External LSAs To configure the OSPF area 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects Field Description Aging Interval The Link State Advertisement LSA aging timer interval External Routing A definition of the router s capabilities for the area including whether or not AS external LSAs are flooded into throughout the area If the area is a stub area then these are the possible options for which you may configure the external routing capability otherwise the only option is Import External LSAs e Import External LSAs Import and propagate external LSAs e Import No LSAs Do not import and propagate external LSAs SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated usin
135. of an ACL list This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped To use the ACL Wizard to configure an ACL 1 Use ACL Type to specifies the ACL type you are using to create the ACL You can select one type from 10 optional types e ACL Based on Destination MAC To create a ACL based on the destination MAC address destination MAC mask and VLAN e ACL Based on Source MAC To create a ACL based on the source MAC address source MAC mask and VLAN e ACL Based on Destination IPv4 To create a ACL based on the destination IPv4 address and IPv4 address mask e ACL Based on Source IPv4 To create a ACL based on the source IPv4 address and IPv4 address mask e ACL Based on Destination IPv6 To create a ACL based on the destination IPv6 prefix and IPv6 prefix length e ACL Based on Source IPv6 To create a ACL based on the source IPv6 prefix and IPv6 prefix length e ACL Based on Destination IPv4 L4 Port To create a ACL based on the destination IPv4 layer4 port number e ACL Based on Source IPv4 L4 Port To create a ACL based on the source IPv4 layer4 port number e ACL Based on Destination IPv6 L4 Port To create a ACL based on the destination IPv6 layer4 port number e ACL Based on Source IPv6 L4 Port To create a ACL based on the source IPv6 layer4 port number Use Rule ID to enter a whole number in t
136. offered by the LAN to those users and devices that are permitted to use those services Port based network access control makes use of the physical characteristics of LAN infrastructures in order to provide a means of authenticating and authorizing devices attached to a LAN port that has point to point connection characteristics and of preventing access to that port in cases in which the authentication and authorization process fails In this context a port is a single point of attachment to the LAN such as ports of MAC bridges and associations between stations or access points in IEEE 802 11 Wireless LANs The IEEE 802 11 standard describes an architectural framework within which authentication and consequent actions take place It also establishes the requirements for a protocol between the authenticator the system that passes an authentication request to the authentication server and the supplicant the system that requests authentication as well as between the authenticator and the authentication server The managed switch switches support a guest VLAN which allows unauthenticated users to have limited access to the network resources Note You can use QoS features to provide rate limiting on the guest VLAN to limit the network resources the guest VLAN provides Another 802 1X feature is the ability to configure a port to Enable Disable EAPoL packet forwarding support You can disable or enable the forwarding of EAPoL when 802 1X is di
137. on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions The number of frames discarded on egress for this port due to egress filtering being enabled Dropped Transmit Frames Number of transmit frames discarded at the selected port Dropped Receive Frames Number of Receive frames discarded at the selected port STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port 802 3x Pause Frames Transmitted A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half duplex mode GVRP PDUs Received The count of GVRP PDUs received in the GARP layer GVRP PDUs Transmitted The count of GVRP PDUs transmitted from the GARP layer GVRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GVRP registrations could not be completed GMRP PDUs Received The count of GMRP PDUs received from the GARP layer GMRP PDUs Transmitted The count of GMRP PDUs transmit
138. only Timer Schedule Select the timer schedule to use for the port By default no timer schedules are configured To create a timer schedule use the Timer Schedule Global Configuration page Output Voltage Shows the current voltage being delivered to device in Volts Output Current Shows the current being delivered to device in mA Output Power Shows the current power being delivered to device in Watts Temperature The temperature measured at this port of the PoE Controller It is measured in degrees celsius Status View the operational status of the port PD detection e Disabled Indicates no power is being delivered e DeliveringPower Indicates power is being drawn by a connected device e Fault Indicates a problem with the port e Test Indicates the port is in test mode e OtherFault Indicates the port is idle due to an error condition e Searching Indicates the port is not in one of the above states e Requesting Power Indicates that a valid PD has been detected but the device is not able to deliver power to the PD due to a power management decision Fault Status Describes the error description when the PSE port is in fault status which can be one of the following e No Error Specifies that the PSE port is not in any error state e MPS Absent Specifies that the PSE port has detected an absence of main power supply e Short Specifies that the PSE port has detected a short circuit condition e Overload Spe
139. operating normally e A solid yellow LED indicates that system is in the boot up stage e No lit LED indicates that power is disconnected FAN Status LED FAN status is indicated as follows e A solid yellow LED indicates that the fan is faulty e No lit LED indicates that the fan is operating normally Stack Master LED The Stack Master LED is lit if there is an active stack link and the unit is in stack mode e A solid green LED indicates that the switch acts as a master unit in a stack of switches e No lit LED indicates that the switch acts as a slave member in a stack of switches Module LEDs Each switch includes two back panel XAUI ports that support stacking or Ethernet modules For the M5300 Series 28G switches the port numbers are 27 and 28 For M5300 Series 52G switches the port numbers are 51 and 52 If a back panel module is present and active the LED is solid green Seven Segment LED for the Stacking ID A solid green LED displays the stack ID 1 6 Getting Started 14 ProSafe M5300 Switch Device View Navigation Click the port you want to view or configure to see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options Click the menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or monitoring options FS ProSafe 48 port L2 Stackable Connect with Innovation GE PoE Switch with Static Routing System Switching Routing Security Monitoring Maintenance Help Index Management License Services
140. or more full duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group which is also known as a port channel The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link To access the LAG Configuration page click Switching gt LAG gt LAG Configuration LAG Configuration LAG Configuration LAG lagi Enable 3 Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port lag2 Enable 3 Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port lag3 Enable 3 Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Configured Active LAG Local Preference STP d Static Mod Link T Enable Disable Disable 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 DOWN Disable Enable Disable Disable DOWN Disable Enable Disable Disable DOWN Disable Configuring Switching Information 184 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure LAG settings 1 Use LAG Name to enter the name you want assigned to the LAG You may enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters A valid name has to be specified in order to create the LAG Use Hash Mode to select the load balancing mode used on a port channel LAG Traffic is balanced on a port channel LAG by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link e Src MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Dest
141. packets received with an unknown authentication type Authentication Type Mismatch The total number of packets received with an authentication type different to the locally configured authentication method Packet Length Errors The total number of packets received with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP header Click REFRESH to show the latest VRRP information Routing 285 ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast IP Multicasting enables a network host or multiple hosts to send an IP datagram to multiple destinations simultaneously The initiating host sends each multicast datagram only once to a destination multicast group address and multicast routers forward the datagram only to hosts who are members of the multicast group Multicast enables efficient use of network bandwidth because each multicast datagram needs to be transmitted only once on each network link regardless of the number of destination hosts Multicasting contrasts with IP unicasting which sends a separate datagram to each recipient host The IP routing protocols can route multicast traffic but the IP multicast protocols handle the multicast traffic more efficiently with better use of network bandwidth You use the IPv4 IPv6 multicast feature on the ProSafe managed switch to route multicast traffic between VLANs on the switch If all hosts connected to the switch are on the same subnet there is no need to configure the IP IPv6 multicast featu
142. port From the VLAN link you can access the following pages e VLAN Routing Wizard on page 218 e VLAN Routing Configuration on page 219 VLAN Routing Wizard The VLAN Routing Wizard creates a VLAN adds selected ports to the VLAN The VLAN Wizard gives the user the option to add the selected ports as a Link Aggregation LAG The Wizard will e Create a VLAN and generate a unique name for VLAN e Add selected ports to the newly created VLAN and remove selected ports from the default VLAN e Create a LAG add selected ports to a LAG then add LAG to the newly created VLAN e Enable tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN Disable tagging if a selected port does NOT exist in another VLAN e Exclude ports NOT selected from the VLAN e Enable routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered To display the VLAN Routing Wizard page click Routing gt VLAN gt VLAN Routing Wizard Routing 218 ProSafe M5300 Switch VLAN Routing Wizard VLAN Routing Wizard Vian ID IP Address Network Mask To configure a VLAN routing interface by using the VLAN Routing Wizard 1 Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN Identifier VID associated with this VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 2 Use Ports to display selectable physical ports and LAGs if any Selected ports will be added to the Routing VLAN Each port has three modes e T Tagged Select the ports on which all frames transmitted f
143. port This button is only selectable if the control mode is auto If the button is not selectable it will be grayed out Once this button is pressed the action is immediate It is not required to press the APPLY button for the action to occur Click REAUTHENTICATE to begin the reauthentication sequence on the selected port This button is only selectable if the control mode is auto If the button is not selectable it will be grayed out Once this button is pressed the action is immediate It is not required to press the APPLY button for the action to occur Managing Device Security 392 ProSafe M5300 Switch Port Summary Use the Port Summary page to view information about the port access control settings on a specific port To access the Port Summary page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt Port Summary Port Summary Port Summary 1 2 All Port Control sieri Reauthentication Control Protocol PAE Authenticator Mode Hada Enabled Direction Version Capabilities PAE State 1 0 1 Auto N A FALSE Versioni Authenticator Initialize 1 0 2 Auto N A FALSE Versioni Authenticator Initialize 1 0 3 Auto N A FALSE Versioni Authenticator Initialize 1 0 4 Auto N A FALSE Versioni Authenticator Initialize 1 0 5 Auto N A FALSE Versioni Authenticator Initialize Backend VLAN sae i eee Port Port State Animaj Assigned Transmission x Termination Status Method Reason Enabled Action
144. prefix 9 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 10 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately DHCPv 6 Interface Configuration Use the DHCPv6 Interface Configuration page to configure a DHCPv 6 interface To display the DHCPv6 Interface Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPv6 Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays DHCPv6 Interface Configuration DHCPV6 Interface Configuration 1 2 LOOPBACKS All Go To Interface Ses RAEI AS ST eae eae ee a 1 0 1 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 1 0 6 Disable 1 0 7 Disable 1 0 8 Disable 1 0 9 Disable 1 0 10 Disable To configure the DHCPv 6 Interface Configuration information 1 Select the check box associated with each interface to configure or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same configuration to all interfaces 2 Inthe Admin Mode field specify the DHCPv6 mode to configure server functionality on the selected interface s DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive 3 In the Pool Name field specify the DHCPv6 pool containing stateless and or prefix delegation parameters 4 Optional In the Rapid Commit field select Enable to allow abbreviated exchange between the client and server
145. receipt of a frame If the bridge detects a malfunctioning port it will place that port into the broken state The other five states are defined in IEEE 802 1D e Disabled e Blocking e Listening e Learning e Forwarding e Broken Admin Mode The Port control administration state The port must be enabled in order for it to be allowed into the network The factory default is enabled LACP Mode Indicates the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administration state The mode must be enabled in order for the port to participate in Link Aggregation Monitoring the System 460 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Physical Mode Indicates The port speed and duplex mode In auto negotiation mode the duplex mode and speed are set from the auto negotiation process Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode Link Status Indicates whether the Link is up or down Link Trap Indicates whether or not the port will send a trap when link status changes Packets RX and TX 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 65 127 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 12
146. retained across a power cycle unless a save configuration is performed Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Managing Device Security 416 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Binding Configuration DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration Static Binding Configuration ba a T E Dynamic Binding Configuration To configure static DHCP snooping bindings 1 2 3 4 i 6 From the Interface menu select the interface on which to configure a static binding Use MAC Address to specify the MAC address for the binding to be added This is the Key to the binding database Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN from the list for the binding rule The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 Use IP Address to specify valid IP Address for the binding rule Click ADD to add DHCP snooping binding entry into the database Click DELETE to delete selected static entries from the database The Dynamic Binding Table displays the following information Field Description Interface Displays the interface to which a binding entry in the DHCP snooping database MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the binding in the binding database VLAN ID Displays the VLAN for the binding entry in the binding database The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 IP Address Displays IP Address for the binding
147. secret After you add the RADIUS accounting server this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server has been configured 5 In the Secret field type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server 6 From the Accounting Mode menu enable or disable the RADIUS accounting mode 7 To delete a configured RADIUS Accounting server click DELETE The following table describes RADIUS accounting server statistics available on the page Click CLEAR COUNTERS to clear the accounting server statistics Managing Device Security 363 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Accounting Server Address Identifies the accounting server associated with the statistics Round Trip Time secs Displays the time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server Accounting Requests Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent not including retransmissions Accounting Retransmissions Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Accounting Responses Displays the number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server Malformed Accounting Responses Displays the number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packet
148. state database This is done using Dijkstra s algorithm initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Routing 264 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Translator State Translator State Enabled means that the NSSA router OSPFv3 Area NssA Translator Role has been set to always Translator State of Elected means a candidate NSSA Border router is translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 Disabled implies that a candidate NSSA Border router is NOT translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 Area Range Configuration Use the Area Range Configuration page to configure OSPFv3 area ranges To display the Area Range Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Area Range Configuration Area Range Configuration OSPFv3 Area Range Configuration area a Use Area ID to specify the area for which data is to be configured Use IPv6 Prefix to enter the IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length for the address range
149. switch was reset DHCP L2 Relay The DHCP Layer 2 Relay feature permits Layer 3 Relay agent functionality in Layer 2 switched networks From the DHCP L2 Relay link you can access the following pages e DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration on page 54 e DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration on page 55 e DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics on page 56 DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration To display the DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP L2 Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays DHCP L2 Relay Configuration DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable DHCP L2 Relay VLAN Configuration Admin Circuit ID Remote ID VLAN ID 1 Disable Disable 2 Disable Disable To configure the administrative mode of DHCP L2 Relay on the device use Admin Mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the switch The default is Disable Configuring System Information 54 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the DHCP L2 Relay VLAN information 1 VLAN ID shows the VLAN ID configured on the switch 2 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected VLAN 3 Use Circuit ID Mode to enable or disable the Circuit ID suboption of DHCP Option 82 4 Use Remote ID String to specify the Remote ID when Remote ID mode is enabled DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration To display the DHCP L
150. switch with the new settings CLick CANCEL to abandon the changes Managing Device Security 383 ProSafe M5300 Switch Access Control The Access Control feature allows you to configure settings that control management access to the switch Access Control configure requires three steps 1 Use the Access Profile Configuration page to create an access profile To add rules to the profile the access profile must be deactivated which is the default setting 2 Use the Access Rule Configuration page to add one or more access rules to the profile 3 Return to the Access Profile Configuration page to activate the profile The access profile is similar to an access control list ACL in that you can add multiple rules to the profile that permit or deny access to the switch by protocols transmitted by specific IP addresses From the Access Control link you can access the following pages e Access Profile Configuration on page 384 e Access Rule Configuration on page 385 Access Profile Configuration Use this page to create an access profile control the administrative mode of the profile and view summary information about the profile To access the Access Profile Configuration page click Security gt Access and then click the Access Control gt Access Profile Configuration link In the following figure a profile called administrators has been created and one rule has been added to the profile Access Profile Configuration
151. the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds 4 Use Dead Interval to enter the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 2147483647 The default is 40 5 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to enter the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second 6 Use Retransmit Interval to enter the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds 7 Use Authentication Type to select an authentication type other than none by clicking on the Configure Authentication button You will then see a new screen where you c
152. the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port If a delay is necessary packets get held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission As queues become full packets have no place to be held for transmission and get dropped by the switch QoS is a means of providing consistent predictable data delivery by distinguishing between packets that have strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS capable network With this in mind all elements of the network must be QoS capable The presence of at least one node which is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised Class of Service The Class of Service CoS queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of switch queueing This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic when the complexities of DiffServ are not required The priority of a packet arriving at an interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a mapping table CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping such as minimum guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping are user configurable at the queue or port level Eight queues per port are supported 331 ProSafe M5300 Switch From the Class of Service link unde
153. the changes made on the page and navigate back to the referring page Routing 217 ProSafe M5300 Switch VLAN You can configure ProSafe M5300 Switch software with some ports supporting VLANs and some supporting routing You can also configure the software to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the VLAN were a router port When a port is enabled for bridging default rather than routing all normal bridge processing is performed for an inbound packet which is then associated with a VLAN Its MAC Destination Address MAC DA and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address table If routing is enabled for the VLAN and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that of the internal bridge router interface the packet is routed An inbound multicast packet is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN plus the internal bridge router interface if it was received on a routed VLAN Since a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN VLAN routing might be enabled for all of the VLANs on the port or for a subset VLAN Routing can be used to allow more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet It could also be used when a VLAN spans multiple physical networks or when additional segmentation or security is required This section shows how to configure the NETGEAR switch to support VLAN routing A port can be either a VLAN port or a router port but not both However a VLAN port may be part of a VLAN that is itself a router
154. the member reloads A stack move causes all routes and layer 2 addresses to be lost The administrator is prompted to confirm the management move To display the Stack Configuration page click System gt Stacking gt Basic gt Stack Configuration A screen similar to the following is displayed Stack Configuration Management Unit Selection Management Unit Selected E E Stack Configuration Hardware Unit Switch Management Switch ID Change Switch ID to Switch Type Management Priority Status Standby Status Status mm o e ee a C C Sos z GSM7328S Unassigned Unassigned StackMember Opr Standby Basic Stack Status SFS P Preconfigured Plugged in Detected Detected Code Switch Serial Last D ipti RAR Model Model Code in FEDI Se a Identifier Identifier Version Flash P Status 1 MS300 28G3 ng3456 2 days 1 hours 53 minutes 16 secs M5300 28G3 M5300 28G3 R 6 20 3 R 6 20 3 None M5300 28G3 ng2xn1225lf0014 2 days 1 hours 53 minutes 17 secs M5300 28G3 M5300 28G3 R 6 20 3 R 6 20 3 To select a new stack master 1 In the Management Unit Selected menu select the unit ID of the stack member to become the stack master 2 A message indicating that moving stack management will unconfigure entire stack including all interfaces 3 Click OK to confirm the selection and reload the stack The stack will be unavailable until the boot process completes To configure a stack member before adding it to the stack
155. the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router e candidate Cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status 5 Use Translate Stability Interval to configure the translator of the NSSA The value is the period of time that an elected translation continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been deposed by another router 6 Use No Redistribute Mode to configure the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA 7 Click ADD to configure the area as a NSSA area 8 Click DELETE to delete the NSSA area designation The area will be returned to normal state Routing 239 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state
156. the time out value in seconds for request retransmissions The valid range is 1 30 Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS max retransmit and RADIUS time out If multiple RADIUS servers are configured the max retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted A retransmit will not occur until the configured time out value on that server has passed without a response from the RADIUS server Therefore the maximum delay in receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of retransmit times time out for Managing Device Security 360 ProSafe M5300 Switch all configured servers If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt all user interfaces will be blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response 3 From the Accounting Mode menu select whether the RADIUS accounting mode is enabled or disabled on the current server 4 Use RADIUS Attribute 4 to enable or disable RADIUS attribute 4 Default value is Disable This is an optional field and can be seen only when RADIUS attribute 4 is enabled It takes IP address value in the format xx xx xx Xxx Field Description Current Server Address The Address of the current server This field is blank if no servers are configured Number of Configured Servers The number of RADIUS servers that have been configured This value will be in the range of 0 and 3 RADIUS Ser
157. this reason IP packets may still be addressed to an interface in Loopback state To facilitate this such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes whose destination is the IP interface address Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router for the network by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Desi
158. this router LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router Routing 271 ProSafe M5300 Switch Neighbor Table This screen shows the OSPF v3 Neighbor Table This information is displayed only if OSPFv3 is enabled and there exists at least on OSPF v3 enabled interface having a valid neighbor To display the Neighbor Table page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Neighbor Table OSPFv3 Neighbor Table OSPFv3 Neighbor Table Search By Interface GO Interface Router Area Router Dead Retransmission Interf Options State Events Pa Identifier orter Age options poiret state Poa sacg Events Queue length Field Description Interface The Interface for which the data needs to be displayed Router ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the Router ID of the neighbor on the selected Interface Area ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the area common to the neighbor selected Options A Bit Mask corresponding to the neighbor s options field Router Priority The priority of this neighbor in the designated router election algorithm A value of 0 signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular network State Stat
159. though frames belonging to different VLANs can take different paths within any Region per IEEE DRAFT P802 1s D13 All bridges whether they use STP RSTP or MSTP send information in configuration messages via Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs to assign port roles that determine each port s participation in a fully and simply connected active topology based on one or more spanning trees The information communicated is known as the spanning tree priority vector The BPDU structure for each of these different protocols is different A MSTP bridge will transmit the appropriate BPDU depending on the received type of BPDU from a particular port Configuration Examples 521 ProSafe M5300 Switch An MST Region comprises of one or more MSTP Bridges with the same MST Configuration Identifier using the same MSTIs and which have no Bridges attached that cannot receive and transmit MSTP BPDUs The MST Configuration Identifier has the following components 1 Configuration Identifier Format Selector 2 Configuration Name 3 Configuration Revision Level 4 Configuration Digest 16 byte signature of type HMAC MD5 created from the MST Configuration Table a VLAN ID to MSTID mapping As there are Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree there is a MSTP state maintained on a per port per instance basis or on a per port per VLAN basis as any VLAN can be in one and only one MSTI or CIST For example port A can be forwarding for instance 1 while dis
160. to configure the association between the primary private VLAN and secondary VLANs To display the Private VLAN Association Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Private VLAN gt Private VLAN Association Configuration Private VLAN Association Configuration Private VLAN Association Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN s Isolated VLAN Community VLAN s L100 x 100 To configure an association between a primary and secondary VLAN 1 From the Primary VLAN field select the ID of the primary private VLAN to configure Managing Device Security 408 ProSafe M5300 Switch 2 In the Secondary VLAN field specify the VLAN ID of the VLAN to associate with the selected primary VLAN 3 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Field Description Isolated VLAN Displays the isolated VLAN associated with the primary VLAN Community VLAN Displays the list of community VLAN s associated with the primary VLAN Private VLAN Port Mode Configuration Use tis page to configure the port mode for the ports that belong to a private VLAN To display the Private VLAN Port Mode Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Private VLAN gt Private VLAN Port Mode Configuration Private Vlan Port Mode Configuration Private Vlan Port Mode Configuration
161. to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Strong Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded The factory default is Archive Maintenance 492 ProSafe M5300 Switch 2 If you are downloading a GSM7352Sv1 or GSM7352Sv2 image Archive select the image on the switch to overwrite This field is only visible when Archive is selected as the File Type Note It is recommended that you not overwrite the active image The system will display a warning that you are trying to overwrite the active image 3 Click BROWSE to open a file upload window to locate the file you want to download 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click the APPLY button to initiate the file download Note After a file transfer is started please wait until the page refreshes When the page refreshes the Select File option will be blanked out This indicates that the file transfer is done Note To download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Note To download SSL PEM files SSL must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 6 Use Select File to browse give name along with path for the file you want to download You may enter up to 80 characters The factory default is blank 7 Download Status Displays the status during transfer file to the switch Maintenance 493 ProSafe M5300 Switch US
162. type of Authentication for the Virtual Router from the pull down menu The default is None The choices are e 0 None No authentication will be performed e 1 Simple Authentication will be performed using a text password Authentication Data If you selected simple authentication enter the password Use Status to select active or inactive to start or stop the operation of the Virtual Router The default is inactive Click ADD to add a new Virtual Router to the switch configuration Click DELETE to delete the selected Virtual Router Note that the router can not be deleted if there are secondary addresses configured Interface IP Address Indicates the IP Address associated with the selected interface Owner Set to True if the Virtual IP Address and the Interface IP Address are the same otherwise set to False If this parameter is set to True the Virtual Router is the owner of the Virtual IP Address and will always win an election for master router when it is active VMAC Address The virtual MAC Address associated with the Virtual Router composed of a 24 bit organizationally unique identifier the 16 bit constant identifying the VRRP address block and the 8 bit VRID State The current state of the Virtual Router e State e Initialize e Master e Backup Routing 281 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e VRRP Configurati
163. value in the range of 1 to 200000000 The following table describes the read only MST port configuration information displayed on the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page Field Description Auto Calculated Port Path Cost Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated Enabled or not Disabled Path cost will be calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Port Uptime Since Last Clear Counters Time since the counters were last cleared displayed in Days Hours Minutes and Seconds Port Mode Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port channel The possible values are Enable or Disable Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree The port role will be one of the following values Root Port Designated Port Alternate Port Backup Port Master Port or Disabled Port Designated Root Root Bridge for the selected MST instance It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of
164. values TLVs in the LLDP MED will be transmitted in the LLDP PDUs frames for the selected interface e MED Capabilities To transmit the capabilities TLV in LLDP frames e Network Policy To transmit the network policy TLV in LLDP frames e Location Identification To transmit the location TLV in LLDP frames e Extended Power via MDI PSE To transmit the extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames e Extended Power via MDI PD To transmit the extended PD TLV in LLDP frames e Inventory Information To transmit the inventory TLV in LLDP frames The following table describes the LLDP MED Interface Configuration fields Field Description Link Status Specifies the link status of the ports whether it is Up Down Operational Status Specifies the LLDP MED TLVs are transmitted or not on this interface Configuring System Information 102 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP MED Local Device Information To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Local Device Information A screen similar to the following displays LLDP MED Local Device Information LLDP MED Interface Selection Interface 3 0 1 x Network Policies Information Media Unknown Tagged Application VLAN ID Priority DSCP Bit Bit Type Status Status Inventory Information Hardware Revision Firmware Revision Software Revision Serial Number Manufacturer Name Model Name Asset Id Location Information Sub Type Location
165. violating packets per the policing metrics from which one can be selected The default is send For each of the above Action Selectors one of the following actions can be taken e Drop These packets are immediately dropped e Mark IP DSCP These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value before being presented to the system forwarding element This selection requires that the DSCP value field be set e Mark CoS These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before being presented to the system forwarding element This selection requires that the Mark CoS value field be set e Send These packets are presented unmodified by DiffServ to the system forwarding element e Mark IP Precedence These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP Precedence value before being presented to the system forwarding element This selection requires that the Mark IP Precedence value field be set Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch If you change any of the settings on the page click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Configuring Quality of Service 350 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Policy Name Displays name of the DiffServ policy Policy Type Displays type of the policy as In Member Class Name Displays name o
166. which belong to the same community and to the promiscuous ports There can be multiple community VLANs per private VLAN To display the Private VLAN Type Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Private VLAN gt Private VLAN Type Configuration Managing Device Security 407 ProSafe M5300 Switch Private VLAN Type Configuration Private VLAN Type Configuration gr Ges Unconfigured 2 Primary To configure the private VLAN type 1 Select the check box associated with each VLAN to configure To apply the same settings to all VLANs select the check box in the header row 2 Use the Private VLAN Type menu to identify a group of protected ports that can be combined into a logical group The options are as follows e Primary Sets Private VLAN as Primary Type that forwards the traffic from the promiscuous ports to isolated ports community ports and other promiscuous ports in the same private VLAN e Isolated Sets Private VLAN as Isolated Type that carries traffic from isolated ports to promiscuous ports e Community Sets Private VLAN as Isolated Type that forwards traffic between ports which belong to the same community and to the promiscuous ports e Unconfigured Sets the VLAN as non Private VLAN 3 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Private VLAN Association Configuration Use this page
167. will never acquire a supplicant The default value is 60 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Transmit Period This input field allows the user to configure the transmit period for the selected port The transmit period is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on the specified port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request Identity frame to the supplicant The transmit period must be a number in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 30 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Guest VLAN Id This field allows the user to configure Guest VLAN ID on the interface The valid range is 0 3965 The default value is 0 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Enter 0 to clear the Guest VLAN ID on the interface Guest VLAN Period This input field allows the user to enter the guest VLAN period for the selected port The guest VLAN period is the value in seconds of the timer used by the Guest VLAN Authentication The guest VLAN time out must be a value in the range of 1 and 300 The default value is 90 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Unauthenticated VLAN ID This input field allows the user to enter the Unauthenticated VLAN ID for the selected port The valid range is 0 3965 The default value is 0 Ch
168. zero Hello Timer Displays the value of the parameter for the CST Auto Calculated External Port Path Displays whether the external path cost is automatically calculated Cost Enabled or not Disabled External Path cost will be calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for External Port Path Cost is zero BPDU Guard Effect Display the BPDU Guard Effect it disables the edge ports that Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port receive BPDU packets The possible values are Enable or Disable Configuring Switching Information 149 CST Port Status ProSafe M5300 Switch Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page to display Common Spanning Tree CST and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch To display the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt CST Port Status CST Port Status CST Port Status 1 2 LAGS All Port Forwarding State Interface Forwarding Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Point Root Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Designated Desi ted Root esignated Roo Gast 80 00 00 07 03 05 05 06 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Port Up Time L Since STe Desi ted Brid esignated Bridge Port 80 00 C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5
169. 0 Log The sequence number of this trap System Up Time The time at which this trap occurred expressed in days hours minutes and seconds since the last reboot of the switch Trap Information identifying the trap Event Logs This panel displays the event log which contains error messages from the system Event log is not cleared on a system reset To access the Event Log page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Event Logs Monitoring the System 474 Event Logs ProSafe M5300 Switch unitmgr c unitmgr c unitmgr c unitmgr c unitmgr c me k _ unitmgr c fone my fee unitmgr c unitmgr c Code AAAAAAAA 00031 AAAAAAAA 00031 003142 001334 0024 00239 00536 0060 00247 014817 001210 mL Se 00045 00148 00340 unitmgr c The following table describes the Event Log information displayed on the screen Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions Click CLEAR to clear the messages out of the Event Log Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current information Monitoring the System 475 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Entry The sequence number of the event Type The type of the event File Name The file in which the event originated Line The line number of the event Task Id The task ID of the event Code The event code Tim
170. 0 wj 10 27 138 21 1 To configure the global DNS settings 1 Specify whether to enable or disable the administrative status of the DNS Client e Enable Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS domain name Default value is Enable e Disable Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries 2 Enter the DNS default domain name to include in DNS queries When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified hostname this field is provided as the domain name for example if default domain name is netgear com and the user enters test then test is changed to test netgear com to resolve the name The length of the name should not be longer than 255 characters 3 Use Retry Number to specify the number of times to retry sending DNS queries to DNS server This number ranges from 0 to 100 The default value is 2 4 Use Response Timeout secs to specify the amount of time in seconds to wait for a response to a DNS query This timeout ranges from 0 to 3600 The default value is 3 5 To specify the DNS server to which the switch sends DNS queries enter an IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation in the DNS Server field and click ADD The server appears in the list below You can specify up to eight DNS servers The precedence is set in the order created 6 To remove a DNS server from the list select the check box next to the server you want to remove and click DELETE If no DNS server is specified the c
171. 0 Switch MLD VLAN Configuration To access the MLD VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt MLD VLAN Configuration MLD VLAN Configuration MLD VLAN Configuration Fast one Admin Leave P Maximum Multicast Router VLAN ID Membership 7 a Mode Admin Response Time Expiry Time Ke Interval E 100 Enable Enable 10 0 1 Use VLAN ID to set the VLAN IDs for which MLD Snooping is enabled 2 Use Admin Mode to enable MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID 3 Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the MLD Snooping Fast Leave Mode for the specified VLAN ID 4 Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is Maximum Response Time 1 to 3600 5 Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval 1 Its value should be less than group membership interval value 6 Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time of MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 0 to 3600 7 Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 8 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring Switching Information 169
172. 00 Switch OUI Table Use this page to add and remove Organizationally Unique Identifiers OUIs from the OUI database the device maintains Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI ina network adapter to help identify the device The OUI is a unique 24 bit number assigned by the IEEE registration authority Several default OUls have been preconfigured in the OUI database on the device To display the OUI Table page click Switching gt Auto VoIP gt OUI based gt OUI Table OUI Table QUI Table Telephony Ours 00 01 E3 00 03 6B 00 12 43 00 0F E2 00 60 B9 00 D0 1E 00 E0 75 00 E0 BB 00 04 0D 00 1B 4F SIEMENS cIscol CISCO2 H3C NITSUKO PINTEL VERILINK 3COM AVAYAL AVAYA2 To configure entries in the OUI table 1 Inthe Telephony OUI field specify the unique OUI that identifies the device manufacturer or vendor The OUI is specified in three octet values each octetis represented as two hexadecimal digits separated by colons 2 Inthe Description field provide a description of the manufacturer or vendor associated with the OUI 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes 5 To remove an OUI from the table select the check box next to each entry to remove and click DELETE Configuring Switching Information 138 ProSafe M5300 Switch iSCSI The Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI feature helps network administrato
173. 0088 24 keyed ood ee ee 84 SNMP eeren ie tad aides diame dade O aa i n a added dese 87 SNMPVIIN2 oc2 oo de eked be Oredeke dee Gb Veke hbase bo KETER E 87 SNMP V3 User Configuration 0 00 cece ee 92 MDE ccecmakectageh aianetends palais casas ees ad eae aes 6 93 BE DP ss eect sett de oa dseut se apa wa haed ale dtd dee den EP ae eee ag 93 PL DPAMEDS stxctasc ata a aieia dare adn a ace aes Batauiela us ae tata 100 SDP atu hewnd tu Laedee eh Sees deen eee ane Seema 109 ISDP Global Configuration kiss aod daes ae adda eR Rasa edd ae 109 Advanced ISDP Configuration 0 0 00 eee eee 110 Timer Schedule 2 2 2 c0cch ae canthisankh ada kE ek ae dines EENE 114 Timer Global Configuration 2 0220400520 00400 rews ed eer enews 114 Timer Schedule Configuration 0 0 c eee eee 115 Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information MWILAINS acc es oes Sid Scouts Bee Leh eae ess os daha ete oe alae ae ean 119 BaSICs a 24 45 0840 dia seat te Coded 2h 6 eed eee 120 Advanced cs desk Pid aos Seid Sita ia a vids dnc a dA g i eee a 122 Auto VolP Configuration s acacia tate wane ahem Bacal AERP RLANA 134 Protocol Based cs dcanmaoxdde dees a sneha e E 134 OUDIO 54 dagocnnrgurcagaa aRada RIPI ce danas duaeeaiad cen 136 oE TIRE 44d car TEE tonnes eiee Gado ber eaeaerardeke nt 139 BASIC aeei a a E aig is tae acted hapa nas auaiatecs 139 Advanced a5 este 5 Bie ate gud Aa hk amp oR Reh ea Ebon w Bae tele a ate yah eee a 141 Spanning
174. 1 to 255 Interface IP dd Address Address M 1 1 0 5 192 168 3 10 192 168 3 20 Active Initialize To configure the global VRRP settings 1 VRID is only configurable if you are creating new Virtual Router in which case enter the VRID in the range 1 to 255 2 Use Interface to select the Unit Slot Port for the new Virtual Router from the pull down menu Routing 280 10 11 Field Description ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Pre empt Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable a backup router will preempt the master router if it has a priority greater than the master virtual router s priority provided the master is not the owner of the virtual router IP address The default is enable Use Priority to enter the priority value to be used by the VRRP router in the election for the master virtual router If the Virtual IP Address is the same as the interface IP Address the priority gets set to 255 no matter what the user enters If the user enters a priority of 255 when the Virtual and interface IP Addresses are not the same the priority gets set to the default value of 100 Use Advertisement Interval to enter the time in seconds between the transmission of advertisement packets by this virtual router Enter a number between 1 and 255 The default value is 1 second Use Primary IP Address to enter the IP Address associated with the Virtual Router The default is 0 0 0 0 Use Authentication Type to select the
175. 1 with the following settings e Rule ID 1 e Action Deny e Assign Queue ID 0 optional 0 is the default value e Match Every False e Source IP Address 192 168 187 0 e Source IP Mask 255 255 255 0 For additional information about IP ACL rules see P Rules on page 443 3 Click ADD 4 From the IP Rules screen create a second rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings e Rule ID 2 e Action Permit e Match Every True 5 Click ADD 6 From the IP Binding Configuration page assign ACL ID 1 to the interface gigabit ports 2 3 and 4 and assign a sequence number of 1 See P Binding Configuration on page 453 By default this IP ACL is bound on the inbound direction so it examines traffic as it enters the switch 7 Click APPLY 8 Use the IP Binding Table screen to view the interfaces and IP ACL binding information See MAC Binding Table on page 441 The IP ACL in this example matches all packets with the source IP address and subnet mask of the Finance department s network and deny it on the Ethernet interfaces 2 3 and 4 of the switch The second rule permits all non Finance traffic on the ports The second rule is required because there is an explicit deny all rule as the lowest priority rule Configuration Examples 513 ProSafe M5300 Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ Standard IP based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service Best effort service implies that the network
176. 2 Relay Interface Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP L2 Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays To configure one or more interfaces for DHCP L2 relay DHCP L2 Relay Configuration DHCP L2 Relay Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface bso Interface Admin Mode 82 Option Trust Mode 1 0 1 Disable Disable 1 0 2 Disable Disable 1 0 3 Disable Disable 1 0 4 Disable Disable 1 0 5 Disable Disable 1 0 6 Disable Disable 1 0 7 Disable Disable 1 0 8 Disable Disable To configure one or more interfaces for DHCP L2 relay 1 Select the check box associated with each interface to configure or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected interface Default is disable 3 Use 82 Option Trust Mode to enable or disable an interface to be trusted for DHCP L2 Relay Option 82 received Configuring System Information 55 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics To display the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics page click System gt Services gt DHCP L2 Relay gt DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics A screen similar to the following displays DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics 1 2 LAGS All Messages With Opt82 Messages With Opt82 Mes
177. 21 13 28 Agent Address 10 27 34 52 Field Description Agent Version Uniquely identifies the version and implementation of this MIB The version string must have the following structure MIB Version Organization Software Revision where MIB Version 1 3 the version of this MIB e Organization NETGEAR Inc e Revision 1 0 Agent Address The IP address associated with this agent Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest sFlow agent information Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e sFlow Agent on page 479 e sFlow Receiver Configuration on page 481 e sFlow Interface Configuration on page 482 Monitoring the System 480 ProSafe M5300 Switch sFlow Receiver Configuration Use the sFlow Receiver Configuration page to configure the sFlow Receiver To display the sFlow Receiver Configuration page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Advanced gt sFlow Receiver Configuration sFlow Receiver Configuration Index Field Description sFlow Receiver Configuration amp Receiver Receiver Maximum Receiver Datagram Receiver Owner Receiver Port o 1400 0 0 0 0 6343 5 6 1400 0 0 0 0 6343 5 Receiver Index Selects the receiver for which data is to be displayed or configured Allowed range is 1 to 8 Use Receiver Owner to specify the entity making use of this sFlowRcvrTable entry The empty string indicates that the entry is currently unclaimed and th
178. 3at mode If the PD class detected by the switch is not Class 4 type 2 the port will power up the PD but only Class 4 PDs can be powered up in the IEEE 802 3at mode e Power Limit Type Select the type of power limit to use on the port which is one of the following e Class Select this option to base the power limit on the detected class value When this value is selected the user configured value configured in the Power Limit field is ignored e User Select this option to base the power limit on the value configured in the Power Limit field e None Select this option to indicate that no power limit type is used on the port e Power Limit Set the maximum amount of power that can be delivered by a port when the Power Limit Type is User e Detection Type Select the PD detection mode the PSE port uses to detect an attached device The detection mode can be one of the following modes e Auto The port performs four point resistive detection 802 3af4point followed by legacy detection e Pre ieee The port performs legacy detection e ieee The port performs four point resistive detection 802 3af4point Configuring System Information 85 ProSafe M5300 Switch Class View the class of the PD connected to the port The class defines the range of power a PD is drawing from the system The class is defined as e 0 0 44 12 95W e 1 0 44 3 83W e 2 3 84 6 48W e 3 6 49 12 95W e 4 12 95 25 50W 802 3at Type 2 devices
179. 472 ProSafe M5300 Switch Trap Logs Trap Logs Number of Traps Since Last Reset 376 Trap Log Capacity 256 Number of Traps Since Log Last Viewed 376 Trap Logs 2 days 23 19 51 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 2 days 23 19 51 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 2 days 23 19 50 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot O Port 22 2 days 23 19 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 2 days 23 19 48 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 2 days 23 19 48 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 2 days 22 35 50 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot O Port 22 2 days 22 35 49 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 2 days 22 35 48 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 2 days 22 35 47 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 10 2days 22 35 47 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 11 2 days 22 35 47 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 12 2 days 19 15 17 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 13 2 days 19 15 17 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 14 2 days 19 15 16 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 15 2days 19 15 15 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0
180. 5 Click DELETE to delete the currently selected policy from the switch To configure the policy attributes 1 Click the name of the policy The policy name is a hyperlink The following figure shows the configuration fields for the policy Policy Class Configuration Class Information Policy Name Policy Type Member Class Name Policy Attribute Policy Attribute Assign Queue Drop Mark VLAN CoS Mark CoS As Secondary CoS Mark IP Precedence Mark IP DSCP Simple Policy Two Rate policy1 In VoIP oly afil Color Blind Comitted Burst Size Conform Action Color Mode Comitted Rate Send Drop Mark CoS Mark CoS As Secondary CoS Mark IP Precedence Mark IP DSCP Send Drop Violate Action Mark CoS Mark CoS As Secondary CoS Mark IP Precedence Mark IP DSCP Color Blind A Color Mode Comitted Rate Comitted Burst Size Peak Rate Peak Burst Size Send Drop Conform Action Mark CoS Mark CoS As Secondary CoS 10 2 Select the queue to which packets will of this policy class will be assigned This is an integer value in the range 0 to 7 3 Configure the policy attributes e Drop Select the drop radio button This flag indicates that the policy attribute is defined to drop every inbound packet e Mark VLAN CoS This is an integer value in the range from 0 to 7 for setting the VLAN priority e Mark IP Precedence This is an IP Precedence valu
181. 50 e DHCP Bindings Information on page 51 e DHCP Conflicts Information on page 52 DHCP Server Configuration To display the DHCP Server Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Server Configuration A screen similar to the following displays DHCP Server Configuration DHCP Server Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Ping Packet Count 2 0 2 to 10 Conflict Logging Mode Disable Enable Bootp Automatic Mode Disable Enable Excluded Address IP Range From IP Range To Configuring System Information 45 ProSafe M5300 Switch To enable or disable DHCP service 1 2 Use Admin Mode to specify whether the DHCP Service is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Disable Use Ping Packet Count to specify the number of packets a server sends to a Pool address to check for duplication as part of a ping operation Default value is 2 Valid Range is 0 2 to 10 Setting the value to O will disable the function Use Conflict Logging Mode to specify whether conflict logging on a DHCP Server is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Enable Use Bootp Automatic Mode to specify whether Bootp for dynamic pools is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Disable Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration
182. 504 abe weer E Go ees bed edond oe keene 6 53 DHCP L2 REAaY 2x sac cdaddoe weed t ESE med oo hale w ead EES 54 UDP Relay lt 2 22956284022 irda ekee ee sepoi oo rE Er EA 57 DHOP VO SONET 240 aveahne ss ep eees tie os es bat E ad 59 DACP VO ROIN 26 icacegonn 285 wica abs Teoh ea AG edna ER GA 66 SLACKING erreniega een a eaedded ace ated tee det Eee eee te 68 DIAC FEIOS aad bined IINA tue tues dau yeas Katee ue donate aes 68 Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade 00 eee eee 69 Configuration Maintenance 0 0 00 ee 69 Stack Master Electon eree 4 2000 Trenirke eke Gata gion ndead a 70 Factory Defaults Reset Behavior 2456ce4 0ecen need eeea es 70 Nonstop Forwarding 31 2424 2 29 00 4 ete eee PG bebo nad bd PRO aeHs T1 Slack COMMGUANOM sroioseirerce hee eee keet hikar ee 72 Slack Por COMMGUPAUOM e eere darters hace karir ew dean od Ea 74 Slack Port DIMAGNOSUCS 4 46is0 vn bead tid ereki tartiner a ial 76 Stack Firmware Synchronization 0 0 e eee eee 77 ProSafe M5300 Switch NSE cede seceded trate el eee pee ean geek seu 26 eee 78 Checkpoint Statistics a a5 4cccea caida Kawa oe RSME MAGA REE RA 80 stack Template Summary 25 22 2500 05500 bb eee eb een eee edanes 81 Stack Template Configuration 0 00 0 e eee eee 82 PoE M5300 28G POE and M5300 52G POE Only 82 Basic PoE Configuration scx wed sn gee ede ddd Sebo Rede eee 83 PoE Port Configuration os 32246 08s 20000
183. 5300 Switch OSPF Interface Statistics This screen displays statistics for the selected interface The information will be displayed only if OSPF is enabled To display the OSPF Interface Statistics page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt OSPF Interface Statistics Receveu ranet Discards Bad Version Virtual Link Not Found Area Mismatch Invalid Destination Address No Neighbor at Source Address Invalid OSPF Packet Type Hellos Ignored Hellos Sent Hellos Received DD Packets Sent DD Packets Received LS Requests Sent LS Requests Received LS Updates Sent LS Updates Received LS Acknowledgements Sent LS Acknowledgements Received To view OSPF statistics for an interface select the interface from the Interface menu Field Description OSPF Area ID The OSPF area to which the selected router interface belongs An OSPF Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass AS Border Router Count The total number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs IP Addres
184. 5300 Switch The following table describes the LLDP MED Remote Device Information fields Field Description Remote ID Specifies the remote client identifier assigned to the remote system Capability Information Specifies the supported and enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port Supported Capabilities Specifies supported capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port Enabled Capabilities Specifies enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port Device Class Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected to the port Network Policy Information Specifies if network policy port TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this Media Application Type Specifies the application type Types of application types are unknown voicesignaling guestvoice guestvoicesignalling softphonevoice videoconferencing streammingvideo vidoesignalling Each application type that is received has the VLAN id priority DSCP tagged bit status and unknown bit status A port may receive one or many such application types If a network policy TLV has been receive on this port only then would this information be displayed VLAN Id Specifies the VLAN id associated with a particular policy type Priority Specifies the priority associated with a particular policy type DSCP Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular
185. 8 255 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 256 511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 512 1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 1024 1518 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 1519 2047 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 1519 and 2047 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 2048 4095 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were between 2048 and 4095 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets RX and TX 4096 9216 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received or transmitted that were betwee
186. A Configuring System Information 20 ProSafe M5300 Switch The System Information provides various statuses Switch Status To define system information 1 2 In the System Name field enter the name you want to use to identify this switch You may use up to 255 alphanumeric characters The factory default is blank In the System Location field enter the location of this switch You may use up to 255 alphanumeric characters The factory default is blank In the System Contact field enter the contact person for this switch You may use up to 25 alphanumeric characters The factory default is blank In the Login Timeout field specify how many minutes of inactivity should occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the connection Enter a number between 0 and 160 the factory default is 5 Entering 0 disables the timeout Click APPLY to send the updated screen to the switch and cause the changes to take effect on the switch These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed The following table describes the status information the System Page displays Field Description Product Name IPv4 Network Interface The product name of this switch The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the network interface IPv6 Network Interface The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the network interface IPv4 Loopback Interface IPv6 Loopback Inter
187. ACL falls within the specified time range active or is not within the range inactive Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch To delete a rule select the check box associated with the rule and click DELETE To change a rule select the check box associated with the rule change the desired fields and click APPLY Configuration changes take effect immediately Managing Device Security 439 ProSafe M5300 Switch MAC Binding Configuration When an ACL is bound to an interface all the rules that have been defined are applied to the selected interface Use the MAC Binding Configuration page to assign MAC ACL lists to ACL Priorities and Interfaces To display the MAC Binding Configuration page click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt MAC Binding Configuration MAC Binding Configuration Binding Configuration ACL ID macACL Direction Inbound Port Selection Table eua ee Interface Binding Status aS ai Number 1 1 1 0 5 Inbound MAC ACL macACL 1 0 9 Inbound MAC ACL macACL 1 Select an existing MAC ACL from the ACL ID menu You can select one and bind it to the interfaces you wanted The packet filtering direction for ACL is Inbound which means the MAC ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the port 2 Specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists a
188. AE EEE EAEE EE T ae beara ed ae eae tides aed de 193 AGVANCEG 25 6 5286 de Sbd nth ne Oho dewhe eee oud ddue SOc dink 197 IPO erdroen t Bis ah eater ha dh pale Ged aks Seale a GGsS Wifiak taste e S EENE 201 BASICn EEEE TEE OE eee GOW OG Oe ote ewe eeeas 201 MOVANCEG 24 icra d does eel oeAd eM Rd SEE e eS SA Che 204 MEAN seen maccaage oat A whee awed s aceon E asda 218 VLAN Routing Wizard 13 220 5 20409 08 65 605 S5 02 2G hese ogd ameaee 218 VLAN Routing Configuration iis ccci un eae and ee Rage eke eae 219 ARP is veaceiad ghee dt ane ate ae eae tedey eed eues eeu eae 220 BOSC neta TT OST TETEE ANE E A ad bam easaege a 221 AQVANCEG 6603060 crete tee emen haw idem eensed ode new 221 RIP cs ik a aise at tok E A antes iiiad aa and audideed Stan s eda Sided 225 BOSICrc ita do bbe be etoile bY SoU eRe hee be weeheess 225 POWANICO 5 iy Ss Los E a dew cht os cep dl ey lad to As eras ate de 226 OSPF 2242 2000 Pee tidw dedi debe edb ee ise Dede ddwdaee eee e 232 BASICS sci canna sko sare bois hap tare eal hope a ee b erat beni eal alae 232 ANONO e ameaud wings hae te agatha aul ub eR EGRE heals ead 233 OSFEVS EE E E do E EE E dod de ae he ee 257 BASIC EEEE EE ESEE EEA ES aso ELET NEEE ETET 257 AGVAENCEC s54 ccnneoosg eee ee neebiee gad ERER TOn ea 258 Router DISCOVEIY aii ddrukd ch mata d niere KANEA oe Ra Giase EN 279 Router Discovery Configuration 0 0 0 0 eee eee 279 VRRP a cesids ies 8 Sees tied ans Becky das Tele rte te eke a e
189. AN 03 22 40 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_comtrol c 3523 1735 DHCP option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 11 20 lt 13 gt JAN 03 22 36 00 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1948147584 traputil c 614 1734 Spanning Tree Topology Change Recewed MSTID 0 Unt 1 Slot O Port 22 lt 13 gt JAN 03 22 35 59 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1948147584 traputilc 614 1733 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unk 1 Slot O Port 22 Buffered Log Configuration This log stores messages in memory based upon the settings for message component and severity On stackable systems this log exists only on the top of stack platform Other platforms in the stack forward their messages to the top of stack log 1 A log that is Disabled shall not log messages A log that is Enabled shall log messages Enable or Disable logging by selecting the corresponding radio button 2 Behavior Indicates the behavior of the log when it is full It can either wrap around or stop when the log space is filled 3 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest messages in the log 4 Click CLEAR to clear the buffered log in the memory Message Log This help message applies to the format of all logged messages which are displayed for the message log persistent log or console log Monitoring the System 469 ProSafe M5300 Switch Format of the messages Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have an identical
190. AN Configuration on page 120 specify the VLAN membership as follows e For the default VLAN with VLAN ID 1 specify the following members port 7 U and port 8 U Configuration Examples 510 ProSafe M5300 Switch e For the VLAN with VLAN ID 10 specify the following members port 1 U port 2 U and port 3 T e For the VLAN with VLAN ID 20 specify the following members port 4 U port 5 T and port 6 U 3 In the Port PVID Configuration screen see Port PVID Configuration on page 3 103 specify the PVID for ports g1 and g4 so that packets entering these ports are tagged with the port VLAN ID e Portg1 PVID 10 e Port g4 PVID 20 4 With the VLAN configuration that you set up the following situations produce results as described e If an untagged packet enters port 1 the switch tags it with VLAN ID 10 The packet has access to port 2 and port 3 The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to leave port 2 as an untagged packet For port 3 the outgoing packet leaves as a tagged packet with VLAN ID 10 e If a tagged packet with VLAN ID 10 enters port 3 the packet has access to port 1 and port 2 If the packet leaves port 1 or port 2 it is stripped of its tag to leave the switch as an untagged packet e If an untagged packet enters port 4 the switch tags it with VLAN ID 20 The packet has access to port 5 and port 6 The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to become an untagged packet as it leaves port 6
191. B File Download Use this menu to download a file from the switch to USB device To display the HTTP File Upload page click Maintenance gt Download gt USB File Upload Download File From USB Download File From USB File Type Archive Image Name image USB File 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve e Text Configuration to specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration The factory default is Archive 2 Use USB File to give a name along with path for the file you want to upload You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Maintenance 494 ProSafe M5300 Switch File Management The system maintains two versions of the ProSafe software in permanent storage One image is the active image and the second image is the backup image The active image is loaded during subsequent switch restarts This feature reduces switch down time when upgrading or downgrading the ProSafe sof
192. Backup Designated Router Metric The metric value used by the Virtual Link Routing 276 ProSafe M5300 Switch Route Redistribution This screen can be used to configure the OSPFv3 Route Redistribution parameters The allowable range for each field is displayed next to it If an invalid value is entered in one or multiple fields an alert message will be displayed with the list of all the valid values To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Route Redistribution Route Redistribution OSPFv3 Route Redistribution C Connected Disable External Type 2 C Static Disable External Type 2 1 Use Source to select those Source Protocols that have already been configured for redistribution by OSPFv3 The valid values are Static and Connected 2 Use Redistribute Option to enable or disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol 3 Use Metric to set the metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the metric if the source was pre configured and can be modified The valid values are 0 to 16777214 4 Use Metric Type to set the OSPFv3 metric type of redistributed routes 5 Use Tag to set the tag field in routes redistributed This field displays the tag if the source was pre configured else a default tag value of 0 is displayed The valid values are O to 4294967295 Routing 277 ProSafe M5300 Switch N
193. CEL to abandon the changes IGMP Routing Interface Statistics To display the IGMP Routing Interface Statistics page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Routing Interface Statistics IGMP Routing Interface Statistics IGMP Routing Interface Statistics 1 2 VLANS All Wron x Querier Querier ng Number IP Protocol Querier Querier Version F Up Expiry z of Joins Address State IP Status Queries a 5 Received Groups Received Interface Time Time 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Non Operational 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Non Operational 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Non Operational 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Non Operational 1 0 5 192 168 3 10 255 255 255 0 Non Operational 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Non Operational Field Description Interface The interface on which the IGMP is enabled IP Address The IP address of the selected interface Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the IP address of the selected interface Protocol State The operational state of IGMP on the selected interface Querier IP The address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached Querier Status Indicates whether the selected interface is in querier or non querier mode Querier Up Time The time in seconds since the IGMP interface querier was last changed Querier Expiry Time The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires If the local system is the querier this will be zero W
194. CL T m puh EE ID Name Number E 1 0 8 In Bound IP ACL The following table describes the information displayed in the IP ACL Binding Table To delete an IP ACL to interface binding select the check box next to the interface and click DELETE Field Description Interface Displays selected interface Direction Displays selected packet filtering direction for ACL ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction ACL ID Name Displays the ACL Number in the case of IP ACL or ACL Name in the case of Named IP ACL and IPv6 ACL identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface and direction Sequence Number Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction Managing Device Security 454 ProSafe M5300 Switch VLAN Binding Table Use this page to bind ACLs to VLANs on the switch rather than to ports At the bottom of the page the table displays any currently configured ACLs for the selected VLAN You can also bind an ACL to a port To display the VLAN Binding Table click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt VLAN Binding Table ACL Vlan Binding Table VLAN Binding Configuration E VLAN ID Sequence Number ACL Type ACL ID In Bound 1 IP ACL 10 The following table describes the information displayed in the ACL VLAN Binding Table 1 In the VLAN ID field specify the VLAN to whic
195. CP Conflicts Information Reset All Address Conflicts Specific Address Conflict DHCP Conflicts Information Search By Conflict IP Address so IP Address Detection Method Detection Time 1 Choose e All Address Conflicts to specify all address conflicts to be deleted e Specific Address Conflict to specify a specific dynamic binding to be deleted The following table describes the DHCP Conflicts Information fields Field Description IP Address Specifies the IP Address of the host as recorded on the DHCP server Detection Method Specifies the manner in which the IP address of the hosts were found on the DHCP Server Detection Time Specifies the time when the conflict was detected in N days NNh NNm NNs format with respect to the system up time Configuring System Information 52 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Relay If the switch is functioning as a Layer 3 device the Layer 3 DHCP Relay Agent can relay DHCP messages between DHCP clients and DHCP servers that are located in different IP subnets To display the DHCP Relay page click System gt Services gt DHCP Relay A screen similar to the following displays DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Maximum Hop Count Admin Mode Disable Enable Minimum Wait Time secs 0 Circuit ID Option Mode Disable Enable DHCP Status Requests Received Requests Relayed Packets Discarded DHCP Relay Configuration To co
196. Class click the class link to the Class page To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Class Configuration Class Name Class Name E vote All To configure a DiffServ class 1 To create a new class enter a class name select the class type and click ADD This field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names from which one can be selected The switch supports only the Class Type value All which means all the various match criteria defined for the class should be satisfied for a packet match All signifies the logical AND of all the match criteria Only when a new class is created this field is a selector field After class creation this becomes a non configurable field displaying the configured class type 2 To rename an existing class select the check box next to the configured class update the name and click APPLY 3 To remove a class click the check box beside the Class Name then click DELETE 4 Click REFRESH to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch After creating a Class click the class link to the Class page Configuring Quality of Service 343 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the class match criteria 1 Click the class name for an existing class The class name is a hyperlink The following figure shows the configur
197. Configuration Port PVID Configuration PVID Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface GO Acceptable Confi a G t Sei Current P aeon aml m ae Interface VID PVID Frame Ingress Ingress Port Priority Filtering Filtering C ee a All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable Admit All Disable Disable 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 H ee eeeh Heemer H o ie o E o E o iC To configure PVID information 1 Click ALL to display information for all Physical ports and LAGs 2 Select the check box next to the interfaces to configure You can select multiple interfaces to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 3 Use Interface to select the interface you want to configure 4 Use Configured PVID to specify the VLAN ID you want assigned to untagged or priority tagged frames received on this port The factory default is 1 The Current PVID field shows the PVID currently in use on the interface 5 Use Acceptable Frame Types to specify the types of frames that may be received on this port The options are VLAN only and Admit All e When set to VLAN only untagged frames or priority tagged frames rece
198. D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Transitions Out Of Loop Transitions Into Loop Designated Topology Change Acknowledge to Point MAC True False False False False False CST Regional Root 80 00 C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Counters Last Cleared 1 day 0 hr 9 min 11 sec 3 day 3 hr 25 min 30 sec 3 day 3 hr 25 min 30 sec 3 day 3 hr 25 min 30 sec 3 day 3 hr 25 min 30 sec 3 day 3 hr 25 min 30 sec Inconsistent State Inconsistent State Inconsistent State The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the screen Field Description Interface Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree The port role will be one of the following values Root Port Designated Port Alternate Port Backup Port Master Port or Disabled Port Configuring Switching Information 150 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Designated Root Ro
199. DD to add a new IPv6 address to the interface 9 Click DELETE to delete a existing IPv6 address entry from the interface Field Description Current State Indicates the state of the IPV6 address The state is TENT if routing is disabled or DAD fails The state is Active if interface is active and DAD is successful Routing 206 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Statistics Use the IPv6 Statistics page to display IPv6 traffic statistics for one or all interfaces To display the IPv6 Statistics page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Statistics The following image shows some but not all of the statistics the page displays IPv6 Statistics IPv6 Interface Selection Interface IPv6 Statistics Total Datagrams Received Received Datagrams Locally Delivered Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Header Errors Received Datagrams Discarded Due To MTU Received Datagrams Discarded Due To No Route Received Datagrams With Unknown Protocol Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Invalid Address Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Truncated Data Received Datagrams Discarded Other Received Datagrams Reassembly Required Datagrams Successfully Reassembled Datagrams Failed To Reassemble Datagrams Forwarded Datagrams Locally Transmitted Datagrams Transmit Failed Datagrams Successfully Fragmented Datagrams Failed To Fragment Datagrams Fragments Created Multicast Datagrams Received 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
200. DHCP Vendor Class Identifier String to specify the text string to add to DHCP requests as option 60 the VCI option 9 Use Management VLAN ID to specify the management VLAN ID of the switch It may be configured to any value in the range of 1 4093 Some network administrators use a management VLAN to isolate system management traffic from end user data traffic 10 Click APPLY to update the network interface with the specified values 11 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes IPv6 Network Interface Configuration To display the IPv6 Network Configuration page click System gt Management gt Network Interface gt IPv6 Network Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays IPv6 Network Interface Configuration Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode Disable Enable Current Network Configuration Protocol None DHCPv6 IPv6 Gateway Interface Status Up IPv6 Network Interface Configuration E fe80 2eb0 5dff fe91 f6f0 64 True The IPv6 network interface is the logical interface used for in band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch s front panel ports The configuration parameters associated with the switch s network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed To access the switch over an IPv6 network you must first configure it with IPv6 information IPv6 prefix pr
201. Dynamic MAC Address Use the Dynamic MAC Address page to convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked address To display the Dynamic MAC Address page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Dynamic MAC Address Dynamic MAC Address Table Port Security Settings Convert Dynamic Address to Static Number Of Dynamic MAC Addresses Learned 0 Dynamic MAC Address Table Port List 1 0 1 E VLAN ID MAC Address To convert learned MAC addresses 1 Port List Select the physical interface for which you want to display data 2 Use Convert Dynamic Address to Static to convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a statically locked address The Dynamic MAC address entries are converted to Static MAC address entries in a numerically ascending order until the Static limit is reached 3 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest MAC address learned on a specific port The Dynamic MAC Address Table shows the MAC addresses and their associated VLANs learned on the selected port Use the Port List menu to select the interface for which you want to display data Field Description Number of Dynamic MAC Displays the number of dynamically learned MAC addresses on a Addresses Learned specific port VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID corresponding to the MAC address MAC Address Displays the MAC addresses learned on a specific port Managing Device Securit
202. EC level management access to the CLI by using a console connection or a telnet or SSH session In Privileged EXEC mode read write users have access to all CLI commands The pre configured users admin and guest are assigned to a pre configured list named defaultList which you may not delete All newly created users are also assigned to the defaultList until you specifically assign them to a different list To display the Enable Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt Enable Authentication List Managing Device Security 367 ProSafe M5300 Switch Enable Authentication List Enable Authentication JEA EY Tustname E enableList enableNetList To configure authentication list methods for enable access uP 2 List Name If you are creating a new enable list enter the name you want to assign It can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters long and is not case sensitive Use the drop down menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Line The line password will be used for authentication e Enable The privileg
203. ETE to remove the specified virtual link from the switch configuration Routing 253 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Neighbor State The OSPF interface state it can be these values e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router e Point to Point The interface is operational and is connected either to the virtual link On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router Hello Packets are sent to the neighbor every Hellolnterval seconds e Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network e Backup Designated Route
204. Enable Denial of Service SMAC DMAC to cause the switch to drop packets where the source MAC address Destination MAC address Enable Denial of Service TCP FIN amp URG amp PSH to cause the switch to crop packets where the TCP Flags FIN and URG and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number 0 Enable Denial of Service TCP Flag amp Sequence to cause the switch to drop packets where the TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port lt 1024 or TCP Control Flags 0 and TCP Sequence Number 0 or TCP Flags FIN URG and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set Enable Denial of Service TCP Fragment to allow the switch to drop packets that have a TCP payload where the IP payload length minus the IP header size is less than the minimum allowed TCP header size The factory default is disabled Enable Denial of Service TCP Offset to cause the switch to drop packets where the TCP Header Offset 1 Enable Denial of Service TCP Port to cause the switch to drop packets where the TCP source port equal to TCP destination port The factory default is disabled Enable Denial of Service TCP SYN to cause the switch to drop packets where the TCP Flag SYN set Enable Denial of Service TCP SYN amp FIN to cause the switch to drop packets where the TCP Flags SYN and FIN set Enable Denial of Service UDP Port to cause the switch to drop packets that have UDP source port equal to UDP destination port The factory default is disabled Click APPLY to update the
205. Flag Ignore Ignore psu Ignore Ignore Ignore Fin Ignore Src IP Address Src IP Mask Src L4 Port Dst IP Address Dst IP Mask Dst L4 Port Other Service Type IP DSCP IP Precedence IP TOS Rate Limit Conform Data Rate Rate Limit Burst Size Time Range El Configure the desired criteria for the new rule e Rule ID Specify a number from 1 12 to identify the IP ACL rule You can create up to 12 rules for each ACL e Action Selects the ACL forwarding action which is one of the following e Permit Forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria e Deny Drops packets which meet the ACL criteria e Logging When set to Enable logging is enabled for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is visible for a Deny Action e Assign Queue Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this IP ACL rule Valid range of Queue Ids is 0 to 6 e Mirror Interface Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is copied in addition to being forwarded normally by t
206. For port 5 the outgoing packet leaves as a tagged packet with VLAN ID 20 Access Control Lists ACLs ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources while blocking off any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control restrict contents of routing updates decide which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked and provide security for the network ACLs are normally used in firewall routers that are positioned between the internal network and an external network such as the Internet They can also be used on a router positioned between two parts of the network to control the traffic entering or exiting a specific part of the internal network The added packet processing required by the ACL feature does not affect switch performance That is ACL processing occurs at wire speed Access lists are a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions This collection of conditions known as the filtering criteria is applied to each packet that is processed by the switch or the router The forwarding or dropping of a packet is based on whether or not the packet matches the specified criteria Traffic filtering requires the following two basic steps 1 Create an access list definition The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded Additionally you can assign traffic that matches the C
207. ICMPv4 Packet Size allowed This includes the ICMP header size of 8 bytes If ICMP DoS prevention is enabled the switch will drop ICMP ping packets that have a size greater then this configured Max ICMP Packet Size minus the ICMP header size of 8 bytes The factory default is 512 Use Denial of Service ICMPv6 to enable ICMPv 6 DoS prevention causing the switch to drop ICMP packets that have a type set to ECHO_REQ ping and a size greater than the configured ICMP Pkt Size The factory default is disabled Use Denial of Service Max ICMPv6 Packet Size to specify the Max ICMPv4 Packet Size allowed This includes the ICMP header size of 8 bytes If ICMP DoS prevention is enabled the switch will drop ICMP ping packets that have a size greater then this configured Max ICMP Packet Size minus the ICMP header size of 8 bytes The factory default is 512 Use Denial of Service First Fragment to enable First Fragment DoS prevention causing the switch to check DoS options on first fragment IP packets when switch are receiving fragmented IP packets Otherwise switch ignores the first fragment IP packages The factory default is disabled Use Denial of Service ICMP Fragment to cause the switch to drop ICMP Fragmented packets The factory default is disabled Use Denial of Service SIP DIP to enable SIP DIP DoS prevention causing the switch to drop packets that have a source IP address equal to the destination IP address The factory default is disabled
208. ID px f Querier Querier Participate Address State Version Response Address Version z Mode Time 100 Enable 192 168 10 2 Disable 2 To configure Querier VLAN settings 1 To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP Snooping select New Entry from the VLAN ID field and complete the following fields User can also set pre configurable Snooping Querier parameters e VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID for which the IGMP Snooping Querier is to be enabled e Querier Election Participate Mode Enable or disable Querier Participate Mode e Disabled Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN the snooping querier moves to the non querier state e Enabled The snooping querier participates in querier election in which the least IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN The other querier moves to non querier state e Snooping Querier VLAN Address Specify the Snooping Querier IP Address to be used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN 2 Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 3 To disable Snooping Querier on a VLAN select the VLAN ID and click DELETE 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click REFRESH to update the page with the latest information from the switch Configuring Switching Information 165 ProS
209. Information Coordinate Based Civic Address ELIN Extended PoE Device oe diaii Primary 3000 00 Watts Configuring System Information 103 ProSafe M5300 Switch To view LLDP MED information transmitted by an interface select the desired interface from the Interface menu The following table describes the LLDP MED Local Device Information fields Field Description Network Policy Information Specifies if network policy TLV is present in the LLDP frames Media Application Type Specifies the application type Types of application types are unknown voicesignaling guestvoice guestvoicesignalling softphonevoice videoconferencing streammingvideo vidoesignalling Each application type that is received has the VLAN id priority DSCP tagged bit status and unknown bit status A port may receive one or many such application types If a network policy TLV has been transmitted only then would this information be displayed Inventory Specifies if inventory TLV is present in LLDP frames Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version Firmware Revision Specifies Firmware version Software Revision Specifies Software version Serial Number Specifies serial number Manufacturer Name Specifies manufacturers name Model Name Specifies model name Asset ID Specifies asset id Location Information Specifies if location TLV is present in LLDP frames Sub Type Specifies typ
210. LANS All Go To Interface ge Advertise Maximum Minimum A i A A i ifeti Pref a Interface Mode dvertise Address Advestice tanai Ridwertixe interest dvertise Lifetime reference Level 1 0 1 Disable 224 0 0 1 600 450 1800 1 0 2 Disable 224 0 0 1 600 450 1800 1 0 3 Disable 224 0 0 1 600 450 1800 1 0 4 Disable 224 0 0 1 600 450 1800 1 0 5 Disable 224 0 0 1 600 450 1800 1 0 6 Disable 224 0 0 1 600 450 1800 To configure router discovery settings 1 Use Interface to select the router interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Advertise Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable Router Advertisements will be transmitted from the selected interface 3 Use Advertise Address to enter the IP Address to be used to advertise the router 4 Use Maximum Advertise Interval to enter the maximum time in seconds allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface 5 Use Minimum Advertise Interval to enter the minimum time in seconds allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface 6 Use Advertise Lifetime to enter the value in seconds to be used as the lifetime field in router advertisements sent from the interface This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as valid router addresses by hosts 7 Use Preference Level to specify the preference level of the router as a default router relative to other routers on the same subnet Higher numbered addresse
211. LLDP information transmitted by an interface select the desired interface from the Interface menu The following table describes the LLDP Local Device Information fields Field Description Chassis ID Subtype Specifies the string that describes the source of the chassis identifier Chassis ID Specifies the string value used to identify the chassis component associated with the local system Port ID Subtype Specifies the string describes the source of the port identifier Port ID Specifies the string that describes the source of the port identifier System Name Specifies the system name of the local system System Description Specifies the description of the selected port associated with the local system Port Description Specifies the description of the selected port associated with the local system System Capabilities Supported Specifies the system capabilities of the local system System Capabilities Enabled Specifies the system capabilities of the local system which are supported and enabled Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the local system Management Address Type Specifies the type of the management address Configuring System Information 98 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP Remote Device Information This page displays information on remote devices connected to the port To display this page click Sys
212. List HTTPS Authentication List eT httpsList Local S To configure authentication list methods for HTTPS access 1 List Name Select the HTTPS list name for which you want to configure data 2 Use the drop down menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally Managing Device Security 370 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list 4 Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list Login Sessions This page identifies the users that are logged in to the manag
213. List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt Dot1x Authentication List Dotix Authentication List Dot1x Authentication List a ia dotixList E To configure authentication list method for Dot1x access 1 List Name Select the dot1x list name for which you want to configure data 2 Use the drop down menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list The options are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the new settings 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes HTTP Authentication List You use this page to configure HTTP lists Configuring this list affects management level access to the web based user interface by using HTTP To display the HTTP Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt HTTP Authentication List HTTP Authentication List HTTP Authentication List a httpList Local gt Ly Managing Device Security 369 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure authentication list methods for HTTP access 1 List Name Select the HTTP list name for which you want to configure data 2 Use the drop down menu to select the method tha
214. Local Device Information on page 103 LLDP MED Remote Device Information on page 105 LLDP MED Remote Device Inventory on page 108 Configuring System Information 100 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP MED Global Configuration Use the LLDP MED Global Configuration page to specify LLDP MED parameters that are applied to the switch To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays LLDP MED Global Configuration Global Configuration G Fast Start Repeat Count 3 1 to 10 Device Class Network Connectivity To configure global LLDP MED settings 1 Use Fast Start Repeat Count to specify the number of LLDP PDUs that will be transmitted when the protocol is enabled The range is from 1 to 10 Default value of fast repeat count is 3 2 Click APPLY to update the switch with the modified setting 3 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes The following table describes the LLDP MED Global Configuration fields Field Description Device Class Specifies local device s MED Classification There are four different kinds of devices three of them represent the actual end points classified as Class Generic IP Communication Controller etc Class II Media Conference Bridge etc Class III Communication IP Telephone etc The fourth device is Network Connectivity Device which is typically a LAN Switch Router IEEE 802 1 Bridge IEEE 802 11 Wir
215. MAC VLAN EType incoming port Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src IP and Src TCP UDP Port fields Source IP and Source TCP UDP fields of the packet e DestIP and Dest TCP UDP Port fields Destination IP and Destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet e rc Dest IP and TCP UDP Port Fields Source Destination IP and source destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet e Enhanced hashing mode Features MODULO N operation based on the number of ports in the LAG non Unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash algorithm excellent load balancing performance and packet attributes selection based on the packet type e For L2 packets source and destination MAC address are used for hash computation e For L3 packets source IP destination IP address TCP UDP ports are used Use Link Trap to specify whether you want to have a trap sent when link status changes The factory default is enable which will cause the trap to be sent Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is disabled no traffic will flow and LACPDUs will be dropped but the links that form the LAG will not be released The factory default is enable Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated
216. Managing Device Security 424 DAI Statistics ProSafe M5300 Switch This screen shows the Statistics per VLAN To display the DAI Statistics page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI Statistics Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics DAI Statistics Bad Bad DHCP DHCP ACL ACL I lid VLAN ESEE E E E Source Dest iia Forwarded Dropped e p MAC MAC 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Field Description VLAN The enabled VLAN ID for which statistics to be displayed DHCP Drops Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as there is no matching DHCP Snooping binding entry found DHCP Permits ACL Drops ACL Permits Number of ARP packets that were forwarded by DAI as there is a matching DHCP Snooping binding entry found Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as there is no matching ARP ACL rule found for this VLAN and the static flag is set on this VLAN Number of ARP packets that were permitted by DAI as there is a matching ARP ACL rule found for this VLAN Bad Source MAC Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the sender MAC address in ARP packet didn t match the source MAC in ethernet header Bad Dest MAC Number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the target MAC address in ARP reply packet didn t match the destination MAC in ethernet header Invalid IP Forwarded Number of ARP packets that were dropped by
217. NETGEAR ProSafe M5300 Switch Web Management User Guide ProSafe M5300 Switch NETGEAR Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form or by any means without the written permission of NETGEAR Inc NETGEAR the NETGEAR logo and Connect with Innovation are trademarks and or registered trademarks of NETGEAR Inc and or its subsidiaries in the United States and or other countries Information is subject to change without notice Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders NETGEAR Inc All rights reserved Technical Support Thank you for choosing NETGEAR To register your product get the latest product updates get support online or for more information about the topics covered in this manual visit the Support website at http support netgear com Phone US amp Canada only 1 888 NETGEAR Phone Other Countries Check the list of phone numbers at http support netgear com app answers detail a_id 984 Statement of Conditions To improve internal design operational function and or reliability NETGEAR reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice NETGEAR does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Revi
218. Notify to specify the LLDP 802 1AB notification mode for the selected interface 6 Use Transmit Management Information to specify whether management address is transmitted in LLDP frames for the selected interface 7 Optional TLV s e Use System Name to include system name TLV in LLDP frames e Use System Description to include system description TLV in LLDP frames e Use System Capabilities to include system capability TLV in LLDP frames e Use Port Description to include port description TLV in LLDP frames Configuring System Information 95 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP Statistics To display this page click System gt LLDP gt Statistics A screen similar to the following displays LLDP Statistics LLDP Statistics Last Update 2 Days 03 16 46 Total Inserts 2 Total Deletes 0 Total Drops 0 1 Total Ageouts LLDP Statistics ec a aS Total Total Discards Unknowns MED 802 1 802 3 1 0 1 99 101 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 The following table describes the LLDP Statistics fields Field Description Last Update Specifies the time when an entry was created modified or deleted in the tables associated with the remote system Total Inserts Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been inserted into tables associated with the remote systems Total Deletes Specifies the number of times th
219. Originate is set to enable If Default Information Originate is set to enable and values for Always Metric and Metric Type are already configured then setting Default Information Originate back to disable will set the Always Metric and Metric Type values to default Use Always to set the router advertise when set to True Use Metric to specify the metric of the default route The valid values are 0 to 16777214 Use Metric Type to set the metric type of the default route Valid values are External Type 1 and External Type 2 Routing 259 ProSafe M5300 Switch OSPFv3 Configuration iP Use Router ID to specify the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPFv3 After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF v3 to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPF v3 will be activated for the switch The default value is enable You must configure a Router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational This can also be done by issuing the CLI command router id in the IPv6 router OSPF mode Note Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset Use Exit Overflow Interval to enter the number of seconds that
220. P Address The IP address of the IGMP Proxy interface Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the IP address of the IGMP Proxy interface Operational Mode The operational state of IGMP Proxy interface Number of Groups The current number of multicast group entries for the IGMP Proxy interface in the cache table Routing 301 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Version 1 Querier Timeout The older IGMP version 1 querier timeout value in seconds The Older Version Querier Interval is the time out for transitioning a host back to IGMPv3 mode once an older version query is heard When an older version query is received hosts set their Older Version Querier Present Timer to Older Version Querier Interval Version 2 Querier Timeout The older IGMP version 2 querier timeout value in seconds Proxy Start Frequency The number of times the proxy was brought up IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics To display the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Proxy Interface Statistics IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics IGMP Proxy non operational Field Description Interface Displays the interface on which IGMP packets received Version The version of IGMP packets received Queries Received The number of IGMP queries received Report Received The number of IGMP reports received Reports Sent The number of IGMP r
221. P Bytes Bytes Packets Packets MAC A Prot Verif terf EAI SES ES reet e Time amertare BE Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Field Description MAC Address Identifies the MAC address of the client IP Address Drops Identifies the IP address of the client if applicable Protocol Shows the current connection protocol which is either HTTP or HTTPS Verification Shows the current account type which is Guest Local or RADIUS Session Time Shows the amount of time that has passed since the client was authorized Interface Identifies the interface the client is using CP ID The ID of the Captive Portal instance User Name Displays the user name or Guest ID of the connected client Bytes Received Total bytes the client has received Bytes Transmitted Total bytes the client has transmitted Packets Received Total packets the client has received Packets Transmitted Total packets the client has transmitted Managing Device Security 434 ProSafe M5300 Switch Configuring Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources while blocking off any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control restrict contents of routing updates decide which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked and above all provide security for the ne
222. P NTP time servers to update the switch s clock the time data received from the server is based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC which is the same as Greenwich Mean Time GMT This may not be the time zone in which the switch is located Use Time Zone Name to configure a timezone specifying the number of hours and optionally the number of minutes difference from UTC with Offset Hours and Offset Minutes The time zone can affect the display of the current system time The default value is UTC 8 Use Offset Hours to specify the number of hours difference from UTC See Time Zone Name Step 7 previous for more information Allowed range is 24 to 24 The default value is 0 9 Use Offset Minutes to specify the number of Minutes difference from UTC See Time Zone Name Step 7 previous for more information Allowed range is 0 to 59 The default value is Configuring System Information 36 SNTP Global Status ProSafe M5300 Switch The following table displays SNTP Global Status information Field Description Version Specifies the SNTP Version the client supports Supported Mode Specifies the SNTP modes the client supports Multiple modes may be supported by a client Last Update Time Specifies the local date and time UTC the SNTP client last updated the system clock Last Attempt Time Specifies the local date and time UTC of the last SNTP request or receipt Last Attempt Status of an unsolicited mes
223. P link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 225 e Advanced on page 226 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e RIP Configuration Basic on page 225 RIP Configuration Basic Use the RIP Configuration page to enable and configure or disable RIP in Global mode To display the RIP Configuration page click Routing gt RIP gt Basic gt RIP Configuration RIP Configuration RIP Configuration RIP Admin Mode Disable Enable To configure the administrative mode of ARP on the switch 1 Use the RIP Admin Mode field and select Disable or Enable 2 Click APPLY to update the switch with the change 3 Click CANCEL to abandon the change Routing 225 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e RIP Configuration Advanced on page 226 e Interface Configuration on page 227 e Route Redistribution on page 230 RIP Configuration Advanced Use the RIP Configuration page to enable and configure or disable RIP in Global mode and to configure global RIP settings To display the RIP Configuration page click Routing gt RIP gt Advanced gt RIP Configuration RIP Configuration RIP Configuration RIP Admin Mode Disable Enable Split Horizon Mode None Simple Poison Reverse Auto Summary Mode Enable Disable Host Routes Accept Mode Enable Disable Global Route Changes 0 Global Queries 0 Default Information Originat
224. PLY button the switch will send traceroute and the results will be displayed below the configurable data If a reply to the traceroute is received you will see e 1x y z w 9869 usec 9775 usec 10584 usec e 2 0 0 0 0 0 usec 0 usec 0 usec e 30 0 0 0 0 usec 0 usec 0 usec e Hop Count w Last TTL z Test attempt x Test Success y To display the Traceroute IPv4 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Traceroute IPv4 TraceRoute IPv4 TraceRoute IPv4 IP Address Hostname Probes Per Hop E Max TTL 30_ Init TTL ES MaxFail 5 Interval L3 0 Results To configure the Traceroute settings and send probe packets to discover the route to a host on the network 1 Use IP Address Hostname to enter the IP address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to discover path The initial value is blank The IP Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 2 Optionally configure the following settings e Probes Per Hop Enter the number of probes per hop The initial value is default The Probes per Hop you enter is not retained across a power cycle e MaxTTL Enter the maximum TTL for the destination The initial value is default value The MaxTTL you enter is not retained across a power cycle Maintenance 499 ProSafe M5300 Switch e InitTTL Enter the initial TTL to be used The initial value is default value The InitTTL you enter is not retained acros
225. Portal and to specify captive portal events that will generate a trap All CP SNMP traps are disabled by default To display the Captive Portal Trap Flags page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Trap Flags CP Trap Flags Trap Flags CP Trap Mode Disable Enable Client Auth Failure Disable Enable Client Connect Disable Enable Client DB Full Disable Enable Client Disconnect Disable Enable CP Trap Mode Displays the captive portal trap mode status To enable or disable the mode use the System gt SNMP gt SNMPv1 v2 gt Trap Flags page If you enable the Client Auth Failure field the SNMP agent sends a trap when a client attempts to authenticate with a captive portal but is unsuccessful If you enable the Client Connect field the SNMP agent sends a trap when a client authenticates with and connects to a captive portal If you enable the Client DB Full field the SNMP agent sends a trap each time an entry cannot be added to the client database because it is full If you enable the Client Disconnect field the SNMP agent sends a trap when a client disconnects from a captive portal Managing Device Security 433 Captive Portal Client ProSafe M5300 Switch To display the Captive Portal Client page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Client Captive Portal Client Captive Portal Client Search By MAC Address GO Co E IP Ba Session c
226. Prefix Length transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 4 Click ADD to add a new Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router 5 Click DELETE to delete an extant Candidate RP Address for the PIM SM router Routing 318 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM BSR Candidate Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM SM BSR Candidate Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast PIM SM gt BSR Candidate Configuration PIM BSR Candidate Configuration PIM BSR Candidate Configuration Interface Hash Mask Length BSR Expiry Time hh mm ss Priority IP Address Next bootstrap Message hh mm ss Next Candidate RP Advertisement hh mm ss Advertisement Interval secs To configure BSR candidate settings for IPv6 PIM SM 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Priority to enter the priority of C BSR 3 Use Hash Mask Length to enter the C BSR hash mask length to be advertised in bootstrap messages This hash mask length will be used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group The valid values are from 0 to 128 Default value is 126 Field Description IP Address Displays the IP address of the Elected BSR Next bootstrap Message Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR Next Candidate RP Advertisement Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next candidate RP advertis
227. ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast Router Configuration To access the Multicast Router Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Multicast Router Configuration Multicast Router Configuration Multicast Router Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface eo DAET 1 0 1 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 1 0 6 Disable 1 0 7 Disable 1 0 8 Disable 1 0 9 Disable 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable Multicast Router on the selected interface Multicast Router VLAN Configuration To access the Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Interface 170 1 x Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Bf VLAN ID Multicast Router 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which you want Multicast Router to be enabled 2 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID for which the Multicast Router Mode is to be Enabled or Disabled 3 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable the multicast router for the Vlan ID Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration chang
228. RP routing interface 3 Use Interface Metric to enter the DVMRP metric for the selected interface This value is sent in DVMRP messages as the cost to reach this network Valid values are from 1 to 31 The default value is 1 4 Click REFRESH to show the latest DVMRP interface information Field Description Protocol State The operational state of the DVMRP protocol on the selected interface either operational or non operational Local Address The IP address used as a source address in packets sent from the selected interface Generation ID The DVMRP generation ID used by the router for the selected interface This value is reset every time an interface is re started and is placed in prune messages A change in generation ID informs the neighbor routers that any previous information about this router should be discarded Received Bad Packets The number of invalid packets received on the selected interface Received Bad Routes The number of invalid routes received on the selected interface Sent Routes The number of routes sent on the selected interface Routing 292 DVMRP Neighbor ProSafe M5300 Switch To display the DVMRP Neighbor page click Routing gt Multicast gt DVMRP gt DVMRP Neighbor DVMRP Neighbor DVMRP Neighbor Search By To search for an entry in the DVMRP neighbor table select the search criteria from the Search menu Interface l aeo R
229. SF OSPFv3 Summary Use the NSF OSPFv3 Summary page to configure the non stop forwarding NSF support mode and to view NSF summary information for the OSPF feature NSF is a feature used in switch stacks to maintain switching and routing functions in the event of a stack unit failure For information about NSF see Nonstop Forwarding on page 71 To display the page click To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt NSF OSPFv3 Summary NSF OSPFv3 Summary NSF OSPFv3 Summary Support Mode Disabled Restart Interval 120 Restart Status Restart Age secs Restart Exit Reason To configure NSF settings for OSPFv3 1 Use Support Mode to configure the administrative mode of NSF for the OSPF feature 2 Use Restart Interval to configure the length of the grace period on the restarting router The value you specify is the number of seconds that the restarting router asks its neighbors to wait before exiting helper mode The restarting router includes the restart interval in its grace LSAs The valid range 1 1800 seconds and the default value is 120 seconds 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click REFRESH to update the screen with the most recent information 5 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Restart Status Displays the restart status of the restarting router The possible values are Not Restarting e Planned Restart e Unplanne
230. Schedule Admin Mode Disable Enable Timer Schedule Name Timer Timer Schedule Name Shedule Status E Timert Inactive 1 To configure a timer 1 Use Admin Mode to Enable or Disable the Timer Control service The default value is Disable 2 Use the Timer Schedule Name to specify the name of a timer schedule Configuring System Information 114 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Click ADD to add the new timer schedule with a specified name The configuration changes take effect immediately 4 Toremove a configured timer select the entry to remove and click DELETE The configuration changes take effect immediately 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest values 6 To change the administrative mode select the desired option and click APPLY The configuration changes take effect immediately The following table describes the Timer Schedule non configurable fields Field Description Timer Schedule Status Indicates whether the timer is currently active or inactive A timer is inactive if the current day and time does not fall within the time entry specified in the time range Identification of the timer Schedule Maximum number of schedules that can be created is 100 Timer Schedule Configuration Use the Timer Schedule Configuration page to add time ranges to a configured timer Note The time range entries use
231. Static the value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be relearned e Learned the value of the corresponding instance was learned and is being used e Management the value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress Configuring Switching Information 178 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Dynamic Addresses on page 179 e Address Table on page 177 e Static MAC Address on page 180 Dynamic Addresses This page allows the user to set the Address Aging Interval for the specified forwarding database To display the Address Table page click Switching gt Address Table gt Advanced gt Dynamic Addresses Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Table Address Aging Timeout seconds 1 Use Address Aging Timeout seconds to specify the time out period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information 802 1D 1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds The value may be specified as any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds The factory default is 300 2 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 3 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Switching Information 179 ProSafe M5300 Switch Static MAC Address Use this page to configure static MAC addresses in the MAC address table Each static MAC address can be associate
232. Summary LSA The default is Enable 6 Click ADD to add the new address range to the switch 7 Click DELETE to remove the specified address range from the area configuration Routing 241 ProSafe M5300 Switch Interface Configuration Use the OSPF Interface Configuration page to configure an OSPF interface To display the Interface Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration Interface Configuration OSPF Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS All inbex ace IP Area ID Admin Router Retransmit Hello Address Mode Priority Interval Interval 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 0 5 192 168 3 10 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 2 Enable 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable Iftransit LSA Ack Dead Delay Interval Interval Interval 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 Authentication Designated Sele see SoS SPE eni Metric Key ID State mE Designated of Link Link LSA Cost if Router Events LSAs Checksum nwununnn a Disable i Broadcast Disable i Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast G o C C koeee eee To configure an
233. T ORFCS 0 RFRG 0 RIBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT OTFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 302d5fe6 RPKT 13c3db TBYT 2f5b1e45 TPKT 124803RFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT 0TFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 0 RPKT 0 TBYT 0 TPKT ORFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT OTFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 0 RPKT 0 TBYT 0 TPKT ORFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJIBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT OTFCS 0 TERR 0 The following table describes the Stack Port Diagnostics fields Field Definition Unit ID Displays the unit Port Displays the stackable interface on the given unit Port Diagnostics Info Displays three text fields 80 character strings populated by the driver containing debug and status information Configuring System Information 76 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stack Firmware Synchronization To display the stack firmware synchronization configurations from the Stack Firmware Synchronization page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt Stack Firmware Synchronization A screen similar to the following is displayed Stack Firmware Synchronization Stack Firmware Synchronization Stack Firmware Auto Upgrade Disable Traps Enable e Allow Downgrade Enable m To configure the Stack Firmware Synchronization features 1 Specify whether Stack Firmware Auto Upgrade is enabled or disabled This feature determines what to do when a new member attempts to join the stack and its firmware does not match the version running on the master e Enable The stack master upgrades t
234. TP gt Advanced gt MST Configuration MST Configuration MST Configuration Time ASF z a Since MST ID Priority Bridge Identifier TopaogY Change 0 32768 1 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 1 2 oO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 100 Topology Root T I Change ee ti Designated Root Path Count 5 Cost 1 day 0 hr 10 min 10 sec 1 0 day 0 hr 0 min 2 sec 1 Root Port Identifier 80 00 00 07 03 05 05 06 40000 80 01 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 0 00 00 False True Configuring Switching Information 151 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure an MST instance 1 To add an MST instance configure the MST values and click ADD e MST ID Specify the ID of the MST to create Valid values for this are between 1 and 4094 This is only visible when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected e Priority Specifies the bridge priority value for the MST When switches or bridges are running STP each is assigned a priority After exchanging BPDUs the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096 If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096 the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095 it will be set to 0 The default priority is 32768 The valid range is O 61440 e VLAN ID This gives a combo box of each VLAN on the switch
235. TP operation was successful and the system time was updated e Request Timed Out A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server e Bad Date Encoded The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid e Version Not Supported The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client e Server Unsynchronized The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers This is indicated via the leap indicator field on the SNTP message Server Kiss Of Death The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 ina message received from a server Failed Requests Specifies the number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since last reboot Configuring System Information 39 ProSafe M5300 Switch DNS You can use these pages to configure information about DNS servers the network uses and how the switch operates as a DNS client DNS Configuration Use this page to configure global DNS settings and DNS server information To access this page click System gt Management gt DNS gt DNS Configuration DNS Configuration DNS Configuration DNS Status Disable Enable DNS Default Name to 255 alphanumeric characters Retry Number 0 to 100 Response Timeout secs DNS Server Configuration _ Serial no pns Server J 1 10 27 138 20
236. Table OSPF Neighbor Table OSPF Neighbor Table Search By Interface GO Neighb Neighb egal mired Router Area Router Hellos Retransmission Up Dead Interface IP Interface Options aie Events Permanence x ID ID Priority Suppressed Queue length Time Time Address Index Field Description Interface Displays the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured Slot 0 is the base unit Router ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the neighbor interface Neighbor IP Address The IP address of the neighboring router s interface to the attached network It is used as the destination IP address when protocol packets are sent as unicasts along this adjacency Also used in router LSAs as the Link ID for the attached network if the neighboring router is selected to be designated router The Neighbor IP address is learned when Hello packets are received from the neighbor For virtual links the Neighbor IP address is learned during the routing table build process Area ID The area ID of the OSPF area associated with the interface Options An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor The neighbor s optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its Hello packets This enables received Hello Packets to be rejected i e neighbor relationships will not even start to form if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF capabilities
237. Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 16 2 days 19 15 14 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 17 2days 19 15 14 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 18 2 days 19 10 49 Spanning Tree Topology Change 0 Unit 1 19 2days 19 10 49 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 20 2 days 19 10 48 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 21 2days 19 10 47 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unit 1 Slot 0 Port 22 oon own Wnre O m 7 yo er m oll om Se The following table describes the Trap Log information displayed on the screen The page also displays information about the traps that were sent Click Clear Counters to clear all the counters This resets all statistics for the trap logs to the default values Monitoring the System 473 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Number of Traps Since Last Reset The number of traps that have occurred since the switch last reboot Trap Log Capacity The maximum number of traps stored in the log If the number of traps exceeds the capacity the entries will overwrite the oldest entries Number of Traps since log last viewed The number of traps that have occurred since the traps were last displayed Displaying the traps by any method terminal interface display Web display upload file from switch etc will cause this counter to be cleared to
238. VLAN from the list for the binding entry IP Address Displays valid IP Address for the binding entry Filter Type Filter Type using on the interface one is source IP address filter type the other is source IP address and MAC address filter type Click CLEAR to clear all the dynamic binding entries Dynamic ARP Inspection malicious ARP packets DAI prevents a class of man in the middle attacks where an unfriendly station intercepts traffic for other stations by poisoning the ARP caches of its unsuspecting neighbors The malicious attacker send ARP requests or responses mapping another station s IP address to its own MAC address When DAI is enabled the switch drops ARP packets whose sender MAC address and sender IP address do not match an entry in the DHCP snooping bindings database You can optionally configure additional ARP packet validation When DAI is enabled on a VLAN DAI is enabled on the interfaces physical ports or LAGs that are members of that VLAN Individual interfaces are configured as trusted or untrusted The trust configuration for DAI is independent of the trust configuration for DHCP snooping The Dynamic ARP Inspection DAI folder contains links to the following features e DAI Configuration on page 422 e DAI VLAN Configuration on page 422 e DAI Interface Configuration on page 423 e DAI ACL Configuration on page 424 e DAI ACL Rule Configuration on page 424 e DAI Statistics on page 425 Managing D
239. Value is enabled or disabled 6 Use BPDU Guard to specify whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent and predictable The switches behind the edge ports that have STP BPDU guard enabled will not be able to influence the overall STP topology At the reception of BPDUs the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state This would lead to administrative disable of the port 7 Use BPDU Filter to specify whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs If an operational edge port receives a BPDU it immediately loses its operational status In that case if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port Configuring Switching Information 144 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Configuration digest key Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances including the CST and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corre
240. a a eRe eee ho oe a E 404 Protected Ports Configuration 3 2 ead8 5 vein oda ts eae ooo Be 406 Private VLAN 6 3003 4 c00d 40Gd oa Gis kdaiite e oR Red eae 407 SOM COMMOL erednek eropa E oa ea EES 412 COnUOl PESEE E E E E E EEEE 414 DACP SNOOp ING reeeo e E akon eed e Ee E 414 IP Source Guan 221th eid EEA EREA 419 Dynamic ARP Inspection assssssaasssssrirsisrrrrrens 421 Captive Ponal scx seats dd caus acetate e EEE ang oe AA a ae ataa aa 426 Configuring Access Control Lists 0 0 0 0 0 eee 435 AOL WZA orasi tinin t hi ce ate Ashe Ee ad PARKEDE RO hee 435 BaSICi s 22 as5 2d EEEE nea oadeaae ronda die Leas ed ede 437 AVANO e a sratiid ating ERDA ARESE ERIA EINAR haa aie E ERR 441 ProSafe M5300 Switch Chapter 7 Monitoring the System POMS 2ctonnnd canes teond dianeayatnransisane ead tet aad aaa ne 457 PON SUSE aega aca hn ANa EARE a Guin EAA ENA BARDEA 458 Port Detailed StaliStiCS 21 410 24 0sdetcdigaw inenika nt nEn 459 EAP SauSUCS lt g6 a cebcnartge ah tatadgdba abd edd denen ARSA 466 Cable Test 2 2 2icd22nor sd agaeraonnega ge ndsdnagae boar ndada d 467 LOGS IPRA EE eed shdddaltas ake cans eadae da nose REE ETS 468 Buffered Logs 1 3 464 024 chee iideko toy oh Pebeo tee thee eheass 469 Command Log Configuration os ci6ctes ee oe ek eae 470 Console Log Configurati n oc se Gis de tginld poled amp Gedddarhwn Rabe Gey aei 471 Syslog Configuratii scicccsnan beta iehewd ae apa raka 471 STAD LS sy ce ct nd eget nd he eh
241. a binding will expire Valid Lifetime The valid lifetime value in seconds of the prefix associated with a binding Prefer Lifetime The preferred lifetime value in seconds of the prefix associated with a binding Configuring System Information 64 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCPv6 Server Statistics To display the DHCP Server Statistics page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPV6 Server Statistics A screen similar to the following displays DHCPv6 Server Statistics DHCPv6 Interface Selection Interface 1 0 1 m Messages Received Total DHCPv6 Packets Received DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received DHCPv6 Request Packets Received DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received DHCPv6 Release Packets Received DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received DHCPv6 Relay forward Packets Received DHCPv6 Relay reply Packets Received DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded Messages Sent Total DHCPv6 Packets Sent DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted DHCPv6 Relay forward Packets Transmitted DHCPv6 Relay reply Packets Transmitted The following table describes the DHCPv6 Server Statistics fields Field Description Interface Select the interface with the statistics to view Messages Recei
242. advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Translator State The field tells you if and how the NSSA border router translates type 7 into type 5 e enabled The NSSA border router s translator role has been set to always e elected The candidate NSSA border router is translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 e disabled The candidate NSSA border router is NOT translating type 7 LSAs into type 5 Routing 240 ProSafe M5300 Switch Area Range Configuration Use the OSPF Area Range Configuration page to configure and display an area range for a specified NSSA To display the Area Range Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Area Range Configuration Area Range Configuration OSPF Area Range Configuration To configure an OSPF area range 1 Use Area ID to specify the area for which data is to be configured 2 Use IP address to enter the IP Address for the address range for the selected area 3 Use Subnet Mask to enter the Subnet Mask for the address range for the selected area 4 Use LSDB Type to select the type of Link Advertisement associated with the specified area and address range The default type is Network Summary 5 Use Advertise to select Enable or Disable If you select Enable the address range will be advertised outside the area via a Network
243. afe M5300 Switch Field Description Operational State Displays the operational state of the IGMP Snooping Querier on a VLAN It can be in any of the following states e Querier Snooping switch is the Querier in the VLAN The Snooping switch will send out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN it moves to non querier mode e Non Querier Snooping switch is in Non Querier mode in the VLAN If the querier expiry interval timer is expires the snooping switch will move into querier mode e Disabled Snooping Querier is not operational on the VLAN The Snooping Querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP Snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured Operational Version Displays the operational IGMP protocol version of the querier Last Querier Address Displays the IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Last Querier Version Displays the IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the Snooping Querier Configuring Switching Information 166 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Snooping From the MLD Snooping link you
244. age to activate and configure OSPF v3 for a switch To display the OSPFv3 Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Basic gt OSPFv3 Configuration OSPFv3 Configuration OSPFv3 Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Router ID 0 0 0 0 To configure global OSPF v3 settings 1 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPF v3 will be activated for the switch The default value is disable You must configure a Router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational This can also be done by issuing the CLI command router id in the IPv6 router OSPF mode 2 Use Router ID to specify the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPFv3 After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPFv3 to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID Routing 257 ProSafe M5300 Switch Note Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e OSPFv3 Configuration on page 259 e Common Area Configuration on page 262 e Stub Area Configuration on page 263 e NSSA Area Configuration on page 264 e Area Range Configu
245. al HTTP Secure Port Default is 0 Use Authentication Timeout to specify the number of seconds to keep the authentication session open with the client To access the network through a portal the client must first enter authentication information on an authentication Web page When the time out expires the switch disconnects any active TCP or SSL connection with the client The valid range is 60 to 600 seconds Default Authentication Timeout is 300 seconds Field Description Operational Status Shows whether the CP feature is Enabled or Disabled Default is Disabled Disabled Reason If CP is disabled this field displays the reason which can be one of the following e Administrator Disabled e IP Address Not Configured e No IP Routing Interface e Routing Disabled CP IP Address Shows the captive portal IP address Supported Captive Portals Shows the number of supported captive portals in the system Configured Captive Portals Shows the number of captive portals configured on the switch Active Captive Portals Shows the number of captive portal instances that are operationally enabled System Supported Users Shows the number of authenticated users that the system can support Local Supported Users Shows the number of entries that the Local User database supports Authenticated Users Shows the number of users currently authenticated to all captive portal
246. al segments which provides better administration security and management of multicast traffic By default all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain VLANs electronically separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch When you use a VLAN users can be grouped by logical function instead of physical location Each VLAN in a network has an associated VLAN ID which appears in the IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN An end station may omit the tag or the VLAN portion of the tag in which case the first switch port to receive the packet may either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID A given port may handle traffic for more than one VLAN but it can only support one default VLAN ID From the VLAN link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 120 e Advanced on page 122 119 ProSafe M5300 Switch Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e VLAN Configuration on page 120 VLAN Configuration Use the VLAN Configuration page to define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table Each switch in the ProSafe family supports up to 1024 VLANs Two VLANs are created by default e VLAN 1 is the default VLAN of which all ports are members e VLAN 2 is the default VLAN for the Auto VoIP feature To display the VLAN Configuration page click Switc
247. alf of the Authenticator All three roles are required in order to complete an authentication exchange managed switch switches support the Authenticator role only in which the PAE is responsible for communicating with the Supplicant The Authenticator PAE is also responsible for submitting the information received from the Supplicant to the Authentication Server in order for the credentials to be checked which will determine the authorization state of the Port The Authenticator PAE controls the authorized unauthorized state of the controlled Port depending on the outcome of the RADIUS based authentication process Supplicant Authenticator Switch Authentication Server RADIUS 192 168 10 23 Configuration Examples 519 ProSafe M5300 Switch 802 1X Example Configuration This example shows how to configure the switch so that 802 1X based authentication is required on the ports in a corporate conference room 1 0 5 1 0 8 These ports are available to visitors and need to be authenticated before granting access to the network The authentication is handled by an external RADIUS server When the visitor is successfully authenticated traffic is automatically assigned to the guest VLAN This example assumes that a VLAN has been configured with a VLAN ID of 150 and VLAN Name of Guest 1 2 From the Port Authentication screen select ports 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 and 1 0 8 From the Port Control menu select Unauthorized The P
248. ame can be up to 255 characters in length Bootfile Specifies the name of the default boot image for a DHCP client File Name can be up to 128 characters in length 2 Use ADD to create the Pool Configuration 3 Use APPLY to change the Pool Configuration Sends the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 4 Use DELETE to delete the Pool This field is not visible to a user with read only permission DHCP Pool Options DHCP options are collections of data with type codes that indicate how the options should be used Options can specify information that is required for the DHCP protocol IP stack configuration parameters for the client information allowing the client to rendezvous with DHCP servers and so on To display the DHCP Pool Options page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool Options If at least one DHCP pool has been created a screen similar to the following displays DHCP Pool Options DHCP Pool Options Poot Name Option Code Option Type Option Value To configure DHCP options for an existing pool 1 Use Pool Name to select the Pool Name 2 Option Code specifies the Option Code configured for the selected Pool Configuring System Information 49 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Use Option Type to specify the Option Type against the Option Code configured for the selected pool e ASCII e Hex e P Address 4 O
249. amount of time you want the switch to wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds The configured value must be greater than Max Response Time The default is 260 seconds 4 Use Max Response Time secs to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in seconds The default is 10 seconds The configured value must be less than the Group Membership Interval 5 Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds The default is 0 seconds A value of zero indicates an infinite time out i e no expiration 6 Use Fast Leave Admin mode to select the Fast Leave mode for the a particular interface from the pull down menu The default is disable 7 Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 8 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring Switching Information 168 ProSafe M530
250. an select the authentication type from the pull down menu The choices are e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pull down menu on the second screen you will be returned to the first screen e Simple If you select Simple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key e Encrypt If you select Encrypt you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID Encryption uses the MD5 Message Digest algorithm All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID 8 Use Authentication Key to enter the OSPF Authentication Key for the specified interface If you do not choose to use authentication you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple authentication you cannot use a key of more than eight octets If you choose encrypt the key may be up to 16 octets long The key value will only be displayed if you are logged on with Read Write privileges otherwise it will be displayed as asterisks 9 Use Authentication ID to enter the ID to be used for authentication You will only be prompted to enter an ID when you select Encrypt as the authentication type The ID is a number between 0 ad 255 inclusive 10 Click ADD to add a new virtual link to the switch 11 Click DEL
251. anagement cc c 00rsdw eee ewe ee nee tweet dare Cira 495 CODY teh tad tee bs 5 odio o ee oe taes Rade kes ee eTA 495 Dual Image Configuration 4 00 00 0080 ce ees ee dud awe ee eis 496 Troubleshooting 2vscc0s5002 re etki tiA enr A Eee 497 PAMPA csp antag dots aut eenia aE A EE a NA 497 aAa E E E E E E E E E 498 Traceroute IPVA 5 2 a paaia nh G ao da A ine Ae a aa A 499 Traceroute IPVO aaeanoa aaea aa a a aeRO E Od gE e AE 500 ProSafe M5300 Switch Chapter9 Help Online Help o s42 0 220d404ae004otere nae etal oea ged aad anaeats 501 SUPPO s a aanne Meena mee Mi Anne untae an N 501 Yser GUID sisia otal Res eRe eae a ana hee eee saad ae eels 502 REGSUAUON 234 0253 EARRA ede une TELEDATA ARRERA SEA 503 Appendix A Default Settings Appendix B Configuration Examples Virtual Local Area Networks VLANS 000 0c 509 VLAN Example Configuration 00000 2 eee eee aes 510 Access Control Lists ACUS sorrir canis dda wedded tna ghee od dhe 511 MAC ACL Example Configuration 202020 ee aee 512 Standard IP ACL Example Configuration 000005 513 Differentiated Services DiffServ aasaassuissriaserererrau 514 LEa a tas Mii A E ERE Lae BAKE 514 DiffServ Traffic Classes 5 0 c06 0 manda a eoaaacas a f adera kas arad doen 515 Creating Poles lt 2 04 4 22g000404 02G55 eha eGh et eegeangan 515 DiffServ Example Configuration 4 000 0000 000 0e as neta ee 517 BO2IX feds e db
252. and false If the value is true reauthentication will occur Otherwise reauthentication will not be allowed Control Direction This displays the control direction for the specified port The control direction dictates the degree to which protocol exchanges take place between Supplicant and Authenticator This affects whether the unauthorized controlled port exerts control over communication in both directions disabling both incoming and outgoing frames or just in the incoming direction disabling only the reception of incoming frames This field is not configurable on some platforms Protocol Version This field displays the protocol version associated with the selected port The only possible value is 1 corresponding to the first version of the 802 1x specification This field is not configurable PAE Capabilities This field displays the port access entity PAE functionality of the selected port Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant This field is not configurable Authenticator PAE State This field displays the current state of the authenticator PAE state machine Possible values are e Initialize e Disconnected Connecting e Authenticating e Authenticated e Aborting Held e ForceAuthorized e ForceUnauthorized Backend State This field displays the current state of the backend authentication state
253. anges 5 Click RESET to redisplay the page with the latest status values from the switch The NSF Summary page includes the following non configurable information Field Description Operation Status Last Startup Reason Time Since Last Restart Indicates whether NSF is operational on the stack which may differ from the Admin Status setting If a unit that does not support NSF is connected to the stack then NSF is disabled on all stack members When a unit that does not support NSF is disconnected from the stack and all other units support NSF and NSF is administratively enabled then NSF operation resumes The type of activation that caused the software to start the last time The possible values are e Power On The switch rebooted caused by a power cycle or an administrative Reload command e Administrative Move The administrator issued a command for the stand by manager to take over Warm Admin Move The administrator issued a command for the backup manager to take over e Warm tThe primary management card restarted due to a failure and the system executed a nonstop forwarding failover to a backup management unit e Auto Cold The system switched from the active manager to the backup manager and was unable to maintain user data traffic This is usually caused by multiple failures occurring close together Time since the current management card became the active management card For the backup
254. anging the value will not change the configuration until the Submit button is pressed Enter 0 to clear the Unauthenticated VLAN ID on the interface Supplicant Timeout This input field allows the user to enter the supplicant time out for the selected port The supplicant time out is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to time out the supplicant The supplicant time out must be a value in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 30 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Server Timeout This input field allows the user to enter the server time out for the selected port The server time out is the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator on this port to time out the authentication server The server time out must be a value in the range of 1 and 65535 The default value is 30 Changing the value will not change the configuration until the APPLY button is pressed Managing Device Security 391 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Maximum Requests This input field allows the user to enter the maximum requests for the selected port The maximum requests value is the maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will retransmit an EAPOL EAP Request Identity before timing out the supplicant The maximum requests value must be in the range of 1 and 10 The default value is 2 Changing the value will not change the
255. anto ee odoin oad Fe Ga a a a eed 343 Chapter 6 Managing Device Security Management Security Settings 242 046 0000 bs0ne ee be eee es 355 Loca U Er 5 5 5 2 c5 c he teeta beeen cy hal Ses Seis E B dyaed deed 356 Enable Password Configuration 0 000 eee eee eee 358 Line Password Configuration 0 0000 e eee eee 358 RADIUS ies s2 desc etait riweke dee eed ebe ees sewer tees s 359 Configuring TAGACS 5s s1csa0giarcdyav deta eared ada 364 Authentication List Configuration 00 00 ee eee eae 366 LOGIN SESSIONS o 24 2 2 2050 2ngdtraorteaadooadibanda tas ddad 371 Configuring Management Access 00 c eee eee 372 PURE denies eaten Ac dt ee chge And dk dase ar a td dha ea 372 PUMP Sia 200 eee casos abated oc haces eae a mise adie eRe aE Aha 373 DO gai ewes aah deh edd tne de Bedwas E ede EE 377 Toh ekarri eare ua een erases Ack Sal din E NEA 380 Console Potts i2 2 se 0icsveseee bused iGeurehereeaexebaess 381 Denial of Service 2 x doc 55 c seeead aes dosent hed ead kse eketa 382 Access COntOl c52 21 0c0 dancer wea teaieneeeee nied owen eee 384 PomAUtheniCatlONis 2202 c00s nee bide tasemadiduaasegaced ies 386 ASIC dann a a actsided Ske ae WGiad Wada amp Morena aloe A ENA 387 MOVANCCO ra enue aida aaa hae eae ee eae nade 389 Tame COMO eersten aide RLAR PANT EER oe smn 397 MAC FNO o aered c2nas ce oe od aoedaeaae TERN NEN ERE 397 POM SCCUNLY E cans pam EEEE L ETO EEEE E TETT 399 Phivale Groups eris eaa
256. ard Delay parameter Hold Time secs Minimum time between transmission of Configuration BPDUs CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional Root CST Path Cost Path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root Configuring Switching Information 147 ProSafe M5300 Switch CST Port Configuration Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree CST and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch To display the Spanning Tree CST Port Configuration page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt CST Port Configuration CST Port Configuration CST Port Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Auto Auto Port Admin Port Path Calculated r Eiin Peniti Interface Paadi El Park Cost Port Path Hello Timer Port Path External il Cost Port Path Cost Cost ee 1 0 1 Enable 20000 Enabled 20000 Enabled 1 0 2 128 Enable Enabled 0 Enabled 1 0 3 128 Enable Enabled Enabled 1 0 4 128 Enable Enabled Enabled 1 0 5 128 Enable Enabled Enabled 1 0 6 128 Enable Enabled Enabled 1 0 7 128 Enable Enabled Enabled Port BPDU Root E Auto Edge ae np TCN Guard Port Mode Forwarding Forwarding Guard Guard State C C e O a Disable Disable Disabled Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Forwarding Disable Disable Disabled Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disabled Disable Disable Disabled Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disabled Disable Disab
257. ards the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination Metric Administrative cost of the path to the destination If no value is entered default is 1 The range is 0 255 Preference The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255 The user can specify the preference value sometimes called administrative distance of an individual static route Among routes to the same destination the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database By specifying the preference of a static route the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest learned routes Routing 191 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Route Configuration on page 190 e Route Preferences on page 192 Route Preferences Use this panel to configure the default preference for each protocol e g 60 for static routes 120 for RIP These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics
258. are displayed Field Description Authentication List Displays the authentication list which is used by 802 1X Managing Device Security 389 ProSafe M5300 Switch Port Authentication Use the Port Authentication page to enable and configure port access control on one or more ports To access the Port Authentication page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt Port Authentication Note Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the browser to view all the fields on the Port Authentication page Port Authentication Port Authentication 1 2 All Go Tt Guest i Control Mode Quiet Transmit Guest VLAN Unauthenticated Period Period VLAN ID VLAN ID oi oO 0 oO Cis 0 1 A A 1 0 2 Auto Disable 1 0 3 Auto Disable 1 0 4 Auto Disable E oO 0 oO fo Port C e Go Supplicant Server Maximum PAE Periodic Reauthentication User Privileges Timeout Timeout Requests Capabilities Reauthentication Period 2 Authenticator a CE guest 30 30 2 Authenticator Disable admin guest 2 2 30 30 Authenticator Disable admin guest 30 30 es Authenticator Disable To configure 802 1X settings for the port 1 Select the check box next to the port to configure You can also select multiple check boxes to apply the same settings to the select ports or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all ports 2 For
259. at of the TFTP SFTP SCP Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Server Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 Use Remote File Name to enter the name on the TFTP server of the file you want to download You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank Click APPLY to start to download the Host Key file Note that to download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Managing Device Security 379 ProSafe M5300 Switch Telnet To display the Telnet page click Security gt Access gt Telnet TELNET Authentication List Login Authentication List networkList e Enable Authentication List _enableNetList e Inbound Telnet Telnet Server Admin Mode Enable Allow new telnet sessions Disable Enable Session Timeout 5 Maximum Number of Sessions 5 Current Number of Sessions 0 Telnet Authentication List This page allows you to select the login and enable authentication list available The login list specifies the authentication method s you want used to validate switch or port access for the users associated with the list The enable list specifies the authentication method s you want used to validate privileged EXEC access for the users associated with the list These list can be created by Authentication L
260. atch Every Select true or false from the pull down menu True signifies that all packets will match the selected IP ACL and Rule and will be either permitted or denied In this case since all packets match the rule the option of configuring other match criteria will not be offered To configure specific match criteria for the rule remove the rule and re create it or re configure Match Every to False for the other match criteria to be visible Mirror Interface Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is copied in addition to being forwarded normally by the device This field cannot be set if a Redirect Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action Redirect Interface Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is forced bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device This field cannot be set if a Mirror Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action Source IP Address Requires a packet s source IP address to match the address listed here Type an IP Address in the appropriate field using dotted decimal notation The address you enter is compared to a packet s source IP Address Source IP Mask Specify the IP Mask in dotted decimal notation to be used with the Source IP Address value Rate Limit Conform Data Rate Specify the allowed transmission rate for
261. ation 802 1X Configuration Administrative Mode Disable Enable VLAN Assignment Mode Disable Enable EAPOL Flood Mode Disable Enable Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode Disable Monitor Mode Disable m Users admin x Login defaultList Le Authentication List dotixList To configure global 802 1X settings 1 Select the appropriate radio button in the Port Based Authentication State field to enable or disable 802 1X administrative mode on the switch e Enable Port based authentication is permitted on the switch Managing Device Security 387 ProSafe M5300 Switch Note If 802 1X is enabled authentication is performed by a RADIUS server This means the primary authentication method must be RADIUS To set the method go to Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List and select RADIUS as method 1 for defaultList For more information see Authentication List Configuration on page 6 366 e Disable The switch does not check for 802 1X authentication before allowing traffic on any ports even if the ports are configured to allow only authenticated users Default value 2 Use VLAN Assignment Mode to select one of options for VLAN Assignment mode enable and disable The default value is disable 3 Use Users to select the user name that will use the selected login list for 802 1x port security 4 Use Login to select the login to apply to the specified user All configured logins
262. ation MAC mask of 00 00 00 ff ff ff VLAN Specifies the VLAN ID to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid range of values is 0 to 4095 Either VLAN Range or VLAN can be configured e Logging When set to Enable logging is enabled for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is only supported for a Deny Action e Rate Limit Conform Data Rate Specify the allowed transmission rate for frames on the interface e Rate Limit Burst Size Specify the number of bytes allowed in a temporary traffic burst Burst Rate e Time Range Select the name of the time range that will impose a time limitation on the ACL rule If a time range with the specified name does not exist and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied immediately If a time range with specified name exists and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied when the time range with specified name becomes active The ACL rule is removed when the time range with specified name becomes inactive The Rule Status field indicates whether the
263. ation advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been deleted from tables associated with the remote entries because information timeliness interval had expired TLV Discards Specifies the number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port TLV Unknowns Specifies the number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which were not recognized by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port TLV MED Specifies the total number of LLDP MED TLVs received on the local ports TLV 802 1 Specifies the total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802 1 TLV 802 3 Specifies the total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802 3 LLDP Local Device Information To display this page click System gt LLDP gt Local Device Information A screen similar to the following displays LLDP Local Device Information LLDP Interface Selection Interface 1 0 1 Local Device Information Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Chassis ID 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Port ID Subtype Local Port ID 1 0 1 System Name System Description M5300 28G3 ProSafe 24 port Gigabit L3 with 10 Gigabit Stacking R 6 20 3 B1 6 8 9 Port Description System Capabilities Supported bridge router System Capabilities Enabled bridge Management Address 10 27 34 61 Management Address Type IPv4 Configuring System Information 97 ProSafe M5300 Switch To view
264. ation fields for the class Class Configuration Class Information Class Name Class Type DiffServ Class Configuration Match Every 5 Reference Class 5 Class Of Service 5 VLAN 5 Secondary Class of Service gt Secondary VLAN 5 Ethernet Type D Source MAC D Destination MAC 5 Protocol Type Source IP Source L4 Port gt Destination IP gt Destination L4 Port gt IP DSCP 5 Precedence Value IP ToS Class Summary 0 to 4095 0 to 4095 Appletalk i 600 to ffff hex Address Zz Mask Address E i Mask IcmP gt 0 to 255 Address Mask domain 0 to 65535 Address Mask domain 0 to 65535 afil 0 to 63 0 0 to 7 Bit Value Bit Mask 0 e All Class Name Displays the name for the configured DiffServ class Class Type Displays the DiffServ class type Options Only when a new class is created this field is a selector field After class creation this becomes a non configurable field displaying the configured class type Define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class e Match Every This adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class e Reference Class This lists the class es that can be assigned as reference class es to the cur
265. ault is RIP 2 e None no RIP control packets will be sent Receive Version Displays what RIP control packets the interface will accept from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e RIP 1 accept only RIP version 1 formatted packets e RIP 2 accept only RIP version 2 formatted packets The default is RIP 2 e Both accept packets in either format e None no RIP control packets will be accepted Admin Mode Enables RIP for an interface The default is Disable Link State Indicates whether the RIP interface is up or down Bad Packets Received Bad Routes Received The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process which were subsequently discarded for any reason The number of routes in valid RIP packets which were ignored for any reason e g unknown address family or invalid metric Updates Sent The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface This explicitly does NOT include full updates sent containing new information Routing 229 ProSafe M5300 Switch Route Redistribution Use the RIP Route Redistribution page to configure which routes are redistributed to other routers using RIP The allowable values for each fields are displayed next to the field If any invalid values are entered an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt RIP gt Advan
266. ave been received by Received this authenticator EAPOL Logoff Frames This displays the number of EAPOL logoff frames that have been received Received by this authenticator Monitoring the System 466 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description EAPOL Last Frame Version This displays the protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame EAPOL Last Frame Source EAPOL Invalid Frames Transmitted This displays the source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame This displays the number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized EAPOL Length Error Frames Received This displays the number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized EAP Response ID Frames Received This displays the number of EAP response identity frames that have been received by this authenticator EAP Response Frames Received This displays the number of valid EAP response frames other than resp id frames that have been received by this authenticator EAP Request ID Frames Transmitted This displays the number of EAP request identity frames that have been transmitted by this authenticator EAP Request Frames Transmitted Cable Test This displays the number of EAP request frames other than request identity frames that have been transmitted b
267. be sent Routing 227 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Use Receive Version to select what RIP control packets the interface will accept from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e _RIP 1 Accept only RIP version 1 formatted packets e RIP 2 Accept only RIP version 2 formatted packets The default is RIP 2 e Both Accept packets in either format e None No RIP control packets will be accepted 4 Use RIP admin mode to enable RIP for an interface The default is Disable 5 Use Authentication Type to select an authentication type other than none by clicking on the Configure Authentication button You will then see a new screen where you can select the authentication type from the pull down menu The choices are e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pull down menu on the second screen you will be returned to the first screen and no authentication protocols will be run e Simple If you select Simple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the RIP header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key e Encrypt If you select Encrypt you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID Encryption uses the MD5 Message Digest algorithm All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID 6 Use Authentication Ke
268. be used to identify the rule An IP ACL may have up to 12 rules Configure the desired rule attributes Use Action to specify what action should be taken if a packet matches the rule s criteria The choices are permit or deny Use Logging to enable logging for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is visible for a Deny Action Use Assign Queue ID to specify the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this IPv6 ACL rule Valid range of Queue IDs is 0 to 6 This field is visible for a Permit Action Use Mirror Interface to specify the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is copied in addition to being forwarded normally by the device This field cannot be set if a Redirect Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action Use Redirect Interface to specify the specific egress interface where the matching traffic stream is forced bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device This field cannot be set if a Mirror Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This fie
269. ber of source MAC address that can be learned on a port If a port reaches the configured limit any other addresses beyond that limit are not learned and the frames are discarded Frames with a source MAC address that has already been learned will be forwarded Port security can help secure the network by preventing unknown devices from forwarding packets into the network The Port Security folder contains links to the following features e Port Security Configuration on page 399 e Port Security Interface Configuration on page 400 e Dynamic MAC Address on page 402 e Static MAC Address on page 403 Port Security Configuration Use the Port Security feature to lock one or more ports on the system When a port is locked only packets with an allowable source MAC addresses can be forwarded All other packets are discarded To display the Port Security Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Port Administration Managing Device Security 399 ProSafe M5300 Switch Port Security Configuration Port Security Settings Port Security Mode Disable Enable Port Security Violations Port Last Violation MAC VLAN ID To configure the global port security mode 1 In the Port Security Mode field select the appropriate radio button to enable or disable port security on the switch 2 Click APPLY to update the switch with the change 3 Click CANCEL to abandon the change The Port S
270. ble 1 0 2 Enable Percent RateLimit Disable 1 0 3 Enable Percent RateLimit Disable 1 0 4 Enable Percent RateLimit Disable Enable Percent RateLimit Disable Multicast Storm Unicast Storm Recovery Level Type Recovery Level Recovery Mode Recovery Level Type Recovery Level Ce E ee Percent Disable Percent Percent Disable Percent Percent Disable Percent Percent Disable Percent Percent Disable Percent Field Description Broadcast Storm Recovery Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field When you specify Enable for Broadcast Storm Recovery and the broadcast traffic on the specified Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the broadcast traffic The factory default is disabled Broadcast Storm Recovery Level Specify the Broadcast Storm Recovery Level as a percentage of link Type speed or as packages per second Broadcast Storm Recovery Level Specify the threshold at which storm control activates The factory default is 5 percent of port speed for pps type Multicast Storm Recovery Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field When you specify Enable for Multicast Storm Recovery and the multicast traffic on the specified Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the multicast traffic The factory
271. ble Displays the number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch Class Rule table Displays the number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch Policy table Displays the number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch Policy Instance table Displays the number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch Policy Attributes table Displays the number of configured policy attributes attached to the policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch Service table Displays the number of configured services attached to the policies on specified interfaces out of the total allowed on the switch Configuring Quality of Service 342 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced e DiffServ Configuration on page 341 e Class Configuration on page 343 e Pv6 Class Configuration on page 346 e Policy Configuration on page 348 e Service Interface Configuration on page 351 e Service Statistics on page 352 Class Configuration Use the Class Configuration page to add a new DiffServ class name or to rename or delete an existing class The page also allows you to define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class As packets are received these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets You can have multiple match criteria in a class The logic is a Boolean logical and for this criteria After creating a
272. ble Not In Service v2 125 10000 IE 1 0 3 Disable Not In Service v2 125 10000 1 0 4 Disable Not In Service v2 125 10000 1 0 5 Disable Not In Service v2 125 10000 1 0 6 Disable Not In Service v2 125 10000 1 0 7 Disable Not In Service v2 125 10000 cou Startup Query Interval Startup Query Count Last Member Query Interval Last Member Query Count 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 To configure per interface MLD settings Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured or displayed 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of MLD on the selected interface The default value is disable 3 Use Version to enter the version to be configured on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 2 The default value is 2 4 Use Query Interval to enter the frequency in seconds at which MLD host query packets are to be transmitted on this interface Valid values are from 1 to 1800 The default value is 125 5 Use Query Max Response Time to enter the maximum query response time to be advertised in MLDv2 queries on this interface in milliseconds Valid values are from 0 to 65535 The default value is 10000 milliseconds 6 Use Robustness to specify the robustness parameter for the selected interface This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If a subnet is expected to be lossy the robustness variable may be increased MLD is robust to robu
273. blocks you can use to construct a differentiated service network Use these same blocks in different ways to build other types of QoS architectures There are 3 key QoS building blocks needed to configure DiffServ e Class e Policy e Service i e the assignment of a policy to a directional interface Class You can classify incoming packets at layers 2 3 and 4 by inspecting the following information for a packet e Source destination MAC address e EtherType e Class of Service 802 1p priority value first only VLAN tag e VLAN ID range first only VLAN tag e Secondary 802 1p priority value second inner VLAN tag e Secondary VLAN ID range second inner VLAN tag Configuration Examples 514 ProSafe M5300 Switch e IP Service Type octet also known as ToS bits Precedence value DSCP value e Layer 4 protocol TCP UDP etc e Layer 4 source destination ports e Source destination IP address From a DiffServ point of view there are two types of classes e DiffServ traffic classes e DiffServ service levels forwarding classes DiffServ Traffic Classes With DiffServ you define which traffic classes to track on an ingress interface You can define simple BA classifiers DSCP and a wide variety of multi field MF classifiers e Layer 2 Layers 3 4 IP only e Protocol based e Address based You can combine these classifiers with logical AND or OR operations to build complex MF classifiers by specifying a clas
274. bor is reachable by this switch e stale 2 Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion e delay 3 No information has been received from neighbor during delay period e probe 4 Switch is attempting to probe for this neighbor e unknown 6 Unknown status Last Updated The last sysUpTime that this neighbor has been updated Time ProSafe software supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server ProSafe software operates only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems Time sources are established by Stratums Stratums define the accuracy of the reference clock The higher the stratum where zero is the highest the more accurate the clock The device receives time from stratum 1 and above since it is itself a stratum 2 device The following is an example of stratums e Stratum 0 A real time clock is used as the time source for example a GPS system e Stratum 1 A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used Stratum 1 time servers provide primary network time standards e Stratum 2 The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path For example a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link via NTP from a Stratum 1 server Information received from SNTP serve
275. by the operation of the Hello Protocol This is the most advanced state short of beginning adjacency establishment The Backup Designated Router is selected from the set of neighbors in state 2 Way or greater e Exchange Start This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers The goal of this step is to decide which router is the master and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number Neighbor conversations in this state or greater are called adjacencies e Exchange In this state the router is describing its entire link state database by sending Database Description packets to the neighbor In this state Link State Request Packets may also be sent asking for the neighbor s more recent LSAs All adjacencies in Exchange state or greater are used by the flooding procedure These adjacencies are fully capable of transmitting and receiving all types of OSPF routing protocol packets e Loading In this state Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered but not yet received in the Exchange state Full In this state the neighboring routers are fully adjacent These adjacencies will now appear in router LSAs and network LSAs Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred Permanence This variable displays the status of the entry dynamic and permanent refer to how the neighbor be
276. c e Weighted Weighted round robin associates a weight to each queue This is the default e Strict Services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first 3 Queue Management Type displays the Queue depth management technique used for queues on this interface This is only used if device supports independent settings per queue Queue Management Type can only be taildrop All packets on a queue are safe until congestion occurs At this point any additional packets queued are dropped 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 If you make changes to the page click APPLY to apply the changes to the system CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration Use the CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration page to configure thresholds for packet loss during times of queue congestion Each port can have its own drop precedence configuration or all ports can be globally configured To display the Interface Queue Configuration page click the QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration CoS Interface Queue Drop Precedence Configuration Interface 3 0 1 e Queue ID 0 Drop Precedence Level WRED Minimum Threshold WRED Maximum Threshold WRED Drop Probability Scale CoS Interface Queue Drop Precedence Status ueue Drop Precedence Level WRED Minimum Threshold WRED Maximum Th
277. c on page 190 Advanced on page 192 189 ProSafe M5300 Switch Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages Route Configuration on page 190 Route Configuration To display the Route Configuration page click Routing gt Routing Table gt Basic gt Route Configuration Route Configuration Configure Routes Route Network Next Hop IP Fae aS eee os Learned Routes 2 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 Local Connected loopbackO 22 2 2 3 3 3 0 255 255 255 0 loopback1 ILII Next Network Route Next Hop S D Protocol Type Sistecface Hop IP Preference bbs Address 0 1 0 1 Route Configuration 1 Use the Route Type field to specify default or static If creating a default route all that needs to be specified is the next hop IP address otherwise each field needs to be specified Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network This is also referred to as the subnet network mask Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path towards the destination The next router will always be one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255 The user can specify the preference value sometimes called administrat
278. came known Hellos Suppressed This indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor Retransmission Queue An integer representing the current length of the retransmission queue of the Length specified neighbor router Id of the specified interface Up Time Neighbor uptime how long since the adjacency last reached the Full state Dead Time The amount of time in seconds to wait before the router assumes the neighbor is unreachable Click REFRESH to show the latest DHCP bindings information Click CLEAR to clear all the neighbors in the table Routing 250 ProSafe M5300 Switch Link State Database Use the OSPF Link State Database page to display OSPF link state information To display the Link State Database page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Link State Database Link State Database Link State Database Router Area mao External LSDB Table Rout LSA rower TAL o age Sequence checksum AS Opaque LSDB Table Router LSA pme Misa dae lewee lame Field Description Router ID The 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS The Router ID is set on the IP Configuration page If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Rout
279. can access the following pages MLD Snooping Configuration on page 167 MLD Snooping Interface Configuration on page 168 MLD VLAN Configuration on page 169 Multicast Router Configuration on page 170 Multicast Router VLAN Configuration on page 170 MLD Snooping Querier Configuration on page 171 MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration on page 172 MLD Snooping Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for MLD Snooping which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access the MLD Snooping Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Configuration MLD Snooping Configuration MLD Snooping Configuration MLD Snooping Admin Mode Disable Enable Multicast Control Frame Count 0 Interfaces Enabled for MLD Snooping VLAN IDs Enabled for MLD Snooping To configure global MLD snooping settings 1 Use MLD Snooping Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Field Definition Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU Interfa
280. carded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Packets Transmitted Without Errors Unicast Packets Transmitted Multicast Packets Transmitted Broadcast Packets Transmitted Transmit Packets Discarded The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address including those that were discarded or not sent The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space Most Address Entries Ever Used Address Entries in Use The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries that have been learned
281. carding for instance 2 The port states have changed since IEEE 802 1D specification To support multiple spanning trees a MSTP bridge has to be configured with an unambiguous assignment of VLAN IDs VIDs to spanning trees This is achieved by 1 Ensuring that the allocation of VIDs to FIDs is unambiguous 2 Ensuring that each FID supported by the Bridge is allocated to exactly one Spanning Tree Instance The combination of VID to FID and then FID to MSTI allocation defines a mapping of VIDs to spanning tree instances represented by the MST Configuration Table With this allocation we ensure that every VLAN is assigned to one and only one MSTI The CIST is also an instance of spanning tree with a MSTID of 0 An instance may occur that has no VIDs allocated to it but every VLAN must be allocated to one of the other instances of spanning tree The portion of the active topology of the network that connects any two bridges in the same MST Region traverses only MST bridges and LANs in that region and never Bridges of any kind outside the Region in other words connectivity within the region is independent of external connectivity Configuration Examples 522 ProSafe M5300 Switch MSTP Example Configuration This example shows how to create an MSTP instance from the GSM7352Sv1 or GSM7352Sv2 switch The example network has three different ProSafe that serve different locations in the network In this example ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 are
282. cast address Last Reporter The IPv6 address of the source of the last membership report received for the IPv6 Multicast group address on the MLD Proxy interface Up Time The time elapsed since this entry was created Expiry Time This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which is a member of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out State The state of the host entry A Host can be in one of the state Non member state does not belong to the group on the interface Delaying member state host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer running The report timer is used to send out the reports Idle member state host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer running Filter Mode The group filter mode Include Exclude None for the specified group on the MLD Proxy interface Number of Sources The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD proxy membership information Routing 328 ProSafe M5300 Switch Static Routes Configuration To display the Static Routes Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt Static Routes Configuration Static Routes Configuration Static Routes Configuration To configure static IPv6 multicast routes 1 Use Source IP to enter the IP Address that ident
283. ccounts and to add and delete accounts other than admin up to the maximum of six Only a user with Read Write privileges may alter data on this screen and only one account may be created with Read Write privileges To display the User Management page click Security gt Management Security gt Local User gt User Management User Management Manage Users P d Confirm Access Lockout TASR Edit Password Password Expiration Password Mode Status a Disable ee oe C WRITE guest Disable kktkkkk sick aes ae READ ONLY To manage users that have access to the switch management interface 1 Use User Name to enter the name you want to give to the new account You can only enter data in this field when you are creating a new account User names are up to eight characters in length and are not case sensitive Valid characters include all the alphanumeric characters as well as the dash and underscore _ characters User name default is not valid User names once created cannot be changed modified 2 Set the Edit Password field to Enable only when you want to change the password The default value is Disable 3 Use Password to enter the optional new or changed password for the account It will not display as it is typed only asterisks will show Passwords are up to eight alpha numeric characters in length and are case sensitive 4 Use Confirm Password to enter the password aga
284. ce OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks Interfaces are not passive by default Use Interface Type to set the interface type to broadcast mode or point to point mode The default interface type is broadcast Use Metric Cost to enter the value on this interface for the cost TOS type of service The range for the metric cost is between 1 and 65 535 Metric Cost is only configurable if OSPFv3 is initialized on the interface Routing 267 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the interface LSA Ack Interval The number of seconds between LSA Acknowledgment packet transmissions which must be less than the Retransmit Interval State The current state of the selected router interface One of Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface Loopback In this state the router s interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic However it may still be desirable to gain information on the quality of this interface either through sending ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test For
285. ce i e there is a system wide table that has MAC address to VLAN ID mappings When untagged or priority tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the MAC to VLAN table the source MAC address of the packet is looked up If an entry is found the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet If the packet is already priority tagged it will maintain this value otherwise the priority will be set to zero The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN table if the VLAN is valid ingress processing on the packet continues otherwise the packet is dropped This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC address mapping to a VLAN that has not been created on the system To display the MAC Based VLAN page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt MAC Based VLAN Mac Based VLAN Group Configuration MAC Based VLAN Configuration m MAC Address VLAN ID Oieee M D4 B2 9D 3C 90 43 To configure a MAC based VLAN group 1 Use the MAC Address field to specify a valid MAC Address which is to be bound to a VLAN ID 0 2 Use VLAN ID to specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093 3 Click ADD to add an entry of MAC Address to VLAN mapping Click DELETE to delete and entry of MAC Address to VLAN mapping Configuring Switching Information 126 ProSafe M5300 Switch Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration You can use a protocol based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets By default if yo
286. ce of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement s LS type Routing 273 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Age The time since the link state advertisement was first originated in seconds Sequence The sequence number field is a signed 32 bit integer It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements The larger the sequence number the more recent the advertisement Checksum The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded or while it is being held in a router s memory This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the LS age field Options The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement The options are e Q This enables support for QoS Traffic Engineering e E This describes the way AS external LSAs are flooded e MC This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications e O This describes whether Opaque LSAs are supported e V This describes whether OSPF extensions for VPN COS are supported Router Options The router specific options Click REFRESH to show the latest OSPF v3 Link State information Routing 274
287. ced gt Route Redistribution Route Redistribution Configuration Source Redistribute Mode Metric Distribute List Summary Redistribute Mode Metric Connected Disable Static Disable OSPF Disable nable isable isable isable isable RIP Route Redistribution Configuration This screen can be used to configure the RIP Route Redistribution parameters The allowable values for each fields are displayed next to the field If any invalid values are entered an alert message will be displayed with the list of all the valid values 1 The Source select box is a dynamic selector and is populated by only those Source Routes that have already been configured for redistribute by RIP Use Source to configure another Source Route from among the Available Source Routes The valid values are e Static e Connected e OSPF 2 Use Redistribute Mode to enable or disable RIP redistribute mode The default value is disable 3 Use Metric to specify the Metric of redistributed routes for the given Source Route Use Distribute List to set the Access List that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol Only permitted routes are redistributed If this command refers to a non existent access list all routes are permitted The valid values for Access List IDs are 1 to 199 When used for route filtering the only fields in an access list that get used are e Source IP Address and netmask e Destination IP A
288. ceived packet the copied packet is VLAN tagged or untagged as it was received on the source port If the mirror is copying a transmitted packet the copied packet is VLAN tagged or untagged as it is being transmitted on the source port Monitoring the System 477 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use the Multiple Port Mirroring page to define port mirroring sessions To access the Multiple Port Mirroring page click Monitoring gt Mirroring gt Port Mirroring Multiple Port Mirroring Status Table 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Destination Session Mirroring S Port Directi mA 1 C__t__ 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 1 0 6 Disable 1 0 7 Disable To configure Port Mirroring 1 Select the check box next to each port to configure as a source port 2 Use Source Port to specify the configured port s as mirrored port s Traffic of the configured port s is sent to the probe port 3 Inthe Destination Port field specify the port to which port traffic is be copied Use the unit slot port format to specify the port You can configure only one destination port on the system Acts as a probe port and will receive all the traffic from configured mirrored port s Default value is blank 4 From the Session Mode menu select the mode for port mirroring on the selected port e Enable Multiple Port Mirroring is active on the selected port e Disable Port mirroring is not active o
289. ces Enabled for MLD Snooping A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for MLD Snooping Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU The number of data frames forwarded by the CPU VLAN Ids Enabled For MLD Snooping Displays VLAN Ids enabled for MLD snooping Configuring Switching Information 167 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Snooping Interface Configuration To access the MLD Snooping Interface Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Interface Configuration MLD Snooping Interface Configuration MLD Snooping Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface k Group Present Admin 3 Max Response pea Interface Membership Expiration Mode Time secs E Interval secs Time secs SS E 1 0 1 Disable 260 1 0 2 Disable 260 10 1 0 3 Disable 260 10 1 0 4 Disable 260 10 1 0 5 Disable 260 10 1 0 6 Disable 260 10 1 0 7 Disable 260 10 1 0 8 Disable 260 10 1 0 9 Disable 260 10 1 0 10 Disable 260 10 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable P ISI o IGI o ISi o ISi o ia o 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for MLD Snooping for the switch The default is disable 3 Use Group Membership Interval secs to specify the
290. ch Field Description Protocol State The operational state of the multicast forwarding module Table Maximum Entry Count The maximum number of entries in the IP Multicast routing table Protocol The multicast routing protocol presently activated on the router if any Table Entry Count The number of multicast route entries currently present in the Multicast route table Routing 288 ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast Interface Configuration To display the Multicast Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt Interface Configuration Interface Configuration Configuration 1 2 VLANS All Go To Interface so 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 en a To configure the TTL threshold for one or more interfaces 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use TTL Threshold to enter the TTL threshold below which a multicast data packet will not be forwarded from the selected interface You should enter a number between 0 and 255 If you enter 0 all multicast packets for the selected interface will be forwarded You must configure at least one router interface before you will see this field 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the change
291. ch To display the Spanning Tree Configuration Status page click Switching gt STP gt Basic gt STP Configuration Configuring Switching Information 143 ProSafe M5300 Switch STP Configuration STP Configuration Spanning Tree Admin Mode Disable Enable Force Protocol Version IEEE 802 1d IEEE 802 1w IEEE 802 1s Configuration Name 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F0 Configuration Revision Level o Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable Enable BPDU Guard Disable Enable BPDU Filter Disable Enable Configuration Digest Key 0xac36177f50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62 Configuration Format Selector 0 STP Status 2 2 100 To configure the global STP settings 1 Use Spanning Tree Admin Mode to specify whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch Value is enabled or disabled 2 Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch The options are IEEE 802 1d IEEE 802 1w and IEEE 802 1s 3 Use Configuration Name to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used It may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters 4 Use Configuration Revision Level to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is 0 5 Use Forward BPDU while STP Disabled to specify whether spanning tree BPDUs should be forwarded or not while spanning tree is disabled on the switch
292. change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID 2 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPF will be activated for the switch The default value is disable You must configure a Router ID before OSPF can become operational see step 1 or by issuing the CLI command Config router router id 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Routing 232 ProSafe M5300 Switch Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages OSPF Configuration Advanced on page 234 Common Area Configuration on page 237 Stub Area Configuration on page 238 NSSA Area Configuration on page 239 Area Range Configuration on page 241 Interface Configuration on page 242 OSPF Interface Statistics on page 246 OSPF Neighbor Table on page 249 Link State Database on page 251 Virtual Link Configuration on page 252 Route Redistribution on page 255 NSF OSPF Summary on page 256 Routing 233 ProSafe M5300 Switch OSPF Configuration Advanced Use the OSPF Configuration page to enable OSPF on a router and to configure the related OSPF settings To display the OSPF Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt OSPF Configuration OSPF Configuration Default Route Advertise Configuration Default Information Originate Disable Enable Always True False Metric o Metric Type External Typ
293. changes take effect immediately Excluded Address Configuration To configure addresses that cannot be assigned to DHCP clients 1 Use the IP Range From field to specify the low address if you want to exclude a range of addresses Specify the address to be excluded in case you want to exclude a single address Use the IP Range To field to specify the high address if you want to exclude a range of addresses To exclude a single address enter the same IP address as specified in IP range from or leave as 0 0 0 0 Click ADD to add the exclude addresses configured on the screen to the switch Click DELETE to delete the exclude address from the switch Configuring System Information 46 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Pool Configuration To display the DHCP Pool Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool Configuration A screen similar to the following displays DHCP Pool Configuration DHCP Pool Configuration Pool Name pooli e Type of Binding L Dynamic w Network Address 192 168 1 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Prefix Length Client Name Hardware Address Hardware Address Type Ethernet E Client ID Host Number Host Mask Host Prefix Length Lease Time Infinite x Days 0 Hours 0 Minutes 0 Next Server Address 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Bootfile NetBIOS Node Type b node Broadcast
294. cifies that the PD connected to the PSE port had tried to provide more power than it is permissible by the hardware e Power Denied Specifies that the PSE port has been denied power because of shortage of power or due to administrative action Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the system Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click RESET to forcibly reset the selected port s Configuring System Information 86 ProSafe M5300 Switch SNMP From SNMP link under the System tab you can configure SNMP settings for SNMP V1 V2 and SNMPVv3 From the SNMP link you can access the following pages e SNMPV1 V2 on page 87 e SNMP V3 User Configuration on page 92 SNMPV1 V2 The pages under the SNMPV1 V2 menu allow you to configure SNMP community information traps and trap flags From the SNMP V1 V2 link you can access the following pages e Community Configuration on page 87 e Trap Configuration on page 89 e Trap Flags on page 90 e Supported MIBs on page 91 Community Configuration By default two SNMP Communities exist e Private with Read Write privileges and status set to Enable e Public with Read Only privileges and status set to Enable These are well known communities Use this page to change the defaults or to add other communities Only the communities that you define using this page will have access to the switch using
295. configure global DVMRP settings 1 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of DVMRP to active or inactive The default is disable Field Description Version The current value of the DVMRP version string Total Number of Routes The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table Reachable Routes The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table that have a non infinite metric DVMRP Interface Configuration To display the DVMRP Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt Interface Configuration DVMRP Interface Configuration DVMRP Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS ee Go To Interface SO Interface Parameters Parameters Interface Statistics Tikes face Interface Protocol Local Interface Generation outa area Sent Mode State Address Metric ID Routes ne eee Routes Pe 1 CJ a In SSS 1 0 2 Disable Not In Service 1 0 3 Disable Not In Service 1 0 4 Disable Not In Service 1 0 5 Disable Not In Service 192 168 3 10 1 0 6 Disable Not In Service 1 0 7 Disable Not In Service 1 0 8 Disable Not In Service 1 0 9 Disable Not In Service es TH o Ee o Ie o Fe o Io o He o ie o ie o Hh o Routing 291 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure per interface DVMRP settings 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Interface Mode to set the administrative mode of the selected DVM
296. connected to host stations so those links are not subject to network loops Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 are connected across switches 1 2 and 3 Ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 Connected to Hosts S Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 Connected to Switch 2 and 3 Ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 Connected to Hosts Ports 1 0 6 1 0 8 1 0 1 1 0 5 Switch 1 Connected to Switch 1 and 3 Root Bridge Connected to Switch 2 and Ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 Connected to Hosts Perform the following procedures on each switch to configure MSTP 1 Use the VLAN Configuration screen to create VLANs 300 and 500 see VLAN Configuration on page 120 2 Use the VLAN Membership screen to include ports 1 0 1 1 0 8 as tagged T or untagged U members of VLAN 300 and VLAN 500 see VLAN Configuration on page 120 3 From the STP Configuration screen enable the Spanning Tree State option see STP Configuration on page 143 Use the default values for the rest of the STP configuration settings By default the STP Operation Mode is MSTP and the Configuration Name is the switch MAC address 4 From the CST Configuration screen set the Bridge Priority value for each of the three switches to force Switch 1 to be the root bridge e Switch 1 4096 e Switch 2 12288 e Switch 3 20480 Note Bridge priority values are multiples of 4096 Configuration Examples 523 ProSafe M5300 Switch If you do not specify a root bridge and all switches have the same Bridge Priority value the sw
297. creen varies depending on the current step in the rule configuration process Note There is an implicit deny all rule at the end of an ACL list This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped To display the IP extended Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP Extended Rules Extended ACL Rules IP Rules ACL ID NAME Extended ACL Rule Table S a Adian komma Assign Mirror Redirect Match Protocol ae capes Source IP gg ng Queue ID Interface Interface Every Type 9 Bika Mask Deny Disable 1 0 5 False 4 IP 192 168 2 0 0 255 255 255 Ss tinati es ere Destination Destination Rate Limit Conform Rate Limit Service Type IP Mask L4 Port Data Rate Burst Size Fiat To configure rules for an IP ACL 1 To add an IP ACL rule select the ACL ID to add the rule to select the check box in the Extended ACL Rule table and click ADD The page displays the extended ACL Rule Configuration fields as the following figure shows Managing Device Security 445 ProSafe M5300 Switch Extended ACL Rule Configuration Extended ACL Rule Configuration 100 199 ACL ID Name 101 Rule ID 0 Action Permit Egress Queue Deny Logging Disable Enable Mirror Interface X Redirect Interface m Match Every False v Protocol Type m TCP
298. ct from a list of all of available tunnel IDs 2 Use Mode to select the Tunnel mode The supported modes are 6 in 4 configured and 6 to 4 3 Use IPv6 Mode to enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address This option is only configurable prior to specifying an explicit IPv6 address 4 Use IPv6 Unreachables to specify the Mode of Sending ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables on this interface If Disabled then this interface will not send ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables By default IPv6 Destination Unreachables mode is enable 5 Use IPv6 Address to select a list of configured IPv6 addresses for the selected interface Address must be entered in the format prefix length 6 Use EUI64 to specify the 64 bit extended unique identifier EUI 64 For 6to4 tunnels configure the ipv6 address with first 48 bits in the format 2002 tunnel source ipv4 address 48 7 Use Source Address to specify the desired source address The source address for this tunnel must be entered in dotted decimal notation 8 Use Source Interface to specify the source interface for this tunnel The address associated with the selected interface will be used as the source address Routing 216 ProSafe M5300 Switch 9 Use Destination Address to specify the destination address for this tunnel in dotted decimal notation 10 Click ADD to allow the user to configure a new tunnel 11 Click DELETE to delete the corresponding tunnel 12 Click CANCEL to discard
299. cted Use Preference to specify the Route Preference of the Configured Route Click ADD to configure a new route Click DELETE to delete the corresponding route Routing 214 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Route Preferences Use this panel to configure the default preference for each protocol These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol independent of any other protocol The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value When there are multiple routes to a destination the preference values are used to determine the preferred route If there is still a tie the route with the best route metric will be chosen To avoid problems with mismatched metrics you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols To display the IPv6 Route Preferences page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Route Preferences IPv6 Route Preferences IPv6 Route Preferences Local Static OSPFv3 Intra OSPFv3 Inter OSPFv3 External To configure IPv6 Route Preferences 1 Use Static to specify the Static Route preference value for the router The default value is 1 The range is 1 to 255 2 Use OSPFv3 Intra to specify the OSPF v3 intra route preference value in the router The default value is 110 The range is 1 to 255
300. cular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds The default is 260 seconds 4 Use Max Response Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in seconds The default is 10 seconds The configured value must be less than the Group Membership Interval 5 Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds The default is 0 seconds A value of zero indicates an infinite time out i e no expiration 6 Use Fast Leave Admin mode to select the Fast Leave mode for the a particular interface from the pull down menu The default is disable 7 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 8 If you make any configuration changes click APPLY to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Configuring Switching Information 160 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP VLAN Configuration Use the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page to configure IGMP snooping settings f
301. d Default O 1 0 13 Disable Not Blocked Default E 1 0 14 Disable Not Blocked Default Click DELETE to remove the currently selected interface Managing Device Security 430 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Interface The interface for which you want to view information CP ID The ID of captive portal instance Operational Status Shows whether the portal is active on the specified interface Block Status Indicates whether the captive portal is temporarily blocked for authentications Authenticated users Displays the number of authenticated users using the captive portal instance on this interface Captive Portal Group Configuration When you click Add from the CP Group Configuration page the screen refreshes and you can add a new group to the User Group database To display the Captive Portal Group Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Group Configuration CP Group Configuration CP Group Configuration TCO ea ee Default 1 Use the Group ID pull down menu to select the Group ID for which to create or update a group 2 Use Group Name to enter the name of the user group Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Click ADD to add a new group 4 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected group Managing Device Security 431 ProSafe M5300 Switch Captive Portal User Configuration When you click Add from the
302. d MLD Packets Sent Queries Received Queries Sent Reports Received Reports Sent Leaves Received O o oO o0c0 hUCrm8WUlcOlUO Leaves Sent Field Description Valid MLD Packets Received The number of valid MLD packets received by the router Valid MLD Packets Sent The number of valid MLD packets sent by the router Queries Received The number of valid MLD queries received by the router Queries Sent The number of valid MLD queries sent by the router Reports Received The number of valid MLD reports received by the router Reports Sent The number of valid MLD reports sent by the router Leaves Received The number of valid MLD leaves received by the router Leaves Sent The number of valid MLD leaves sent by the router Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD traffic Click CLEAR to clear all the MLD traffic Routing 325 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Proxy Interface Configuration To display the MLD Proxy Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Proxy Interface Configuration MLD Proxy Interface Configuration MLD Proxy Interface Configuration Interface 1 0 1 x Admin Mode Disable x Unsolicited Report Interval 1 IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length Operational Mode Disable Querier Address on Proxy Interface Number of Groups Version Version 1 Querier Timeout Proxy Start Frequency To configure MLD proxy in
303. d Restart Restart Age If a graceful restart is in progress this field shows the number of seconds until the grace period expires Restart Exit Reason Displays how the master unit on the stack last started up The possible values are e Not Attempted Graceful restart has not been attempted e In Progress Restart is in progress e Completed The previous graceful restart completed successfully e Timed Out The previous graceful restart timed out e Topology Changed The previous graceful restart terminated prematurely because of a topology change Routing 278 ProSafe M5300 Switch Router Discovery The Router Discovery protocol is used by hosts to identify operational routers on the subnet Router Discovery messages are of two types Router Advertisements and Router Solicitations The protocol mandates that every router periodically advertise the IP Addresses it is associated with Hosts listen for these advertisements and discover the IP Addresses of neighboring routers From the Router Discovery tab you can access the following pages e Router Discovery Configuration on page 279 Router Discovery Configuration Use the Router Discovery Configuration page to enter or change Router Discovery parameters To display the Router Discovery Configuration page click Routing gt Router Discovery gt Router Discovery Configuration Router Discovery Router Discovery Configuration 1 2 V
304. d determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial asset number LLDP From the LLDP link you can access the following pages e LLDP Global Configuration on page 94 e LLDP Interface Configuration on page 95 e LLDP Statistics on page 96 e LLDP Local Device Information on page 97 e LLDP Remote Device Information on page 99 e LLDP Remote Device Inventory on page 100 Configuring System Information 93 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP Global Configuration Use the LLDP Global Configuration page to specify LLDP parameters that are applied to the switch To display this page click System gt LLDP gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays LLDP Global Configuration Global Configuration Transmit Interval Transmit Hold Multiplier Re Initialization Delay Notification Interval To configure global LLDP settings 1 Use Transmit Interval to specify the interval in seconds to transmit LLDP frames The range is from 5 to 32768 secs Default value is 30 seconds 2 Use Transmit Hold Multiplier to specify the multiplier on Transmit Interval to assign TTL The range is from 2 to 10 secs Default value is 4 3 Use Re Initialization Delay to specify the delay before re initialization The range is from 1 to 10 secs Default value is 2 seconds 4 Use Notification Interval to specify the interval in seconds for transmission of notifications The range is f
305. d to as the subnet network mask and defines the portion of the interface s IP address that is used to identify the attached network Use Routing Mode to enable or disable routing for an interface The default value is enable Use Administrative Mode to enable disable the Administrative Mode of the interface The default value is enable This mode is not supported for Logical VLAN Interfaces Use Forward Net Directed Broadcasts to select how network directed broadcast packets should be handled If you select enable from the pull down menu network directed broadcasts will be forwarded If you select disable they will be dropped The default value is disable Use Encapsulation Type to select the link layer encapsulation type for packets transmitted from the specified interface from the pull down menu The possible values are Ethernet and SNAP The default is Ethernet Use Proxy Arp to disable or enable proxy Arp for the specified interface from the pull down menu Use Local Proxy Arp to disable or enable Local Proxy ARP for the specified interface from the pull down menu Use Bandwidth to specify the configured bandwidth on this interface This parameter communicates the speed of the interface to higher level protocols OSPF uses bandwidth to compute link cost Valid range is 1 to 10000000 Use ICMP Destination Unreachables to specify the Mode of Sending ICMP Destination Unreachables on this interface If this is Disabled then this interface
306. d to the network This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by all connected nodes In the case of multicast packets however this approach could lead to less efficient use of network bandwidth particularly when the packet is intended for only a small number of nodes Packets will be flooded into network segments where no node has any interest in receiving the packet While nodes will rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets addressed to unrequested group addresses they are unable to transmit new packets onto the shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded The problem of wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared for example in full duplex links Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem The switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the network to determine which segments should receive packets directed to the group address From the IGMP Snooping link you can access the following pages e IGMP Snooping Configuration on page 159 e IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration on page 160 e IGMP VLAN Configuration on page 161 e Multicast Router Configuration on page 162 e Multicast Router VLAN Configuration on page 163 e IGMP Snooping Querier on page 163 e IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration on page 164 e IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration on page
307. d with one or more interfaces and VLANs Unlike dynamic MAC addresses in the MAC address table static MAC addresses do not age out To display the Static MAC Address page click Switching gt Address Table gt Advanced gt Static MAC Address Static MAC Address Configuration Port List Interface 1 0 1 wl Static MAC Address Table Statiemacadaress viano O O O OOOO O D4 BE D9 3A 90 53 1 Use Interface to select the physical interface LAGs for which you want to configure a MAC address or display data 2 Use the Static MAC Address to input the MAC address to be added 3 Select the VLAN ID associated with the MAC address 4 Click ADD to add a new static MAC address to the switch 5 To delete a static MAC address from the table select the check box associated with the entry to remove and click DELETE 6 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring Switching Information 180 ProSafe M5300 Switch Ports The pages on the Ports tab allow you to view and monitor the physical port information for the ports available on the switch From the Ports link you can access the following pages e Port Configuration on page 181 e Port Description on page 182 Port Configuration Use the Port Configuration page to configure the physical interfaces on the switch To access the Port Configuration page click Switchi
308. ddress and netmask e Action permit or deny All other fields source and destination port precedence ToS etc are ignored 5 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 6 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Routing 230 ProSafe M5300 Switch The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route The source IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route Note that a 1 in the mask indicates a don t care in the corresponding address bit When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask an extended access list the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the destination of the route The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask indicating which bits in the route s destination mask are significant for the filtering operation RIP Route Redistribution Summary This screen displays the RIP Route Redistribution Configurations Field Description Source The Source Route to be Redistributed by RIP Metric The Metric of redistributed routes for the given Source Route Displays Unconfigured when not configured Match List of Routes redistributed when OSPF is selected as Source The list may include one or more of e Internal Sets Internal OSPF Routes to be redistributed e External Type 1 Set
309. default is disabled Multicast Storm Recovery Level Specify the Multicast Storm Recovery Level as a percentage of link Type speed or as packages per second Managing Device Security 413 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Multicast Storm Recovery Level Specify the threshold at which storm control activates The factory default is 5 percent of port speed for pps type Unicast Storm Recovery Mode Enable or disable this option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field When you specify Enable for Unicast Storm Recovery and the unicast traffic on the specified Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the unicast traffic The factory default is disabled Unicast Storm Recovery Level Type Specify the Unicast Storm Recovery Level as a percentage of link speed or as packages per second Unicast Storm Recovery Level Specify the threshold at which storm control activates The factory default is 5 percent of port speed for pps type Control To display the page click the Security gt Control tab The Control folder contains links to the following features e DHCP Snooping on page 414 e IP Source Guard on page 419 e Dynamic ARP Inspection on page 421 DHCP Snooping Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Snooping is a security feature that monitors DHCP messages between a DHCP client and DHCP server to accomplish the follo
310. delete the currently selected Community Name Configuring System Information 88 ProSafe M5300 Switch Trap Configuration This page displays an entry for every active Trap Receiver To access this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Trap Configuration Trap Configuration Trap Configuration I Name To configure SNMPv1 v2 traps 1 To add a host that will receive SNMP traps enter trap configuration information in the available fields described below and then click ADD a Community Name Enter the community string for the SNMP trap packet to be sent to the trap manager This may be up to 16 characters and is case sensitive b Version Select the trap version to be used by the receiver from the pull down menu e SNMP v1 Uses SNMP v1 to send traps to the receiver e SNMP v2 Uses SNMP v2 to send traps to the receiver c Protocol Select the protocol to be used by the receiver from the pull down menu Select the IPv4 if the receiver s address is IPv4 address or IPv 6 if the receiver s address is IPv6 d Address Enter the IPv4 address in x x x x format or IPv6 address in XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Or a hostname starting with an alphabet to receive SNMP traps from this device Length of address can not exceed 158 characters e Status Select the receiver s status from the pull down menu e Enable Send traps to the receiver e Disable Do not send traps to the receiver
311. dicates the interface on which data is displayed Group IP Indicates the address of the MLD members Last Reporter The IP Address of the source of the last membership report received for this multicast group address on the interface Version1 Host Timer Up Time Time elapsed in seconds since the multicast group has been known Expiry Time Time left in seconds before the entry is removed from the MLD membership table of this interface Filter Mode The filter mode of the multicast group on this interface The values it can take are INCLUDE and EXCLUDE The time remaining until the router assumes there are no longer any MLD version 1 Hosts on the specified interface Group Compat Mode The compatibility mode of the multicast group on the interface The values it can take are MLDv1 and MLDv2 Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address Source Address Expiry Time This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which are members of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest MLD groups information Routing 324 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Traffic To display the MLD Traffic page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt MLD Traffic MLD Traffic MLD Traffic Valid MLD Packets Received Vali
312. dress 10 27 34 1 1 0 1 00 16 9C E1 D8 00 To view the ARP cache 1 Use Port to select the associated Unit Slot Port of the connection 2 IP Address displays the IP address It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch s existing routing interfaces 3 MAC Address displays the unicast MAC address of the device The address is six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 4 Click REFRESH to show the latest IP information Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e Static ARP Cache on page 222 e ARP Table Configuration on page 223 Routing 221 ProSafe M5300 Switch Static ARP Cache To display the Static ARP Cache page click Routing gt ARP gt Advanced gt ARP Create Static ARP Cache ARP Static Configuration B IP Address MAC Address ARP Cache ARP Static Configuration Use this screen to add an entry to the Address Resolution Protocol table 1 Use IP Address to enter the IP address you want to add It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch s existing routing interfaces 2 Use MAC Address to specify the unicast MAC address of the device Enter the address as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 3 Click ADD to add a new static ARP entry to the switch Click DELETE to delete an existing static ARP entry from the
313. dress exists that entry will be displayed An exact match is required Field Description MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related Type This displays the type of the entry Static entries are those that are configured by the end user Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol Configuring Switching Information 156 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Component This is the component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database Possible values are IGMP Snooping GMRP Static Filtering and MLD Snooping Description The text description of this multicast table entry Possible values are Management Configured Network Configured and Network Assisted ForwardingInterfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces MFDB Statistics Use this page to view statistical information about the multicast forwarding database MFDB To display the MFDB Statistics page click Switching gt Multicast gt MFDB gt MFDB Statistics MFDB Statistics MFDB Statistics Max MFDB Table Entries Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset Current Entries Field Description Max MFDB Table Entries The maxi
314. e No file chosen To download a file to the switch by using HTTP 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to transfer e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to upgrade the operational flash e Image Specify the code image1 you want to download e Image2 Specify the code image2 you want to download e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want a banner to be displayed before the login prompt e Configuration Specify configuration when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped e Use Config Script to specify script configuration file e Use SSH 1 RSA Key File to specify SSH 1 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File e Use SSH 2 RSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File PEM Encoded e Use SSH 2 DSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Digital Signature Algorithm DSA Key File PEM Encoded e Use SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Trusted Root Certificate File PEM Encoded e Use SSL Server Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Server Certificate File PEM Encoded e Use SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Weak Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded e Use SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File
315. e Private Group Membership page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Private Group gt Private Group Membership Private Group Membership Group ID 1 iwl Group Name pgroup1 Group Mode Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 vivix 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 To configure private group port membership 1 Use Group ID to select the Group ID for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use Port List to add the ports you selected to this private group Field Description Group Name This field identifies the name for the Private Group you selected It can be up to 24 non blank characters long Group Mode This field identifies the mode of the Private Group you selected The modes are community Each member port can forward traffic to other members in the same group but not to members in other groups default e isolated The member port in the group cannot forward its egress traffic to any other members in the same group Managing Device Security 405 ProSafe M5300 Switch Protected Ports Configuration If a port is configured as protected it does not forward traffic to any other protected port on the switch but it will forward traffic to unprotected ports Use the Protected Ports Configuration page to configure the ports as protected or unprotected You need read write access privileges to modi
316. e 1 External Type 2 OSPF Configuration Router ID 0 0 0 0 Admin Mode Enable ASBR Mode Disable RFC 1583 Compatibility Enable ABR Status Opaque LSA Status Enable Eel Exit Overflow Interval secs o _ 0 to 2147483647 SPF Delay Time secs 5 ___ 0 to 65535 SPF Hold Time secs 0 to 65535 External LSA Count External LSA Checksum AS_OPAQUE LSA Count AS_OPAQUE LSA Checksum New LSAs Originated LSAs Received External LSDB Limit 7 1 to 2147483647 Default Metric o0 0 to 16777214 Maximum Paths t 1 to 4 AutoCost Reference Bandwidth 1 to 4294967 Default Passive Setting l Disal ble Helper Support Mode Always m Helper Strict LSA Checking Enable m Default Route Advertise Configuration 1 When Default Information Originate is enabled OSPF originates an external LSA advertising a default route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 Always If Default Information Originate is enabled but the Always option is FALSE OSPF will only originate a default route if the router already has a default route in its routing table Set Always to TRUE to force OSPF to originate a default route regardless of whether the router has a default route Routing 234 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Metric to specify the metric of the default route The range of valid values is 0 to 16777214 Use Metric Type to set the OSPF metric type of the defa
317. e 477 e sFlow on page 479 Ports The pages available from the Ports link contain a variety of information about the number and type of traffic transmitted from and received on the switch From the Ports link you can access the following pages e Port Statistics on page 458 e Port Detailed Statistics on page 459 e EAP Statistics on page 466 e Cable Test on page 467 457 Port Statistics ProSafe M5300 Switch The Port Statistics page displays a summary of per port traffic statistics on the switch To access the Port Statistics page click Monitoring gt Ports gt Port Statistics Status 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Time Packets Packets Packets Interface received without Broadcast Transmit since received transmitted Collision Packets Packet counters with without Frames received Errors last Errors Errors Errors cleared 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec 2 day 4 hr 38 min 28 sec The following table describes the per port statistics displayed on the screen Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e To clear all the counters for all ports on the switch select the check box in the row heading and click CLEAR The button resets all statistics for all ports to default values e Toc
318. e AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast addresses No Neighbor at Source Address The number of OSPFv3 packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender s IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor Routing 270 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Invalid OSPF Packet Type The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPFv3 header is not a known type Hellos Ignored The number of received Hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit has been reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole Hellos Sent The number of Hello packets sent on this interface by this router Hellos Received The number of Hello packets received on this interface by this router DD Packets Sent The number of Database Description packets sent on this interface by this router DD Packets Received The number of Database Description packets received on this interface by this router LS Requests Sent The number of LS Requests sent on this interface by this router LS Requests Received The number of LS Requests received on this interface by this router LS Updates Sent The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router LS Updates Received The number of LS updates received on this interface by
319. e Candidate RP Configuration on page 308 e BSR Candidate Configuration on page 309 e Static RP Configuration on page 310 PIM Global Configuration To display the PIM Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM gt Global Configuration PIM Global Configuration PIM Global Configuration PIM Protocol Type PIM DM PIM SM Admin Mode Disable Enable To configure global PIM settings 1 Use PIM Protocol Type to select the PIM type to run e PIM SM Recommended for networks with sparsely populated multicast receivers e PIM SM Recommended for networks with densely populated multicast receivers 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM on the router The default is disable 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the new settings Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Routing 304 ProSafe M5300 Switch SSM Configuration The settings on this page are valid for PIM SM and do not apply if the PIM mode is PIM DM While PIM SM employs a specially configured RP router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners Protocol Independent Multicast Source Specific Multicast PIM SSM does not use an RP It supports only source route deliver trees It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs The SSM service model can be implemented with a strict subset of the PIM SM protocol mechan
320. e Configuration The settings on this page are valid for PIM SM and do not apply if the PIM mode is PIM DM To display the PIM BSR Candidate Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM SM gt BSR Candidate Configuration PIM BSR Candidate Configuration PIM BSR Candidate Configuration Interface Hash Mask Length BSR Expiry Time hh mm ss Priority IP Address Next bootstrap Message hh mm ss Next Candidate RP Advertisement hh mm ss Advertisement Interval secs To configure a BSR candidate 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Priority to enter the priority of C BSR 3 Use Hash Mask Length to enter the C BSR hash mask length to be advertised in bootstrap messages This hash mask length will be used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group The valid values are from 0 to 32 Default value is 30 4 Click DELETE to delete the RP address selected 5 Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest PIM SM neighbor information Field Description IP Address Displays the IP address of the Elected BSR Next bootstrap Message Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR Next Candidate RP Advertisement Time in hours minutes and seconds in which the next candidate RP advertisement will be sent Routing 309 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stat
321. e Enable Disable Default Metric 0 To configure the advanced RIP global settings Use RIP Admin Mode to enable or disable RIP for the switch The default is enable 2 Use Split Horizon Mode to select none simple or poison reverse from the radio buttons Split horizon is a technique for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was originally learned The options are e None No special processing for this case e Simple A route will not be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned e Poison reverse A route will be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned but the metric will be set to infinity The default is simple 3 Use Auto Summary Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable groups of adjacent routes will be summarized into single entries in order to reduce the total number of entries The default is disable 4 Use Host Routes Accept Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable the router will be accept host routes The default is enable 5 Use Default Information Originate to enable or disable Default Route Advertise Routing 226 ProSafe M5300 Switch 6 Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the default metric if one has already been set or blank if not configured earlier The valid values are 1 to 15 Field Descr
322. e Link Aggregation Control Protocol administration state The mode must be enabled in order for the port to participate in Link Aggregation May be enabled or disabled by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field The factory default is enabled Use the Physical Mode pull down menu to select the port s speed and duplex mode If you select auto the duplex mode and speed will be set by the auto negotiation process Note that the port s maximum capability full duplex and speed will be advertised Otherwise your selection will determine the port s duplex mode and transmission rate The factory default is auto Use Link Trap to determine whether to send a trap when link status changes The factory default is enabled Use Maximum Frame Size to specify the maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured including ethernet header CRC and payload 1518 to 9216 The default maximum frame size is 1518 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Click APPLY to update the switch with the values you entered If you want the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle you must perform a save Field Description Port Type For normal ports this field will be normal Otherwise the possible values are e Mirrored The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic will be copied to the probe port e Probe Use this port to monitor mirrored port Trunk Number The port is a member of a
323. e NSSA when Import Summary LSAs is disabled This can also be applied by the CLI command area lt areaid gt nssa default info originate in the IPv6 router OSPF config mode 4 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the default information originate Valid values are True or False 5 Use Metric Value to set the Default Metric value for default information originate The valid range of values is 1 to 16777214 6 Use Metric Type to select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field e Comparable Cost External Type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPFv3 metric e Non comparable Cost External Type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPFv3 metric 7 Use Translator Role to specify the NSSA Border router s ability to perform NSSA translation of type 7 LSAs into type 5 LSAs The valid values are Always and Candidate 8 Use Translator Stability Interval to specify the number of seconds after an elected translator determines its services are no longer required that it should continue to perform its translation duties The valid range of values is 0 to 3600 9 Use No Redistribute Mode to enable or disable the No Redistribute Mode 10 Click ADD to configure the area as a NSSA area 11 Click DELETE to delete the NSSA area designation The area will be returned to normal state Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link
324. e The time this event occurred Persistent Logs A persistent log is a log that is stored in persistent storage Persistent storage survives across platform reboots The first log type is the system startup log The system startup log stores the first N messages received after system reboot The second log type is the system operation log The system operation log stores the last N messages received during system operation To access the Persistent Logs page click Monitoring gt Logs gt Persistent Logs 1 Persistent Logs Persistent Logs Admin Mode Disable Enable Behavior Alert Message Log Total number of Messages 0 Description A log that is Disabled shall not log messages A log that is Enabled shall log messages Enable or Disable logging by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field Behavior A log records messages equal to or above a configured severity threshold Select the severity option by selecting the corresponding line on the pull down entry field These severity levels have been enumerated below e Emergency 0 system is unusable e Alert 1 action must be taken immediately e Critical 2 critical conditions Monitoring the System 476 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Error 3 error conditions e Warning 4 warning conditions e Notice 5 normal but significant conditions e Informational 6 informational messages e Debug 7 debug leve
325. e Vlan ID 4 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 5 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes IGMP Snooping Querier IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end devices on the network to announce their multicast memberships This central device is the IGMP querier The IGMP query responses known as IGMP reports keep the switch updated with the current multicast group membership on a port by port basis If the switch does not receive updated membership information in a timely fashion it will stop forwarding multicasts to the port where the end device is located These pages enable you to configure and display information on IGMP snooping queriers on the network and separately on VLANs Configuring Switching Information 163 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for IGMP Snooping Querier Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access this page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Querier Configuration IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration Querier Configuration Querier Admin Mode Disable Enable Snooping Querier Address 0 0 0 0 IGMP Version Z Query Interval secs 60 Querier Expiry Interval secs 125 VLAN IDs Enabled for IGMP Snooping Querier To configure IGMP Snooping Querier settings 1 Use Querier Admin
326. e complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been deleted from tables associated with the remote systems Total Drops Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP could not be entered into tables associated with the remote systems because of insufficient resources Total Age outs Specifies the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point MSAP has been deleted from tables associated with the remote systems because the information timeliness interval has expired Interface Specifies the unit slot port for the interfaces Transmit Total Specifies the number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port Configuring System Information 96 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Receive Total Specifies the number of valid LLDP frames received by this LLDP agent on the corresponding port while the LLDP agent is enabled Discards Specifies the number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port Errors Specifies the number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port while the LLDP agent is enabled Age outs Specifies the number of age outs that occurred on a given port An age out is the number of times the complete set of inform
327. e in the range from 0 to 7 Configuring Quality of Service 349 ProSafe M5300 Switch Mark IP DSCP This lists the keywords for the known DSCP values from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values Simple Policy Use this attribute to establish the traffic policing style for the specified class This command uses single data rate and burst size resulting in two outcomes conform and violate If you select the Simple Policy attribute you can configure the following fields Color Mode This lists the color mode The default is Color Blind e Color Blind e Color Aware Color Aware mode requires the existence of one or more color classes that are valid for use with this policy instance A valid color class contains a single non excluded match criterion for one of the following fields provided the field does not conflict with the classifier of the policy instance itself e CoS e IP DSCP e IP Precedence Committed Rate This value is specified in the range 1 to 4294967295 kilobits per second Kbps Committed Burst Size This value is specified in the range 1 to 128 KBytes The committed burst size is used to determine the amount of conforming traffic allowed Conform Action This lists the actions to be taken on conforming packets per the policing metrics from which one can be selected The default is send Violate Action This lists the actions to be taken on
328. e invisible to the marketing VLAN members accessible to all or accessible only to specified individuals depending on how the IT manager has set up the VLANs VLANs have a number of advantages e It is easy to do network segmentation Users that communicate most frequently with each other can be grouped into common VLANs regardless of physical location Each group s traffic is contained largely within the VLAN reducing extraneous traffic and improving the efficiency of the whole network 509 ProSafe M5300 Switch They are easy to manage The addition of nodes as well as moves and other changes can be dealt with quickly and conveniently from a management interface rather than from the wiring closet They provide increased performance VLANs free up bandwidth by limiting node to node and broadcast traffic throughout the network They ensure enhanced network security VLANs create virtual boundaries that can be crossed only through a router So standard router based security measures can be used to restrict access to each VLAN Packets received by the switch are treated in the following way When an untagged packet enters a port it is automatically tagged with the port s default VLAN ID tag number Each port has a default VLAN ID setting that is user configurable the default setting is 1 The default VLAN ID setting for each port can be changed in the Port PVID Configuration screen See Port PVID Configuration on page
329. e of location information Location Information Specifies the location information as a string for given type of location id Extended PoE M5300 28G POE and M5300 52G POE only Specifies if local device is a PoE device Device Type Specifies local device s PoE device type Power Source Specifies the power source Power Priority Specifies the power priority Power Value Specifies the power value in Watts Configuring System Information 104 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP MED Remote Device Information To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Remote Device Information A screen similar to the following displays LLDP MED Remote Device Information LLDP MED Interface Selection Interface 1 0 1 m Remote ID 4 Capability Information Supported Capabilities Enabled Capabilities Device Class Network Policies Information Media Unknown Tagged Application VLAN ID Priority DSCP Bit Bit Type Status Status Inventory Information Hardware Revision Firmware Revision Software Revision Serial Number Manufacturer Name Model Name Asset Id Location Information Sub Type Location Information Extended PoE Device Type Extended PoE PSE Devic rail saci _ Extended PoE PD D To view LLDP MED information received by an interface select the desired interface from the Interface menu Configuring System Information 105 ProSafe M
330. e of the relationship with this neighbor Dead Time Number of seconds since last Hello was received from Adjacent Neighbors Set to 0 for neighbors in a state less than or equal to Init Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred Retransmission Queue Length of the selected neighbor s retransmit queue Length 1 Click REFRESH to refresh the page with the latest OSPFv3 neighbor information for the selected interface 2 Click CLEAR to clear all the neighbor in the table Routing 272 ProSafe M5300 Switch Link State Database Use the OSPF v3 Link State Database page to display the link state database To display the Link State Database page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Link State Database Link State Database OSPFv3 Link State Database Router Area LSA Router Sequence Checksum ID ID Type Options OSPFv3 External LSA Database Field Description Router ID The 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS The Router ID is set on the OSPFv3 Configuration page If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF v3 After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF v3 to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is nota valid Router ID Area ID The ID of an OSPF v3 area to which one of the router interfaces
331. e period expires Restart Exit Reason Displays how the master unit on the stack last started up The possible values are e Not Attempted Graceful restart has not been attempted e In Progress Restart is in progress e Completed The previous graceful restart completed successfully e Timed Out The previous graceful restart timed out e Topology Changed The previous graceful restart terminated prematurely because of a topology change Routing 256 ProSafe M5300 Switch OSPFv3 OSPF v3 is the Open Shortest Path First routing protocol for IPv6 It is similar to OSPFv2 in its concept of a link state database intra inter area and AS external routes and virtual links It differs from its IPv4 counterpoint in a number of respects including the following peering is done via link local addresses the protocol is link based rather than network based and addressing semantics have been moved to leaf LSAs which eventually allow its use for both IPv4 and IPv6 Point to point links are also supported in order to enable operation over tunnels It is possible to enable OSPF and OSPF v3 at the same time OSPF works with IPv4 and OSPF v3 works with IPv6 From the OSPF link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 257 e Advanced on page 258 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e OSPFv3 Configuration on page 257 OSPFv3 Configuration Use the OSPF v3 Configuration p
332. e reachability of the tracked Route Routing 283 Virtual Router Statistics ProSafe M5300 Switch Use the Virtual Router Statistics page to display statistics for a specified virtual router To display the Virtual Router Statistics page click Routing gt VRRP gt Advanced gt Statistics VRRP Statistics Global Statistics Router Checksum Errors Router Version Errors Router VRID Errors Statistics State VRRP Interface UP Transitioned ID Time to Master 1 1 0 3 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 secs 0 1 0 5 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 secs 0 Zero Zero Invalid Advert t Add Invalid Authentication Packet Advertisement vertisement authentication IP TTL Priority Priority Type eed peers ypa ppa x Interval List Authentication Type Length Received rams Failure Errors Packets Packets Packets AUIS Lea mee Received Sent Received se o 0 o o o o 0 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Field Description Router Checksum Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value Router Version Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an unknown or unsupported version number Router VRID Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRID for this virtual router VRRP ID The VRID for the selected Virtual Router Interface The Unit Slot Port for the selected Virtual Router Up Time The
333. e receiver configuration is reset to default values An entity wishing to claim an sFlowRcvrTable entry must ensure that the entry is unclaimed before trying to claim it The entry is claimed by setting the owner string The entry must be claimed before any changes can be made to other sampler objects Use Receiver Timeout to specify the time in seconds remaining before the sampler is released and stops sampling A management entity wanting to maintain control of the sampler is responsible for setting a new value before the old one expires Allowed range is 0 to 4294967295 secs A value of zero sets the selected receiver configuration to its default values Use Maximum Datagram Size to specify the maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram The manager should set this value to avoid fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams Default Value 1400 Allowed range is 200 to 9116 Use Receiver Address to specify the IP address of the sFlow collector If set to 0 0 0 0 no sFlow datagrams will be sent Use Receiver Port to specify the destination port for sFlow datagrams Allowed range is 1 to 65535 Receiver Datagram Version The version of sFlow datagrams that should be sent Monitoring the System 481 ProSafe M5300 Switch sFlow Interface Configuration sFlow agent collects statistical packet based sampling of switched flows and sends them to the configured receivers A data source configured
334. e selected PIM interface For point to point interfaces this will be 0 0 0 0 Routing 316 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM Neighbor To display the IPv6 PIM Neighbor page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM gt PIM DM Neighbor PIM Neighbor PIM Neighbor Search By Interface GO Toke boc Neighbor Up Expiry IP Time hh mm ss Time hh mm ss Field Description Interface The physical interface on which PIM DM is enabled Neighbor IP The IP address of the PIM neighbor for which this entry contains information Up Time The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor will be aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest PIM DM neighbor information Routing 317 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM Candidate RP Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM Candidate RP Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM gt Candidate RP Configuration PIM Candidate RP Configuration PIM Interface Selection Interface 1 0 1 PIM Candidate RP Configuration ae E To configure candidate RP settings for IPv6 PIM SM 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed 2 Use Group Address to specify the group IPv6 address prefix transmitted in Candidate RP Advertisements 3 Use Prefix Length to specify the group IPv6
335. e subnet mask but not both Valid Range is 0 to 32 Client Name Specifies the Client Name for DHCP manual Pool Hardware Address Specifies the MAC address of the hardware platform of the DHCP client Hardware Address Type Specifies the protocol of the hardware platform of the DHCP client Valid types are ethernet and ieee802 Default value is ethernet Client ID Specifies the Client Identifier for DHCP manual Pool Host Number Specifies the IP address for a manual binding to a DHCP client Host can be set only if at least one among of Client Identifier or Hardware Address is specified Deleting Host would delete Client Name Client ID Hardware Address for the Manual Pool and set the Pool Type to Unallocated Host Mask Specifies the subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client Either Host Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Host Prefix Length Specifies the subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client Either Host Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both Valid Range is 0 to 32 Lease Time Can be selected as Infinite to specify lease time as Infinite or Specified Duration to enter a specific lease period In case of dynamic binding infinite implies a lease period of 60 days and In case of manual binding infinite implies indefinite lease period Default Value is Specified Duration Da
336. e switch as opposed to an interface To display the IP Configuration page click Routing gt IP gt Basic gt IP Configuration IP Configuration IP Configuration Default Time to Live 64 Routing Mode Enable Disable ICMP Echo Replies Enable Disable ICMP Redirects Enable Disable ICMP Rate Limit Interval 1000 i ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size 100 Maximum Next Hops 4 Maximum Routes 224 Select to configure Global Default Gateway Global Default Gateway To configure global IP routing 1 Use Routing Mode to select enable or disable You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces The default value is disable 2 Use ICMP Echo Replies to select enable or disable If it is enable then only the router can send ECHO replies By default ICMP Echo Replies are sent for echo requests 3 Use ICMP Redirects to select enable or disable If it is enabled globally and on interface level then only the router can send ICMP Redirects 4 Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By default Rate limit is 100 packets sec i e burst interval is 1000 msec To disable ICMP Rate limiting set this field to 0 Valid Rate Interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 Routing 193 ProSafe M5300 Switch 5 Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by s
337. e the Hop Limit option to define the unicast hop count used in IPv6 packets originated by the node The value is also included in router advertisements Valid values for lt hops gt are 1 64 inclusive The default not configured means that a value of zero is sent in router advertisements and a value of 64 is sent in packets originated by the node Note that this is not the same as configuring a value of 64 Use ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval to control the ICMPv6 error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By Default Rate limit is 100 packets sec i e burst interval is 1000 msec To disable ICMP rate limiting set this field to 0 Valid Rate Interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 Use ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval Default burst size is 100 packets When burst interval is 0 then configuring this field is not a valid operation Valid Burst Size must be in the range 1 to 200 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Routing 202 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Route Table Use the IPv6 Route Table page to display all active IPv6 routes and their settings To display the IPv6 Route Table page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Basic gt Route Table IPv6 Route Table IPv6 Route Table Routes Displayed All Routes
338. e to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface or specify all CoS configurable interfaces 2 The IP DSCP field displays an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63 3 For each DSCP value specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding IP DSCP value The queue number depends on specific hardware 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 If you make changes to the page click APPLY to apply the changes to the system CoS Interface Configuration Use the CoS Interface Configuration page to apply an interface shaping rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface To display the CoS Interface Configuration page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt CoS Interface Configuration CoS Interface Configuration CoS Interface Configuration 1 LAGS All Go To Interface __ Interface Interface Trust Mode Interface Shaping Rate 1 0 1 802 1p 0 1 0 2 802 1p 0 1 0 3 802 1p 0 1 0 4 802 1p 0 1 0 5 802 1p 0 1 0 6 802 1p 0 0 ft 0 o 1 0 7 802 1p 1 0 8 802 1p 802 1p 802 ip To configure CoS settings for an interface 1 Use Interface to specify all CoS configurable interfaces 2 Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress Interface Trust Mode can only be one of the following Default value is trust dot1p e untrusted e trust do
339. e traffic isolation can be achieved by assigning each port with a different VLAN allocating an IP subnet for each VLAN and enabling L3 routing between them On the other hand in a private VLAN domain all members can share a common address space of a single subnet which is associated with a primary VLAN So the advantage of the private VLANs feature is that it reduces the number of consumed VLANs improves IP addressing space utilization and helps to avoid L3 routing The Private VLAN folder contains links to the following features e Private VLAN Type Configuration on page 407 e Private VLAN Association Configuration on page 408 e Private VLAN Port Mode Configuration on page 409 e Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration on page 410 e Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration on page 411 Private VLAN Type Configuration Use this page to set an existing VLAN as a private VLAN type A private VLAN can be one of the following types e A Primary VLAN forwards the traffic from the promiscuous ports to isolated ports community ports and other promiscuous ports in the same private VLAN Only one primary VLAN can be configured per private VLAN All ports within a private VLAN share the same primary VLAN e An Isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN It carries traffic from isolated ports to promiscuous ports Only one isolated VLAN can be configured per private VLAN e ACommunity VLAN is a secondary VLAN It forwards traffic between ports
340. eating a Class click the class link to the Class page Configuring Quality of Service 346 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the class match criteria 1 Click the class name for an existing class The class name is a hyperlink The following figure shows the configuration fields for the class IPv6 Class Configuration IPv6 Class Information Class Name ipv6Class Class Type All IPv6 DiffServ Class Configuration Match Every Any Reference Class VoIP Protocol Type ICMPv6 Source Prefix Length Source L4 Port domain Destination Prefix Length Destination L4 Port domain 0 to 65525 Flow Label 0 to 1048575 5 IP DSCP e 0 to 63 Class Summary 2 Class Name Displays the name for the configured DiffServ class 3 Class Type Displays the DiffServ class type Options All Only when a new class is created this field is a selector field After class creation this becomes a non configurable field displaying the configured class type 4 Define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class Match Every This adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class Reference Class This lists the class es that can be assigned as reference class es to the current class Protocol Type This lists the keywords for the layer 4 protocols from which one can be selected
341. eceived Received Neighbor Up Expiry Generation Major Minor La Received i Interface yi ci a Capabilities Bad Bad IP Time Time ID Version Version Routes Packets Routes e interface Search by the interface on which the neighbor was discovered If you select this search method specify the interface ID in the associated field e Neighbor IP Search by the IP address of the neighbor If you select this search method specify the neighbor IP address in the associated field Field Description State The state of the specified neighbor router on the selected interface either active or down Up Time The DVMRP uptime for the specified neighbor on the selected interface This is the time since the neighbor entry was learned Expiry Time The DVMRP expiry time for the specified neighbor on the selected interface This is the time left before this neighbor entry will age out and is not applicable if the neighbor router s state is down Generation ID Major Version The DVMRP generation ID for the specified neighbor on the selected interface The DVMRP Major Version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Minor Version The DVMRP Minor Version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Capabilities The DVMRP capabilities of the specified neighbor on the selected interface Received Routes The number of routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected inte
342. ection based on the packet type For L2 packets source and destination MAC address are used for hash computation ForL3 packets source IP destination IP address TCP UDP ports are used Use the Port Selection Table to select the ports as members of the LAG Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Click APPLY to update the switch with the values you entered If you want the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle you must perform a save Configuring Switching Information 187 ProSafe M5300 Switch Configuring Switching Information 188 Routing The Routing tab contains links to the following features Routing Table on page 189 IP on page 193 Pv6 on page 201 IPv6 on page 201 Licensed Feature ARP on page 220 RIP on page 225 Licensed Feature OSPF on page 232 Licensed Feature OSPFv3 on page 257 Licensed Feature Router Discovery on page 279 Licensed Feature VRRP on page 280 Licensed Feature Multicast on page 286 Licensed Feature IPv6 Multicast on page 313 Licensed Feature Note Some routing features are available only when a valid license is installed Routing Table The Routing Table collects routes from multiple sources static routes RIP routes OSPF routes and local routes The Routing Table may learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources The Routing Table lists all routes From the Routing Table link you can access the following pages Basi
343. ecurity Violation table shows information about violations that occurred on ports that are enabled for port security The following table describes the fields in the Port Security Violation table Field Description Port Displays the physical interface for which you want to display data Last Violation MAC Displays the source MAC address of the last packet that was discarded at a locked port VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID corresponding to the Last Violation MAC address Port Security Interface Configuration A MAC address can be defined as allowable by one of two methods dynamically or statically Both methods are used concurrently when a port is locked Dynamic locking implements a first arrival mechanism for Port Security You specify how many addresses can be learned on the locked port If the limit has not been reached then a packet with an unknown source MAC address is learned and forwarded normally When the limit is reached no more addresses are learned on the port Any packets with source MAC addresses that were not already learned are discarded You can effectively disable dynamic locking by setting the number of allowable dynamic entries to zero Static locking allows you to specify a list of MAC addresses that are allowed on a port The behavior of packets is the same as for dynamic locking only packets with an allowable source MAC address can be forwarded To display the Port Security Interface Configurat
344. ed EXEC password will be used for authentication e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated e Deny Authentication will be denied always Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list Click ADD to add a new login list to the switch Click DELETE to remove the selected authentication enable list from the configuration You can only use this button if you have Read Write access The change will not be retained across a power cycle unless you perform a save Managing Device Security 368 ProSafe M5300 Switch Dot1x Authentication List You use this page to configure IEEE 802 1X Dot1x lists Dot1x controls port based access to the network through a switch port that is controlled by IEEE 802 1X A dot1x list specifies the authentication method s you want to be used to validate port access for the users associated with the list Only one dot1x method can be supported To display the Dot1x Authentication
345. efix length and default gateway You can configure the IP information using any of the following e IPv6 Auto Configuration e DHCPv6 e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port Once you have established in band connectivity you can change the IPv6 information using any of the following e Terminal interface via the EIA 232 port e Terminal interface via telnet e SNMP based management e Web based management Configuring System Information 32 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure an IPv6 network interface 1 2 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the IPv6 network interface on the switch The default value is enable Use IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode to set the IPv6 address for the IPv6 network interface in auto configuration mode if this option is enabled The default value is disable Auto configuration can be enabled only when IPv6 Auto config or DHCPv6 are not enabled on any of the management interfaces Use Current Network Configuration Protocol to configure the IPv6 address for the IPv6 network interface by DHCPv6 protocol if this option is enabled The default value is None DHCPVv6 can be enabled only when IPv6 Auto config or DHCPv6 are not enabled on any of the management interfaces Use DHCPv 6 Client DUID to specify an Identifier used to identify the client s unique DUID value This option only displays when DHCPV6 is enabled Use IPv6 Gateway to specify the gateway for the IPv6 network interface The gateway
346. elect the mode for the CP to use to verify clients e Guest The user does not need to be authenticated by a database e Local The switch uses a local database to authenticated users e RADIUS The switch uses a database on a remote RADIUS server to authenticate users Managing Device Security 428 ProSafe M5300 Switch 6 Use Block to control the blocked status If the CP is blocked users cannot gain access to the network through the CP Use this function to temporarily protect the network during unexpected events such as denial of service attacks 7 If the Verification Mode is Local or RADIUS use Group to assign an existing User Group to the captive portal All users who belong to the group are permitted to access the network through this portal The User Group list is the same for all CP configurations on the switch 8 Use Idle Timeout to enter the number of seconds to wait before terminating a session A user is logged out once the idle time out is reached If the value is set to 0 then the time out is not enforced The valid range is 0 to 86400 seconds and the default value is 0 9 Use User Logout to allow the authenticated client to deauthenticate from the network 10 Use Radius Auth Server to enter the IP address of the RADIUS server used for client authentications The switch acts as the RADIUS client and performs all RADIUS transactions on behalf of the clients 11 Use Redirect URL to specify the URL to which the new
347. elected port RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port Configuring Switching Information 155 ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses which range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 From the Multicast link you can access the following pages e MFDB on page 156 e IGMP Snooping on page 158 e MLD Snooping on page 167 MFDB From the MFDB link you can access the following pages e MFDB Table on page 156 e MFDB Statistics on page 157 MFDB Table The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active multicast address entries The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair Entries may contain data for more than one protocol To display the MFDB Table page click Switching gt Multicast gt MFDB gt MFDB Table MFDB Table MFDB Table Search By MAC Address GO VLAN F di To search for a specific MAC address use the Search by MAC Address field to enter a MAC Address whose MFDB table entry you want displayed Enter six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 01 23 43 45 67 Then click on the GO button If the ad
348. eless Access Point etc Configuring System Information 101 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP MED Interface Configuration To display this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays LLDP MED Interface Configuration Interface Configuration 1 2 All Go To Port aaa Transmit Type Length Values Iaiarfaca Operational Notification MED Network Location Inventory a ae ae I me r m 0 1 m ZE A e A C e 1 0 2 Down Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 3 Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 4 Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 5 Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 6 Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 7 Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 8 Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable To configure LLDP MED interface settings 1 To configure LLDP MED settings on one or more interfaces select the check box associated with each interface to configure or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use MED Status to specify whether LLDP MED mode is enabled or disabled on this interface 3 Use Notification Status to specify the LLDP MED topology notification mode of the interface 4 Use Transmit Type Length Values to specify which optional type length
349. ement interface of the device The page also provides information about their connections To display the Login Sessions page click Security gt Management Security gt Login Sessions Login Sessions Login Sessions Connection Session Session Idle Time From Time Type admin i ffff 10 27 253 150 00 00 00 01 35 38 Field Description ID Identifies the ID of this row User Name Shows the user name of user made the session Connection From Shows the user is connected from which machine Idle Time Shows the idle session time Session Time Shows the total session time Session Type Shows the type of session telnet serial or SSH Managing Device Security 371 ProSafe M5300 Switch Configuring Management Access From the Access page you can configure HTTP and Secure HTTP access to the ProSafe M5300 management interface The Security gt Access tab contains the following folders e HTTP on page 372 e HTTPS Configuration on page 373 e SSH on page 377 e Telnet on page 380 e Console Port on page 381 e Denial of Service on page 382 e Access Control on page 384 HTTP From the HTTP link you can access the following pages e HTTP Configuration on page 372 HTTP Configuration To access the switch over a web you must first configure it with IP information IP address subnet mask and default gateway You can configure the IP information using any of the following e BOOTP
350. ement will be sent Routing 319 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM Static RP Configuration This page is used to statically configure the RP address for one or more multicast groups To display the IPv6 PIM Static RP Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM gt Static RP Configuration PIM Static RP Configuration Static RP Configuration CoE OSE E OEN AE To configure static RP settings for IPv6 PIM SM 1 Use RP Address to specify the IP Address of the RP to be created or deleted 2 Use Group Address to specify the Group Address of the RP to be created or deleted 3 Use Prefix Length to specify the Group IPv6 Prefix Length of the RP to be created or deleted 4 Use Override to indicate that if there is a conflict the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR 5 Click ADD to add a new static RP address for one or more multicast groups 6 Click DELETE to delete the RP address selected Routing 320 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD MLD is used by IPv6 systems listeners and routers to report their IP multicast addresses memberships to any neighboring multicast routers The implementation of MLD v2 is backward compatible with MLD v1 MLD protocol enables the IPv6 router to discover the presence of multicast listeners the nodes that want to receive the multicast data packets on its directly attached interfaces The protocol specifically discovers which multicast addresse
351. emote File Name To upload a file from the switch to the TFTP server 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload e Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve e CLI Banner Specify CLI Banner when you want retrieve the CLI banner file e Startup Configuration Specify configuration when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Script File Specify script file when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Error Log Specify error log to retrieve the system error persistent log sometimes referred to as the event log e Buffered Log Specify buffered log to retrieve the system buffered in memory log e Trap Log Specify trap log to retrieve the system trap records Maintenance 487 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Tech Support Specify Tech Support to retrieve the switch information needed for trouble shooting The factory default is Archive 2 Use Transfer Mode to specify what protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy 3 Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the Server
352. emove it from the list select the check box next to the VLAN ID and click DELETE To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN select the check box next to the VLAN ID update the desired values and click APPLY Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring Switching Information 161 ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast Router Configuration This page configures the interface as the one the multicast router is attached to All IGMP packets snooped by the switch will be forwarded to the multicast router reachable from this interface The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch will automatically detect the presence of multicast router and forward IGMP packet accordingly It is only needed when you want to make sure the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network To access the Multicast Router Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Multicast Router Configuration Multicast Router Configuration Multicast Router Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Go Interface Multicast Router 1 0 1 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 1 0 6 Disable 1 0 7 Disable 1 0 8 Disable 1 0 9 Disable 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Selec
353. ence clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet Server Mode Specifies the mode of the server for the last received valid packet Unicast Server Max Entries Specifies the maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this client Configuring System Information 37 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Unicast Server Current Entries Specifies the number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client Broadcast Count Specifies the number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that have been received and processed by the SNTP client since last reboot SNTP Server Configuration Use the SNTP Server Configuration page to view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP servers To display the SNTP Server Configuration page click System gt Management gt Time gt SNTP Server Configuration SNTP Server Configuration SNTP Server Configuration Serve Esa ee aa Air i Type C ny ustiming org SNTP Server Status Last Last Last Failed Address Update Attempt Attempt Requests Requests Time Time Status 1 0 nisti ny ustiming org Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 UTC 0 00 Jan 2 23 25 19 1970 UTC 0 00 Success To configure a new SNTP Server 1 Enter the appropriate SNTP server information in the available fields Server Type Specifies
354. ent Security Settings on page 355 e Configuring Management Access on page 372 e Port Authentication on page 386 e Traffic Control on page 397 e Control on page 414 e Configuring Access Control Lists on page 435 Management Security Settings From the Management Security Settings page you can configure the login password Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADIUS settings Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS settings and authentication lists To display the page click the Security gt Management Security tab The Management Security folder contains links to the following features e Local User on page 356 e Enable Password Configuration on page 358 e Line Password Configuration on page 358 e RADIUS on page 359 e Configuring TACACS on page 364 e Authentication List Configuration on page 366 e Login Sessions on page 371 355 ProSafe M5300 Switch Local User From the Local User link you can access the following pages e User Management on page 356 e User Password Configuration on page 357 User Management By default two user accounts exist e admin with Read Write privileges e guest with Read Only privileges By default both of these accounts have blank passwords The names are not case sensitive If you logon with a user account with Read Write privileges i e as admin you can use the User Accounts screen to assign passwords and set security parameters for the default a
355. eports sent Leaves Received The number of IGMP leaves received Leaves Sent The number of IGMP leaves sent Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest IGMP Proxy interface statistics Routing 302 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Proxy Membership To display the IGMP Proxy Membership page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Proxy Membership IGMP Proxy Membership IGMP Proxy Membership Search By Group IP i GO Number Last Up Expiry Filter Proxy Interface Source Hosts i N of Reporter Time Time Mode Sources Field Description Group IP Displays the IP multicast group address Proxy Interface Displays the interface on which IGMP proxy is enabled Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address Last Reporter The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP Multicast group address on the IGMP Proxy interface Uptime The time elapsed since this entry was created Expiry Time This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which is a member of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out State The state of the host entry A Host can be in one of the state Non member state does not belong to the group on the interface Delaying member state host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer r
356. er Guide Please click APPLY button below to view the PDF User Guide s You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader to view a Guide To access to the User Guide that is available online click APPLY Help 502 ProSafe M5300 Switch Registration Use the Registration page to register your ProSafe M5300 switch Completing the registration confirms your e mail address lowers technical support resolution time and ensures your shipping address accuracy NETGEAR Inc would also like to incorporate your feedback into future product development Note NETGEAR will never sell or rent your e mail address and you may opt out of communications at any time To access the Registration page click Help gt Registration Product Registration Registration We are delighted to have you as a customer Registration confirms your email alerts will work lowers techinical support resolution time and ensures your shipping address accuracy We d also like to incorporate your feedback into future product development NETGEAR will never sell or rent your email address and you may opt out of communictaions at any time To register the switch click Register The switch attempts to contact the NETGEAR Registration Server For the product registration process to proceed the administrative system running the browser must meet the following requirements e The administrative system must have Internet access e The browser must allow pop up wi
357. er ID Area ID The ID of an OSPF area to which one of the router interfaces is connected An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected LSA Type The format and function of the link state advertisement One of the following e Router Links e Network Links e Network Summary e ASBR Summary e AS external LS ID The Link State ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement s LS type Age The time since the link state advertisement was first originated in seconds Sequence The sequence number field is a signed 32 bit integer It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements The larger the sequence number the more recent the advertisement Routing 251 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Checksum The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded or while it is being held in a router s memory This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the LS age field Options The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement The options are e Q This enables support for QoS Traffic Engineering e E This d
358. er Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the TFTP SFTP SCP Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Server Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 Use Remote File Name to enter the name of the file you want to download from the server You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank Use User Name to enter the user name for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file resides This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected Use Password to enter the password for remote login to SFTP SCP server where the file resides This field is visible only when SFTP or SCP transfer modes are selected The last row of the table is used to display information about the progress of the file transfer The screen will refresh automatically until the file transfer completes Maintenance 491 ProSafe M5300 Switch HTTP File Download Use the HTTP File Download page to download files of various types to the switch using an HTTP session for example via your Web browser To display this page click Maintenance gt Download gt HTTP File Download HTTP File Download HTTP File Download File Type Archive Image Name imaget Select File Choose Fil
359. er does not want to delete any entry from the ARP Table 7 Use Remove IP Address to enter the IP Address against the entry that is to be removed from the ARP Table This appears only if the user selects Specific Dynamic Gateway Entry or Specific Static Entry in the Remove from Table Drop Down List Field Description Total Entry Count Total number of Entries in the ARP table Peak Total Entries Highest value reached by Total Entry Count This counter value is restarted whenever the ARP table Cache Size value is changed Active Static Entries Total number of Active Static Entries in the ARP table Configured Static Entries Total number of Configured Static Entries in the ARP table Maximum Static Entries Maximum number of Static Entries that can be defined Routing 224 ProSafe M5300 Switch RIP Note RIP is a licensed feature and is available only on switches that have an active license installed RIP is an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP based on the Bellman Ford algorithm and targeted at smaller networks network diameter no greater than 15 hops The routing information is propagated in RIP update packets that are sent out both periodically and in the event of a network topology change On receipt of a RIP update depending on whether the specified route exists or does not exist in the route table the router may modify delete or add the route to its route table From the RI
360. er exchanging BPDUs the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge Specifies the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CST The valid range is 0 61440 The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096 If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096 the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095 it will be set to 0 The default priority is 32768 Bridge Max Age secs Specifies the bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CST which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before implementing a topological change The valid range is 6 40 and Configuring Switching Information 146 ProSafe M5300 Switch the value must be less than or equal to 2 Bridge Forward Delay 1 and greater than or equal to 2 Bridge Hello Time 1 The default value is 20 Bridge Hello Time secs Specifies the bridge Hello time for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CST which indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages The value is fixed at 2 seconds The value must be less than or equal to Bridge Max Age 2 1 The default hello time value is 2 Bridge Forward Delay secs Specifies the bridge forward delay time which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remain
361. er of seconds it will take for an ARP entry to age out The range for this field is 15 to 21600 seconds The default value for Age Time is 1200 seconds 2 Use Response Time to enter the value for the switch to use for the ARP response time out You must enter a valid integer which represents the number of seconds the switch will wait for a response to an ARP request The range for this field is 1 to 10 seconds The default value for Response Time is 1 second 3 Use Retries to enter an integer that specifies the maximum number of times an ARP request will be retried The range for this field is O to 10 The default value for Retries is 4 4 Use Cache Size to enter an integer that specifies the maximum number of entries for the ARP cache The range for this field is 256 to 1664 The default value for Cache Size is 1664 5 Use Dynamic Renew to control whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew ARP Entries of type Dynamic when they age out The default setting is Enable 6 Use Remove from Table to remove certain entries from the ARP Table The choices listed specify the type of ARP Entry to be deleted e All Dynamic Entries e All Dynamic and Gateway Entries e Specific Dynamic Gateway Entry Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP Address Routing 223 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Specific Static Entry Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP Address e None Selected if the us
362. erates as the querier in that VLAN The other querier moves to non querier state 3 Use Querier VLAN Address to specify the Snooping Querier Address to be used as source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN Field Description Operational State Specifies the operational state of the MLD Snooping Querier on a VLAN It can be in any of the following states e Querier Snooping switch is the Querier in the VLAN The Snooping switch will send out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN it moves to non querier mode e Non Querier Snooping switch is in Non Querier mode in the VLAN If the querier expiry interval timer is expires the snooping switch will move into querier mode e Disabled Snooping Querier is not operational on the VLAN The Snooping Querier moves to disabled mode when MLD Snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured Operational Version Displays the operational MLD protocol version of the querier Last Querier Address Displays the IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Last Querier Version Displays the MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN Operational Max Response Displays maximum response time to be used
363. erface If you do not choose to use authentication you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple authentication you cannot use a key of more than eight octets If you choose encrypt the key may be up to 16 octets long The key value will only be displayed if you are logged on with Read Write privileges otherwise it will be displayed as asterisks 14 Use Authentication Key ID to enter the ID to be used for authentication You will only be prompted to enter an ID when you select Encrypt as the authentication type The ID is a number between 0 ad 255 inclusive 15 Use Metric Cost to enter the link cost OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths The range is from 1 to 65 535 16 Click APPLY to update the switch with the configured settings 17 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description IP Address The IP address of the interface Subnet Mask The network mask indicating the portion of the IP address that identifies the attached network LSA Ack Intervian secs The number of seconds to wait before sending a delayed acknowledgement Routing 244 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description State The current state of the selected router interface One of e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values A
364. ermined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Received The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Received The number of ICMP destination unreachable communication administratively prohibited messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages Received The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Parameter Problem Messages Received The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages Received The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages Received The number of ICMP Echo request messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages Received The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages Received The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Router Advertisement Messages Received The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages Received The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement Messages Received The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by
365. es e UDP Relay Global Configuration on page 57 e UDP Relay Interface Configuration on page 58 UDP Relay Global Configuration To display the UDP Relay Global Configuration page click System gt Services gt UDP Relay gt UDP Relay Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays UDP Relay UDP Relay Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable UDP Relay Global Configuration Server UDP Port Hit To configure UDP relay 1 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the UDP Relay on the switch The default value is disable 2 Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x x x x format 3 Use UDP Port to specify the UDP Destination Port These ports are supported e DefaultSet Relay UDP port 0 packets This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating the Relay server e dhcp Relay DHCP UDP port 67 packets e domain Relay DNS UDP port 53 packets e isakmp Relay ISAKMP UDP port 500 packets e mobile ip Relay Mobile IP UDP port 434 packets e nameserver Relay IEN 116 Name Service UDP port 42 packets e netbios dgm Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server UDP port 138 packets e netbios ns Relay NetBIOS Name Server UDP port 137 packets e ntp Relay network time protocol UDP port 123 packets e pim auto rp Relay PIM auto RP UDP port 496 packets Configuring System Information 57 ProSafe M5300 Switch e rip Relay RIP UDP port 520 packets e tacacs
366. es IPv6 Unicast Routes The maximum number of IPv6 unicast forwarding table entries ECMP Next Hops The maximum number of next hops that can be installed in the IPv4 and IPv6 unicast forwarding tables IPv4 Multicast Routes The maximum number of IPv4 multicast forwarding table entries IPv6 Multicast Routes The maximum number of IPv6 multicast forwarding table entries License From the License link under the System tab you can view information about the switch license Note The Licence feature is not available on all switch models The License link provides access to the following pages e License Key on page 43 e License Features on page 44 License Key Use the License Key page to view information about the license s on the device Some features might require a special license in order to be active If a license is not active the feature associated with the license is not available and cannot be configured To display the License Key page click System gt License gt License Key A screen similar to the following displays Configuring System Information 43 ProSafe M5300 Switch License Key License Key License Date Sept 9 2012 License Copy z License Status Active Description License key is active The following table describes the non configurable fields on the License Key page Field Description License Date The date the license is purchased License Copy The number of
367. es may be defined on a per class instance basis and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class Then one or more classes are added to a policy Policies are then added to interfaces Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet The all class type option defines that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class The any class type option defines that at least one match criteria must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class Classes are tested in the order in which they were added to the policy A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found To display the DiffServ Configuration page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Basic gt DiffServ Configuration Configuring Quality of Service 341 ProSafe M5300 Switch DiffServ Configuration DiffServ Configuration DiffServ Admin Mode 5 Disable Enable Status Class Table 32 Class Rule table 416 Policy table 64 Policy Instance table 1792 Policy Attributes table 5376 Service table 480 Field Description DiffServ Admin Mode The options mode for DiffServ The default value is enable While disabled the DiffServ configuration is retained when saved and can be changed but it is not activated When enabled Diffserv services are activated Class ta
368. es take effect immediately 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring Switching Information 170 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Snooping Querier Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for MLD Snooping Querier Note that only a user with Read Write access privileges may change the data on this screen To access the MLD Snooping Querier Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Querier Configuration MLD Snooping Querier Configuration MLD Snooping Querier Configuration Querier Admin Mode Disable Enable Querier Address 33 MLD Version 1 Query Interval secs 60 Querier Expiry Interval secs 60 VLAN Ids Enabled for MLD Snooping Querier 1 Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD Snooping for the switch The default is disable 2 Use Querier Address to specify the Snooping Querier Address to be used as source address in periodic MLD queries This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent The supported IPv6 formats are x x x x X X x x and XX 3 Use MLD Version to specify the MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries MLD queries 4 Use Query Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier The Query Interval must be a value i
369. escribes the way AS external LSAs are flooded e MC This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications e O This describes whether Opaque LSAs are supported e V This describes whether OSPF extensions for VPN COS are supported Click REFRESH to show the latest OSPF Link State information Virtual Link Configuration Use the OSPF Virtual Link Configuration page to create or configure virtual interface information for a specific area and neighbor A valid OSPF area must be configured before this page can be displayed To display the Virtual Link Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Virtual Link Configuration Virtual Link Configuration OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Aran iD Neighbor Router Hello Dealiin Iftransit Delay ID Interval Interval Retransmit Authentication Authentication Authentication Neighbor Metric Interval Type Key ID State To configure an OSPF virtual link 1 Use Area ID to enter the area ID of the OSPF area Virtual links may be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area 2 Use Neighbor Router ID to enter the neighbor portion of a Virtual Link specification Virtual links may be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area Routing 252 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Use Hello Interval to enter
370. ess is 192 168 1 0 through 192 168 1 255 inclusive will be allowed access To allow access from only one station use a Client IP Mask value of 255 255 255 255 and use that machine s IP address for Client Address 3 Client IP Mask Taken together the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access this device If either Client Address or IP Mask value is 0 0 0 0 access is allowed from any IP address Otherwise every client s address is ANDed with the mask as is the Client Address and if the values are equal access is allowed For example if the Client Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 then any client whose IP address is 192 168 1 0 through 192 168 1 255 inclusive will be allowed access To allow access from only one station use a Client IP Mask value of 255 255 255 255 and use that machine s IP address for Client Address 4 Use Access Mode to specify the access level for this community by selecting Read Write or Read Only from the pull down menu 5 Use Status to specify the status of this community by selecting Enable or Disable from the pull down menu If you select enable the Community Name must be unique among all valid Community Names or the set request will be rejected If you select disable the Community Name will become invalid Click ADD to add the currently selected community to the switch 7 Click DELETE to
371. evice Security 421 ProSafe M5300 Switch DAI Configuration To display the DAI Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection Global Configuration Validate Source MAC Disable Enable Validate Destination MAC Disable Enable Validate IP Disable Enable To configure global DAI settings 1 Use Validate Source MAC to choose the DAI Source MAC Validation Mode for the switch by selecting Enable or Disable radio button If you select Enable Sender MAC validation for the ARP packets will be enabled The factory default is disable Use Validate Destination MAC to choose the DAI Destination MAC Validation Mode for the switch by selecting Enable or Disable radio button If you select Enable Destination MAC validation for the ARP Response packets will be enabled The factory default is disable Use Validate IP to choose the DAI IP Validation Mode for the switch by selecting Enable or Disable radio button If you select Enable IP Address validation for the ARP packets will be enabled The factory default is disable DAI VLAN Configuration To display the DAI VLAN Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI VLAN Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration VLAN Configuration Dynamic Logging VLAN B ARP Invalid ARP ACL Name aa Inspection Packets 9 C
372. ew Telnet Sessions are enabled new outbound telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available If Allow New Telnet Sessions are disabled no new outbound telnet sessions are established An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends the session 1 Use Allow New Telnet Sessions to specify whether the new Outbound Telnet Session is Enabled or Disabled Default value is Enabled 2 Use Maximum Number of Sessions to specify the maximum number of Outbound Telnet Sessions allowed Default value is 5 Valid Range is 0 to 5 3 Use Session Timeout to specify the Outbound Telnet login inactivity time out Default value is 5 Valid Range is 1 to 160 4 Current Number of Sessions Displays the number of current sessions Console Port To display the Console Port page click Security gt Access gt Console Port Console Port Console Port Serial Port Login Timeout minutes i Baud Rate bps 115200 Character Size bits 8 Flow Control Disable Stop Bits 1 Parity None Login Authentication List defaultList Enable Authentication List enableList e To configure console port settings 1 Use Serial Port Login Timeout minutes to specify how many minutes of inactivity should occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the connection Enter a number between 0 and 160 the factory default is 5 Entering 0 disables t
373. ext sensitive For example if the IP Addressing page is open the help topic for that page displays if you click Help User Defined Fields User defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters unless otherwise noted on the configuration Web page All characters may be used except for the following unless specifically noted in for that feature lt gt Using SNMP The ProSafe software supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP agent generates ProSafe use both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that support additional switch functionality All private MIBs begin with a prefix The main object for interface configuration is in SWITCHING MIB which is a private MIB Some interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB IF MIB SNMP is enabled by default The System gt Management gt System Information Web page which is the page that displays after a successful login displays the information you need to configure an SNMP manager to access the switch Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol but for authentication and encryption the switch supports only one user which is admin therefore there is only one profile that can be created or modified To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by using the Web interface 1 Navigate to the System gt SNMP gt SNMPv3
374. f OSPF packets discarded because the area ID in the OSPF header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface Invalid Destination Address The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet s destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast addresses Wrong Authentication Type The number of packets discarded because the authentication type specified in the OSPF header does not match the authentication type configured on the ingress interface Authentication Failure The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender s IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor No Neighbor at Source Address The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender s IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor Invalid OSPF Packet Type The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPF header is not a known type Hellos Ignored The number of received Hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit has been reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole Routing 247 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Hellos Sent The number of Hello packets sent on th
375. f each class instance within the policy Service Interface Configuration Use the Service Interface Configuration page to activate a policy on an interface To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Service Interface Configuration Service Interface Configuration Service Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface GO Policy I T Ba ms _ aA 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 To configure DiffServ policy settings on an interface 1 Use Interface to select the interface on which you will configure the DiffServ service 2 Policy Name Lists all the policy names from which one can be selected This field is not shown for Read Write users where inbound service policy attachment is not supported by the platform Field Description Direction Shows that the traffic direction of this service interface is In Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface either Up or Down Configuring Quality of Service 351 ProSafe M5300 Switch Service Statistics This screen displays class oriented statistical information for the policy which is specified by the interface and direction The Member Classes drop down list is populated on the basis of the specified interface and direction and hence the attached policy if any Highlighting a member class name displays the statistica
376. f weeks when the schedule will be triggered If number of weeks is not specified then the schedule will be triggered every week e WeekDay Specify the days of week when the schedule should operates e Monthly The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence e Monthly Mode Show the day of the month when the schedule will be triggered Field Every Month s means that the schedule will be triggered every defined number of months 7 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest values 8 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch The configuration changes take effect immediately Configuring System Information 117 ProSafe M5300 Switch Configuring System Information 118 Contiguring Switching Information Use the features in the Switching tab to define Layer 2 features The Switching tab contains links to the following features e VLANs on page 119 e Auto VolP Configuration on page 134 e iSCSI on page 139 e Spanning Tree Protocol on page 143 e Multicast on page 156 e MVR Configuration on page 173 e Address Table on page 177 e Ports on page 181 e Link Aggregation Groups on page 184 VLANs Adding Virtual LAN VLAN support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both bridging and routing Like a bridge a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2 header which is fast and like a router it partitions the network into logic
377. face The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the loopback interface The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the loopback interface System Date The current date and time If the system has not synchronized with an SNTP server the system time and date is probably incorrect by many years System Up Time The time in days hours and minutes since the last switch reboot Current SNTP Sync Status Indicates whether the system time has synchronized with an SNTP server Success or has not attempted or failed to synchronize with an SNTP server Other System SNMP OID System Mac Address The base object ID for the switch s enterprise MIB Universally assigned network address Supported Java Plugin Version The supported version of Java plugin Current SNTP Synchronized Time The current date and time if the system time has been synchronized with an SNTP server otherwise this field is Not Synchronized Configuring System Information 21 ProSafe M5300 Switch FAN Status The screen shows the status of the fans in all units These fans remove the heat generated by the power CPU and other chipsets allowing the chipsets to work normally Fan status has three possible values OK Failure Not Applicable NA The following table describes the Fan Status information Field Description Unit ID The stack member unit identifier assigned to the switch which the fan bel
378. face Queue Configuration 1 LAGS All Go To Interface Mi interface Queue EEA Scheduler Type Queue Management Type ee a 1 0 1 Weighted C E 1 0 2 Weighted TailDrop 1 0 3 Weighted TailDrop 1 0 4 Weighted TailDrop 1 0 5 Weighted TailDrop 1 0 6 Weighted TailDrop 1 0 7 Weighted TailDrop To configure CoS queue settings for an interface 1 Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure You can select multiple ports and LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces Select the check box in the heading row to apply a trust mode or rate to all interfaces 2 Configure any of the following settings e Queue ID Use the menu to select the queue to be configured platform based Configuring Quality of Service 336 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Use Minimum Bandwidth to specify the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allotted to this queue Setting this value higher than its corresponding Maximum Bandwidth automatically increases the maximum to the same value Default value is 0 Valid Range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1 The value 0 means no guaranteed minimum Sum of individual Minimum Bandwidth values for all queues in the selected interface cannot exceed defined maximum 100 e Use Scheduler Type to specify the type of scheduling used for this queue Options are Weighted and Strict Defining on a per queue basis allows the user to create the desired service characteristics for different types of traffi
379. face specified in the VLAN ID field to the switch configuration 5 Click DELETE to remove the VLAN Routing Interface specified in the VLAN ID field from the switch configuration Field Description Port The interface assigned to the VLAN for routing MAC Address The MAC Address assigned to the VLAN Routing Interface ARP The ARP protocol associates a layer 2 MAC address with a layer 3 IPv4 address ProSafe software features both dynamic and manual ARP configuration With manual ARP configuration you can statically add entries into the ARP table ARP is a necessary part of the internet protocol IP and is used to translate an IP address to a media MAC address defined by a local area network LAN such as Ethernet A station needing to send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination or of the next hop router if the destination is not on the same subnet This is achieved by broadcasting an ARP request packet to which the intended recipient responds by unicasting an ARP reply containing its MAC address Once learned the MAC address is used in the destination address field of the layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each station on a network ARP cache entries are learned by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response Thus when an ARP request is broadcast to all stati
380. face to reach a relay server In the Destination IP Address field specify an IPv6 Address to reach a relay server In the Remote ID field specify the relay agent information option The remote ID needs to be derived from the DHCPv6 server DUID and the relay interface number or it can be specified as a user defined string Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Configuring System Information 67 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stacking A stackable switch is a switch that is fully functional operating as a stand alone unit but can also be set up to operate together with up to seven other switches This group of switches shows the characteristics of a single switch while having the port capacity of the sum of the combined switches From the Stacking link under the System tab you can access the following pages e Stack Configuration on page 72 e Stack Port Configuration on page 74 e Stack Port Diagnostics on page 76 e Stack Firmware Synchronization on page 77 One of the switches in the stack controls the operation of the stack This switch is called the stack master The remaining switches in the stack are stack members The stack members use stacking technology to behave and work together as a unified system Layer 2 and higher protocols present t
381. ffect for any of the IPv6 ACL rules To display the IPv6 Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IPv6 Rules IPv6 Rules IPv6 Rules ACL Name ipv6ACL IPv6 ACL Rule Table Source ane Assign Mirror Redirect Match Source Action Logging Protocol Prefix Queue ID Interface Interface Every Prefix Length ae Disable False 4 IPv6 2001 db8 32 Destination ee ele pene Flo pscp Rate Limit Conform Rate Limit Prefix laadib le La he I oie Data Rate Burst Size ftpdata 1 To add an IP ACL rule select the ACL ID to add the rule to select the check box in the Extended ACL Rule table and click ADD The page displays the extended ACL Rule Configuration fields as the following figure shows IPv6 ACL Rule Configuration IPv6 ACL Rule Configuration ACL Name ipv6ACL Rule ID 1 Action Permit Egress Queue Deny Logging Disable Enable Mirror Interface v Redirect Interface iB Match Every Disable Enable Protocol Type IPv6 to 255 Source Prefix PrefixLength 2001 db8 Source L4 Port ftp i E 0 to 65535 Destination Prefix PrefixLength Destination L4 Port ftpdata v _ 0 to 65535 Flow Label 0 to 1048575 IP DSCP Service L z Rate Limit Conform Data Rate Rate Limit Burst Size Time Range Managing Device Security 450 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Rule ID to enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 12 that will
382. fficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces Each instance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree RSTP with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP IEEE 802 1D is the ability to configure and recognize full duplex connectivity and ports which are connected to end stations resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification These features are represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge Note For two bridges to be in the same region the force version should be 802 1s and their configuration name digest key and revision level should match For additional information about regions and their effect on network topology refer to the IEEE 802 1Q standard From the VLAN link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 143 e Advanced on page 145 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e STP Configuration on page 143 STP Configuration The Spanning Tree Configuration Status page contains fields for enabling STP on the swit
383. fic is inherently time sensitive for a network to provide acceptable service the transmission rate is vital The priority level enables the separation of voice and data traffic entering the port To display the Voice VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Global Admin Admin Mode Disable Enable Voice VLAN Configuration 1 2 All Go To Interface CoS O d 0 ti I Interface Interface Mode Value Jeet pora Mode n C a ___ __ 1 0 1 Disable Disable Lum 1 0 2 Disable Disable Disable 1 0 3 Disable Disable Disable 1 0 4 Disable Disable Disable 1 0 5 Disable Disable Disable 1 0 6 Disable Disable Disable To configure Voice VLAN settings 1 Use Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for Voice VLAN on the switch The default is disable 2 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 3 Use Interface Mode to select the Voice VLAN mode for selected interface s e Disable Default value e None Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic e VLAN ID Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic e dot1p Configure Voice Vlan 802 1p priority tagging for voice traffic When this is selected please enter the dot1p value in the Value field e Untag
384. fig MAC Filter Create Filter MAC Address 3 Source Port Members Portt1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Destination Port Members Managing Device Security 397 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure MAC filter settings 1 Select Create Filter from the MAC Filter menu a This is the list of MAC address and VLAN ID pairings for all configured filters To change the port mask s for an existing filter select the entry you want to change To add a new filter select Create Filter from the top of the list From the VLAN ID menu select the VLAN to use with the MAC address to fully identify packets you want filtered You can change this field only when the Create Filter option is selected from the MAC Filter menu In the MAC Address field specify the MAC address of the filter in the format 00 01 1A B2 53 4D You can change this field when you have selected the Create Filter option You cannot define filters for the following MAC addresses e 00 00 00 00 00 00 e 01 80 C2 00 00 00 to 01 80 C2 00 00 0F e 01 80 C2 00 00 20 to 01 80 C2 00 00 21 e FF FF FF FF FF FF Click the orange bar to display the available ports and select the port s to include in the inbound filter If a packet with the MAC address and VLAN ID you specify is received on a port that is not in the list it will be dropped
385. figuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI Interface Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection Interface Configuration DAI Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Interface Trust Mode Rate Limit pps Burst Interval secs 1 0 1 Disable 15 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 1 0 6 Disable To configure DAI interface settings 1 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Trust Mode to indicate whether the interface is trusted for Dynamic ARP Inspection purpose If this object is set to Enable the interface is trusted ARP packets coming to this interface will be forwarded without checking If this object is set to Disable the interface is not trusted ARP packets coming to this interface will be subjected to ARP inspection The factory default is disable 3 Use Rate Limit pps to specify rate limit value for Dynamic ARP Inspection purpose If the incoming rate of ARP packets exceeds the value of this object for consecutively burst interval seconds ARP packets will be dropped If this value is None there is no limit The factory default is 15pps packets per second 4 Use Burst Interval secs to specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purpose on this interface If the rate limit is None burst interval has no mea
386. for the selected Use LSDB Type to select the type of Link Advertisement associated with the specified area and address range The default type is Network Summary Use Advertise to select Enable or Disable If you select Enable the address range will be advertised outside the area via a Network Summary LSA The default is Enable Click ADD to add the new address range to the switch Click DELETE to remove the specified address range from the area configuration Routing 265 ProSafe M5300 Switch Interface Configuration Use the OSPF v3 Interface Configuration page to create and configure OSPFv3 interfaces To display the Interface Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration OSPFv3 Interface Configuration OSPFv3 Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS TUNNELS All Interface Ares 3D Admin Router Retransmit Hello ace Mode Priority Interval Interval 0 0 0 A L m 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 5 10 F 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 Disable i 5 10 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 5 10 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 5 10 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 Disable 1 5 10 siege Backu Number MTU Passive Designated p Metric Delay Network Type Designated of Link Ignore Mode Router Cost eoor mT C LA Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast Disable Disable Broadcast To configure an interface for OSPFv3 ro
387. format of either type If system is not stacked e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 STKO MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a message with severity 7 15 mod 8 debug on a system that is not stack and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged If the system is stacked e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 0 0 0 0 1 MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a message with severity 7 15 mod 8 debug on a system that is stacked and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged with system IP 0 0 0 0 and task id 1 Format of the messages e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 STKO MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a user level message 1 with severity 7 debug ona system that is not stack and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have an identical format to the above message e Total number of Messages For the message log only the latest 200 entries
388. frames on the interface Rate Limit Burst Size Specify the number of bytes allowed in a temporary traffic burst Burst Rate Time Range Select the name of the time range that will impose a time limitation on the ACL rule If a time range with the specified name does not exist and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied immediately If a time range with specified name exists and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied when the time range with specified name becomes active The ACL rule is removed when the time range with specified name becomes inactive To delete an IP ACL rule select the check box associated with the rule and then click DELETE Managing Device Security 444 ProSafe M5300 Switch 4 To update an IP ACL rule select the check box associated with the rule update the desired fields and then click APPLY You cannot modify the Rule ID of an existing IP rule 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 6 If you change any of the settings on the page click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately IP Extended Rules Use these screens to configure the rules for the IP Access Control Lists created using the IP Access Control List Configuration screen What is shown on this s
389. from 0 to 65535 e Select one of the keyword from the list DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range Use Destination Prefix Prefix Length to enter up to 128 bit prefix combined with prefix length to be compared to a packet s destination IP Address as a match criteria for the selected IPv6 ACL rule Prefix length can be in the range 0 to 128 Use Destination L4 Port to specify a packet s destination layer 4 port as a match condition for the selected IPv6 ACL rule Destination port information is optional Destination port information can be specified in two ways e Select keyword other from the drop down menu and specify the number of the port in the range from 0 to 65535 e Select one of the keyword from the list DOMAIN ECHO FTP FTPDATA HTTP SMTP SNMP TELNET TFTP and WWW Each of these values translates into its equivalent port number which is used as both the start and end of the port range Flow label is 20 bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet used by end stations to signify quality of service handling in routers Flow label can specified within the range 0 to 1048575 Use IPv6 DSCP Service to specify the IP DiffServ Code Point DSCP field The DSCP is defined as the high order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IPv6 header This is an optional configuratio
390. fy the configuration To display the Protected Ports Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Protected Ports Protected Ports Configuration Protected Ports Configuration Group ID Group Name prot_port1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 viv v 49 50 51 52 To configure protected ports 1 Use Group ID to identify a group of protected ports that can be combined into a logical group Traffic can flow between protected ports belonging to different groups but not within the same group The selection box lists all the possible protected port Group IDs supported for the current platform The valid range of the Group ID is 0 to 2 2 Use the optional Group Name field to associate a name with the protected ports group used for identification purposes It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks The default is blank This field is optional 3 Click the orange bar to display the available ports Click the box below each port to configure as a protected port The selection list consists of physical ports protected as well as unprotected The protected ports are tick marked to differentiate between them No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports If left unconfigured the default state is unprotected No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports
391. g this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Import Summary LSAs The summary LSAs will be enabled disabled imported into this area Click ADD to configure the area as a common area Click DELETE to delete the common area Routing 237 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stub Area Configuration To display the Stub Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Stub Area Configuration Stub Area Configuration OSPF Stub Area Configuration Area SPF Border Area LSA Type of Default Cost Runs Router Checksum SE ai Service Count Mm 0 0 0 3 Enable 1 Normal To configure an OSPF stub area 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format tha
392. g information e Rules Displays the number of rules currently configured for the MAC ACL e Direction Displays the direction of packet traffic affected by the MAC ACL which can be Inbound or blank 2 To delete a MAC ACL select the check box next to the Name field then click DELETE 3 To change the name of a MAC ACL select the check box next to the Name field update the name then click APPLY 4 Click ADD to add a new MAC ACL to the switch configuration MAC Rules Use the MAC Rules page to define rules for MAC based ACLs The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or discarded A default deny all rule is the last rule of every list To display the MAC Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt MAC Rules macACL Rule Table Assign Mirror Redirect Match Destination MAC Action Destinati SSS Queue Id T ET T TES ro eae A Ca A 3C A2 32 62 F2 CA EtherType Rate Limit Conform Rate Limit Time Rule EtherType Ke Source MAC Source MAC Mask E YP id User ogging _ Rate Burst Size Range Status FC BB 32 62 31 L To configure MAC ACL rules 1 From the ACL Name field specify the existing MAC ACL to which the rule will apply To set up a new MAC ACL use the MAC Binding Table on page 6 441 2 To add a new rule enter a whole number in the range of 1 to 12 that will be used to identify the rule configure the follo
393. g to download files 492 HTTPS 373 IEEE 802 11x 518 IEEE 802 1AB 93 IEEE 802 1D 143 IEEE 802 1Q 119 143 IEEE 802 1s 143 IEEE 802 1w 143 IEEE 802 1X 359 IGMP 158 interface LAG 184 logical 17 naming convention 17 physical 17 queue configuration 336 337 IP DSCP 332 Mapping 334 L LAG VLAN 184 LAGPDUs 184 LAGs 184 Membership 186 Static 184 LLDP 93 LLDP MED 93 M MAC 158 filter summary 399 rules 438 MD5 35 MIBs 16 multicast traffic controlling 132 N navigation 11 P port authentication 386 summary 393 product registration 503 Q QoS 331 802 1p to Queue Mapping 333 ProSafe M5300 Switch R RADIUS 355 server 359 reboot 485 registration disabling 503 product 503 serial number 503 reset configuration to defaults 486 switch 485 RSTP 143 S Simple Network Time Protocol 34 SNMP traps 89 using 16 v1 v2 87 SNTP 34 server configuration 38 server status 39 SSL 373 storm control 412 STP 143 example configuration 521 Status 143 Stratum 0 34 134 2 34 T T1 34 T2 34 T3 34 T4 34 TACACS folder 365 settings 365 technical support 2 time 34 levels 34 trademarks 2 traffic control 397 trap flags 90 529 U Unicast 35 upload configuration 487 V VLAN 119 example configuration 509 guest 518 ID 119 managing 119 Port VLAN ID 125 PVID 125 VolP 134 ProSafe M5300 Switch 530
394. ged Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic 4 Use Value to enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value This field is available only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as Interface Mode 5 Use CoS Override Mode to select the Cos Override mode for selected interface e Enabled The port ignores the 802 1p priority value in the Ethernet frames it receives from connected devices e Disabled The port trusts the priority value in the received frame The default is disable Configuring Switching Information 131 ProSafe M5300 Switch 6 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 7 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Operational State This is the operational status of the voice vlan on the given interface To be enabled Voice VLAN must be globally enabled and enabled on the interface Additionally the interface must be up and have a link GARP Switch Configuration The switch supports Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP and GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GVRP relies on the services provided by GARP to provide IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN pruning and dynamic VLAN creation on 802 1Q trunk ports GMRP uses GARP services to help control the flooding of multicast traffic by keeping track of group membership information Note It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect To display
395. gnated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router The State is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled Designated Router The identity of the Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Designated Router is identified here by its router ID The value 0 0 0 0 means that there is no Designated Router This field is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled Routing 268 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Backup Designated Router The identity of the Backup Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Backup Designated Router is identified here by its router ID Set to 0 0 0 0 if there is no Backup Designated Router This field is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled Number of Link Events This is the number of times the specified OSPF v3 interface has changed its state This field is only displayed if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled Interface Statistics This screen displays statistics for the selected interface The information will be displayed only if OSPF v3 is enabled To display the Interface Statistics page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Interface Statistics OSPF v3 Interface Statistics OSPF v3 Interface Selection Interface OSPFv3 Interface Statistics OSPFv3 Area ID Area Borde
396. gt Logs gt Buffered Logs Buffered Logs Buffered Logs Aden Statws Osable Enable Reaver Wrap Message Log Total number of Messages 1292 lt 14 gt JAN O3 23 40 43 10 27 34 S2 2 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 2026 1882 5 Autolnatall Waning for retry mesut lt 14 gt JAN O3 23 40 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_comtrol c 3523 1881 4 OHOP option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 21 20 lt 124 gt JAN O3 23 30 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 2026 1752 Autolnatall Waiting for retry tenet lt 14 gt JAN 03 23 30 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_comtrol c 3523 1751 4 DHCP option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 11 20 lt 14 gt JAN 03 23 20 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 2026 1750 Autolnstall Waiting for retry teneout lt 14 gt JAN 03 23 20 43 10 27 34 52 1 AUTO_INST 427012512 auto_install_control c 3523 1749 DHCP option resolved TFTP IP address 10 9 11 20 lt 13 gt DAN 03 23 20 01 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1948147584 traputil c 614 1748 Spanning Tree Topology Change O Unit 1 lt 13 gt JAN 03 23 20 01 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1948147584 traputil c 614 1747 Spanning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unk 1 Slot O Port 22 lt 13 gt JAN O3 23 20 00 10 27 34 52 1 TRAPMGR 1948147584 traputil c 614 1746 Spenning Tree Topology Change Received MSTID 0 Unt 1 Slot O Port
397. guration GARP Port Configuration GARP Port Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface GO Leave Port GVRP Port GMRP Join Timer Leave All Interface Timer s E Mode Mode centisecs Timer centisecs m 0 1 CJ tJ CE C 1 0 2 Disable Disable 20 1000 1 0 3 Disable Disable 20 1000 1 0 4 Disable Disable 20 1000 1 0 5 Disable Disable 20 1000 1 0 6 Disable Disable 20 1000 To configure the per interface GARP settings 1 2 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces Use Port GVRP Mode to choose the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol administrative mode for the port by selecting enable or disable from the dropdown list If you select disable the protocol will not be active and the Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time will have no effect The factory default is disable Use Port GMRP Mode to choose the GARP Multicast Registration Protocol administrative mode for the port by selecting enable or disable from the dropdown list If you select disable the protocol will not be active and Join Time Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect The factory default is disable Use Join Time centiseconds to specify the time between the transmission of GARP PDUs registering or re registering membership for a VLAN or multicast group in centiseconds Enter a number between 10 and 100 0 1 to 1
398. gure e Absolute The timer occurs once e Periodic The timer occurs periodically at regular intervals The fields available for the timer schedule configuration depend on the selected timer type 3 In the Timer Schedule Entry menu select new to configure a new schedule or select an existing entry to change its settings 4 Specify the start and end times for the timer in the appropriate fields The time range is from 00 00 to 23 59 5 Specify the start and end dates for the timer by clicking the calendar icon and selecting the date If the timer schedule is periodic you can specify that there is no end date Configuring System Information 116 ProSafe M5300 Switch 6 Use the Recurrence Pattern to show with what period the event will repeat These fields are available only if the scheduler type is periodic If recurrence is not needed a timer schedule should be triggered just once then set Date Stop as equal to Date Start There are the following possible values of recurrence e Daily The timer schedule works with daily recurrence e Daily Mode Every WeekDay selection means that the schedule will be triggered every day from Monday to Friday Every Day s selection means that the schedule will be triggered every defined number of days If number of days is not specified then the schedule will be triggered every day e Weekly The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence e Every Week s Define the number o
399. gured for redistribution by OSPF The valid values are Static Connected and RIP 2 Use Redistribute Option to enable or disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol 3 Use Metric to set the metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes This field displays the metric if the source was pre configured and can be modified The valid values are 0 to 16777214 4 Use Metric Type to set the OSPF metric type of redistributed routes 5 Use Tag to set the tag field in routes redistributed This field displays the tag if the source was pre configured otherwise 0 and can be modified The valid values are 0 to 4294967295 6 Use Subnets to set whether the subnetted routes should be redistributed 7 Use Distribute List to set the Access List that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol Only permitted routes are redistributed If this command refers to a non existent access list all routes are permitted The valid values for Access List IDs are 1 to 199 When used for route filtering the only fields in an access list that get used are e Source IP Address and netmask e Destination IP Address and netmask e Action permit or deny All other fields source and destination port precedence ToS and so on are ignored Routing 255 ProSafe M5300 Switch NSF OSPF Summary Use the NSF OSPF Configuration page to configure the non stop forwarding NSF support mode and to v
400. h an IP will be bound 2 Use Direction to specify the packet filtering direction for ACL Valid directions are Inbound 3 Use Sequence Number to specify the order of the specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction A lower number indicates higher precedence order If a sequence number is already in use for this VLAN and direction the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number If the sequence number is not specified by the user i e the value is 0 a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this VLAN and direction will be used Valid range is 1 to 4294967295 4 Use ACL Type to specify the type of ACL Valid ACL Types include IP ACL MAC ACL and IPv6 ACL 5 Use ACL ID to display all the ACLs configured depending on the ACL Type selected 6 Click APPLY to add the configured ACL to VLAN binding 7 To delete a VLAN ACL to interface binding select the check box next to the VLAN and click DELETE Managing Device Security 455 ProSafe M5300 Switch Managing Device Security 456 Monitoring the System Use the features available from the Monitoring tab to view a variety of information about the switch and its ports and to configure how the switch monitors events The Monitoring tab contains links to the following features e Ports on page 457 e Logs on page 468 e Port Mirroring on pag
401. he authenticator to the supplicant device Vlan ID This field displays vlan id assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device Vlan Assigned This field displays reason for the vlan id assigned by the authenticator to the supplicant device Session Timeout This field displays Session Timeout set by the Radius Server to the supplicant device Termination Action This field displays Termination Action set by the Radius Server to the supplicant device Managing Device Security 396 ProSafe M5300 Switch Traffic Control From the Traffic Control link you can configure MAC Filters Storm Control Port Security and Protected Port settings To display the page click the Security gt Traffic Control tab The Traffic Control folder contains links to the following features e MAC Filter on page 397 e Port Security on page 399 e Private Group on page 404 e Protected Ports Configuration on page 406 e Storm Control on page 412 MAC Filter The MAC Filter folder contains links to the following features e MAC Filter Configuration on page 397 e MAC Filter Summary on page 399 MAC Filter Configuration Use the MAC Filter Configuration page to create MAC filters that limit the traffic allowed into and out of specified ports on the system To display the MAC Filter Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt MAC Filter gt MAC Filter Configuration MAC Filter Configuration MAC Filter Con
402. he device This field cannot be set if a Redirect Interface is already configured for the ACL rule This field is visible for a Permit Action e Match Every Select true or false from the pull down menu True signifies that all packets will match the selected IP ACL and Rule and will be either permitted or denied In this case since all packets match the rule the option of configuring other match criteria will not be offered To configure specific match criteria for the rule Managing Device Security 446 ProSafe M5300 Switch remove the rule and re create it or re configure Match Every to False for the other match criteria to be visible Protocol Keyword Specify that a packet s IP protocol is a match condition for the selected IP ACL rule The possible values are ICMP IGMP IP TCP and UDP TCP Flag Specify that a packet s TCP flag is a match condition for the selected IP ACL rule The TCP flag values are URG ACK PSH RST SYN FIN Each TCP flag has these possible values below and can be set separately e Ignore A packet matches this ACL rule whatever the TCP flag in this packet is set or not e Set A packet matches this ACL rule if the TCP flag in this packet is set e Clear A packet matches this ACL rule if the TCP flag in this packet is not set Src IP Address Enter an IP address using dotted decimal notation to be compared to a packet s source IP Address as a match criteria for the selected IP ACL rule
403. he entire switch stack as a single entity to the network The stack master is the single point of stack wide management From the stack master you configure the following e System level global features that apply to all stack members e Interface level features for all interfaces on any stack member A switch stack is identified in the network by its network IP address The network IP address is assigned according to the MAC address of the stack master Every stack member is uniquely identified by its own stack member number which is from 1 6 The stack master can be any number within that range Stack Features Stacking on the ProSafe M5300 switches supports the following e Up to eight switches per stack which can be any combination of the following switch models e M5300 Series all models e GSM7328S e GSM7352S e GSM7328FS e GSM7328Sv2 e GSM7352Sv2 e GSM7228PS e GSM7252PS Configuring System Information 68 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Single IP address management through a web browser the CLI or SNMP e Master slave configuration e The master retains configuration for entire stack e Automatic detection of new members with synchronization of firmware upgrade or downgrade as needed e Configuration updates across the stack through a single operation e Automatic master fail over Fully resilient stack with chain and ring topology e Hot swapping insertion and removal of stack members Firmware Synchro
404. he list includes other as an option for the unnamed ports Destination IP Address This is a valid destination IP address in the dotted decimal format DestinationMask This is a bit mask in IP dotted decimal format indicating which part s of the destination IP Address to use for matching against packet content Destination L4 Port This lists the keywords for the known destination layer 4 ports from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the unnamed ports IP DSCP This lists the keywords for the known DSCP values from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values Precedence Value This lists the keywords for the IP Precedence value in the range 0 to 7 IP ToS Configure the IP ToS field e ToS Bits This is the Type of Service octet value in the range 00 to ff to compare against e ToS Mask This indicates which ToS bits are subject to comparison against the Service Type value Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Configuring Quality of Service 345 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Class Configuration Use the IPv6 Class Configuration page to add a new IPv6 DiffServ class name or to rename or delete an existing class The page also allows yo
405. he range of 1 to 1023 that will be used to identify the rule Use Action to specify what action should be taken if a packet matches the rule s criteria The choices are permit or deny Use Destination MAC to specify the destination MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is xx xx xx xx xx xx The BPDU keyword may be specified using a Destination MAC address of 01 80 C2 xx xx xx Use Destination MAC Mask to specify the destination MAC address mask specifying which bits in the destination MAC to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is XX XX XX XX XX XX The BPDU keyword may be specified using a Destination MAC mask of 00 00 00 ff ff ff Click ADD to add a new rule to the ACL based on destination MAC Managing Device Security 436 ProSafe M5300 Switch 7 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected Rule from the ACL based on destination MAC 8 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 9 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Basic The Basic folder contains links to the following features e MAC ACL on page 437 e MAC Rules on page 438 e MAC Binding Configuration on page 440 e MAC Binding Table on page 441 MAC ACL AMAC ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criter
406. he time out 2 Use Baud Rate bps to select the default baud rate for the serial port connection from the pull down menu You may choose from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 baud The factory default is 9600 baud 3 Use Login Authentication List to specify which authentication list to use when you login through Telnet The default value is defaultList 4 Use Enable Authentication List to specify which authentication list you are using when going into the privileged EXEC mode The default value is enableList Managing Device Security 381 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Character Size bits The number of bits in a character This is always 8 Flow Control Whether hardware flow control is enabled or disabled It is always disabled Stop Bits The number of stop bits per character Its is always 1 Parity The parity method used on the serial port It is always None Denial of Service Use this page to configure settings that help prevent Denial of Service DoS attacks against the network The switch provides support for classifying and blocking several types of DoS attacks To display the Denial of Service page click Security gt Access gt Denial of Service Denial of Service Configuration Denial of Service Configuration Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size 20 Denial of Service ICMPv4 Denial of Service Max ICMPv4 Packet Size Denial of Service ICMP
407. he version on the new member to match the version running on the rest of the stack e Disable The new member is not allowed to join 2 Use the Traps field to enable or disable sending of traps during Stack Firmware Synchronization Start Failure or Finish 3 Use the Allow Downgrade field to determine whether the stack master should downgrade the firmware version on a new member that attempts to join the stack if the new member has a firmware version that is more recent that the stack 4 Click Refresh to update the page with the latest information from the switch 5 Click Apply to apply the new settings to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Configuring System Information 77 ProSafe M5300 Switch NSF Use the NSF Summary page to enable nonstop forwarding feature on the stack view operational status information and to initiate a warm restart of the management unit When nonstop forwarding is enabled if the management unit of a stack fails the backup unit takes over as the master without clearing the hardware tables of any of the surviving units Data traffic continues to be forwarded in hardware while the management functions initialize on the backup unit NSF is enabled by default on platforms that support it The administrator may wish to disable NSF in order to redirect the CPU resources consumed by data checkpointing To display the NSF Summary page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt NSF
408. heck box is global and will delete all the DNS servers listed Configuring System Information 40 ProSafe M5300 Switch Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately DNS Server Configuration The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information Field Description Serial No The sequence number of the DNS server Preference Shows the preference of the DNS Server The preference is determined by the order they were entered Host Configuration Use this page to manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic DNS mappings To access this page click System gt Management gt DNS gt Host Configuration DNS Host Configuration DNS Host Configuration SS E Dynamic Host Mapping a nist1 ny ustiming org 21600 663 64 90 182 55 time a netgear com 5778 744 IP 209 249 181 22 time g netgear com 745 Canonical time a netgear com To add a static entry to the local DNS table 1 Specify the static host name to add Its length can not exceed 255 characters and it is a mandatory field for the user Specify the IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation to associate with the hostname Click ADD The entry appears in the list below To remove an entry from the static DNS table select the check box
409. hed For NSF to be effective adjacent networking devices must not reroute traffic around the restarting device The switch uses three techniques to prevent traffic from being rerouted 1 A protocol may distribute a part of its control plane to stack units so that the protocol can give the appearance that it is still functional during the restart Spanning tree and port channels use this technique 2 A protocol may enlist the cooperation of its neighbors through a technique known as graceful restart OSPF uses graceful restart if it is enabled 3 A protocol may simply restart after the failover if neighbors react slowly enough that they will not normally detect the outage The IP multicast routing protocols are a good example of this behavior To take full advantage of nonstop forwarding layer 2 connections to neighbors should be via port channels that span two or more stack units and layer 3 routes should be ECMP routes with next hops via physical ports on two or more units The hardware can quickly move traffic flows from port channel members or ECMP paths on a failed unit to a surviving unit Configuring System Information 71 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stack Configuration From this page you can preconfigure stack members before adding them to the stack change the unit number assigned to a stack member and to select a new stack master or give management preference to one or more units If you change the unit ID on a stack member
410. hen you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to update the switch s configuration If the file has errors the update will be stopped e Use Config Script to specify script configuration file e Use SSH 1 RSA Key File to specify SSH 1 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File e Use SSH 2 RSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File PEM Encoded e Use SSH 2 DSA Key PEM File to specify SSH 2 Digital Signature Algorithm DSA Key File PEM Encoded Maintenance 490 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Use SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Trusted Root Certificate File PEM Encoded e Use SSL Server Certificate PEM File to specify SSL Server Certificate File PEM Encoded e Use SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Weak Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded e Use SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File to specify SSL Diffie Hellman Strong Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded The factory default is Image1 Note To download SSH key files SSH must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Note To download SSL PEM files SSL must be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions Use Transfer Mode to specify what protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transf
411. hentication List on page 367 e Dot1x Authentication List on page 369 e HTTP Authentication List on page 369 e HTTPS Authentication List on page 370 Login Authentication List You use this page to configure login lists A login list specifies the authentication method s you want to be used to validate switch or port access for the users associated with the list The pre configured users admin and guest are assigned to a pre configured list named defaultList which you may not delete All newly created users are also assigned to the defaultList until you specifically assign them to a different list To display the Login Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt Login Authentication List Login Authentication List Login Authentication List be RS E defaultList Local networkList Local Managing Device Security 366 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the authentication lists for access to the switch management interface 1 2 List Name If you are creating a new login list enter the name you want to assign It can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters long and is not case sensitive Use the drop down menu to select the method that should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options
412. hing gt VLAN gt Basic gt VLAN Configuration VLAN Configuration Reset Reset Configuration Internal VLAN Configuration Internal VLAN Allocation Base 4093 Internal VLAN Allocation Policy 5 Ascending Descending VLAN Configuration oe P default Default Disable E Dynamic AUTO VoIP Disable Reset to Factory Default Settings To reset the VLAN configuration to the default values 1 Select the Reset Configuration check box 2 Confirm the action 3 Click the APPLY button All VLAN configuration parameters will be reset to their factory default values Also all VLANs except for the default VLAN will be deleted The factory default values are e All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1 e All ports are configured with a PVID of 1 e All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames Configuring Switching Information 120 ProSafe M5300 Switch e All ports are configured with Ingress Filtering disabled e All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames e GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared Internal VLAN Configuration This section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal VLAN The internal VLAN is reserved by port based routing interface and invisible to the end user Once these internal VLANs are allocated by port based routing interface they are cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface 1
413. his network Use Retransmit Interval to enter the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds Use Hello Interval to enter the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds Use Dead Interval to enter the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 2147483647 The default is 40 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to enter the OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second Use MTU Ignore to disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection on received database description packets Default value is Disable MTU mismatch detectio
414. ia of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an MAC ACL applies must be specified as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the MAC ACL are specified created using the MAC ACL Rule Configuration menu There are multiple steps involved in defining a MAC ACL and applying it to the switch 1 Use the MAC ACL page to create the ACL ID 2 Use the MAC Rules page to create rules for the ACL 3 Use the MAC Binding Configuration page to assign the ACL by its ID number to a port 4 Optionally use the MAC Binding Table page to view the configurations To display the MAC ACL page click Security gt ACL gt Basic gt MAC ACL MAC ACL MAC ACL Current Number of ACL Maximum ACL MAC ACL Table Ss E macACt Managing Device Security 437 ProSafe M5300 Switch The MAC ACL table displays the number of ACLs currently configured in the switch and the maximum number of ACLs that can be configured The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 ACLs plus the number of configured MAC ACLs To configure a MAC ACL 1 To add a MAC ACL specify a name for the MAC ACL in the Name field and click ADD The name string may include alphabetic numeric dash underscore or space characters only The name must start with an alphabetic character Each configured ACL displays the followin
415. ia telnet e SNMP based management e Web based management To configure an IPv4 network interface 1 Use Current Network Configuration Protocol to specify how the device acquires network information on the network interface e None The switch does not attempt to acquire network information dynamically Select this option to configure a static IP address subnet mask and default gateway e BOOTP During the next boot cycle the BOOTP client on the switch broadcasts a BOOTP request in an attempt to acquire information from a BOOTP server on the network e DHCP During the next boot cycle the DHCP client on the switch broadcasts a DHCP request in an attempt to acquire information from a DHCP server on the network After this option is applied you can use the Refresh icon at the end of the row to renew the IPv4 address learned from DHCP server 2 If the network configuration protocol is None use the IP Address field to specify the IP address of the interface The factory default value is 169 254 100 100 For DHCP or BootP configuration protocols this field shows the IP address the network interface has leased from the DHCP or BootP server 3 If the network configuration protocol is None use the Subnet Mask field to enter the IP subnet mask for the interface The factory default value is 255 255 0 0 For DHCP or BootP configuration protocols this field shows the subnet mask assigned to the network interface has by the DHCP or
416. ic RP Configuration This page is used to statically configure the RP address for one or more multicast groups To display the PIM SM Static RP Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM SM gt Static RP Configuration PIM Static RP Configuration Static RP Configuration 2 Se To configure a static RP 1 Use RP Address to specify the IP Address of the RP to be created or deleted 2 Use Group Address to specify the Group Address of the RP to be created or deleted 3 Use Group Mask to specify the Group Mask of the RP to be created or deleted 4 Use Override to indicate that if there is a conflict the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR Click ADD to add a new static RP address for one or more multicast groups 6 Click DELETE to delete the RP address selected a Routing 310 ProSafe M5300 Switch Static Routes Configuration To display the Static Routes Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt Static Routes Configuration Static Routes Configuration Static Routes Configuration To configure a static multicast route 1 A O p a i Use Source IP to enter the IP Address that identifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating Use Source Mask to enter the subnet mask to be applied to the Source IP address Use RPF Neighbor to enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source Use Metric to enter the lin
417. ic class to a policy and then adding the policy to the ports selected on DiffServ Wizard page The DiffServ Wizard will e Create a DiffServ Class and define match criteria used as a filter to determine if incoming traffic meets the requirements to be a member of the class e Set the DiffServ Class match criteria based on Traffic Type selection as below e VOIP sets match criteria to UDP protocol e HTTP sets match criteria to HTTP destination port e FTP sets match criteria to FTP destination port e Telnet sets match criteria to Telnet destination port e Every sets match criteria all traffic e Create a Diffserv Policy and add it to the DiffServ Class created e f Policing is set to YES then DiffServ Policy style is set to Simple Traffic which conforms to the Class Match criteria will be processed according to the Outbound Priority selection Outbound Priority configures the handling of conforming traffic as below e High sets policing action to markdscp ef e Med sets policing action to markdscp af31 e Low sets policing action to send e If Policing is set to NO then all traffic will be marked as specified below e High sets policy mark ipdscp ef e Med sets policy mark ipdscp af31 e Low sets policy mark ipdscp be e Each port selected will be added to the policy created To display the DiffServ Wizard page click QoS gt DiffServ gt DiffServ Wizard Diffserv Wizard Diffserv Wizard Traffic Type VOIP
418. icates whether the slot is empty or full Administrative State Indicates whether the slot is administratively enabled or disabled Power State Indicates whether the device is providing power to the slot Configured Card Model ID The model ID of the card configured for the slot Configured Card Description The description of the card configured for the slot Inserted Card Model ID The model ID of the card plugged into the slot Inserted Card Description The description of the card plugged into the slot Configuring System Information 27 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Card Power Down If the value is True the Power State can be administratively enabled or disabled If the value is False the Power State cannot be configured Card Pluggable If the value is True the card can be administratively enabled or disabled If the value is False the Administrative State cannot be configured Supported Card The following table describes information in the Supported Card table Field Description Card Model The model ID of the supported card Card Index The index assigned to the card type Card Type The hardware type of the supported card which is assigned by the manufacturer Card Descriptor Description of the supported card which includes the manufacturer s product number and information about number and speed of the supported interfaces
419. ied e Select Deny to prohibit access to the management interface for traffic that meets the criteria you configure for the rule Any traffic that does not meet the rules is allowed access to the switch Unlike MAC ACLs and IP ACLs there is no implied deny all rule at the end of the rule list e Service Type Select the type of service to allow or prohibit from accessing the switch management interface e SNMP e HTTP e HTTPS e Source IP Address Specify the IP Address of the client originating the management traffic e Mask Specify the subnet mask associated with the IP address The subnet mask is a standard subnet mask and not an inverse wildcard mask that you use with IP ACLs e Priority Configure priority to the rule The rules are validated against the incoming management request in the ascending order of their priorities If a rule matches action is performed and subsequent rules below are ignored For example if a Source IP 10 10 10 10 is configured with priority 1 to permit and Source IP 10 10 10 10 is configured with priority 2 to Deny then access is permitted if the profile is active and the second rule is ignored 2 To modify an access rule select the check box next to the Rule Type update the desired settings and click APPLY 3 To delete an access rule select the check box next to the Rule Type and click DELETE Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest
420. ield is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected port is not mac based Possible values are Default e Reauthenticate If the termination action is default then at the end of the session the client details are initialized Otherwise re authentication is attempted Port Status This field shows the authorization status of the specified port The possible values are Authorized Unauthorized and N A If the port is in detached state the value will be N A since the port cannot participate in port access control Port Method This field shows the authorization mode of the specified port The possible values are Mac based Port based Managing Device Security 395 ProSafe M5300 Switch Client Summary To access the Client Summary page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Advanced gt Client Summary Client Summary Client Summary 1 2 All Port ee Session Filter VLAN VLAN Session Termination Time ID ID Assigned Timeout Action Address 1 2 All Field Description Port The port to be displayed User Name This field displays the User Name representing the identity of the supplicant device Supplicant Mac Address This field displays supplicant s device Mac Address Session Time This field displays the time since the supplicant as logged in seconds Filter ID This field displays policy filter id assigned by t
421. iew NSF summary information for the OSPF feature NSF is a feature used in switch stacks to maintain switching and routing functions in the event of a stack unit failure For information about NSF see Nonstop Forwarding on page 71 To display the page click To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt NSF OSPF Summary NSF OSPF Summary NSF OSPF Summary Support Mode Disabled e Restart Interval 4 20 Restart Status Restart Age secs Restart Exit Reason To configure NSF settings for OSPF 1 Use Support Mode to configure the administrative mode of NSF for the OSPF feature 2 Use Restart Interval to configure the length of the grace period on the restarting router The value you specify is the number of seconds that the restarting router asks its neighbors to wait before exiting helper mode The restarting router includes the restart interval in its grace LSAs The valid range 1 1800 seconds and the default value is 120 seconds 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click REFRESH to update the screen with the most recent information 5 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Restart Status Displays the restart status of the restarting router The possible values are Not Restarting e Planned Restart e Unplanned Restart Restart Age If a graceful restart is in progress this field shows the number of seconds until the grac
422. if it is configured to originate an external LSA advertising the default route ABR Status The router is an Area Border Router if it has active non virtual interfaces in two or more OSPF areas External LSA Count The number of external LS type 5 LSAs link state advertisements in the link state database External LSA Checksum The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers This value is in hexadecimal AS_OPAQUE LSA Count The number of opaque LSAs with domain wide flooding scope AS_OPAQUE LSA Checksum The sum of the LS checksums of the opaque LSAs with domain wide flooding scope This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers This value is in hexadecimal New LSAs Originated In any given OSPF area a router will originate several LSAs Each router originates a router LSA If the router is also the Designated Router for any of the area s networks it will originate network LSAs for those networks This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router LSAs Received The number of LSAs link state advertisements received that were determined to be new instantiations This
423. ified in the Count field and the results are displayed below the configurable data in the Ping area Ping IPv This screen is used to send a Ping request to a specified Hostname or IPv6 address You can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IPv6 station Once you Click the APPLY button the switch will send three pings and the results will be displayed below the configurable data The output will be Send count 3 Receive count n from IPv6 Address Average round trip time n ms To access the Ping IPv6 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Ping IPv6 Ping IPv6 Ping IPv6 Ping Global e IPv6 Address Host Name Datagram Size 64 Result Use Ping to select either global IPv6 Address Hostname or Link Local Address to ping Use IPv6 Address Hostname to enter the IPv6 address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to ping The initial value is blank The IPv6 Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle Use Datagram Size to enter the datagram size The valid range is 48 to 2048 Result Displays the result after the switch send a Ping IPv6 request to the specified IPv6 address Maintenance 498 ProSafe M5300 Switch Traceroute IPv4 Use this screen to tell the switch to send a TraceRoute request to a specified IP address or Hostname You can use this to discover the paths packets take to a remote destination Once you click the AP
424. ifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating 2 Use Prefix Length to enter the Prefix Length to be applied to the Source IPv6 address o3 Use RPF Neighbor to enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source 4 Use Metric to enter the link state cost of the path to the multicast source The range is 0 255 and the default is 1 You can change the metric for a configured route by selecting the static route and editing this field 5 Use RPF Interface to select the interface number from the drop dead menu This is the interface that connects to the neighbor router for the given source IP address 6 Click ADD to add a new static route to the switch 7 Click DELETE to delete the multicast static routes selected Routing 329 ProSafe M5300 Switch Routing 330 Configuring Quality of Service Use the features in the QoS tab to configure Quality of Service QoS settings on the switch The QoS tab contains links to the following features e Class of Service on page 331 e Differentiated Services on page 339 In a typical switch each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the attached network Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain packets over others based on user defined criteria When a packet is queued for transmission in a port the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly
425. ighbors this is set to value of the default prune lifetime timer otherwise it is set to the smallest received value or the default timer whichever is less Routing 294 DVMRP Route ProSafe M5300 Switch To display the DVMRP Route page click Routing gt Multicast gt DVMRP gt DVMRP Route DVMRP Route DVMRP Route Source Source Upstream Expiry Interf Met UpT Address Mask Neighbor S aain Time a Field Description Source Address The network address that is combined with the source mask to identify the sources for this entry Source Mask The subnet mask to be combined with the source address to identify the sources for this entry Upstream Neighbor The address of the upstream neighbor e g RPF neighbor from which IP datagrams from these sources are received Interface The interface on which IP datagrams sent by these sources are received A value of 0 typically means the route is an aggregate for which no next hop interface exists Metric The distance in hops to the source subnet Expiry Time The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry will be aged out Up Time The time since the route represented by this entry was learned by the router Routing 295 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used by IPv4 systems hosts L3 switches and routers to report their IP multicast group memberships to a
426. iguring System Information 113 ProSafe M5300 Switch Timer Schedule The Timer Schedule feature allows you to configure time ranges to use in time based access control list ACL rules For switches that support PoE timers can also control when power can and cannot be delivered to the port Time based ACLs allow one or more rules within an ACL to be based on a periodic or absolute time Each ACL rule within an ACL except for the implicit deny all rule can be configured to be active and operational only during a specific time period The time range pages allow you to define specific times of the day and week in order to implement time based ACLs The time range is identified by a name and can then be referenced by an ACL rule defined with in an ACL From Timer Schedule link under the System tab you can configure the Timer Schedule settings From the Timer Schedule link you can access the following pages e Timer Global Configuration on page 114 e Timer Schedule Configuration on page 115 Timer Global Configuration Use the Timer Global Configuration page to add or remove a timer After you create a timer use the Timer Schedule Configuration page to add an absolute time and or one or more periodic time schedules To display the Timer Global Configuration page click System gt Services gt Timer Schedule gt Basic gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays Timer Schedule Global Configuration Timer
427. ill be required to enter a new password following the first login after password expiration A value of 0 indicates that passwords never expire 3 Use Password History to specify the number of previous passwords to store for prevention of password reuse This ensures that each user does not reuse passwords often A value of 0 indicates that no previous passwords will be stored 4 Use Lockout Attempts to specify the number of allowable failed local authentication attempts before the user s account is locked A value of 0 indicates that user accounts will never be locked Managing Device Security 357 ProSafe M5300 Switch Enable Password Configuration Use this page to configure a local password to control CLI access to privileged levels Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters The password is case sensitive To display the Enable Password Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt Enable Password Enable Password Configuration Enable Password Configuration Password eeccccee Confirm Password eocccces To configure the enable password 1 Use Password to specify a password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters 2 Use Confirm Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly Line Password Configuration Use this page to configure a password to control CLI access to the switch by using one of the following methods e Console e Te
428. in to confirm that you entered it correctly This field will not display but will show asterisks Managing Device Security 356 ProSafe M5300 Switch 5 Access Mode indicates the user s access mode The admin account always has Read Write access and all other accounts have Read Only access 6 Click ADD to add a user account with Read Only access 7 Click DELETE to delete the currently selected user account This button is only visible when you have selected a user account with Read Only access You cannot delete the Read Write user Field Description Lockout Status Indicates whether the user account is locked out TRUE or FALSE Password Expiration Date Indicates the current password expiration date in date format User Password Configuration To display the User Password Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt Local User gt User Password Configuration Password Configuration Password Configuration Password Minimum Length Password Aging days Password History Lockout Attempts To manage password security for users that have access to the switch management interface 1 Use Password Minimum Length to specify the minimum character length of all new local user passwords 2 Use Password Aging days to specify the maximum time that user passwords are valid in days from the time the password is set Once a password expires the user w
429. ins serialNumber appended prepended with system name Advanced ISDP Configuration From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e ISDP Global Configuration on page 109 e ISDP Interface Configuration on page 111 e ISDP Neighbor on page 111 e ISDP Statistics on page 113 Configuring System Information 110 ProSafe M5300 Switch ISDP Interface Configuration To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays ISDP Interface Configuration Interface Configuration Go To Port Admin Mode Enable Enable Enable 1 0 7 Enable 1 0 8 1 0 9 Enable To configure per interface ISDP settings 1 To configure ISDP settings on one or more interfaces select the check box associated with each interface to configure or select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable ISDP on the port The default value is enable 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes ISDP Neighbor Use the ISDP Neighbor page to view information about other devices the switch has discovered through the ISDP To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Advanced gt Neighbor A screen similar to the following displays ISDP Neighbor ISDP Neighbor Search By
430. instances on this switch Managing Device Security 427 ProSafe M5300 Switch Captive Portal Configuration By default the switch has one captive portal You can change the settings for that captive portal and you can also create and configure up to nine additional portals To display the Captive Portal Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Configuration Captive Portal Configuration Captive Portal Configuration Ad CP ID CP Name min Protocol Verification Block Mode E E E E Cit Enable Not Blocked 0 Idi U Back d a nia Radius Auth Server Redirect Mode Redirect URL ETN Timeout Logout ene Disable Disable cp_welcome html BFBFBF Foreground Separator Max Hax 9 p Bandwidth pay Max Input Max Output Max Total Color Color LAr 0 0 0 999999 A 1 Use the CP ID pull down menu to select the CP ID for which to create or update 2 Use CP Name to enter the name of the configuration Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Use Admin Mode to enable or disable this CP instance 4 Use Protocol to choose whether to use HTTP or HTTPs as the protocol for the portal to use during the verification process e HTTP Does not use encryption during verification e HTTPS Uses the Secure Sockets Layer SSL which requires a certificate to provide encryption The certificate is presented to the user at connection time 5 Use Verification to s
431. interface for OSPF 1 Use the check boxes to the left of the Interface field to select each interface to configure The same settings are applied dot all selected interfaces 2 Use Area ID to enter the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the OSPF area to which the selected router interface connects If you assign an Area ID which does not exist the area will be created with default values Routing 242 10 11 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable The default value is disable You can configure OSPF parameters without enabling OSPF Admin Mode but they will have no effect until you enable Admin Mode The following information will be displayed only if the Admin Mode is enabled State Designated Router Backup Designated Router Number of Link Events LSA ACK Interval and Metric Cost For OSPF to be fully functional you must enter a valid IP Address and Subnet Mask via the Interface IP Configuration page or through the CLI command ip address lt ipaddr gt lt subnet mask gt Note Once OSPF is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset Use Router Priority to enter the OSPF priority for the selected interface The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255 The default is 1 which is the highest router priority A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on t
432. interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets Valid values range from 0 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default is 5 seconds Use Hello Interval to enter the OSPF v3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network Valid values range from 1 to 65 535 The default is 10 seconds Use Dead Interval to enter the OSPF v3 dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network This value should a multiple of the Hello Interval e g 4 Valid values range from 1 to 65535 The default is 40 Use Iftransit Delay Interval to enter the OSPFv3 Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface Valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds 1 hour The default value is 1 second Use MTU Ignore to disable OSPFv3 MTU mismatch detection on receiving packets Default value is Disable Use Passive Mode to make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interfa
433. ion on page 366 This example enables 802 1X based port security on ProSafe and prompts the hosts connected on ports g5 g8 for an 802 1X based authentication The switch passes the authentication information to the configured RADIUS server Configuration Examples 520 ProSafe M5300 Switch MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol STP runs on bridged networks to help eliminate loops If a bridge loop occurs the network can become flooded with traffic IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces Each instance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to the Forwarding state The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP IEEE 802 1D is the ability to configure and recognize full duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end stations resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the Forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification These features are represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge So an IEEE 802 1s bridge inherently also s
434. ion page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Interface Configuration Managing Device Security 400 ProSafe M5300 Switch Port Security Interface Configuration Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All GoToPort Leo Max Allowed 2 x Max Allowed Statically Port Security Mode Dynamically Violation Trap Locked MAC Learned MAC Se 1 0 1 Disable 600 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 600 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 600 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 600 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 600 Disable To configure port security settings 1 2 Port Selects the interface to be configured Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure Select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected interfaces Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces Specify the following settings Security Mode Enables or disables the Port Security feature for the selected interface Max Allowed Dynamically Learned MAC Sets the maximum number of dynamically learned MAC addresses on the selected interface Max Allowed Statically Locked MAC Sets the maximum number of statically locked MAC addresses on the selected interface Violation Traps Enables or disables the sending of new violation traps designating when a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received on a locked port Managing Device Security 401 ProSafe M5300 Switch
435. ions for IPv6 mode enable and disable Default value is disable Use DHCPVv6 Client Mode to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client mode on an interface At any point of time only one interface can act as a Client Default value is disable Use Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode to enable or disable Stateless Address AutoConfig mode on an interface Default value is disable Use Routing Mode to enable disable routing mode of an interface Default value is disable Use Admin Mode to enable disable the Administrative Mode of the interface The default value is enable This mode is not supported for Logical VLAN Interfaces Use MTU to specify the maximum transmit unit on an interface If the value is O then this interface is not enabled for routing It is not valid to set this value to 0 if routing is enabled Range of MTU is 1280 to 1500 Use Duplicate Address Detection Transmits to specify the number of duplicate address detections transmits on an interface DAD transmits values must be in range 0 to 600 Use Life Time Interval to specify the router advertisement lifetime field sent from the interface This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval 0 means do not use the router as the default router The range of router lifetime is O to 9000 Use Adv NS Interval to specify the retransmission time field of router advertisement sent from the interface A value of 0 means interval is not specified for router Range of
436. iption Global Route Changes The number of route changes made to the IP Route Database by RIP This does not include the refresh of a route s age Global queries The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems Interface Configuration Use the RIP Interface Configuration page to enable and configure or to disable RIP on a specific interface To display the Interface Configuration page click Routing gt RIP gt Advanced gt Interface Configuration Interface Configuration Interface Configuration Interface Send Version Receive Version RIP Admin Mode Authentication Type Bad Packets Received Bad Routes Received Updates Sent Status Enable Disable None m Interf IP Send Receive Admin Link ern Address Version Version Mode State 1 0 5 192 168 3 10 RIP 2 Disable Link Down vlan 100 192 168 22 100 RIP 2 Both Disable Link Down To configure the advanced RIP global settings 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be configured 2 Use Send Version to select the version of RIP control packets the interface should send from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e RIP 1 Send RIP version 1 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 1c RIP version 1 compatibility mode Send RIP version 2 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 2 Send RIP version 2 packets using multicast The default is RIP 2 e None No RIP control packets will
437. ired operation FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter FCC Declaration Of Conformity We NETGEAR Inc 350 East Plumeria Drive San Jose CA 95134 declare under our sole responsibility that the ProSafe M5300 Switch complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and 525 ProSafe M5300 Switch e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Radio Frequency Interference Warnings amp Instructions This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful in
438. is interface by this router Hellos Received The number of Hello packets received on this interface by this router DD Packets Sent The number of Database Description packets sent on this interface by this router DD Packets Received The number of Database Description packets received on this interface by this router LS Requests Sent The number of LS Requests sent on this interface by this router LS Requests Received The number of LS Requests received on this interface by this router LS Updates Sent The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router LS Updates Received The number of LS updates received on this interface by this router LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen to show the latest interface statistics Click CLEAR to clear all the statistics of the OSPF interface Routing 248 ProSafe M5300 Switch OSPF Neighbor Table This screen displays the OSPF neighbor table list When a particular neighbor ID is specified detailed information about a neighbor is given The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled To display the OSPF Neighbor Table page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt OSPF Neighbor
439. is page to configure the global iSCSI settings on the switch To access the iSCSI Global Configuration page click Switching gt iSCSI gt Basic gt Global Configuration iSCSI Global Configuration iSCSI Status Disable Enable QoS Profile VLAN Priority Tag DSCP VLAN Priority Tag 5 DSCP 46 iSCSI Aging Time 10 Configuring Switching Information 139 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure global iSCSI settings 1 2 In the iSCSI Status field either Enable or Disable iSCSI optimization on the switch The default is Disable In the QoS Profile field select the quality of service profile that will be applied to iSCSI flows e VLAN Priority Tag e DSCP By default iSCSI flows are assigned to the highest VPT DSCP mapped to the highest queue not used for stack management or voice VLAN Be sure to configure the relevant Class of Service parameters for the queue in order to complete the setting Setting the VPT DSCP sets the QoS profile which determines the egress queue to which the frame is mapped The switch default setting for egress queues scheduling is Weighted Round Robin WRR You can complete the QoS setting by configuring the relevant ports to work in other scheduling and queue management modes via the Class of Service settings If using VLAN Priority as the QoS profile use the VLAN Priority Tag field to assign a VLAN Priority value to iSCSI session packets If using DSCP as the QoS pr
440. isms Both regular IP Multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router and both can be implemented using the PIM SM protocol A range of multicast addresses currently 232 0 0 0 8 in IPv4 is reserved for SSM To display the SSM Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM gt SSM Configuration PIM SSM Configuration SSM Configuration a SSM Group Address SSM Group Mask To configure PIM SSM 1 Use SSM Group Address to enter the source specific multicast group ip address 2 Use SSM Group Mask to enter the source specific multicast group ip address mask 3 Click ADD to add a new source specific group 4 Click DELETE to delete an existing source specific group Routing 305 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM Interface Configuration To display the PIM Interface Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt PIM gt Interface Configuration PIM Interface Configuration PIM Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS All Go To Interface eee Admin Protocol IP Join Prune BSR a Designated Neighbor le ee n Interval secs aiii Count B 1 0 11 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable 1 0 2 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable 1 0 3 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable 1 0 4 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable 1 0 5 Disable Non Operational 192 168 3 10 60 Disable 1 0 6 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable 1 0 7 Disable Non Operational 0 0 0 0 30 60 Disable 1 0
441. ist page under Management Security 1 Use Login Authentication List to specify which authentication list to use when you login through telnet The default value is networkList 2 Use Enable Authentication List to specify which authentication list you are using when going into the privileged EXEC mode The default value is enableList Inbound Telnet Configuration This page regulates new telnet sessions If Allow New Telnet Sessions are enabled new inbound telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available If Allow New Telnet Sessions are disabled no new inbound telnet sessions are established An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends the session 1 Use Allow New Telnet Sessions to specify whether the new Inbound Telnet session is Enabled or Disabled Default value is Enabled 2 Use Session Timeout to specify how many minutes of inactivity should occur on a telnet session before the session is logged off You may enter any number from 1 to 160 The factory default is 5 3 Use Maximum Number of Sessions to select how many simultaneous telnet sessions will be allowed The maximum is 5 which is also the factory default 4 Current Number of Sessions Displays the number of current sessions Managing Device Security 380 ProSafe M5300 Switch Outbound Telnet Client Configuration This page regulates new outbound telnet connections If Allow N
442. istical sampling rate for packet sampling from this source A sampling rate of 1 counts all packets A sampling rate of 0 disables sampling Allowed range is 1024 to 65536 6 Use Maximum Header Size to specify the maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet Allowed range is 20 to 256 Monitoring the System 482 Maintenance Use the features available from the Maintenance tab to help you manage the switch The Maintenance tab contains links to the following features Save Configuration on page 483 Reset on page 485 Upload File From Switch on page 487 Download File To Switch on page 490 File Management on page 495 Troubleshooting on page 497 Save Configuration The Save Configuration menu contains links to the following options Save Configuration on page 483 Auto Install Configuration on page 484 Save Configuration To access the Save Configuration page click Maintenance gt Save Config gt Save Configuration Save Configuration Save Configuration Saving all applied changes will cause all changes to configuration panels that were applied but not saved oO to be saved thus retaining their new values across a system reboot Select the check box and click the APPLY button to have configuration changes you have made saved across a system reboot All changes submitted since the previous save or system reboot will be retained by the switch 483 ProSafe M5300 Switch Auto Ins
443. itch with the lowest MAC address is elected as the root bridge see CST Configuration on page 146 5 From the CST Port Configuration screen select ports 1 0 1 1 0 8 and select Enable from the STP Status menu see CST Port Configuration on page 148 Click APPLY 7 Select ports 1 0 1 1 0 5 edge ports and select Enable from the Fast Link menu Since the edge ports are not at risk for network loops ports with Fast Link enabled transition directly to the Forwarding state 8 Click APPLY You can use the CST Port Status screen to view spanning tree information about each port 9 From the MST Configuration screen create a MST instances with the following settings e MST ID 1 e Priority Use the default 32768 e VLAN ID 300 For more information see MST Configuration on page 151 10 Click ADD 11 Create a second MST instance with the following settings e MST ID 2 e Priority 49152 e VLAN ID 500 12 Click ADD In this example assume that Switch 1 has become the Root bridge for the MST instance 1 and Switch 2 has become the Root bridge for MST instance 2 Switch 3 has hosts in the Sales department ports 1 0 1 1 0 2 and 1 0 3 and in the HR department ports 1 0 4 and 1 0 5 Switches 1 and 2 also have hosts in the Sales and Human Resources departments The hosts connected from Switch 2 use VLAN 500 MST instance 2 to communicate with the hosts on Switch 3 directly Likewise hosts of Switch 1 use VLAN 300 MST ins
444. ity over data traffic on ports that have this feature enabled Protocol based Auto VoIP checks for packets carrying the following VoIP protocols e Session Initiation Protocol SIP e H 323 e Signalling Connection Control Part SCCP e Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP VoIP frames that are received on ports that have the Auto VoIP feature enabled are marked with the configured CoS Traffic Class OUI based Auto VoIP scans traffic for Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI bits Traffic with known OUI bits can be placed in a specific VLAN and assigned an 802 1p priority value From the Auto VoIP link you can access the following pages e Protocol Based on page 134 e OUI Based on page 136 Protocol Based Use this page to configure the protocol based Auto VoIP priority settings and to enable or disable the protocol based Auto VoIP mode on the interfaces To display the Protocol Based Port Settings page click Switching gt Auto VoIP gt Protocol based gt Port Settings Configuring Switching Information 134 ProSafe M5300 Switch Protocol Based Port Settings Protocol Based Global Settings Prioritization Type Traffic Class lt Class Value 6 wl Protocol Based Port Settings 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface laso Interface Auto VoIP Mode Operational Status 1 0 1 Enable UP 1 0 2 Enable UP 1 0 3 Enable UP 1 0 4 Enable UP 1 0 5 Enable UP 1 0 6 Enable UP 1 0 7 Enable UP 1 0 8 Enable UP 1 0 9 Enab
445. ive distance of an individual static route Among routes to the same destination the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database By specifying the preference of a static route the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination Use Identifier to specify the description of this route that identifies the route Click ADD to add a new static route entry to the switch Click DELETE to delete a existing static route entry from the switch Routing 190 Learned Routes ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Route Type This field can be either default or static If creating a default route all that needs to be specified is the next hop IP address otherwise each field needs to be specified Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination Subnet Mask Also referred to as the subnet network mask this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network Protocol This field tells which protocol created the specified route The possibilities are one of the following Local e Static OSPF e RIP Next Hop IP Address Next Hop Interface The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router if any in the path tow
446. ived on this port are discarded e When set to Admit All untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the Port VLAN ID for this port With either option VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802 1Q VLAN specification Configuring Switching Information 125 ProSafe M5300 Switch 6 Ingress Filtering e When enabled the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated In a tagged frame the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag In an untagged frame the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame e When disabled all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802 1Q VLAN bridge specification The factory default is disabled The Current Ingress Filtering field shows the current administrative mode of ingress filtering on the interface 7 Use Port Priority to specify the default 802 1p priority assigned to untagged packets arriving at the port The possible value is from 0 to 7 MAC Based VLAN The MAC Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet A MAC to VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the MAC to VLAN table An entry is specified via a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID The MAC to VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the devi
447. k state cost of the path to the multicast source The range is 0 255 and the default is one You can change the metric for a configured route by selecting the static route and editing this field Use RPF Interface to select the interface number This is the interface that connects to the neighbor router for the given source IP address Click ADD to add a new static route to the switch Click DELETE to delete the multicast static routes selected Routing 311 ProSafe M5300 Switch Admin Boundary Configuration The definition of an administratively scoped boundary is a mechanism to stop the ingress and egress of multicast traffic for a given range of multicast addresses on a given routing interface To display the Admin Boundary Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt Admin Boundary Configuration Admin Boundary Configuration Admin Boundary Configuration PE a a e aS To configure an administrative boundary 1 Use Interface to select the router interface for which the administratively scoped boundary is to be configured 2 Use Group IP to enter the multicast group address for the start of the range of addresses to be excluded The address must be in the range of 239 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 3 Use Group Mask to enter the mask to be applied to the multicast group address The combination of the mask and the Group IP gives the range of administratively scoped addresses for the selected interface 4
448. kets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router e Point to Point The interface is operational and is connected either to the virtual link On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router Hello Packets are sent to the neighbor every Hellolnterval seconds e Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network e Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router e Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the
449. l information for the policy class instance for the specified interface and direction To display the Service Statistics page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Service Statistics Service Statistics Statistics Type Selection Counter Mode Selector Packets Service Statistics Search By Interface Saterface Diredi Policy Operational Member Offered Discarded Sent Name Status Classes Packets Octets Packets Octets Packets Octets 3 0 2 policyl Down VoIP 3 0 3 In policyl1 Down VoIP Counter Mode Selector specifies the format of the displayed counter values which must be either Octets or Packets The default is Octets The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page Field Description Interface List of all valid slot number and port number combinations in the system that have a DiffServ policy currently attached in In direction Direction List of the traffic direction of interface as In Only shows the direction s for which a DiffServ policy is currently attached Policy Name Name of the policy currently attached to the specified interface and direction Operational Status Operational status of the policy currently attached to the specified interface and direction The value is either Up or Down Member Classes List of all DiffServ classes currently defined as members of the selected Policy Name Choose one member class name at a time
450. l messages 3 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest messages in the persistent log Format of the messages e Total number of Messages Number of persistent log messages displayed on the switch e lt 15 gt Aug 24 05 34 05 STKO MSTP 2110 mspt_api c 318 237 Interface 12 transitioned to root state on message age timer expiry The above example indicates a user level message 1 with severity 7 debug ona system that is not stack and generated by component MSTP running in thread id 2110 on Aug 24 05 34 05 by line 318 of file mstp_api c This is the 237th message logged Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have an identical format to the above message Port Mirroring The page under the Mirroring link allows you to view and configure port mirroring on the system Multiple Port Mirroring Port mirroring selects the network traffic for analysis by a network analyzer This is done for specific ports of the switch As such many switch ports are configured as source ports and one switch port is configured as a destination port You have the ability to configure how traffic is mirrored on a source port Packets that are received on the source port that are transmitted on a port or are both received and transmitted can be mirrored to the destination port The packet that is copied to the destination port is in the same format as the original packet on the wire This means that if the mirror is copying a re
451. later Getting Started 10 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use the following procedures to log on to the Web interface 1 Open a Web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the Web browser address field 2 The default user name is admin default password is none no password Type the user name into the field on the login screen and then click Login User names and passwords are case sensitive 3 After the system authenticates you the System Information page displays The figure below shows the layout of the Managed Switch Web interface Navigation Tab Switching v System Information Switch Statistics gt System CPU Status Slot Information Loopback Interface Network Interface gt Time gt DNS gt SDM Jemplate Pre nce Routing QoS Stacking SNMP System Information System Information Product Name System Name System Location System Contact Login Timeout IPv4 Network Interface IPv6 Network Interface IPv4 Loopback Interface Security Feature Link Help Link M5300 28G3 ProSafe 24 port L3 Stackable GE Switch with L3 Routing Monitoring Maintenance Help Index Logout LLDP ISDP Timer Schedule LOGOUT Button M5300 28G3 ProSafe 24 port Gigabit L3 with 10 Gigabit Stacking R 6 27 1 B1 6 8 9 Help Page 5 10 27 34 175 255 255 255 0 fe80 2eb0 5dff fe91 f6f0 64 Configuration Status and Options m Page Menu IPv6 Loopback Interface REFRESH
452. lays the configured match criteria for the specified class 6 Values Displays the values of the configured match criteria 7 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 8 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Policy Configuration Use the Policy Configuration page to associate a collection of classes with one or more policy statements After creating a Policy click the policy link to the Policy page To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt Policy Configuration Policy Configuration Policy Configuration m Policy Name Policy Type Member Class policy1 In 1 Use Policy Name to uniquely identify a policy using a case sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters 2 Member Class This lists all existing DiffServ classes currently defined as members of the specified Policy from which one can be selected This list is automatically updated as a new class is added to or removed from the policy This field is a selector field only when an existing policy class instance is to be removed After removal of the policy class instance this becomes a non configurable field 3 Policy Type Indicates the type is specific to inbound traffic direction Click ADD to add a new policy to the switch Configuring Quality of Service 348 ProSafe M5300 Switch
453. lays the number of rules currently configured for the IP ACL e Type Identifies the ACL as a basic IP ACL extended IP ACL and named IP ACL 2 To delete an IP ACL select the check box next to the IP ACL ID field then click DELETE 3 Click ADD to add a new IP ACL to the switch configuration Managing Device Security 442 ProSafe M5300 Switch IP Rules Use these screens to configure the rules for the IP Access Control Lists created using the IP Access Control List Configuration screen What is shown on this screen varies depending on the current step in the rule configuration process Note There is an implicit deny all rule at the end of an ACL list This means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit rules match then the final implicit deny all rule applies and the packet is dropped To display the IP Rules page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP Rules IP Rules IP Rules ACL ID NAME 10 w Basic ACL Rule Table A S Acia Lonni Queue Match Mirror Redirect NSS Source IP Rate Limit Conform Rate Limit gg ng Every Interface Interface poe Mask Data Rate Burst Size Deny Disable False 192 168 3 1 255 255 255 0 To configure rules for an IP ACL 1 To add an IP ACL rule select the ACL ID to add the rule to complete the fields described in the following list and click ADD Only displays ACL IDs from 1 to 99 Standard ACL Rule Configuration Standard ACL R
454. ld is visible for a Permit Action Use Match Every to select true or false from the pull down menu True signifies that all packets will match the selected IPv6 ACL and Rule and will be either permitted or denied In this case since all packets match the rule the option of configuring other match criteria will not be offered To configure specific match criteria for the rule remove the rule and recreate it or reconfigure Match Every to False for the other match criteria to be visible Use Protocol to configure IPv6 protocol e Specify an integer ranging from 0 to 255 after selecting protocol keyword other This number represents the IP protocol e Select name of a protocol from the existing list of Internet Protocol IP Transmission Control Protocol TCP User Datagram Protocol UDP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP and Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Use Source Prefix Prefix Length to specify IPv6 Prefix combined with IPv6 Prefix length of the network or host from which the packet is being sent Prefix length can be in the range 0 to 128 Managing Device Security 451 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Source L4 Port to specify a packet s source layer 4 port as a match condition for the selected IPv6 ACL rule Source port information is optional Source port information can be specified in two ways e Select keyword other from the drop down menu and specify the number of the port in the range
455. le Disabled Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disabled Disable Disable Disabled Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disabled Disable Disable Disabled Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disabled To configure CST port settings q 2 Interface One of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the CST The port priority is set in multiples of 16 For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15 it will be set to O If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and 2 16 1 it will be set to 16 and so on Use Admin Edge Port to specify if the specified port is an Edge Port within the CIST It takes a value of TRUE or FALSE where the default value is FALSE Configuring Switching Information 148 ProSafe M5300 Switch 4 Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the common and internal spanning tree It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 5 Use External Port Path Cost to set the External Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the spanning tree It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 6 Use BPDU Filter to configure the BPDU Filter which filters the BPDU traffic on this port when STP is enabled on this port The possible values are Enable or Disable 7 Use BPDU Flood to configure the BPDU Flo
456. le UP To configure protocol based Auto VolP settings 1 From the Prioritization Type menu select the method used to prioritize VoIP traffic wnen a call control protocol is detected which is one of the following e Remark Remark the voice traffic with the specified 802 1p priority value at the ingress interface e Traffic Class Assign VoIP traffic to the specified traffic class when egressing the interface From the Class Value field select the traffic class used for protocol based VolP traffic If the Auto VoIP mode is enabled and the interface detects a call control protocol the switch assigns the traffic in that session to the configured Class of Service CoS queue Traffic classes with a higher value are generally used for time sensitive traffic The CoS queue associated with the specified traffic class should be configured with the appropriate bandwidth allocation to allow priority treatment for VoIP traffic Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces From the Auto VoIP Mode menu select the Auto VoIP administrative mode for the interface Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Operational Status This is the operational status of the Auto VoIP feature on the given interface Configuring Switching Information 135
457. le you must perform a save Field Description Port Selects the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured MAC Address Displays the physical address of the specified interface PortList Bit Offset Displays the bit offset value which corresponds to the port when the MIB object type PortList is used to manage in SNMP iflndex Displays the interface index associated with the port Configuring Switching Information 183 ProSafe M5300 Switch Link Aggregation Groups Link aggregation groups LAGs which are also known as port channels allow you to combine multiple full duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link Network devices treat the aggregation as if it were a single link which increases fault tolerance and provides load sharing You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG The LAG by default becomes a member of the management VLAN A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic but not both All members of a LAG must participate in the same protocols A static port channel interface does not require a partner system to be able to aggregate its member ports Static LAGs are supported When a port is added to a LAG as a static member it neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs From the LAGs link you can access the following pages e LAG Configuration on page 184 e LAG Membership on page 186 LAG Configuration Use the LAG Port Channel Configuration page to group one
458. lear the counters for a specific port select the check box associated with the port and click CLEAR e Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics Field Description Interface This object indicates the iflndex of the interface table entry associated with this port on an adapter Total Packets Received Without Errors The total number of packets received that were without errors Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Broadcast Packets Received Packets Transmitted Without Errors The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Monitoring the System 458 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Collision Frames Time Since Counters Last Cleared The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The elapsed time in days hours minutes and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared Port Detailed Statistics The Port Detailed Statistics page displays a variety of per port traffic statis
459. lected 3 Use Next Active Image to make the selected image the next active image for subsequent reboots 4 Use Update Bootcode to update the bootloader with the selected image 5 Click DELETE to delete the selected image from permanent storage on the switch 6 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Note After activating an image you must perform a system reset of the switch in order to run the new code Field Description Image Name This displays the image name for the selected unit Active Image Displays the current active image of the selected unit Version Displays the version of the image1 code file Maintenance 496 ProSafe M5300 Switch Troubleshooting The Troubleshooting menu contains links to the following options e Ping IPv4 on page 497 e Ping IPv6 on page 498 e Traceroute IPv4 on page 499 e Traceroute IPv6 on page 500 Ping IPv4 Use this screen to tell the switch to send a Ping request to a specified IP address You can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IP station Once you click the APPLY button the switch will send specified number of ping requests and the results will be displayed If a reply to the ping is not received you will see e Tx Count Rx 0 Min Max Avg RTT 0 0 0 msec If a reply to the ping is received you will see e Received response for Seq Num 0 Rtt xy
460. led Enable implies that the router is an autonomous system border router Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learnt from other protocol ABR Status The values of this are enabled or disabled Enabled implies that the router is an area border router Disabled implies that it is not an area border router External LSA Count External LSA Checksum The number of external LS type 5 LSAs link state advertisements in the link state database The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers New LSAs Originated In any given OSPF v3 area a router will originate several LSAs Each router originates a router LSA If the router is also the Designated Router for any of the area s networks it will originate network LSAs for those networks This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router LSAs Received The number of LSAs link state advertisements received that were determined to be new instantiations This number does not include newer instantiations of self originated LSAs Routing 261 ProSafe M5300 Switch Common Area Configuration Use the Common Area Configuration page to create and configure an OSPF v3 area To display the
461. lem messages sent IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent For a host this object will always be zero since hosts do not send redirects IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent IcmpOutAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e IP Configuration on page 193 e Statistics on page 194 e IP Interface Configuration on page 197 e Secondary IP Address on page 200 IP Interface Configuration Use the IP Interface Configuration page to update IP interface data for this switch To display the IP Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IP gt Advanced gt IP Interface Configuration Routing 197 ProSafe M5300 Switch IP Interface Configuration IP Interface Configuration 1 2 All IP Add Port Description vAn Confi sun uid _ es p ID g Address Mask Mode Method 1 0 1 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable o 0 a c am Go To Interface Administrative Net Encapsulation Link S d Da
462. lick System gt Management gt DNS gt SDM Template Preference SDM Template Preference SDM Template Preference SDM Current Template ID Dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM Next Template ID Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Summary Dual IPv4 and IPv6 4096 6112 1024 3072 4 512 256 IPv4 Routing Default 6144 12256 it 0 4 1024 0 IPv4 Data Center 4096 6112 it 0 16 1024 0 To configure the SDM Template Preference settings 1 Use SDM Current Template ID to view the SDM template the switch is currently using 2 Use SDM Next Template ID to configure the next active template It will be active only after the next reboot To revert to the default template after the next reboot use the Default option Possible values are e Default e Dual IPv4 and IPv6 e Pv4 routing Default e IPv4 Data Center Configuring System Information 42 ProSafe M5300 Switch The following table displays Summary information which describes the maximum resources each template supports for various features Field Description SDM Template Identifies the Template The possible values are e Dual IPv4 and IPv6 e Pv4 routing Default e IPv4 Data Center ARP Entries The maximum number of entries in the IPv4 Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache for routing interfaces IPv4 Unicast Routes The maximum number of IPv4 unicast forwarding table entries IPv6 NDP Entries The maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP cache entri
463. ling of counters From the sFlow link under the Monitoring tab you can access the following pages e Basic on page 479 e Advanced on page 480 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e sFlow Agent on page 479 sFlow Agent Packet Flow Sampling and Counter Sampling are performed by sFlow Instances associated with individual Data Sources within the sFlow Agent Packet Flow Sampling and Counter Sampling are designed as part of an integrated system Both types of samples are combined in sFlow datagrams Packet Flow Sampling will cause a steady but random stream of sFlow datagrams to be sent to the sFlow Collector Counter samples may be taken opportunistically in order to fill these datagrams In order to perform Packet Flow Sampling an sFlow Sampler Instance is configured with a Sampling Rate The Packet Flow sampling process results in the generation of Packet Flow Records In order to perform Counter Sampling the sFlow Poller Instance is configured with a Polling Interval The Counter Sampling process results in the generation of Counter Records The sFlow Agent collects Counter Records and Packet Flow Records and sends them in the form of sFlow datagrams to sFlow Collectors Monitoring the System 479 ProSafe M5300 Switch To display the sFlow Agent page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Basic gt sFlow Agent sFlow Agent Information sFlow Agent Information Agent Version 1 3 Netgear Inc 3
464. lization Memory Utilization Report 59756544 alloc 466309120 CPU Utilization 300 Secs osapiTimer _interrupt_thread bemL2X 90 System CPU Status The following table describes CPU Memory Status information Field Description Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes The available memory space for the switch in KBytes Available Memory CPU Utilization Information This area displays the CPU Utilization information It displays the amount of available and allocated memory and lists each system process task that is running along with its CPU utilization over the last 5 60 and 300 seconds Configuring System Information 26 ProSafe M5300 Switch Slot Information Use this page to view information about the cards installed in the switch s slots This page also provides information about the cards and switches that are compatible with the device To display the Switch Statistics page click System gt Management gt Slot Information A screen similar to the following displays Slot Information Slot Summary Status Administrative Power Configured Card Configured Card Inserted Card Inserted Card Card Card State State Model ID Description Model ID Description Power Down Pluggable 3 0 Full Enable Enable M5300 52G POE ProSafe 48 port Gigabit L2 PoE with 10 Gigabit Stacking M5300 52G POE ProSafe 48 port Gigabit L2 PoE with 10 Gigabit Stacking
465. ll interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Loopback In this state the router s interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic However it may still be desirable to gain information on the quality of this interface either through sending ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test For this reason IP packets may still be addressed to an interface in Loopback state To facilitate this such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes whose destination is the IP interface address e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router for the network by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router Designated Router This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node The network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network Backup Designated Router This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network
466. ll ports of the device To display the MAC Based VLAN page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt IP Subnet Based VLAN IP Subnet Based VLAN Configuration IP Subnet Based VLAN Configuration oo E 192 168 10 0 255 255 255 0 200 CJ To configure a VLAN based on an IP subnet 1 Use IP Address to specify a valid IP Address bound to VLAN ID Enter the IP Address in dotted decimal notation 2 Use Subnet Mask to specify a valid Subnet Mask of the IP Address Enter the Subnet mask in dotted decimal notation 3 Use VLAN ID to specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093 4 Click ADD to add a new IP subnet based VLAN 5 Click DELETE to delete the IP subnet based VLAN selected Configuring Switching Information 129 ProSafe M5300 Switch Port DVLAN Configuration Use this page to view and configure the double VLAN DVLAN tag settings for each interface Double VLAN tagging allows service providers to create Virtual Metropolitan Area Networks VMANs With DVLAN tagging service providers can pass VLAN traffic from one customer domain to another through a metro core By using an additional tag on the traffic the interface can differentiate between customers in the MAN while preserving an individual customer s VLAN identification that is used when the traffic enters the customer s 802 1Q domain To display the Port DVLAN Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Port DVLAN Configuration Po
467. lnet e SSH To display the Line Password Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt Line Password Line Password Configuration Line Password Configuration Console Password Confirm Console Password Telnet Password Confirm Telnet Password SSH Password seeeceee Confirm SSH Password seeceeee Managing Device Security 358 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the ine password 1 2 Use Console Password to enter the Console password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters Use Confirm Console Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly Use Telnet Password to enter the Telnet password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters Use Confirm Telnet Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly e The Encrypted option allows the administrator to transfer the privileged EXEC password between devices without having to know the password The Password field must be exactly 128 hexidecimal characters Use SSH Password to enter the SSH password Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters Use Confirm SSH Password to enter the password again to confirm that you entered it correctly e The Encrypted option allows the administrator to transfer the privileged EXEC password between devices without having to know the password The Password field must be exactly 128 hexidecimal
468. lready assigned to this interface and direction A low number indicates high precedence order If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number If the sequence number is not specified by the user a Sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction will be used The valid range is 14294967295 3 Click the appropriate orange bar to expose the available ports or LAGs The Port Selection Table provides a list of all available valid interfaces for ACL binding All non routing physical interfaces VLAN interface and interfaces participating in LAGs are listed e To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number so that an X appears in the box e To remove the selected ACL from a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number to clear the selection An X in the box indicates that the ACL is applied to the interface 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Managing Device Security 440 ProSafe M5300 Switch 5 Click APPLY to save any changes to the running configuration MAC Binding Table Use the MAC Binding Table page to view or delete the MAC ACL bindings To display the MAC Binding Table click Security gt
469. ly Configuring System Information 92 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP The IEEE 802 1AB defined standard Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP allows stations on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions This information is viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the LAN From the LLDP link you can access the following pages e LLDP on page 93 e LLDP MED on page 100 LLDP is a one way protocol there are no request response sequences Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function and is received and processed by stations implementing the receive function The transmit and receive functions can be enabled disabled separately per port By default both transmit and receive are disabled on all ports The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine appropriately based on the configured status and operational state of the port The Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an enhancement to LLDP with the following features e Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and DiffServ settings enabling plug and play networking e Device location discovery for creation of location databases e Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints e Inventory management enabling network administrators to track their network devices an
470. ly authenticated client is redirected The max length for the URL is 512 alphanumeric characters 12 Use Background Color to specify the value of the background color Example BFBFBF 13 Use Foreground Color to specify the value of the foreground color Example 999999 14 Use Separator Color to specify the value of the separator color Example 46008F 15 Use Max Bandwidth Down to specify the maximum rate Rate in bytes per seconds at which a client can receive data from the network 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 536870911 16 Use Max Bandwidth Up to specify the maximum rate Rate in bytes per seconds at which a client can send data into the network 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 536870911 17 Use Max Input to specify the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transmit After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 4294967295 18 Use Max Output to specify the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to receive After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 4294967295 19 Use Max Total to specify the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transfer i e the sum of octets transmitted and received After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected 0 indicates limit not enforced Range 0 4294967295 20 Click ADD to add a new CP in
471. machine Possible values are e Request e Response Success Fail Timeout e Initialize Idle Managing Device Security 394 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Vlan Assigned This field displays the vlan id assigned to the selected interface by the Authenticator This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected interface is not mac based This field is not configurable Vlan Assigned Reason This field displays reason for the vlan id assigned by the authenticator to the selected interface This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected interface is not mac based This field is not configurable Possible values are e Radius Unauth Default Not Assigned Key Transmission Enabled Session Timeout Session Termination Action This field displays if key transmission is enabled on the selected port This is not a configurable field The possible values are true and false If the value is false key transmission will not occur Otherwise Key transmission is supported on the selected port This field displays Session Timeout set by the Radius Server for the selected port This field is displayed only when the port control mode of the selected port is not mac based This field displays Termination Action set by the Radius Server for the selected port This f
472. mark prec The packet IP Precedence is re marked and forwarded e send the packet is forwarded without DiffServ modification Color Mode Awareness Policing in the DiffServ feature uses either co or blind or color aware mode Color blind mode ignores the coloration marking of the incoming packet Color aware mode takes into consideration the current packet marking when determining the policing outcome An auxiliary traffic class is used in conjunction with the policing definition to specify a value for one of the 802 1p Secondary 802 1p IP DSCP or IP Precedence fields designating the incoming color value to be used as the conforming color The color of exceeding traffic may be optionally specified as well Counting Updating octet and packet statistics to keep track of data handling along traffic paths within DiffServ In this DiffServ feature counters are not explicitly configured by the user but are designed into the system based on the DiffServ policy being created See the Statistics section of this document for more details Assigning QoS Queue Directs traffic stream to the specified QoS queue This allows a traffic classifier to specify which one of the supported hardware queues are used for handling packets belonging to the class Redirecting Forces classified traffic stream to a specified egress port physical or LAG This can occur in addition to any marking or policing action It may also be specified along with a QoS queue
473. miscuous Interface Configuration page click the Security gt Traffic Control gt Private VLAN gt Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface GO Promiscuous Primary VLAN Promiscuous Secondary VLAN s Interf 0 ti I VLAN e crimes Ss to 4093 oe Sy 4093 aia s AEE 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 To associate ports with promiscuous private VLANs 1 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 In the Promiscuous Primary VLAN field specify the VLAN ID of the primary VLAN in which the selected ports are members 3 In the Promiscuous Secondary VLAN field specify the VLAN ID of the secondary VLAN in which the selected ports are members 4 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Field Description Operational VLAN s Indicates which VLANs associated with the port are operational Managing Device Security 411 ProSafe M5300 Switch Storm Control A broadcast storm is the result of an excessive number of broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port
474. mode on all ports by clicking the corresponding radio button When you specify Enable for Broadcast Storm Recovery and the broadcast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the broadcast traffic The factory default is enabled e Multicast Storm Control All Enable or disable the Multicast Storm Recovery mode on all ports by clicking the corresponding radio button When you specify Enable for Multicast Storm Recovery and the multicast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the multicast traffic The factory default is disabled e Unknown Unicast Storm Control All Enable or disable the Unicast Storm Recovery mode on all ports by clicking the corresponding radio button When you specify Enable for Unicast Storm Recovery and the Unicast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the configured threshold the switch blocks discards the unicast traffic The factory default is disabled Managing Device Security 412 ProSafe M5300 Switch Storm Control Interface Configuration To display the Storm Control Interface Configuration page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Storm Control gt Storm Control Interface Configuration Port Configuration Port Configuration 1 2 All Broadcast Storm Port Recovery Mode Recovery Level Type Recovery Level Control Action Recovery Mode Oe E E a O O 1 0 1 Enable Percent RateLimit Disa
475. moved and the device is updated To change the settings for an existing SNTP server select the check box next to the configured server and enter new values in the available fields and then click APPLY Configuration changes take effect immediately Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click REFRESH to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch SNTP Server Status The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers configured on your switch The following table describes the SNTP Global Status fields The following table displays SNTP Server Status information Field Description Address Specifies all the existing Server Addresses If no Server configuration exists a message saying No SNTP server exists flashes on the screen Last Update Time Specifies the local date and time UTC that the response from this server was used to update the system clock Last Attempt Time Specifies the local date and time UTC that this SNTP server was last queried Last Attempt Status Specifies the status of the last SNTP request to this server If no packet has been Requests Specifies the number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot received from this server a status of Other is displayed e Other None of the following enumeration values Success The SN
476. mum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database table can hold Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset The largest number of entries that have been present in the Multicast Forwarding Database table since last reset This value is also Known as the MFDB high water mark Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table Configuring Switching Information 157 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping is a feature that allows a switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses which range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance A traditional Ethernet network may be separated into different network segments to prevent placing too many devices onto the same shared media Bridges and switches connect these segments When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received the switch will forward a copy into each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the IEEE MAC Bridge standard Eventually the packet is made accessible to all nodes connecte
477. n Enter an integer from 0 to 63 The IPv6 DSCP is selected by possibly selection one of the DSCP keyword from a drop down menu If a value is to be selected by specifying its numeric value then select the Other option in the drop down menu and a text box will appear where the numeric value of the DSCP can be entered Rate Limit Conform Data Rate Specify the allowed transmission rate for frames on the interface Rate Limit Burst Size Specify the number of bytes allowed in a temporary traffic burst Burst Rate Time Range Select the name of the time range that will impose a time limitation on the ACL rule If a time range with the specified name does not exist and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied immediately If a time range with specified name exists and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied when the time range with specified name becomes active The ACL rule is removed when the time range with specified name becomes inactive Click APPLY to add the ACL rule with the specified criteria Use DELETE to select the check box of the rule you want to delete and click DELETE Managing Device Security 452 ProSafe M5300 Switch IP Binding Configuration When an ACL is bound to an interface all the rules that have been defined are applied to the selected interface Use the IP Binding Configuration page to assign ACL lists t
478. n 4096 and 9216 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Octets Received The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization If greater precision is desired the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval Packets Received 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 65 127 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Monitoring the System 461 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Packets Received 128 255 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 256 511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 512 1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that
479. n all configuration settings to default values To reset the switch to the factory default settings select the check box and click the APPLY button to have all configuration parameters reset to their factory default values All changes you have made will be lost even if you have issued a save You will be shown a confirmation screen after you select the button Password Reset Use the Password Reset page to reset all user passwords to defaults To access the Password Reset page click Maintenance gt Reset gt Password Reset Password Reset Password Reset Check this box and click APPLY below to reset all user passwords Select the check box and click the APPLY button to have all user passwords reset to their factory default values All changes you have made will be lost even if you have issued a save Maintenance 486 ProSafe M5300 Switch Upload File From Switch Use the File Upload page to upload configuration ASCII log ASCII and image binary files from the switch to the TFTP server The Upload menu contains links to the following options e File Upload on page 487 e HTTP File Upload on page 488 e USB File Upload on page 489 File Upload To display the File Upload page click Maintenance gt Upload gt File Upload File Upload File Upload File Type Archive Image Name imagel Transfer Mode TFTP Server Address Type IPv4 Tel Server Address 0 0 0 0 Remote File Path R
480. n an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists if any are already assigned to this interface and direction The MAC Binding Table displays the interface and MAC ACL binding information See MAC Binding Table on page 441 The ACL named Sales_ACL looks for Ethernet frames with destination and source MAC addresses and MAC masks defined in the rule Also the frame must be tagged with VLAN ID 2 which is the Sales department VLAN The CoS value of the frame must be 0 which is the default value for Ethernet frames Frames that match this criteria are permitted on interfaces 6 7 and 8 and are assigned to the hardware egress queue 0 which is the default queue All other traffic is explicitly denied on these interfaces To allow additional traffic to enter these Configuration Examples 512 ProSafe M5300 Switch ports you must add a new permit rule with the desired match criteria and bind the rule to interfaces 6 7 and 8 Standard IP ACL Example Configuration The following example shows how to create an IP based ACL that prevents any IP traffic from the Finance department from being allowed on the ports that are associated with other departments Traffic from the Finance department is identified by each packet s network IP address 1 From the IP ACL screen create a new IP ACL with an IP ACL ID of 1 See P ACL on page 442 2 From the IP Rules screen create a rule for IP ACL
481. n is enabled Use Passive Mode to make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks Interfaces are not passive by default Use Network Type to set the OSPF network type on the interface to broadcast or point to point OSPF only selects a designated router and originates network LSAs for broadcast networks No more than two OSPF routers may be present on a point to point link The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is broadcast Routing 243 ProSafe M5300 Switch 12 Use Authentication Type to select an authentication type other than none You can select the authentication type from the pull down menu The choices are e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pull down menu no authentication protocols will be run e Simple If you select Simple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key e Encrypt If you select Encrypt you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID Encryption uses the MD5 Message Digest algorithm All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID 13 Use Authentication Key to enter the OSPF Authentication Key for the specified int
482. n menu When the LAG is enabled it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs i e the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it may receive are dropped The factory default is disable Use Hash Mode to select the load balancing mode used on a port channel LAG Traffic is balanced on a port channel LAG by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link e Src MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src Dest MAC VLAN EType incoming port Source Destination MAC VLAN EtherType and incoming port associated with the packet e Src IP and Src TCP UDP Port fields Source IP and Source TCP UDP fields of the packet e DestIP and Dest TCP UDP Port fields Destination IP and Destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet e Src Dest IP and TCP UDP Port fields Source Destination IP and source destination TCP UDP Port fields of the packet e Enhanced Hashing mode Features MODULO N operation based on the number of ports in the LAG non Unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash algorithm excellent load balancing performance and packet attributes sel
483. n of sender MAC Address for DHCP Snooping The factory default is enabled DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration 1 Use VLAN ID to enter the VLAN for which the DHCP Snooping Mode is to be enabled 2 Use DHCP Snooping Mode to enable or disable the DHCP Snooping feature for the specified VLAN The factory default is disabled 3 Click APPLY to apply the new configuration and cause the changes to take effect These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save configuration is performed 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Managing Device Security 415 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration To display the DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Interface Configuration DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface SS so Logging Interface Trust Mode Invalid Rate Limit pps Burst Interval secs COO O j T 1 Ci C 1 0 2 Disable Disable 1 0 3 Disable Disable 1 0 4 Disable Disable 1 0 5 Disable Disable o0 o To configure interfaces for DHCP snooping 1 2 Select the check box associated with each interface to configure To apply the same settings to all interfaces select the check box in the header row If Trust Mode is enabled DHCP snooping application considers as port trusted DHCP servers must be reached through trusted ports The fac
484. n on page 125 MAC Based VLAN on page 126 Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration on page 127 Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership on page 128 IP Subnet Based VLAN on page 129 Port DVLAN Configuration on page 130 Voice VLAN Configuration on page 131 GARP Switch Configuration on page 132 GARP Port Configuration on page 133 VLAN Membership Use this page to add ports and LAGs as members of existing VLANs To display the VLAN Membership page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt VLAN Membership In the following screen the Port area for stack Unit 1 has been expanded to show ports and their membership status for VLAN 1 VLAN Membership VLAN Membership VLAN ID 1 iwl Group Operation Untag All VLAN Name default UNTAGGED PORT MEMBERS TAGGED PORT MEMBERS 17 18 19 20 Uj uj uju Configuring Switching Information 122 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure VLAN membership 1 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use Group Operation to select all the ports and configure them Untag All Select all the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be untagged All the ports will be included in the VLAN Tag All Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be tagged All the ports will be included in the VLAN Remove All All the ports that may be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP This selection has the effec
485. n page 141 e Sessions Detailed on page 142 iSCSI Targets Use this page to view iSCSI targets and to assign target ports port IP address combinations for iSCSI optimization on the switch To access the iSCSI Targets page click Switching gt iSCSI gt Advanced gt iSCSI Targets iSCSI Targets iSCSI Targets Configuration m TCP Port IP Address Target Name 860 3260 Configuring Switching Information 141 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure iSCSI target settings 1 Inthe TCP Port field specify the TCP port number for the target that will monitor for iSCSI traffic The well known iSCSI ports 3260 and 860 are configured as the default ports In the IP Address field specify an IP address for the target that will monitor for iSCSI traffic In the Target Name field specify a name to assign to the Target Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes of 2S Sessions Detailed Use this page to view detailed information about active iSCSI sessions To access the iSCSI Global Configuration page click Switching gt iSCSI gt Advanced gt Sessions Detailed iSCSI Sessions Detailed No iSCSI Sessions Are Available The fields on this page display the information the following table describes Field Description Session Index Shows the list of Session indices The information displayed in the other fields corresponds to the selected Session Index
486. n the range of 1 and 1800 The default value is 60 5 Use Querier Expiry Interval secs to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed The Querier Expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300 The default value is 60 Field Description VLAN Ids Enabled For MLD Snooping Querier Displays VLAN Ids enabled for MLD snooping querier Configuring Switching Information 171 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration To access the MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt MLD Snooping gt Querier VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration Querier Operational a z Last Last Election Querier VLAN Operational Operational Max Es i Querier Querier Participate Address Version k Response Address Version 1 VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID on which MLD Snooping Querier is administratively enabled and VLAN exists in the VLAN database 2 Use Querier Election Participate Mode to enable or disable the MLD Snooping Querier participate in election mode When this mode is disabled up on seeing other querier of same version in the vlan the snooping querier move to non querier state Only when this mode is enabled the snooping querier will participate in querier election where in the least IP address will win the querier election and op
487. n the selected port but the mirroring information is retained 5 Direction Specifies the direction of the Traffic to be mirrored from the configured mirrored port s Default value is Tx and Rx 6 Click APPLY to apply the settings to the system If the port is configured as a source port the Mirroring Port field value is Mirrored 7 To delete a mirrored port select the check box next to the mirrored port and then click DELETE 8 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Field Description Mirroring Port Indicates the port to be in a mirrored state Monitoring the System 478 ProSafe M5300 Switch sFlow sFlow is a standard for monitoring high speed switched and routed networks sFlow technology is built into network equipment and gives complete visibility into network activity enabling effective management and control of network resources The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow Agent embedded in a switch or router or in a standalone probe and a central sFlow Collector The sFlow Agent uses sampling technology to capture traffic statistics from the device it is monitoring sFlow datagrams are used to immediately forward the sampled traffic statistics to an sFlow Collector for analysis The sFlow Agent uses two forms of sampling statistical packet based sampling of switched or routed Packet Flows and time based samp
488. nVLAN 0 5 Disable Disable INACTIVE InVLAN 0 6 Disable Disable INACTIVE InNVLAN 0 7 Disable Disable INACTIVE INVLAN 0 8 Disable Disable INACTIVE INVLAN 0 9 Disable Disable ACTIVE InVLAN Disable Disable INACTIVE InVLAN Disable none Disable INACTIVE InVLAN Disable none Disable INACTIVE InVLAN Go To Interface o C O E O Cl O Cl o C o E 1 1 Use Interface to specify the interface you want to configure 2 Use Admin Mode to Enable or Disable MVR on a port The factory default is Disable 3 Use Type to configure the port as an MVR receiver port or a source port The default port type is none Use Immediate Leave to Enable or Disable the Immediate Leave feature of MVR ona port The factory default is Disable 5 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest MVR interface configuration 6 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 7 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Field Definition Status Displays the status of the specific port Configuring Switching Information 175 ProSafe M5300 Switch MVR Group Membership To display the MVR Configuration page click Switching gt MVR gt Advanced gt MVR Group Membership A screen similar to the following displays MVR Group Membership MVR Group Membership Group IP 1 U
489. nal LSDB limit the router enters overflow state The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit none default AS external LSAs in database The external LSDB limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and or any regular OSPF area The range for limit is 1 to 2147483647 Routing 235 10 11 12 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Default Metric to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes This field is blank if a default metric has not been configured The range of valid values is 1 to 16777214 Use Maximum Paths to set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination The range of valid values is 1 to 4 Use AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to configure the auto cost reference bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates link cost Specify the reference bandwidth in megabits per second Unless a link cost is configured the link cost is computed by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth The range is 1 to 4294967 Use Default Passive Setting to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces Configuring this field overwrites any present interface level passive mode setting OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces but does advertise attached networks as stub networks Field Description ASBR Mode The router is an Autonomous System Boundary Router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol or
490. ndary IP Address VLAN Primary IP Secondary IP Secondary IP fea aaa C E Mask eal 168 3 10 C E 168 4 15 C m 255 255 0 To configure a secondary IP address on an interface enabled for routing 1 Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Secondary IP Address to add a secondary IP address to the selected interface 3 Use Secondary IP Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask for the interface This is also referred to as the subnet network mask and defines the portion of the interface s IP Address that is used to identify the attached network This value is read only once configured 4 Click ADD to add a Secondary IP Address for the selected interface 5 Click DELETE to delete the Secondary IP Address from the selected interface Field Description VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the displayed or configured interface Primary IP Address The Primary IP Address for the Interface Routing 200 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet Protocol With 128 bit addresses versus 32 bit addresses for IPv4 IPv6 solves the address depletion issues seen with IPv4 and removes the requirement for Network Address Translation NAT which is used in IPv4 networks to reduce the number of globally unique IP addresses required for a given network Its aggregate addresses can dramatically reduce the size of the global routing table through well
491. ndows e If the browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer ActiveX must be enabled If the switch successfully contacts the Registration Server the NETGEAR Product Registration page opens in a new browser window The product serial number and model number fields are pre populated After you provide some basic information and click Register the registration process is complete Help 503 ProSafe M5300 Switch If you have not registered the product or have not disabled the registration reminders the following pop up window appears each time a user successfully logs on to the switch We are delighted to have you as a customer Registration confirms your email alerts will work lowers technical support resolution time and ensures your shipping address accuracy We d also like to incorporate your feedback into future product development NETGEAR will never sell or rent your email address and you may opt out of communications at any time Please register now At a later time you can also register by choosing Help gt Registration from the menu toolbar TURN OFF REMIND ME LATER REGISTERNOW The registration pop up window includes the following buttons e TURN OFF Use this button to turn off the Product Registration feature and to prevent the registration reminder pop up window from appearing on subsequent successful login sessions e REMIND ME LATER The pop up window is closed without taking any action and the regis
492. ne unit was a stack master then the unit with the highest management preference is elected stack master The management preference can be assigned by the administrator However if all units have the same management preference then the unit with the highest MAC address is assigned as the stack master Factory Defaults Reset Behavior If the stack master is reset to the factory default settings see Factory Default on page 281 the stack master applies the default settings to all the stack members and resets the stack including all participating stack members When the stack boots the stack master election process begins A switch can be described in terms of three semi independent functions called the forwarding plane the control plane and the management plane The forwarding plane forwards data packets The forwarding plane is implemented in hardware The control plane is the set of protocols that determine how the forwarding plane should forward packets deciding which data packets are allowed to be forwarded and where they should go Application software on the management unit acts as the control plane The management plane is application software running on the management unit that provides interfaces allowing a network administrator to configure and monitor the device Configuring System Information 70 ProSafe M5300 Switch Nonstop Forwarding Nonstop forwarding NSF allows the forwarding plane of stack units to continue to for
493. nfigure the DHCP Relay information 1 Use Maximum Hop Count to enter the maximum number of hops a client request can take before being discarded The range is 1 to 16 The default value is 4 2 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable radio button When you select enable DHCP requests will be forwarded to the IP address you entered in the Server Address field 3 Use Minimum Wait Time to enter a Minimum Wait Time in seconds This value will be compared to the time stamp in the client s request packets which should represent the time since the client was powered up Packets will only be forwarded when the time stamp exceeds the minimum wait time The range is 0 to 100 4 Use Circuit ID Option Mode to enable or disable Circuit ID Option mode If you select enable Relay Agent options will be added to requests before they are forwarded to the server and removed from replies before they are forwarded to clients Configuring System Information 53 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Relay Status The following table describes the DHCP Relay Status fields Field Description Requests Received The total number of DHCP requests received from all clients since the last time the switch was reset Requests Relayed The total number of DHCP requests forwarded to the server since the last time the switch was reset Packets Discarded The total number of DHCP packets discarded by this Relay Agent since the last time the
494. ng gt Ports gt Port Configuration Port Configuration Port Configuration 1 2 LAGS All fort Port Type STP mode 1 0 1 Normal Enable 1 0 2 Normal Enable 1 0 3 Normal Enable 1 0 4 Normal Enable 1 0 5 Normal Enable 1 0 6 Normal Enable 1 0 7 Normal Enable 1 0 8 Normal Enable 1 0 9 Normal Enable co Maximum Frame Physical Status Link Status Link Trap 1000 Mbps Link Up Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 Unknown Link Down Enable 1518 oon Dunk WN Configuring Switching Information 181 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure port settings 1 2 Select the check box associated with each Port to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all ports Use STP Mode to select the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode for the port or LAG The possible values are e Enable Select this to enable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port e Disable Select this to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port Use the Admin Mode pull down menu to select the Port control administration state You must select enable if you want the port to participate in the network The factory default is enabled Use LACP Mode to select th
495. ng the Captive Portal Global Configuration page you can control the administrative state of the CP feature and configure global settings that affect all captive portals configured on the switch To display the Captive Portal Global Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Global Configuration Captive Portal Global Configuration Captive Portal Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Operational Status Disabled Disabled Reason Administrator Disabled CP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Additional HTTP Port lo Additional HTTP Secure Port o Authentication Timeout 300 Supported Captive Portals Configured Captive Portals Active Captive Portals System Supported Users Local Supported Users Configured Local Users Authenticated Users Managing Device Security 426 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Admin Mode to enable or disable Captive Portal feature By default the Captive Portal feature is disabled Use Additional HTTP Port to configure an additional port for HTTP traffic HTTP traffic uses port 80 but you can configure an additional port for HTTP traffic Enter a port number between 0 65535 excluding port 80 Enter 0 to unconfigure the Additional HTTP Port Default is 0 Use Additional HTTP Secure Port to configure an additional port for HTTP Secure traffic HTTP Secure traffic uses port 443 Enter a port number between 0 65535 excluding port 443 Enter 0 to unconfigure the Addition
496. nge in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Import Summary LSAs The summary LSAs will be enabled disabled imported into this area Routing 262 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stub Area Configuration To display the Stub Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt Stub Area Configuration Stub Area Configuration OSPFv3 Stub Area Configuration Area SPF Border Area LSA Type of A ID Default Cost ss Runs Router Checksum sais az Service Count To configure an OSPF v3 stub area 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into areas Defaults to Enable 3 Use Default Cost to enter the metric value you want applied for the default route advertised into the stub area Valid values range from 1 to 16 777 215 This value is applicable only to Stub areas 4 Click ADD to configure the area as a stub area 5 Click DELETE to delete the stub area designation The area will be returned to normal state Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Co
497. ning shows it as N A The factory default is 1 second Managing Device Security 423 ProSafe M5300 Switch DAI ACL Configuration Use this page to add DAI access control lists ACL and to view DAI ACLs that have been configured To display the DAI ACL Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI ACL Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection ACL Configuration DAI ACL Configuration 1 Use Name to create New ARP ACL for DAI 2 Click ADD to add a new DAI ACL to the switch configuration 3 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected DAI ACL from the switch configuration DAI ACL Rule Configuration Use this page to configure the rules to add to existing DAI ACLs To display the DAI ACL Rule Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Dynamic ARP Inspection gt DAI ACL Rule Configuration Dynamic ARP Inspection ACL Rules Configuration Rules ACL Name dail DAI Rule Table Sourcer address Sourcemacaddress O To configure DAI ACL rules 1 Select the DAI ACL with the rule to add or display from the ACL Name field 2 Inthe Source IP Address field specify the Sender IP address match value for the DAI ARP ACL 3 In the Source MAC Address field specify the Sender MAC address match value for the DAI ARP ACL 4 Click ADD to add a new Rule to the selected ACL 5 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected Rule from the selected ACL
498. nization and Upgrade All stack members must run the same software version to ensure compatibility within the stack By default if a unit is added to the stack and its software version is not the same as the stack master that unit is not allowed to join the stack You can enable the Stack Firmware Auto Upgrade feature which will automatically synchronize the firmware version on the new unit with the version running on the stack master The synchronization operation may result in either upgrade or downgrade of firmware on the mismatched stack member Upgrading the firmware on a stack of switches is the same as upgrading the firmware on a single switch After you download a new image by using the File Download page or SCC the downloaded image is distributed to all the connected units of the stack Note It is recommended to set the active image for all stack members the same as the active image of the stack master In other words if image1 is the active image on the stack master all units should have image1 as the active image For information about configuring the active image see Dual Image Configuration on page 289 Configuration Maintenance The stack master stores and maintains the saved and running configuration files for the switch stack The configuration files include the system level settings for the switch stack and the interface level settings for all stack members Each stack member retains a copy of the saved file for backup purpo
499. nt Show the number of UDP packets hitting the UDP port DHCPv 6 Server IPv6 natively provides IP address autoconfiguration through IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP and through the use of Router Advertisement messages Thus the role of DHCPv 6 within the network is different than that of DHCPv4 because DHCPV6 is not the primary source for IP address assignment From the DHCP Server link you can access the following pages e DHCPVv6 Server Configuration on page 60 e DHCPV6 Pool Configuration on page 60 e DHCPV6 Prefix Delegation Configuration on page 62 e DHCPVv6 Interface Configuration on page 63 e DHCPV 6 Bindings Information on page 64 e DHCPV6 Server Statistics on page 65 Configuring System Information 59 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCPv6 Server Configuration To display the DHCP Server Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCP Server Configuration A screen similar to the following displays DHCPv6 Server Configuration DHCPVv6 Server Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable DHCPv6 Server DUID To configure global DHCPv6 server settings 1 Use Admin Mode to specify whether the DHCPv6 Service is to be Enabled or Disabled Default value is Disable 2 In the DHCPv6 Server DUID field view the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client if enabled when sending messages to the DHCPV6 server 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data
500. nt to be configured SNMP v3 Access Mode Indicates the SNMPv3 access privileges for the user account The admin account always has Read Write access and all other accounts have Read Only access Use Authentication Protocol to specify the SNMPv3 Authentication Protocol setting for the selected user account The valid Authentication Protocols are None MD5 or SHA e Ifyou select None the user will be unable to access the SNMP data from an SNMP browser e Ifyou select MD5 or SHA the user login password will be used as the SNMPv3 authentication password and you must therefore specify a password and it must be eight characters long Use Encryption Protocol to specify the SNMPv3 Encryption Protocol setting for the selected user account The valid Encryption Protocols are None or DES e Ifyou select the DES Protocol you must enter a key in the Encryption Key field e If None is specified for the Protocol the Encryption Key is ignored Encryption Key If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field enter the SNMPv3 Encryption Key here otherwise this field is ignored Valid keys are 0 to 15 characters long The APPLY checkbox must be checked in order to change the Encryption Protocol and Encryption Key Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediate
501. nter up to 16 characters 3 Use Protocol s to specify the protocols you want to be associated with the group The protocol options are as follows e IP IP is a network layer protocol that provides a connectionless service for the delivery of data e ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a low level protocol that dynamically maps network layer addresses to physical medium access control MAC addresses e IPX The Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX is a connectionless datagram Network layer protocol that forwards data over a network e User specified hexadecimal or decimal value in the range of 0x0600 1536 to OxFFFF 65535 Configuring Switching Information 127 ProSafe M5300 Switch 4 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID It can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093 All the ports in the group will assign this VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols you included in this group 5 Click ADD to add a new Protocol Based VLAN group to the switch 6 Click DELETE to remove the Protocol Based VLAN group identified by the value in the Group ID field Field Description Ports Identifies all the member ports which belong to the group Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership To display the Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership In the following screen the port area for Unit 1 has been expanded to show that por
502. nterval Proxy Start Frequency The number of times the proxy was brought up Routing 326 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Proxy Interface Statistics To display the MLD Proxy Interface Statistics page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast MLD gt Proxy Interface Statistics MLD Proxy Interface Statistics MLD Proxy Interface Statistics MLD Proxy non operational Field Description Proxy Interface Displays the interface on which MLD Proxy packets received Version The version of MLD Proxy packets received Queries Received The number of MLD Proxy queries received Report Received The number of MLD Proxy reports received Reports Sent The number of MLD Proxy reports sent Leaves Received The number of MLD Proxy leaves received Leaves Sent The number of MLD Proxy leaves sent Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest MLD Proxy interface statistics Routing 327 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Proxy Membership To display the MLD Proxy Membership page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Proxy Membership MLD Proxy Membership MLD Proxy Membership Search By Group i GO Proxy Interface Group IP Source Hosts Last Reporter Expiry Time State Filter Mode Number of Sources Field Description Group IP The IPv6 multicast group address Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multi
503. number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 512 1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 1024 1518 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted gt 1518 Octets The total number of packets transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed This counter has a max increment rate of 815 counts per sec at 10 Mb s Maximum Frame Size The maximum ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured including ethernet header CRC and payload 1518 to 9216 The default maximum frame size is 1518 Total Packets Transmitted Successfully The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level pr
504. ny neighboring multicast routers The ProSafe managed switch performs the multicast router role of the IGMP protocol which means it collects the membership information needed by the active multicast routing protocol The ProSafe managed switch supports IGMP Version 3 Version 3 adds support for source filtering which is the ability for a system to report interest in receiving packets only from specific source addresses as required to support Source Specific Multicast SSM or from all but specific source addresses sent to a particular multicast address Version 3 is designed to be interoperable with Versions 1 and 2 From the IGMP link you can access the following pages e IGMP Global Configuration on page 296 e IGMP Routing Interface Configuration on page 297 e IGMP Routing Interface Statistics on page 298 e IGMP Groups on page 299 e IGMP Membership on page 300 e IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration on page 301 e IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics on page 302 e IGMP Proxy Membership on page 303 IGMP Global Configuration To display the IGMP Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Global Configuration IGMP Global Configuration IGMP Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable To configure the administrative mode of IGMP on the switch select the desired option from the Admin Mode field The default is disable If you change the mode click APPLY to update the switch with the change
505. o ACL Priorities and Interfaces To display the IP Binding Configuration page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP Binding Configuration IP Binding Configuration Binding Configuration ACL 1D oo E inbound x Sequence Number loss 1 to 4294967295 Port Selection Table Interface Binding Status 5 a Sequence Interface Direction ACL Type ACL ID Name Interface direction act type acto name aaa 101 a 1 0 8 Inbound IP ACL To configure IP ACL interface bindings 1 Select an existing IP ACL from the ACL ID menu The packet filtering direction for ACL is Inbound which means the IP ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the port 2 Specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists already assigned to this interface and direction A low number indicates high precedence order If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number If the sequence number is not specified by the user a Sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction will be used The valid range is 1 4294967295 3 Click the appropriate orange bar to expose the available ports or LAGs The Port Selection Table specifies list of all available valid interfaces for ACL mapping All non routing phy
506. o display the NSSA Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt NSSA Area Configuration NSSA Area Configuration OSPF NSSA Area Configuration Default Information Originate Non Comparable Cost To configure an OSPF NSSA area 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into NSSA areas 3 The Default Information Originate area displays the default Route Information These options will permit a user to advertise a default route into the NSSA when Import Summary LSAs is disabled They can also be applied by the CLI command area area id nssa default info originate in the ip router OSPF config mode e Use Admin Mode to enable or disable the default information originate Valid values are True or False e Use Metric Value to set the Default Metric value for default information originate The valid range of values is 1 to 16777214 e Use Metric Type to select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field e Comparable Cost External Type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPF metric e Non comparable Cost External Type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPF metric 4 Use Translate Role to select the translator role of the NSSA e always Cause
507. oE Configuration A screen similar to the following displays PoE Configuration Unit Selection Unit PoE Configuration Firmware Version Power Status Off Total Power Main AC 384 Watt Total Power RPS 1440 Watt Power Source Main AC Threshold Power 345600 mw Consumed Power 0 mW System Usage Threshold 90 Power Management Mode Dynamic Auto Reset Mode Enable Disable Traps Enable Disable To configure PoE trap settings 1 2 3 If you are managing a stack of switches select the ID of the stack member to configure from the Unit menu Specify the percentage of the threshold power that must be consumed before a trap is sent Select the power management algorithm the switch uses to deliver power to the requesting PDs e Static The Power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold configured on the port e Dynamic The power consumption of each port is measured and calculated in real time Select the appropriate radio button to enable or disable SNMP traps for PoE Click APPLY to apply the new settings to the system Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click REFRESH to update the screen with the current information Configuring System Information 83 ProSafe M5300 Switch The PoE Configuration page also provides the following information Field Description
508. od which floods the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when STP is disabled on this port The possible values are Enable or Disable 8 Use Auto Edge to configure the auto edge mode of a port which allows the port to become an edge port if it does not see BPDUs for some duration The possible values are Enable or Disable 9 Use Root Guard to configure the root guard mode which sets a port to discard any superior information received by the port and thus protect against root of the device from changing The port gets put into discarding state and does not forward any packets The possible values are Enable or Disable 10 Use Loop Guard to configure the loop guard on the port to protect layer 2 forwarding loops If loop guard is enabled the port moves into the STP loop inconsistent blocking state instead of the listening learning forwarding state 11 Use TCN Guard to configure the TCN guard for a port restricting the port from propagating any topology change information received through that port The possible values are Enable or Disable 12 Use Port Mode to enable disable Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port channel The possible values are Enable or Disable Field Description Auto Calculated Port Path Cost Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated Enabled or not Disabled Path cost will be calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is
509. ofile use the DSCP field to assign a DSCP value to iSCSI session packets If using DSCP as the QoS profile specify whether to enable or disable the Remark mode The default is Disable Enabling Remark allows the packets to be updated with IEEE 802 1p or IP DSCP values Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS treatment as the packets continue through the network In the iSCSI Aging Time field set the number of minutes a session can be inactive prior to removal Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Switching Information 140 ProSafe M5300 Switch Sessions Use this page to view active iSCSI session information To access the iSCSI Global Configuration page click Switching gt iSCSI gt Basic gt Sessions iSCSI Sessions Target Name Initiator Name ISID Initiator Session ID The fields on this page display the information the following table describes Field Description Target Name Shows the name assigned to the iSCSI target Initiator Name Shows the name of the initiator ISID Initiator Session ID Shows the unique identifier an initiator assigns to the session endpoint When it is combined with the iSCSI initiator name it provides a unique name in the world for the SCSI initiator port Advanced From the iSCSI Advanced link you can access the following pages e iSCSI Targets on page 141 e Sessions o
510. on CPU Management Interface This is the internal switch interface responsible for the switch base MAC address This interface is not configurable and is always listed in the MAC Address Table 5 1 Routing VLAN Interfaces This is an interface used for routing functionality The format can be expressed in vlan id format or unit slot interface format where unit is 0 slot is 4 and interface is the logical VLAN interface ID 0 4 1 0 4 2 0 4 3 and so on or vlan 1 vlan 2 vlan 3 and so on Getting Started 17 ProSafe M5300 Switch Getting Started 18 Contiguring System Intormation Use the features in the System tab to define the switch s relationship to its environment The System tab contains links to the following features Management on page 19 Device View See Device View on page 12 License on page 43 Services on page 45 Stacking on page 68 PoE M5300 28G POE and M5300 52G POE Only on page 82 SNMP on page 87 LLDP on page 93 ISDP on page 109 Timer Schedule on page 114 Management This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch information such as the management interface IP address system clock settings and DNS information From the Management link you can access the following pages System Information on page 20 Switch Statistics on page 24 System CPU Status on page 26 Loopback Interface on page 29 Network Interface
511. on administratively prohibited messages sent ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Parameter Problem Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages Transmitted ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Router Advertisement Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement Messages Transmitted ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Transmitted The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface The number of Redirect messages sent ICMPv6 Group Membership Query Messages Transmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent ICMPv6 Group Membership Response Messages Transmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent ICMPv6 G
512. on on page 280 e VRRP Secondary IP on page 282 e Tracking Configuration on page 283 e Virtual Router Statistics on page 284 VRRP Secondary IP To display the VRRP Secondary IP page click Routing gt VRRP gt Advanced gt VRRP Secondary IP VRRP Secondary IP Address Configuration Routing Interface VRRP Interface VRRP ID 10 5 e ile VRRP Secondary IP Address Configuration IP resol s Secondary IP Address Address 192 168 3 20 192 168 3 25 To configure a secondary IP address for the VRRP pair 1 Use VRRP ID and Interface to select one of the existing Virtual Routers listed by interface number and VRRP ID 2 Use Secondary IP Address to enter the IP address for the interface This address must be a member of one of the subnets currently configured on the interface This value is read only once configured 3 Click ADD to add a new secondary IP address to the selected VRRP interface 4 Click DELETE to delete the selected secondary IP address Field Description Virtual Router ID The Virtual Router ID for which data is to be displayed or configured Primary IP Address The Primary IP Address of the Virtual Router Routing 282 ProSafe M5300 Switch Tracking Configuration Use Tracking Configuration to track specific route IP states within the router that can alter the priority level of a virtual router fora VRRP group To display the Tracking Configuration page click Routing gt VRRP gt
513. on page 30 Time on page 34 DNS on page 40 SDM Template Preference on page 42 19 ProSafe M5300 Switch System Information After a successful login the System Information page displays Use this page to configure and view general device information To display the System Information page click System gt Management gt System Information A screen similar to the following displays System Information System Information Product Name System Name System Location System Contact Login Timeout IPv4 Network Interface IPv6 Network Interface IPv4 Loopback Interface System Date System Up Time Current SNTP Sync Status System SNMP OID System MAC Address Supported Java Plugin Version Current SNTP Synchronized Time FAN Status M5300 52G POE ProSafe 48 port Gigabit L2 PoE with 10 Gigabit Stacking 2 6 6 8 B1 6 8 9 5 0 to 160 mins 10 27 34 180 255 255 255 0 fe80 2ebO0 Sdff fe91 foad 64 Jul 3 19 48 49 2012 UTC 0 00 17 days 17 hours 19 mins 20 secs Success 1 3 6 1 4 1 4526 100 1 17 2C B0 5D 91 F9 AD 1 6 Jul 3 19 48 49 2012 UTC A CC E cPu1 cPU2 Power 1 Power 2 OK OK OK OK OK OK NA Temperature Status COE EE E E EA System 31 C 27 C Device Status Ce A EE E E E TE NE 2 6 6 8 B1 6 8 9 0x2 2XN1225RF0018 Operational Not Present 1 0 2 4 N A 2 6 6 8 B1 6 8 9 0x2 11 Operational Not Present 4 0 0 3 N
514. on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately DHCPv 6 Pool Configuration Use the DHCPv6 Pool Configuration page to set up a pool of DHCPv6 parameters for DHCPv6 clients The pool is identified with a pool name and contains IPv6 addresses and domain names of DNS servers To display the DHCPv6 Pool Configuration page click System gt Services gt DHCPv6 Server gt DHCPv6 Pool Configuration After expanding the DNS Server Addresses and Domain Name fields a screen similar to the following displays Configuring System Information 60 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Pool Configuration DHCP Pool Configuration Pool Name Pool Name Type of Binding Network Address Network Mask Network Prefix Length Client Name Hardware Address Hardware Address Type Client ID Host Number Host Mask Host Prefix Length Lease Time NetBIOS Node Type Next Server Address Domain Name Bootfile Create x Unallocated x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Ethernet 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Infinite m 0 e 0 b node Broadcast 0 0 0 0 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 0 to 32 8 to 32 0 to 59 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 to 255 characters O to 128 characters C
515. onal rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an IP ACL applies must be specified as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the IP ACL are specified created using the IP ACL Rule Configuration menu To display the IP ACL page click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt IP ACL IP ACL IP ACL Configuration Current Number of ACL Maximum ACL IP ACL Table 10 o Basic IP ACL The IP ACL area shows the current size of the ACL table versus the maximum size of the ACL table The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 plus the number of configured MAC ACLs The maximum size is 100 To configure an IP ACL 1 In the IP ACL ID field specify the ACL ID or IP ACL name The ID is an integer in the following range e 1 99 Creates an IP Basic ACL which allows you to permit or deny traffic from a source IP address e 100 199 Creates an IP Extended ACL which allows you to permit or deny specific types of layer 3 or layer 4 traffic from a source IP address to a destination IP address This type of ACL provides more granularity and filtering capabilities than the standard IP ACL e IP ACL Name Create a Named IP ACL which provides alternate to configure the IP Extended ACL IP ACL Name string which includes alphanumeric characters only and must start with an alphabetic character Each configured ACL displays the following information e Rules Disp
516. onfiguration Examples 511 ProSafe M5300 Switch criteria to a particular queue or redirect the traffic to a particular port A default deny all rule is the last rule of every list 2 APPLY the access list to an interface in the inbound direction ProSafe allow ACLs to be bound to physical ports and LAGs The switch software supports MAC ACLs and IP ACLs MAC ACL Example Configuration The following example shows how to create a MAC based ACL that permits Ethernet traffic from the Sales department on specified ports and denies all other traffic on those ports 1 From the MAC ACL screen create an ACL with the name Sales _ACL for the Sales department of your network See MAC ACL on page 437 By default this ACL will be bound on the inbound direction which means the switch will examine traffic as it enters the port From the MAC Rules screen create a rule for the Sales _ACL with the following settings e ID 1 e Action Permit e Assign Queue ID 0 e Match Every False e CoS 0 e Destination MAC 01 02 1A BC DE EF e Destination MAC Mask 00 00 00 00 FF FF e EtherType User Value e Source MAC 02 02 1A BC DE EF e Source MAC Mask 00 00 00 00 FF FF e VLAN ID 2 For more information about MAC ACL rules see MAC Rules on page 438 From the MAC Binding Configuration screen assign the Sales_ACL to the interface gigabit ports 6 7 and 8 and then click APPLY See MAC Binding Configuration on page 440 You can assig
517. onfiguring System Information 61 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure a DHCPv6 Pool 1 From the Pool Name field select Create and enter name for the Pool to be created To modify information for an existing DHCPv6 pool select the name of the pool to configure 2 If you are configuring a new DHCPV6 pool specify a unique name for the pool in the Pool Name field 3 Click the DNS Server Addresses field to expand the field and enter the IPv6 address for one or more DNS servers 4 Click the Domain Name field to expand the field and specify one or more DNS domain server names for the pool Each name may contain up to 255 alphanumeric characters 5 Use APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 6 Use DELETE to delete the pool selected in the Pool Name field DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Configuration With the larger address space inherent to IPv6 addresses within a network can be allocated more effectively in a hierarchical fashion DHCPv6 introduces the notion of prefix delegation as described in RFC 3633 as a way for routers to centralize and delegate IP address assignment DHCPv 6 clients may request multiple IPv6 prefixes Also DHCPv6 clients may request specific IPv6 prefixes If the configured DHCPv6 pool contains the specific prefix that a DHCPv6 client requests then that prefix will be delegated to the client Otherwise the first available IPv6 prefix within the
518. ongs to CPU 1 CPU2 The working status of each CPU fan Power 1 Power 2 The working status of the power supply fan s If the status is N A the power supply might not be installed or active or the switch model might support a single power supply Click REFRESH to refresh the system information of the switch Temperature Status The screen shows the current operating temperature of the switch The temperature is instant and can be refreshed when the REFRESH button is pressed The maximum temperature of the switch depends on the actual hardware The following table describes the Temperature Status information Field Description Unit ID The stack member unit identifier assigned to the switch which the fan belongs to System The current temperature of the switch Click REFRESH to refresh the system information of the switch Configuring System Information 22 Device Status ProSafe M5300 Switch The screen shows the various inventory information for each device The following table describes the Device Status information Field Description Firmware Version The release version maintenance build number of the code currently running on the switch For example if the release was 8 the version was 0 the maintenance number was 3 and the build number was 11 the format would be 8 0 3 11 Boot Version The version of the boot code which is in the flash memory to
519. ons on a LAN segment or virtual LAN VLAN every recipient has the opportunity to store the sender s IP and MAC address in their respective ARP cache The ARP response being unicast is normally seen only by the requestor who stores the sender information in its ARP cache Newer information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache The number of supported ARP entries is platform dependent Devices can be moved in a network which means the IP address that was at one time associated with a certain MAC address is now found using a different MAC or may have disappeared from the network altogether i e it has been reconfigured disconnected or powered off This leads to stale information in the ARP cache unless entries are updated in reaction to new information seen on the network periodically refreshed to determine if an address still exists or removed from the cache if the entry has not been identified as a sender of an ARP packet during the course of an ageout interval usually specified via configuration From the ARP link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 221 e Advanced on page 221 Routing 220 ProSafe M5300 Switch Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e ARP Cache on page 221 ARP Cache Use this screen to show ARP entries in the ARP Cache To display the ARP Cache page click Routing gt ARP gt Basic gt ARP Cache ARP Cache ARP Cache IP Address Port MAC Ad
520. or VLANs on the system To access the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP VLAN Configuration IGMP VLAN Configuration IGMP VLAN Configuration Fast Gaa VLAN ID Admin Leave kee Maximum Multicast Router Mode Admin Response Time Expiry Time Mode Interval E 200 Enable Enable 10 0 To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs 1 To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN enter the VLAN ID in the appropriate field and configure the IGMP Snooping values Use Admin Mode to enable or disable IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the IGMP Snooping Fast Leave Mode for the specified VLAN ID Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is Maximum Response Time 1 to 3600 seconds Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval 1 Its value should be greater than group membership interval value Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP Snooping for the specified VLAN ID Valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and r
521. or has occurred on the port or that the link is disabled and black indicates that the port is not active The following figure shows the front panel Device View of the M5300 52G POE switch Stack Unit ID Open Full Stack View Stack Navigation eS Master Next Full Stack View PROSAFE M5300 52G POE Front Back View Toggle Use the stack navigation buttons to view the stack master or the next previous members in the stack Click Full Stack View to see the device view for each stack member on a single page The following figure shows the full stack view for a stack with two members 1 NETGEAR PROSAFE M5300 52G POE 08 68 8S a8 BO fe AO AO Oe Ae ae Be ea Ae Pe Oe oe eee a PROSAFE GSM7228PS are es ee A es To view the back panel of the switch click the front back toggle button B or F depending on the current view The following figure shows the back panel Device View of the M5300 52G POE switch Master Full Stack View a G hay H Ze is w Getting Started 13 ProSafe M5300 Switch Device View System LEDs In addition to the port LEDs the device view provides a representation of the system LEDs on the left side of the front switch panel Power Status LED The power LED is a bicolor LED that serves as an indicator of power and diagnostic status The following indications are given by the following LED states e Asolid green LED indicates that the power is supplied to the switch and
522. or this VLAN will be tagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN e U Untagged Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be untagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN e Blank Autodetect Select the ports that may be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP This selection has the effect of excluding a port from the selected VLAN 3 Use the LAG Enabled option to add selected ports to VLAN as a LAG The default is No 4 Use IP Address to define the IP address of the VLAN interface 5 Use Network Mask to define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface VLAN Routing Configuration Use the VLAN Routing Configuration page to configure VLAN Routing interfaces on the system To display the VLAN Routing Configuration page click Routing gt VLAN gt VLAN Routing VLAN Routing Configuration VLAN Routing Configuration O E A 0 4 1 2C B0 5D 91 F8 B7 192 168 22 100 255 255 255 0 To configure an existing VLAN as a VLAN routing interface 1 Use VLAN ID to enter the ID of a VLAN you want to configure for VLAN Routing The field will display the all IDs of the VLAN configured on this switch 2 Use IP Address to enter the IP Address to be configured for the VLAN Routing Interface Routing 219 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Use Subnet Mask to enter the Subnet Mask to be configured for the VLAN Routing Interface 4 Click ADD to add the VLAN Routing Inter
523. or time sensitive traffic 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Switching Information 136 ProSafe M5300 Switch OUI Port Settings Use this page to configure the OUI based Auto VoIP administrative mode on the interfaces To display the OUI Port Settings page click Switching gt Auto VoIP gt OUI based gt OUI Port Settings Protocol Based Port Settings Protocol Based Global Settings Prioritization Type Traffic Class Class Value 6 lt Protocol Based Port Settings 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Geod Interface Auto VoIP Mode Operational Status 1 0 1 Enable UP 1 0 2 Enable UP 1 0 3 Enable uP 1 0 4 Enable UP 1 0 5 Enable UP 1 0 6 Enable UP 1 0 7 Enable uP 1 0 8 Enable UP 1 0 9 Enable UP To configure protocol based Auto VolP settings 1 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 From the Auto VoIP Mode menu select the administrative mode of OUl based Auto VolP on the selected interfaces 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Field Description Operational Status This is the operational status of the Auto VoIP feature on the given interface Configuring Switching Information 137 ProSafe M53
524. ort Control setting for all other ports where authentication is not needed should Authorized When the Port Control setting is Authorized the port is unconditionally put in a force Authorized state and does not require any authentication When the Port Control setting is Auto the authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode In the Guest VLAN field for ports 1 0 5 1 0 8 enter 150 to assign these ports to the guest VLAN You can configure additional settings to control access to the network through the ports See Port Security Configuration on page 399 for information about the settings Click APPLY From the 802 1X Configuration screen set the Port Based Authentication State and Guest VLAN Mode to Enable and then click APPLY See 802 1X Configuration on page 387 This example uses the default values for the port authentication settings but there are several additional settings that you can configure For example the EAPOL Flood Mode field allows you to enable the forwarding of EAPoL frames when 802 1X is disabled on the device From the RADIUS Server Configuration screen configure a RADIUS server with the following settings e Server Address 192 168 10 23 e Secret Configured Yes e Secret secret123 e Active Primary For more information see RADIUS on page 359 Click ADD From the Authentication List screen configure the default List to use RADIUS as the first authentication method See Authentication List Configurat
525. ot Bridge for the CST It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port would have the topology change acknowledgement flag set It is either True or False Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port It takes the value Enabled or Disabled Point to point MAC Derived value of the point to point status CST Regional Root CST Path Cost Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Path Cost to the CST Regional Root Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time since the counters were last cleared displayed in Days Hours Minutes and Seconds MST Configuration Use the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page to configure Multiple Spanning Tree MST on the switch To display the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page click Switching gt S
526. ot include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including ICMP lpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user protocols including ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams IpOutDiscards lpOutNoRoutes The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams which meet this no route criterion Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity IpReasmReqds IpReasmOKs The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity The number of IP datagrams successfully re assembled Routing 195 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field
527. ote system which are supported and enabled Configuring System Information 99 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Time to Live Specifies the Time To Live value in seconds of the received remote entry Management Address e Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system e Type Specifies the type of the management address LLDP Remote Device Inventory Tod simil isplay this page click System gt LLDP gt LLDP gt Remote Device Inventory A screen ar to the following displays LLDP Remote Device Inventory LLDP Remote Device Inventory Search By Interface Remote Device ID Management Address MAC Address System Name Remote Port ID 10 27 34 55 C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 adi 0 1 3 10 27 34 55 C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 0 45 The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Inventory fields Field Description Port Specifies the list of all the ports on which LLDP frame is enabled Management Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system MAC Address Specifies the MAC Address associated with the remote system System Name Specifies model name of the remote device Remote Port ID Specifies the port component associated with the remote system LLDP MED From the LLDP MED link you can access the following pages LLDP MED Global Configuration on page 101 LLDP MED Interface Configuration on page 102 LLDP MED
528. otocol The multicast routing protocol which created this entry The possibilities are e PIM DM e PIM SM Flags The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIMSM The possible values are RPT or SPT For other protocols an is displayed Routing 313 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 PIM From the IPv6 PIM DM link you can access the following pages e PIM Global Configuration on page 314 e PIM SSM Configuration on page 315 e PIM Interface Configuration on page 316 e PIM Neighbor on page 317 e PIM Candidate RP Configuration on page 318 e PIM BSR Candidate Configuration on page 319 e PIM Static RP Configuration on page 320 PIM Global Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM gt Global Configuration PIM Global Configuration PIM Global Configuration PIM Protocol Type PIM DM PIM SM Admin Mode Disable Enable To configure global IPv6 PIM settings 1 Use PIM Protocol Type to select the PIM type to run e PIM SM Recommended for networks with sparsely populated multicast receivers e PIM SM Recommended for networks with densely populated multicast receivers 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of PIM on the router The default is disable 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the new settings 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Routing 314 ProSafe M5300 S
529. otocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address including those that were discarded or not sent Total Transmit Errors The sum of Single Multiple and Excessive Collisions Tx FCS Errors The total number of packets transmitted that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets Underrun Errors The total number of frames discarded because the transmit FIFO buffer became empty during frame transmission Total Transmit Packets Discarded The sum of single collision frames discarded multiple collision frames discarded and excessive frames discarded Single Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Monitoring the System 464 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Multiple Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Excessive Collision Frames Port Membership Discards A count of frames for which transmission
530. p to Queue Mapping on page 333 IP DSCP to Queue Mapping on page 334 CoS Interface Configuration on page 335 Interface Queue Configuration on page 336 CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration on page 337 802 1p to Queue Mapping The 802 1p to Queue Mapping page also displays the Current 802 1p Priority Mapping table To display the 801 p to Queue Mapping page click QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt 802 1p to Queue Mapping 802 1p to Queue Mapping Interface Selection Interface o W 302 ip to Queue Mapping peel E om om i ee ed sil sil Configuring Quality of Service 333 ProSafe M5300 Switch To map 802 1p priorities to queues 1 2 4 Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per interface or specify all CoS configurable interfaces Specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding 802 1p value The queue number depends on the specific hardware The 802 1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802 1p priorities to be mapped The priority goes from low 0 to high 3 For example traffic with a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort Traffic with a higher priority such as 3 might be time sensitive traffic such as voice or video The values in each drop down menu represent the traffic class The traffic class is the hardware queue
531. pecifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval By default burst size is 100 packets When burst interval is 0 then configuring this field is not a valid operation Valid Burst Size must be in the range 1 to 200 Field Description Default Time to Live The default value inserted into the Time To Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch This is a compile time constant Statistics The statistics reported on this screen are as specified in RFC 1213 To display the Statistics page click Routing gt IP gt Basic gt Statistics The following screen shows some but not all of the IP statistics available IP Statistics IP Statistics IpInReceives IpInHdrErrors IpInAddrErrors IpForwDatagrams IpInUnknownProtos IpInDiscards IpInDelivers IpOutRequests IpOutDiscards IpOutNoRoutes IpReasmTimeout IpReasmReqds IpReasmOKs IpReasmFails IpFragOKs IpFragFails IpFragCreates IpRoutingDiscards IcmpInMsgs IcmpInErrors IcmpInDestUnreachs IcmpInTimeExcds IcmpInParmProbs IcmpInSrcQuenchs IcmpInRedirects O O O O e OW O O OOOOOOOO Routing 194 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error
532. peed Gbps Displays the maximum speed of the stacking port Transmit Data Rate Mbps Displays the approximate transmit rate on the stacking port Transmit Error Rate Displays the number of errors in transmit packets per second Total Transmit Errors Displays the total number of errors in transmit packets since boot The counter may wrap Data Rate Mbps Displays the approximate receive rate on the stacking port Receive Error Rate Displays the number of errors in receive packets per second Total Receive Errors Displays the total number of errors in receive packets since boot The counter may wrap Stack Port Diagnostics This page displays the diagnostics for all the stackable interfaces in the given stack To display the Stack Port Diagnostics page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt Stack Port Diagnostics A screen similar to the following is displayed Stack Port Diagnostics Stack Port Diagnostics unit 1D Port Port Diagnostics Info 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RBYT 0 RPKT 0 TBYT 0 TPKT ORFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT 0OTFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 2f5b1e45 RPKT 124803 TBYT 302d628a TPKT 13c3dcRFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT OTFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 0 RPKT 0 TBYT 0 TPKT ORFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT OTFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 0 RPKT 0 TBYT 0 TPKT ORFCS 0 RFRG 0 RJBR 0 RUND 0 ROVR 0 RUNT OTFCS 0 TERR 0 RBYT 0 RPKT 0 TBYT 0 TPK
533. ption Value specifies the Value against the Option Code configured for the selected pool 5 Click ADD to add a new Option Code for the selected pool 6 Click DELETE to delete the Option Code for the selected pool DHCP Server Statistics To display the DHCP Server Statistics page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Server Statistics A screen similar to the following displays DHCP Server Statistics Binding Details Automatic Bindings Expired Bindings Malformed Messages Message Received DHCPDISCOVER DHCPREQUEST DHCPDECLINE DHCPRELEASE DHCPINFORM Message Sent DHCPOFFER DHCPACK DHCPNAK The following table describes the DHCP Server Statistics fields Field Description Automatic Bindings Specifies the number of Automatic Bindings on the DHCP Server Expired Bindings Specifies the number of Expired Bindings on the DHCP Server Malformed Messages Specifies the number of the malformed messages DHCPDISCOVER Specifies the number of DHCPDISCOVER messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPREQUEST Specifies the number of DHCPREQUEST messages received by the DHCP Server Configuring System Information 50 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description DHCPDECLINE Specifies the number of DHCPDECLINE messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPRELEASE Specifies the number of DHCPRELEASE messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPINFORM Specifies the n
534. que LSA Status parameter to enable if OSPF should store and flood opaque LSAs An opaque LSA is used for flooding user defined information within an OSPF router domain Use Exit Overflow Interval secs to specify how long OSPF must wait before attempting to leave overflow state When the number of non default external LSAs exceeds a configured limit the router enters an overflow state as defined in RFC 1765 In overflow state OSPF cannot originate non default external LSAs If the Exit Overflow Interval is 0 OSPF will not leave overflow state until it is disabled and re enabled The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647 seconds Use SPF DelayTime secs to specify the number of seconds from when OSPF receives a topology change to the start of the next SPF calculation Delay Time is an integer from 0 to 65535 seconds The default time is 5 seconds A value of 0 means that there is no delay that is the SPF calculation is started upon a topology change Use SPF HoldTime secs to specify the minimum time in seconds between two consecutive SPF calculations The range is 0 to 65 535 seconds The default time is 10 seconds A value of 0 means that there is no delay that is two SPF calculations can be done one immediately after the other Use External LSDB Limit to set the number of the external LSDB limit for OSPF If the value is 1 then there is no limit When the number of non default AS external LSAs in a router s link state database reaches the exter
535. r This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router e Other Designated Router The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Backup Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router Neighbor State The state of the Virtual Neighbor Relationship Routing 254 ProSafe M5300 Switch Route Redistribution This screen can be used to configure the OSPF Route Redistribution parameters The allowable values for each fields are displayed next to the field If any invalid values are entered an alert message will be displayed with the list of all the valid values To display the Route Redistribution page click Routing gt OSPF gt Advanced gt Route Redistribution Route Redistribution OSPFv3 Route Redistribution R di tribut TOR AE dolce mee e E A a c____ Type 2 C Static Disable o External Type 2 o To configure OSPF route redistribution 1 Use Source to list available source routes that have not previously been confi
536. r MAC Addresses by MAC Address VLAN ID and port e Searched by MAC Address Select MAC Address from pull down menu enter the 6 byte hexadecimal MAC Address in two digit groups separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB Then click on the Go button If the address exists that entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses An exact match is required e Searched by VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from pull down menu enter the VLAN ID for example 100 Then click on the Go button If the address exists the entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses e Searched by Port Select Port from pull down menu enter the port ID in Unit Slot Port for example 2 1 1 Then click on the Go button If the address exists the entry will be displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining greater mac addresses 2 Click Go to initiate the search Field Description Total MAC Address Displaying the number of total MAC addresses learned or configured MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information The format is a 6 byte MAC Address that is separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC Address Port The port upon which this address was learned Status The status of this entry The meanings of the values are e
537. r Router Count AS Border Router Count Area LSA Count IPv6 Address Interface Events Virtual Events Neighbor Events External LSA Count Sent Packets Received Packets Discards Bad Version Virtual Link Not Found Area Mismatch Invalid Destination Address No Neighbor at Source Address Invalid OSPF Packet Type Hellos Ignored Hellos Sent Hellos Received DD Packets Sent DD Packets Received LS Requests Sent LS Requests Received LS Updates Sent LS Updates Received LS Acknowledgements Sent LS Acknowledgements Received Routing 269 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed Field Description OSPF v3 Area ID The OSPF v3 area to which the selected router interface belongs An OSPF v3 Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass AS Border Router Count The total number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the interface Interface Events The number of times the specified
538. r the QoS tab you can access the following pages e Basic on page 332 e Advanced on page 333 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e CoS Configuration on page 332 CoS Configuration To display the CoS Configuration page click QoS gt CoS gt Basic gt CoS Configuration CoS Configuration CoS Configuration Global All Global Trust Mode trustdotip M Interface Interface Trust Mode Use the CoS Configuration page to set the class of service trust mode of an interface Each port in the switch can be configured to trust one of the packet fields 802 1p or IP DSCP or to not trust any packet s priority designation untrusted mode If the port is set to a trusted mode it uses a mapping table appropriate for the trusted field being used This mapping table indicates the CoS queue to which the packet should be forwarded on the appropriate egress port s Of course the trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use so there are default actions performed when this is not the case These actions involve directing the packet to a specific CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole based on the existing port default priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802 1p mapping table Alternatively when a port is configured as untrusted it does not trust any incoming packet priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead All packets
539. rameter PEM File SSL Diffie Hellman Weak Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded e SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File SSL Diffie Hellman Strong Encryption Parameter File PEM Encoded Use Transfer Mode to specify the protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the format of the TFTP SFTP SCP Server Address field The factory default is IPv4 Use Server Address to enter the IP address of the server in accordance with the format indicated by the Server Address Type The factory default is the IPv4 address 0 0 0 0 Use Remote File Name to enter the name on the TFTP server of the file you want to download You may enter up to 32 characters The factory default is blank Managing Device Security 376 ProSafe M5300 Switch SSH From the SSH link you can access the following pages e SSH Configuration on page 377 e Host Keys Management on page 378 e Host Keys Download on page 379 SSH Configuration To display the SSH Configuration page click Security gt Access gt SSH gt SSH Configuration SSH Configuration SSH Configuration SSH Admin Mode Disable Enable SSH Version 1 Disable Enable SSH Version 2 Disable Enable SSH Session Timeout Maximum Number of SSH Sessions Current Number of SSH Sessions Keys Present No Login Authentication
540. ration on page 265 e Interface Configuration on page 266 e Interface Statistics on page 269 e Neighbor Table on page 272 e Link State Database on page 273 e Virtual Link Configuration on page 275 e Route Redistribution on page 277 e NSF OSPFv3 Summary on page 278 Routing 258 ProSafe M5300 Switch OSPFv3 Configuration Use the OSPF v3 Configuration page to activate and configure OSPF v3 for a switch To display the OSPFv3 Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt OSPFv3 Configuration OSPFv3 Configuration Default Route Advertise Configuration Default Information Originate Disable Enable Always True False Metric 0 Metric Type External Type 1 External Type 2 OSPFv3 Configuration Router ID 0 0 0 0 Admin Mode Enable x ASBR Mode Disable ABR Status Exit Overflow Interval secs o 0 to 2147483647 External LSA Count External LSA Checksum New LSAs Originated LSAs Received External LSDB Limit E 1 No Limit to 2147483647 Default Metric Maximum Paths AutoCost Reference Bandwidth Default Passive Setting Disable Helper Support Mode Always x Helper Strict LSA Checking Enable Default Route Advertise 1 Use Default Information Originate to enable or disable Default Route Advertise Note that the values for Always Metric and Metric Type can only be configured after Default Information
541. rding it The range 10 to 255 seconds Default value is 180 seconds 4 Use Version 2 Advertisements to enable or disable the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device The default value is Enabled Configuring System Information 109 ProSafe M5300 Switch The following table describes the ISDP Basic Global Configuration fields Field Description Neighbors table last time changed The amount of time that has passed since the ISDP neighbor table was updated Device ID The Device ID advertised by this device The format of this Device ID is characterized by the value of Device ID Format object Device ID format capability Indicates the Device ID format capability of the device e serialNumber Indicates that the device uses serial number as the format for its Device ID e macAddress Indicates that the device uses layer 2 MAC address as the format for its Device ID e other Indicates that the device uses its platform specific format as the format for its Device ID Device ID format Indicates the Device ID format of the device e serialNumber lIndicates that the value is in the form of an ASCII string containing the device serial number e macAddress lIndicates that the value is in the form of Layer 2 MAC address e other Indicates that the value is in the form of a platform specific ASCII string containing info that identifies the device For example ASCII string conta
542. re If the switch does not handle L3 routing you can use IGMP snooping or MLD snooping to manage port based multicast group membership For more information see GMP Snooping on page 158 If the local network does not have a multicast router you can configure the switch to act as the IGMP querier For more information see GMP Snooping Querier on page 163 If the switch is configured as a layer 3 switch and handles inter VLAN routing through static routes OSPF or RIP and multicast traffic is transmitted within the network enabling and configuring layer 3 multicast routing on the switch is recommended From the Multicast link you can access the following pages e Mroute Table on page 287 e Multicast Global Configuration on page 288 e Multicast Interface Configuration on page 289 e DVMRP on page 290 e IGMP on page 296 e PIM on page 304 e Static Routes Configuration on page 311 e Admin Boundary Configuration on page 312 Routing 286 Mroute Table ProSafe M5300 Switch This screen displays contents of the Mroute Table in tabular form To display the Mroute Table page click Routing gt Multicast gt Mroute Table Mroute Table Mroute Table Source Incoming Outgoing Up Expiry RPF PREECE F SEER IP Interface Interfaces Time hh mm ss Time hh mm ss Neighbor 9 Field Description Source IP The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the Group IP to fully identif
543. rent class Configuring Quality of Service 344 ProSafe M5300 Switch Class of Service This lists all the values for the class of service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can be selected VLAN This is a value in the range of 0 4095 Ethernet Type This lists the keywords for the Ethertype from which one can be selected Source MAC Address This is the source MAC address specified as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons Source MAC Mask This is a bit mask in the same format as MAC Address indicating which part s of the source MAC Address to use for matching against packet content Destination MAC Address This is the destination MAC address specified as six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons Destination MAC Mask This is a bit mask in the same format as MAC Address indicating which part s of the destination MAC Address to use for matching against packet content Protocol Type This lists the keywords for the layer 4 protocols from which one can be selected The list includes other as an option for the remaining values Source IP Address This is a valid source IP address in the dotted decimal format Source Mask This is a bit mask in IP dotted decimal format indicating which part s of the source IP Address to use for matching against packet content Source L4 Port This lists the keywords for the known source layer 4 ports from which one can be selected T
544. reshold WRED Drop Probability Scale 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 3 0 1 Configuring Quality of Service 337 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration settings iP 2 3 4 From the Interface menu select the interface to configure In the Queue ID field select a queue to associate with the selected interface From the Drop Precedence Level field select a drop precedence level In the WRED Minimum Threshold field specify the weighted RED minimum queue threshold below which no packets are dropped for the current drop precedence level Default values are e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 0 e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 1 e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 2 e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 3 e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 4 e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 5 e 40 30 20 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 6 Valid Range is 0 to 100 in sixteenths of the overall device queue size In the WRED Maximum Threshold field specify the weighted RED maximum queue threshold above which all packets are dropped for the current drop precedence level Default values are e 100 90 80 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 0 e 100 90 80 100 for Drop Precedence Levels 1 2 3 4 on QueuelD 1 e 100 90 80
545. rface Filter Mode The source filter mode Include Exclude NA for the specified group on this interface When NA mode is active the field is blank Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest IGMP groups information IGMP Membership To display the IGMP Membership page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt IGMP Membership IGMP Membership IGMP Membership Search By Interface x l so Source Group Compatibilty Source Expiry Mode Mode Field Description Group IP The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed Interface This parameter shows the interface on which multicast packets are forwarded Compatibility Mode This parameter shows group compatibility mode v1 v2 and v3 for this group on the specified interface Source Filter Mode The source filter mode Include Exclude NA for the specified group on this interface Source Hosts This parameter shows source addresses which are members of this multicast address Expiry Time This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address which are members of this multicast group This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest IGMP member information Routing 300 ProSafe M5300 Switch IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration To display the IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration page click Ro
546. rface Received Bad Packets Received Bad Routes The number of invalid packets received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface The number of invalid routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface Routing 293 ProSafe M5300 Switch DVMRP Next Hop To display the DVMRP Next Hop page click Routing gt Multicast gt DVMRP gt DVMRP Next Hop DVMRP Next Hop DVMRP Next Hop Field Description Source IP The IP address used with the source mask to identify the source network for this table entry Source Mask The network mask used with the source IP address Next Hop Interface The outgoing interface for this next hop Type The next hop type Leaf means that no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the outgoing interface Otherwise the type is branch DVMRP Prune To display the DVMRP Prune page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt DVMRP Prune DVMRP Prune DVMRP Prune Field Description Group IP The group address which has been pruned Source IP The address of the source or source network which has been pruned Source Mask The subnet mask to be combined with the source IP address to identify the source or source network which has been pruned Expiry Time The amount of time remaining before this prune should expire at the upstream neighbor If no prune messages have been received from downstream ne
547. rict timing requirements such as voice or multimedia Defining DiffServ To use DiffServ for QoS the Web pages accessible from the Differentiated Services menu page must first be used to define the following categories and their criteria 1 Class Create classes and define class criteria 2 Policy Create policies associate classes with policies and define policy statements 3 Service Add a policy to an inbound interface Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria The classification criteria is defined by a class The processing is defined by a policy s attributes Policy attributes may be defined on a per class instance basis and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs A policy can contain multiples classes When the policy is active the actions taken depend on which class matches the packet Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found The Differentiated Services menu page contains links to the various Diffserv configuration and display features From the DiffServ link under the QoS tab you can access the following pages e DiffServ Wizard on page 340 e Basic on page 341 e Advanced on page 343 Configuring Quality of Service 339 ProSafe M5300 Switch DiffServ Wizard The DiffServ Wizard enables DiffServ on the switch by creating a traffic class adding the traff
548. roblem messages received IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages received IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP Echo request messages received IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which this entity attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent Routing 196 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP Parameter Prob
549. rom 5 to 3600 secs Default value is 5 seconds 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 6 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch and cause the changes to take effect on the switch but these changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed Configuring System Information 94 ProSafe M5300 Switch LLDP Interface Configuration To display this page click System gt LLDP gt Interface Configuration A screen similar to the following displays LLDP Interface Configuration Interface Configuration 1 2 All Go To Port Go Operational TLV s Transmit Link a a System System System Port Port Transmit Receive Notify Management aS oe ae Status z Name Description Capabilities Description Information 1 0 1 Up Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 2 Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 3 Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 0 4 Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 1 Use Port to specify the list of ports on which LLDP 802 1AB can be configured 2 Link Status indicates whether the Link is up or down 3 Use Transmit to specify the LLDP 802 1AB transmit mode for the selected interface 4 Use Receive to specify the LLDP 802 1AB receive mode for the selected interface 5 Use
550. rong Version Queries The number of queries that have been received on the selected interface Received with an IGMP version that does not match the IGMP version configured for the interface over the lifetime of the entry IGMP requires that all routers on a LAN be configured to run the same version of IGMP Therefore a configuration error is indicated if any queries are received with the wrong version number Routing 298 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Number of Joins Received The number of times a group membership has been added on the selected interface that is the number of times an entry for this interface has been added to the cache table This gives an indication of the amount of IGMP activity on the interface Number of Groups The current number of entries for the selected interface in the cache table Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with the latest IGMP interface statistics IGMP Groups To display the IGMP Groups page click Routing gt Multicast gt IGMP gt IGMP Groups IGMP Groups IGMP Groups Search By Interface T GO Version Version Multicast Last U Expi Filter hitara Aaa p PY i Host 2Host Compatibiltiy Group IP Reporter Time Time Mode Timer Timer Field Description Interface The interface which data is to be displayed Multicast Group IP The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed Last Reporter
551. roup Membership Reduction Messages Transmitted The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects The number of duplicate Addresses detected by the interface Routing 211 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv6 Neighbor Table Use the IPv6 Neighbor Table page to display IPv6 neighbor details for a specified interface To display the IPv6 Neighbor Table page click Routing gt IPv6 gt Advanced gt Neighbor Table IPv6 Neighbor Table IPv6 Neighbor Table Search By Interface Ez uso 5 Neighbor Last rf Pv6 A MAC A Interface IPv6 Address C Address isRtr State Updated To search for an entry in the IPv6 neighbor table use the Search By menu to specify the search criteria e Searched by IPv6 Address Select IPv6 Address from pull down menu enter the 128 byte hexadecimal IPv6 Address in four digit groups separated by colons for example 2001 231F 1 Then click Go If the address exists that entry will be displayed An exact match is required e Searched by Interface Select Interface from pull down menu enter the interface ID in Unit Slot Port for example 2 1 1 Then click Go If the IPv6 route exists the entry will be displayed Field Description Interface Specifies the interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row IPv6 Address Specifies the IPv6 address of neighbor or interface MAC Address Specifies MAC addres
552. rs track iSCSI traffic between iSCSI initiators and target systems This is accomplished by monitoring or snooping traffic to detect packets used by iSCSI stations in establishing iSCSI sessions and connections Data from these exchanges may optionally be used to create classification rules to assign the traffic between the stations to a configured traffic class This affects how the packets in the flow are queued and scheduled for egress on the destination port In networks containing iSCSI initiators and targets iSCSI helps to monitor iSCSI sessions or give iSCSI traffic preferential QoS treatment Dynamically generated classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given the desired preference characteristics over other data traveling through the switch This may help to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause iSCSI packets to be dropped However in systems where a large proportion of traffic is iSCSI it may also interfere with other network control plane traffic such as ARP or LACP The preferential treatment of iSCSI traffic needs to be balanced against the needs of other critical data in the network From the iSCSI link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 139 e Advanced on page 141 Basic From the iSCSI Basic link you can access the following pages e Global Configuration on page 139 e Sessions on page 141 Global Configuration Use th
553. rs is evaluated based on the time level and server type SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels e 11 Time at which the original request was sent by the client e T2 Time at which the original request was received by the server e 13 Time at which the server sent a reply e T4 Time at which the client received the server s reply Configuring System Information 34 ProSafe M5300 Switch The device can poll Unicast server types for the server time Polling for Unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known SNTP servers that have been configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for synchronization information T1 through T4 are used to determine server time This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method If this method is selected SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the device using the SNTP Server Configuration page The device retrieves synchronization information either by actively requesting information or at every poll interval SNTP Global Configuration Use the SNTP Global Configuration page to enable the SNTP client on the device and to configure the SNTP client settings Enabling and configuring the SNTP client allows the device to synchronization the system time with a valid SNTP server on the network To display the SNTP Global Configuration page click
554. rs should be returned from the DHCP server only if the DNS server is in the same LAN as the switch performing Autolnstall A DNS server is needed to resolve the IP address of the TFTP server if only the sname or option 66 values are returned to the switch After obtaining IP addresses for both the switch and the TFTP server the Autolnstall feature attempts to download a host specific configuration file using the boot file name specified by the DHCP server If the switch fails to obtain the file it will retry indefinitely To access the Auto Install Configuration page click Maintenance gt Save Config gt Auto Install Configuration Auto Install Configuration Auto Install Configuration AutoInstall Mode Stop AutoInstall Persistent Mode _ Enabled ie AutoSave Mode Disabled m AutoInstall Retry Count 3 1 to 3 AutoInstall State AutoInstall is completed Maintenance 484 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure the auto install settings 1 Use Auto Install to enable disable start stop auto install mode on the switch 2 Select the Auto Save check box and click the APPLY button to have configuration changes you have made saved across a system reboot All changes submitted since the previous save or system reboot will be retained by the switch 3 Use Auto Install Retry Count to specify the number of times the unicast TFTP tries should be made for the DHCP specified file before falling back for broadcast TFTP tries
555. rsion published as RFC 3434 HCNUM TC A MIB module containing textual conventions for high capacity data types Broadcom REF MIB Broadcom Reference SNMP COMMUNITY MIB This MIB module defines objects to help support coexistence between SNMPv1 SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB The SNMP Management Architecture MIB SNMP MPD MIB The MIB for Message Processing and Dispatching SNMP NOTIFICATION MIB The Notification MIB Module SNMP TARGET MIB The Target MIB Module SNMP USER BASED SM MIB The management information definitions for the SNMP User based Security Model SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB The management information definitions for the View based Access Control Model for SNMP USM TARGET TAG MIB SNMP Research Inc The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields Field Description Name The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB Description The RFC title or MIB description Configuring System Information 91 ProSafe M5300 Switch SNMP V3 User Configuration To access this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V3 gt User Configuration A screen similar to the following displays User Configuration User Names User Name admin iw User Configuration SNMP V3 Access Mode Read Write Authentication Protocol None MDS SHA Encryption Protocol None DES To configure SNMPv3 settings for the user account 1 2 Use User Name to specify the user accou
556. rt DVLAN Configuration Global Configuration Global EtherType 802 19 Tag w DVLAN Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface GO Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable To configure a DVLAN settings 1 Use the Global EtherType menu to select the 2 byte hex code to use as the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tag The value configured in this field is used as the primary Tag Protocol Identifier TPID to include in frames transmitted by interfaces that are enabled for DVLAN tagging Select one of the following e 802 1Q Tag Commonly used tag representing 0x8100 e vMAN Tag Commonly used tag representing 0x88A8 e Custom Tag Configure the EtherType in any range from 0 to 65535 If you select this value specify the tag in the Custom Value field that appears 2 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 3 Use Admin Mode to specify the administrative mode via which Double VLAN Tagging can be enabled or disabled The default value for this is Disabled 4 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 5 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Switching Information 130 ProSafe M5300 Switch Voice VLAN Configuration Use this menu to configure the parameters for Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN enables ports to carry voice traffic that has a defined priority Voice over IP VoIP traf
557. rt to access the Designated Root for this MST instance Configuring Switching Information 152 ProSafe M5300 Switch MST Port Status Use the Spanning Tree MST Port Status page to configure and display Multiple Spanning Tree MST settings on a specific port on the switch To display the Spanning Tree MST Port Status page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt MST Port Status MST Port Status MST ID Selection Select MST OE MST Port Status 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Port Interface ui Designated Root 00 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F0 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F0 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 F0 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Auto Port Path Calculated Port Path 00 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 80 01 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO Designated Port Uptime Since Last Clear Counters Transitions Into Loop Inconsistent Loop Inconsistent o i o ia o Ha Oo io Transitions Out Of Loop Inconsistent State Note If no MST instances have been configured on the switch the page displays a No MSTs Available message and does not display the fields shown in the field description table that follows
558. s Routing 289 ProSafe M5300 Switch DVMRP DVMRP is an interior gateway protocol that is suitable for routing multicast traffic within an autonomous system AS DVMRP should not be used between different autonomous systems due to limitations with hop count and scalability Note Only one multicast routing protocol can be operational on the switch at any time If you enable DVMRP PIM must be disabled Similarly if PIM is enabled DVMRP must be disabled DVMRP exchanges probe packets with all its DVMRP enabled routers it establishes two way neighboring relationships and it builds a neighbor table DVMRP exchanges report packets and creates a unicast topology table with which it builds the multicast routing table This table is used to route the multicast packets Since every DVMRP router uses the same unicast routing protocol routing loops are avoided From the DVMRP link you can access the following pages e DVMRP Global Configuration on page 291 e DVMRP Interface Configuration on page 291 e DVMRP Neighbor on page 293 e DVMRP Next Hop on page 294 e DVMRP Prune on page 294 e DVMRP Route on page 295 Routing 290 ProSafe M5300 Switch DVMRP Global Configuration To display the Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast DVMRP gt Global Configuration DVMRP Global Configuration DVMRP Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Version Total Number of Routes Reachable Routes To
559. s External Type 1 OSPF Routes to be redistributed e External Type 2 Sets External Type 2 OSPF Routes to be redistributed NSSA External Type 1 Sets NSSA External Type 1 OSPF Routes to be redistributed NSSA External Type 2 Sets NSSA External Type 2 OSPF Routes to be redistributed Distribute List The Access List that filters the routes to be redistributed by the Destination Protocol Displays 0 when not configured Routing 231 ProSafe M5300 Switch OSPF Note OSPF is a licensed feature and is available only on switches that have an active license installed From the OSPF link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 232 e Advanced on page 233 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e OSPF Configuration Basic on page 232 OSPF Configuration Basic Use the OSPF Configuration page to enable OSPF on a router and to configure the related OSPF settings To display the OSPF Configuration page click Routing gt OSPF gt Basic gt OSPF Configuration OSPF Configuration OSPF Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Router ID 0 0 0 0 To configure the administrative mode of OSPF on the switch 1 Use Router ID to specify a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS To change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF to have the
560. s The IP address of the interface Routing 246 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Interface Events The number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state or an error has occurred Virtual Events Neighbor Events The number of state changes or errors that have occurred on this virtual link The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred External LSA Count The number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database Sent packets The number of OSPF packets transmitted on the interface Received packets The number of valid OSPF packets received on the interface Discards The number of received OSPF packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet Bad Version The number of received OSPF packets whose version field in the OSPF header does not match the version of the OSPF process handling the packet Source Not On Local Subnet The number of received packets discarded because the source IP address is not within a subnet configured on a local interface Virtual Link Not Found The number of received OSPF packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non backbone area and the OSPF header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone but OSPF does not have a virtual link to the packet s sender Area Mismatch The number o
561. s a power cycle e MaxFail Enter the maximum Failures allowed in the session The initial value is default value The MaxFail you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Interval secs Enter the Time between probes in seconds The initial value is default value The Interval you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Port Enter the UDP Dest port in probe packets The initial value is default value The port you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Size Enter the Size of probe packets The initial value is default value The Size you enter is not retained across a power cycle 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 4 Click APPLY to initiate the traceroute The results display in the TraceRoute area Traceroute IPv6 Use this screen to tell the switch to send a TraceRoute request to a specified IP address or Hostname You can use this to discover the paths packets take to a remote destination Once you click the APPLY button the switch will send traceroute and the results will be displayed below the configurable data If a reply to the traceroute is received you will see e 1 a b c d e f g 9869 usec 9775 usec 10584 usec e 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 usec 0 usec 0 usec e Hop Count w Last TTL z Test attempt x Test Success y To display the Traceroute IPv6 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Traceroute IP
562. s are of interest to its neighboring nodes and provides this information to the multicast routing protocol that make the decision on the flow of the multicast data packets From the MLD link you can access the following pages e MLD Global Configuration on page 321 e MLD Routing Interface Configuration on page 322 e MLD Routing Interface Statistics on page 323 e MLD Groups on page 324 e MLD Traffic on page 325 e MLD Proxy Interface Configuration on page 326 e MLD Proxy Interface Statistics on page 327 e MLD Proxy Membership on page 328 MLD Global Configuration To display the MLD Global Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Global Configuration MLD Global Configuration MLD Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable To configure the administrative mode of MLD on the switch select the desired option from the Admin Mode field The default is disable If you change the mode click APPLY to update the switch with the change Routing 321 ProSafe M5300 Switch MLD Routing Interface Configuration To display the MLD Routing Interface Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Routing Interface Configuration MLD Routing Interface Configuration MLD Routing Interface Configuration 1 2 VLANS All Go To Interface Interface Admin Mode Operational Mode Query Interval Query Max Response Time 1 0 1 Disable Not In Service v2 125 10000 1 0 2 Disa
563. s are preferred You must enter an integer Routing 279 ProSafe M5300 Switch VRRP The Virtual Router Redundancy protocol is designed to handle default router failures by providing a scheme to dynamically elect a backup router The driving force was to minimize black hole periods due to the failure of the default gateway router during which all traffic directed towards it is lost until the failure is detected Though static configuration of default routes is popular such an approach is susceptible to a single point of failure when the default router fails VRRP advocates the concept of a virtual router associated with one or more IP Addresses that serve as default gateways In the event that the VRRP Router controlling these IP Addresses formally known as the Master fails the group of IP Addresses and the default forwarding role is taken over by a Backup VRRP Router From the VRRP link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 280 e Advanced on page 282 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e VRRP Configuration on page 280 VRRP Configuration Use the VRRP Configuration page to enable or disable the administrative status of a virtual router To display the VRRP Configuration page click Routing gt VRRP gt Basic gt VRRP Configuration VRRP Configuration Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Table Configuration Interface Primary IP VRID
564. s associated with an interface IsRtr Indicates whether the neighbor is a router If the neighbor is a router the value is TRUE If the neighbor is not a router the value is FALSE Routing 212 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Neighbor State Specifies the state of the neighbor cache entry Following are the states for dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache Incmp Address resolution is being performed on the entry A neighbor solicitation message has been sent to the solicited node multicast address of the target but the corresponding neighbor advertisement message has not yet been received Reach Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly While in REACH state the device takes no special action as packets are sent Stale More than ReachableTime milliseconds have elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly While in STALE state the device takes no action until a packet is sent Delay More than ReachableTime milliseconds have elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly A packet was sent within the last DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds If no reachability confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering the DELAY state send a neighbor solicitation
565. s in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets The value must be greater or equal to Bridge Max Age 2 1 The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds The default value is 15 Spanning Tree Maximum Hops Specifies the maximum number of bridge hops the information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded The valid range is 1 127 Spanning Tree Tx Hold Count Configures the maximum number of bpdus the bridge is allowed to send within the hello time window The default value is 6 Field Description Bridge identifier The bridge identifier for the CST It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Time since topology change The time in seconds since the topology of the CST last changed Topology change count Number of times topology has changed for the CST Topology change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST It takes a value if True or False Designated root The bridge identifier of the root bridge It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST Root Port Identifier Port to access the Designated Root for the CST Max Age secs Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST Forward Delay secs Derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forw
566. s type of all or any respectively That is within a single class multiple match criteria are grouped together as an AND expression or a sequential OR expression depending on the defined class type Only classes of the same type can be nested class nesting does not allow for the negation i e exclude option of the referenced class To configure DiffServ you must define service levels namely the forwarding classes PHBs identified by a given DSCP value on the egress interface These service levels are defined by configuring BA classes for each Creating Policies Use DiffServ policies to associate a collection of classes that you configure with one or more QoS policy statements The result of this association is referred to as a policy From a DiffServ perspective there are two types of policies e Traffic Conditioning Policy a policy applied to a DiffServ traffic class e Service Provisioning Policy a policy applied to a DiffServ service level You must manually configure the various statements and rules used in the traffic conditioning and service provisioning policies to achieve the desired Traffic Conditioning Specification TCS and the Service Level Specification SLS operation respectively Configuration Examples 515 ProSafe M5300 Switch Traffic Conditioning Policy Traffic conditioning pertains to actions performed on incoming traffic There are several distinct QoS actions associated with traffic conditioning
567. s with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses Bad Authenticators Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets that contained invalid authenticators received from this accounting server Pending Requests Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response Timeouts Displays the number of accounting timeouts to this server Unknown Types Displays the number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from this server on the accounting port Packets Dropped Displays the number of RADIUS packets that were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Configuring TACACS TACACS provides a centralized user management system while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes TACACS provides the following services e Authentication Provides authentication during login and via user names and user defined passwords e Authorization Performed at login When the authentication session is completed an authorization session starts using the authenticated user name The TACACS server checks the user privileges The TACACS protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS server Managing Device Security 364
568. sabled on the device The ports of an 802 1X authenticator switch provide the means in which it can offer services to other systems reachable via the LAN Port based network access control allows the Configuration Examples 518 ProSafe M5300 Switch operation of a switch s ports to be controlled in order to ensure that access to its services is only permitted by systems that are authorized to do so Port access control provides a means of preventing unauthorized access by supplicants to the services offered by a system Control over the access to a switch and the LAN to which it is connected can be desirable in order to restrict access to publicly accessible bridge ports or to restrict access to departmental LANs Access control is achieved by enforcing authentication of supplicants that are attached to an authenticator s controlled ports The result of the authentication process determines whether the supplicant is authorized to access services on that controlled port A Port Access Entity PAE is able to adopt one of two distinct roles within an access control interaction 1 Authenticator A Port that enforces authentication before allowing access to services available via that Port 2 Supplicant A Port that attempts to access services offered by the Authenticator Additionally there exists a third role 3 Authentication server Performs the authentication function necessary to check the credentials of the Supplicant on beh
569. sage Specifies the status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and broadcast modes If no message has been received from a server a status of Other is displayed These values are appropriate for all operational modes e Other None of the following enumeration values e Success The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated e Request Timed Out A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server e Bad Date Encoded The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid e Version Not Supported The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client Server Unsynchronized The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers This is indicated via the leap indicator field on the SNTP message e Server Kiss Of Death The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the server for the last received valid packet If no message has been received from any server an empty string is shown Address Type Server Stratum Specifies the address type of the SNTP Server address for the last received valid packet Specifies the claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet Reference Clock Id Specifies the refer
570. sages Without Opt82 Messages Without Opt82 1 0 1 0 0 o o 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 it 0 0 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 10 0 i o ISi o ia o ia o i Oi o ISI o ISi o Ia o S OI o IGI o ISi o ie o G The following table describes the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics fields Field Description Interface Shows the interface from which the DHCP message is received UntrustedServerMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted server UntrustedClientMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client TrustedServerMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server TrustedClientMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client Configuring System Information 56 ProSafe M5300 Switch UDP Relay The UDP Relay feature provides the ability for a router to forward configured UDP broadcast packets to a particular IP address This allows applications to reach servers on non local subnets This is possible even when the application is designed to assume a server is always on a local subnet or when the application uses broadcast packets to reach the server with the limited broadcast address 255 255 255 255 or a network directed broadcast address From the UDP Relay link you can access the following pag
571. se the Group IP to specify the IP multicast address of the MVR group for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use the Port List to shows the configured list of members of the selected MVR group You can use this port list to add the ports you selected to this MVR group 3 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately MVR Statistics To display the MVR Configuration page click Switching gt MVR gt Advanced gt MVR Statistics A screen similar to the following displays Statistics Mvr Statistics IGMP Query Received IGMP Report V1 Received IGMP Report V2 Received IGMP Leave Received IGMP Query Transmitted IGMP Report V1 Transmitted IGMP Report V2 Transmitted IGMP Leave Transmitted IGMP Packet Receive Failures 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IGMP Packet Transmit Failures Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest MVR statistics Field Definition IGMP Query Received Displays the number of received IGMP Queries IGMP Report V1 Received Displays the number of received IGMP Reports V1 IGMP Report V2 Received Displays the number of received IGMP Reports V2 IGMP Leave Received Displays the number of received IGMP Leaves Configuring Switching Information 176 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Defini
572. ses If the master is removed from the stack or becomes unavailable another member will be elected master and will then run from that saved configuration The switch master copies its running configuration to the stack member configured as the standby unit whenever it changes subject to some restrictions to reduce overhead This enables the standby unit to take over the stack operation with minimal interruption if the stack master becomes unavailable The running config synchronization also occurs when the running configuration is auto saved on the stack master or when the standby unit changes Configuring System Information 69 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stack Master Election All stack members are eligible stack masters If the stack master becomes unavailable the remaining stack members participate in electing a new stack master from among themselves The following factors determine which switch is elected the stack master e The switch that is master always has priority to retain the role of master e Assigned priority e MAC address When the stack is powered up and completes the boot process or the original stack master becomes unavailable the stack master is determined through an election process The rules for stack master Election are as follows e lfaunit had previously been elected stack master then it will remain the stack master and other units will simply be stack members e If no units were stack masters or more than o
573. set the hard time out for HTTP sessions This time out is unaffected by the activity level of the session The value must be in the range of 1 to 168 hours The default value is 24 hours The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed 5 Use Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions to set the maximum allowable number of HTTP sessions The value must be in the range of 0 to 16 The default value is 16 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Field Description Authentication List Shows the authentication list which HTTP are using From the HTTPS link you can access the following pages e HTTPS Configuration on page 373 e Certificate Management on page 375 e Certificate Download on page 375 HTTPS Configuration Secure HTTP enables the transmission of HTTP over an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer SSL or Transport Layer Security TLS connection When you manage the switch by using a Web interface secure HTTP can help ensure that communication between the management system and the switch is protected from eavesdroppers and man in the middle attacks Use the Secure HTTP Configuration page to configure the settings for HTTPS communication between the management station and the switch To display the Secure HTTP Configuration page click Security gt Access gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Configuration Managing Device Security 373 ProSafe M5300 Switch HTTPS Configuration
574. set the selected server to the Primary or Secondary server e Use Message Authenticator to enable or disable the message authenticator attribute for the selected server Managing Device Security 361 2 Click ADD to add a new server to the switch This button is only available to READWRITE users These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Click DELETE to remove the selected server from the configuration This button is only available to READWRITE users These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed Field Description Current Indicates if this server is currently in use as the authentication server The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics available on the page Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Click Clear Counters to clear the authentication server and RADIUS statistics to their default values Field Description Radius Server Display the address of the RADIUS server or the name of the RADIUS server for which to display statistics Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This n
575. sical interfaces and interfaces participating in LAGs are listed e Toadd the selected ACL to a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number so that an X appears in the box e To remove the selected ACL from a port or LAG click the box directly below the port or LAG number to clear the selection An X in the box indicates that the ACL is applied to the interface 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click APPLY to save any changes to the running configuration Managing Device Security 453 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Interface Displays selected interface Direction Displays selected packet filtering direction for ACL ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction ACL ID Name Displays the ACL Number in the case of IP ACL or ACL Name in the case of named IP ACL and IPv6 ACL identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface and direction Sequence Number Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction IP Binding Table Use the IP Binding Table page to view or delete the IP ACL bindings To display the IP Binding Table click Security gt ACL gt Advanced gt Binding Table IP ACL Binding Table IP ACL Binding Table ACL Sequence Interf Directi A
576. sion History Publication Part Number Version Publish Date Comments 202 10976 01 v1 0 August 2012 First publication Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started Switch Management Interface 2 22 02 206 e eee eee eben ed 9 WEDACGCSS ita ciean tate na Giana nes hora Readers E E ET 9 Understanding the User Interfaces nanana anaana 10 Using the Web Interface a cascada ae ge Rao Mela we nuri ahead ae 10 Interface Naming Convention 000 40 see bb bbe be eee eee es 17 Chapter 2 Configuring System Information Managemenbes lt s0d ocers Hoe cetaw deg ebdewve iw it eek o Gees 19 SYStSMMIMIOMMAUOM 544 0 5tewdd eee bee topes dhire TE 20 SWIC StAUSUGS 2c ie Seo teata nerd Gdn oad d he Ea 24 System CPU Status so cache pei we eed ad hehe pd Rees ikte diis 26 SIOUINOHMAUON esei erro beer rek HOG i Fete r hehe EERDE AY 27 Loopback lintenaces corres ater runet ae a a a baad 29 Network Menace axes nds wae gears gaia DRM aged a eae Kees as 30 TMG 620 02 d20422200n an reecedaseae TEE EE EE 34 DING 25 thas aon ead acres REETA ae dia mess Sata ace gina amp 40 SDM Template Preference 0 202 cee eens 42 Eais EEEE ce Sarade amides Gawe east T Oa asa desea a 43 LIGCNSE KEY v 01cn c2es0n cee ngesiwa ge petetesaenesoesaaage yd 43 License Features c cccicdcds eeac ede ee abe dled du k Ea eae 44 VENVICES spec EE ed eae en Gee her E eee 45 DHCP Sae 2 0 tae Dose edensee bad Ges eared wees 45 DHCP Rey 02242620
577. sponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them Advanced From the Advanced link you can access the following pages e STP Configuration on page 143 e CST Configuration on page 146 e CST Port Configuration on page 148 e CST Port Status on page 150 e MST Configuration on page 151 e MST Port Status on page 153 e STP Statistics on page 155 Configuring Switching Information 145 CST Configuration ProSafe M5300 Switch Use the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree CST and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch To display the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt CST Configuration CST Configuration CST Configuration Bridge Priority Bridge Max Age secs Bridge Hello Time secs Bridge Forward Delay secs Spanning Tree Maximum Hops Spanning Tree Tx Hold Count CST Status Bridge Identifier Time Since Topology Change Topology Change Count Topology Change Designated Root Root Path Cost Root Port Identifier Max Age secs Forward Delay secs Hold Time secs CST Regional Root CST Path Cost Port Triggered TC To configure CST settings 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 1 day 0 hr 8 min 38 sec 1 False 80 00 00 07 03 05 05 06 40000 80 01 20 15 6 80 00 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 0 1 Specify values for CST in the appropriate fields e Bridge Priority When switches or bridges are running STP each is assigned a priority Aft
578. ssful Note that for a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented Datagrams Locally Transmitted The number of datagrams which this entity has successfully transmitted from this output interface Datagrams Transmit Failed The number of datagrams which this entity failed to transmit successfully Datagrams Successfully Fragmented The number of IPv6 datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this output interface Datagrams Failed To Fragment The number of output datagrams that could not be fragmented at this interface Datagrams Fragments Created Multicast Datagrams Received The number of output datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this output interface The number of multicast packets received by the interface Multicast Datagrams Transmitted The number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface Routing 209 ICMPv6 Statistics ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Total ICMPv6 Messages Received The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which includes all those counted by ipv6lflcmpInErrors Note that this interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages ICMPv6 Messages With Errors Received The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but det
579. st Failed The cable status could not be determined The cable may in fact be working Cable Length The estimated length of the cable in meters The length is displayed as a range between the shortest estimated length and the longest estimated length Unknown is displayed if the cable length could not be determined The Cable Length is only displayed if the cable status is Normal Failure Location The estimated distance in meters from the end of the cable to the failure location The failure location is only displayed if the cable status is Open or Short Logs The switch may generate messages in response to events faults or errors occurring on the platform as well as changes in configuration or other occurrences These messages are stored locally and can be forwarded to one or more centralized points of collection for monitoring purposes or long term archival storage Local and remote configuration of the logging capability includes filtering of messages logged or forwarded based on severity and generating component The Monitoring gt Logs tab contains links to the following folders Buffered Logs on page 469 Command Log Configuration on page 470 Console Log Configuration on page 471 SysLog Configuration on page 471 Trap Logs on page 472 Event Logs on page 474 Persistent Logs on page 476 Monitoring the System 468 ProSafe M5300 Switch Buffered Logs To access the Buffered Logs page click Monitoring
580. st be administratively disabled and there can be no active SSH sessions 8 Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest SSH Sessions Managing Device Security 378 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Keys Present Displays which keys RSA DSA or both are present if any Key Generation In Progress Displays which key is being generated if any RSA DSA or None Host Keys Download Use this page to transfer a host key file to the switch from a remote host To display the Host Keys Download page click Security gt Access gt SSH gt Host Keys Download Host Keys Download Host Keys Download File Type SSH 1 RSA Key File Transfer Mode TFTP Server Address Type IPv4 ie Server Address 10 27 9 99 Remote File Path projects fastpath amyc Remote File Name netgear_0710 stk To download a SSH host key to the switch 1 Use File Type to specify the type of file you want to transfer e SSH 1 RSA Key File SSH 1 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File e SSH 2 RSA Key PEM File SSH 2 Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA Key File PEM Encoded e SSH 2 DSA Key PEM File SSH 2 Digital Signature Algorithm DSA Key File PEM Encoded Use Transfer Mode to specify the protocol to use to transfer the file e TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol e SFTP Secure File Transfer Program e SCP Secure Copy Use Server Address Type to specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the form
581. stance 21 Click DELETE to remove the currently selected CP instance Managing Device Security 429 ProSafe M5300 Switch Captive Portal Binding Configuration You can associate a configured captive portal with a specific network SSID The CP feature only runs on the interfaces you specify A CP can have multiple interfaces associated with it but an interface can be associated to only one CP ata time To display the Captive Portal Global Configuration page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Binding Configuration Captive Portal Binding Configuration Captive Portal Binding Configuration CP ID 1 ie CP Name Pot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 vivix viv 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 1 Use the CP ID pull down list to select the CP ID for which to create or update a CP instance 2 Use CP Name to enter the name of the configuration Name can contain 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters 3 Use Port List to select the interface or interfaces Captive Portal Binding Table To display the Captive Portal Binding Table page click Security gt Control gt Captive Portal gt CP Binding Table Captive Portal Binding Table Captive Portal Binding Table Interface CP ID Operational Block Authenticated Status Status users 1 0 7 Disable Not Blocked Default 1 0 8 Disable Not Blocked Default 1 0 9 Disable Not Blocke
582. stness variable 1 packet losses 7 Use Startup Query Interval to specify the value that indicates the configured interval in seconds between General Queries sent by a Querier on startup Routing 322 ProSafe M5300 Switch 8 Use Startup Query Count to specify the value that indicates the configured number of Queries sent out on startup separated by the Startup Query Interval 9 Use Last Member Query Interval to enter the last member query interval in milliseconds This is the maximum response time to be inserted into group specific queries sent in response to leave group messages and is also the amount of time between group specific query messages Valid values are from 0 to 65535 The default value is 1000 milliseconds 10 Use Last Member Query Count to enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report Valid values are from 1 to 20 The default value is 2 Field Description Operational Mode The operational status of MLD on the Interface MLD Routing Interface Statistics To display the MLD Routing Interface Statistics page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt MLD gt Routing Interface Statistics MLD Routing Interface Statistics MLD Routing Interface Statistics 1 2 VLANS All Querier Status Querier IP Querier Up Time Querier Expiry Time Wrong Version Queries Received Number of Joins Received Number of Groups 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6
583. switch Uptime The displays the relative time since the last reboot of the switch Preconfigured Model Identifier This field displays the model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device Plugged in Model Identifier This field displays the model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the plugged in device Detected Code Version This field indicates the detected version of code on this unit Detected Code Version in Flash The displays the Release number and version number of the code stored in flash SFS Last Attempt Status This displays the status of last tried stack firmware synchronisation None is the default value if SFS has not been tried Stack Port Configuration By default the stack ports on each switch are configured for stacking However you can use these ports as standard Ethernet ports Use the Stack Port configuration page to configure the mode of the stack ports and to view information about the ports To display the Stack Port Configuration page click System gt Stacking gt Advanced gt Stack Port Configuration A screen similar to the following is displayed the page is shown in two parts Configuring System Information 74 ProSafe M5300 Switch Stack Port Configuration me Port Configuration i Ss en re oy pace 0 25 Stack Stack Down 0 26 Stack Stack Up 0 27 Stack Stack Down 0 28 Down 0 25 Down 0 26 Up
584. switch 5 Click APPLY to change the MAC Address mapping to the IP Configuration changes take effect immediately ARP Cache Use this screen to show ARP entries in the ARP Cache Field Description Port The associated Unit Slot Port of the connection IP Address Displays the IP address It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch s existing routing interfaces MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device The address is six two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 00 06 29 32 81 40 Click REFRESH to show the latest IP information Routing 222 ProSafe M5300 Switch ARP Table Configuration You can use this screen to change the configuration parameters for the Address Resolution Protocol Table You can also use this screen to display the contents of the table To display the ARP Table Configuration page click Routing gt ARP gt Advanced gt ARP Table Configuration ARP Table Configuration ARP Table Configuration Age Time secs Response Time secs 10 Retries 10 Cache Size 1024 Dynamic Renew Disable Enable Total Entry Count Peak Total Entries Active Static Entries Configured Static Entries Maximum Static Entries Remove From Table To configure the ARP table 1 Use Age Time to enter the value for the switch to use for the ARP entry ageout time You must enter a valid integer which represents the numb
585. t of excluding all ports from the selected VLAN 3 Click the orange bar to show the ports available on each stack member or to show the available LAGs 4 Click box directly under the port ID or LAG ID to add the port LAG to the selected VLAN The interface can be added as a member in one of the following modes T Tagged All frames transmitted for this VLAN will be tagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN U Untagged All frames transmitted for this VLAN will be untagged The ports that are selected will be included in the VLAN Blank Autodetect The port LAG can be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP This selection has the effect of excluding a port from the selected VLAN Field Definition VLAN Name This field identifies the name for the VLAN you selected It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks VLAN ID 1 always has a name of Default VLAN Type This field identifies the type of the VLAN you selected The VLAN type Default VLAN ID 1 always present Static a VLAN you have configured Dynamic a VLAN created by GVRP registration that you have not converted to static and that GVRP may therefore remove Configuring Switching Information 123 ProSafe M5300 Switch VLAN Status Use this page to display the status of all currently configured VLANs To display the VLAN Status page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt VLAN S
586. t should appear first in the selected authentication login list If you select a method that does not time out as the first method such as local no other method will be tried even if you have specified more than one method The options are e Local The user s locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication e Radius The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server instead of locally e Tacacs The user s ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS server e None The user will not be authenticated 3 Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear second in the selected authentication login list This is the method that will be used if the first method times out If you select a method that does not time out as the second method the third method will not be tried Note that this parameter will not appear when you first create a new login list 4 Use the drop down menu to select the method if any that should appear third in the selected authentication login list HTTPS Authentication List You use this page to configure HTTPS lists This list specifies the authentication method s you want used to control management level access to the web based user interface by using secure HTTP To display the HTTPS Authentication List page click Security gt Management Security gt Authentication List gt HTTPS Authentication List HTTPS Authentication
587. t the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable Multicast Router on the selected interfaces 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Switching Information 162 ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast Router VLAN Configuration This page configures the interface to only forward the snooped IGMP packets that come from VLAN ID lt vlanid gt to the multicast router attached to this interface The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch will automatically detect the presence of a multicast router and forward IGMP packets accordingly It is only needed when you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network To access the Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page click Switching gt Multicast gt IGMP Snooping gt Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Multicast Router VLAN Configuration Interface 1 0 1 z Multicast Router VLAN Configuration AECE 1 Select the check box associated with each interface you want to configure Select the check box in the heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID for which the Multicast Router Mode is to be Enabled or Disabled 3 Use Multicast Router to enable or disable multicast router for th
588. t uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into stub areas 3 Use Default Cost to enter the metric value you want applied for the default route advertised into the stub area Valid values range from 1 to 16 777 215 4 Click ADD to configure the area as a stub area 5 Click DELETE to delete the stub area designation The area will be returned to normal state Field Description SPF Runs The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Type of Service This field is the normal TOS associated with the stub metric Routing 238 ProSafe M5300 Switch NSSA Area Configuration T
589. ta Rat Admi Mode a PS sara marae Directed Type Broadcasts Enable 1000 Mbps Disable 2C B0 5D 91 F8 B7 Enable Unknown Disable ive 2C B0 5D 91 F8 B7 Enable Unknown Disable 2C B0 5D 91 F8 B7 Enable Unknown i Disable i 2C B0 5D 91 F8 B7 Enable Unknown Disable Inactive 2C B0 5D 91 F8 B7 ICMP Local A ICMP Routing Interface Bandwidth Destination 3 Proxy Arp Redirects Status Unreachables 1000000 Enable 100000 Enable Disable 100000 Enable Disable 100000 Enable Disable 100000 Enable To configure IP routing on an interface 1 Use Go To Interface to enter the Interface in unit slot port format and click Go The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected 2 Use Port to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 3 Use Description to enter the description for the interface Routing 198 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use IP Address Configuration Method to enter the method by which an IP address is configured on the interface There are three methods None Manual and DHCP By default the method is None Method None should be used to reset the DHCP method Note When the configuration method is changed from DHCP to None there will be a minor delay before the page refreshes Use IP Address to enter the IP address for the interface Use Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask for the interface This is also referre
590. tagrams Discarded Due To No Route The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Received Datagrams With Unknown Protocol The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Invalid Address The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity This count includes invalid addresses e g 0 and unsupported addresses e g addresses with unallocated prefixes For entities which are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Truncated Data The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame didn t carry enough data Received Datagrams Discarded Other The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly Required
591. tall Configuration The Autolnstall feature enables the configuration of a switch automatically when the device is turned on and during the boot process no configuration file is found in device storage By communicating with a DHCP server Autolnstall obtains an IP address for the switch and an IP address for a TFTP server Autolnstall attempts to download a configuration file from the TFTP server and install in on the switch e The DHCP server that the switch communicates with must provide the following information e The IP address and subnet mask option 1 to be assigned to the switch e The IP address of a default gateway option 3 if needed for IP communication e The identification of the TFTP server from which to obtain the boot file This is given by any of the following fields in the priority shown highest to lowest e The sname field of the DHCP reply e The hostname of the TFTP server option 66 Either the TFTP address or name is specified not both in most network configurations If a TFTP hostname is given a DNS server is required to translate the name to an IP address e The IP address of the TFTP server option 150 e The address of the TFTP server supplied in the siaddr field e The name of the configuration file boot file or option 67 to be downloaded from the TFTP server The boot file name must have a file type of cfg e The IP addresses of DNS name servers option 6 The IP addresses of DNS name serve
592. tance 1 to communicate with the hosts on Switch 3 directly The hosts use different instances of MSTP to effectively use the links across the switch The same concept can be extended to other switches and more instances of MSTP Configuration Examples 524 Notification of Compliance NETGEAR Wired Products Regulatory Compliance Information This section includes user requirements for operating this product in accordance with National laws for usage of radio spectrum and operation of radio devices Failure of the end user to comply with the applicable requirements may result in unlawful operation and adverse action against the end user by the applicable National regulatory authority This product s firmware limits operation to only the channels allowed in a particular Region or Country Therefore all options described in this user s guide may not be available in your version of the product FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States FCC Information to User This product does not contain any user serviceable components and is to be used with approved antennas only Any product changes or modifications will invalidate all applicable regulatory certifications and approvals This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undes
593. tatus VLAN Status VLAN Status VLAN VLAN Routing VLAN T M ber Port default Default 1 0 1 1 0 24 2 0 1 2 0 24 lag 1 lag 64 Dynamic AUTO VoIP 1 0 1 1 0 24 2 0 1 2 0 24 lag 1 lag 64 Field Definition VLAN ID The VLAN Identifier VID of the VLAN The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093 VLAN Name The name of the VLAN VLAN ID 1 is always named Default VLAN Type The VLAN type e Default VLAN ID 1 always present e Static a VLAN you have configured e Dynamic a VLAN created by GVRP registration that you have not converted to static and that GVRP may therefore remove Routing Interface The interface associated with the VLAN in the case that VLAN routing is configured for this VLAN Member Ports The ports that are included in the VLAN Configuring Switching Information 124 ProSafe M5300 Switch Port PVID Configuration The Port PVID Configuration screen lets you assign a port VLAN ID PVID to an interface There are certain requirements for a PVID e All ports must have a defined PVID e If no other value is specified the default VLAN PVID is used e Ifyou want to change the port s default PVID you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as a member e Use the Port VLAN ID PVID Configuration page to configure a virtual LAN on a port To access the Port PVID Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Port PVID
594. te Limit Burst Size Specify the number of bytes allowed in a temporary traffic burst Burst Rate e Time Range Select the name of the time range that will impose a time limitation on the ACL rule If a time range with the specified name does not exist and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied immediately If a time range with specified name exists and the ACL containing this ACL rule is associated with an interface the ACL rule is applied when the time range with specified name becomes active The ACL rule is removed when the time range with specified name becomes inactive Click APPLY to add the ACL rule with the specified criteria 4 To delete an IP ACL rule select the check box associated with the rule and then click DELETE Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch To modify an existing IP Extended ACL rule click the Rule ID The number is a hyperlink to the Extended ACL Rule Configuration page Managing Device Security 448 ProSafe M5300 Switch IPv ACL An IP ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an IP ACL applies must be specified as well as whether
595. ted from the GARP layer GMRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GMRP registrations could not be completed EAPOL Frames Received EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time in days hours minutes and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared Monitoring the System 465 ProSafe M5300 Switch EAP Statistics Use the EAP Statistics page to display information about EAP packets received on a specific port To display the EAP Statistics page click Monitoring gt Ports gt EAP Statistics EAP Statistics EAP Statistics 1 2 All Go To Interface GO EAPOL Length Start Logoff Last Last Invalid Response ID Response Request ID Request PAE Frames Frames Error pcre phair Ne tea Frames Frames Frame Frame Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames apaomnles Received Transmitted Received Received Version Source Received eee Received Received Transmitted Transmitted eceives 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Authenticator 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 Authenticator 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oO o o o o oO o o Authenticator 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 o o o 0 oO 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 o o 0 o oO 0 0
596. tem gt LLDP gt Remote Device Information A screen similar to the following displays LLDP Remote Device Information LLDP Interface Selection Interface 1 0 1 e Remote Device Information Remote ID E Chassis ID C0 3F 0E 90 29 60 Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Port ID 0 8 Port ID Subtype Local System Name System Description GSM7248V2 ProSafe 48G Port Description System Capabilities Supported bridge router System Capabilities Enabled bridge Time To Live 94 Management Address Type IPv4 Management Address 10 27 34 55 To view LLDP information received by an interface select the desired interface from the Interface menu The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Information fields Field Description Chassis ID Subtype Specifies the source of the chassis identifier Chassis ID Specifies the chassis component associated with the remote system Port ID Subtype Specifies the source of port identifier Port ID Specifies the port component associated with the remote system System Name Specifies the system name of the remote system System Description Specifies the description of the given port associated with the remote system Port Description Specifies the description of the given port associated with the remote system System Capabilities Supported Specifies the system capabilities of the remote system System Capabilities Enabled Specifies the system capabilities of the rem
597. terface settings 1 Use Interface to select the interface to be configured 2 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of MLD Proxy on the selected interface The default is disable Routing MLD and Multicast global admin modes should be enabled to enable MLD Proxy interface mode 3 Use Version to enter the version of MLD you want to configure on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 2 and the default value is 3 This field is configurable only when MLD Proxy interface mode is enabled 4 Use Unsolicited Report Interval to enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group Valid values are from 1 to 260 The default value is 1 Field Description IPv6 Prefix The IPv6 address of the MLD Proxy interface Prefix Length The prefix length for the IPv6 address of the MLD Proxy interface Operational Mode The operational state of MLD Proxy interface Number of Groups The current number of multicast group entries for the MLD Proxy interface in the cache table Version 1 Querier Timeout The older MLD version 1 querier timeout value in seconds The Older Version Querier Interval is the time out for transitioning a host back to MLDv2 mode once an older version query is heard When an older version query is received hosts set their Older Version Querier Present Timer to Older Version Querier I
598. terference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following methods e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an electrical outlet on a circuit different from that which the radio receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Modifications made to the product unless expressly approved by NETGEAR Inc could void the user s right to operate the equipment Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus ProSafe M5300 Switch does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada European Union The ProSafe M5300 Switch complies with essential requirements of EU EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC as supported by applying the following test methods and standards e EN55022 2006 A1 2007 e EN55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 e EN60950 1 2005 2nd Edition e EN 61000 3 2 2006 e EN 61000 3 3 1995 w A1 2001 A2 2005
599. the GARP Switch Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt GARP Switch Configuration GARP Switch Configuration GARP Switch Configuration GVRP Mode GMRP Mode Disable Enable Disable Enable To configure the global GARP settings 1 Use GVRP Mode to choose the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol administrative mode for the switch by selecting enable or disable from the radio button When GARP is enabled switches can dynamically register and de register VLAN membership information with other switches attached to the same segment Information about the active VLANs is propagated across all networking switches in the bridged LAN that support GVRP The factory default is disable 2 Use GMRP Mode to choose the GARP Multicast Registration Protocol administrative mode for the switch by selecting enable or disable from the radio button GMRP is similar to IGMP snooping in its purpose but IGMP snooping is more widely used GMRP must be running on both the host and the switch to function properly The factory default is disable 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 4 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Configuring Switching Information 132 ProSafe M5300 Switch GARP Port Configuration Note It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect To display the GARP Port Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt GARP Port Confi
600. the Primary Mask field input the primary IPv4 subnet mask for this interface in dotted decimal notation d View the logical status of the interface in the Loopback Interface Status field A loopback interface is always up 3 For an IPv6 loopback interface configure the following a In the Loopback ID field select the loopback ID number b Use the IPv6 Mode field to enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address This option is only configurable prior to specifying an explicit IPv6 address c Use the IPv6 Address field to enter the IPv6 address in the format prefix length d Use the EUI64 field to optionally specify the 64 bit extended unique identifier EUI 64 4 Click ADD to add the configured IPv4 or IPv6 loopback interface 5 To remove the loopback interface configuration select the box associated with the interface to remove and click DELETE 6 To modify information about a configured interface select the box associated with the interface to modify update the configuration information in the appropriate fields and click APPLY Configuring System Information 29 ProSafe M5300 Switch Network Interface From the Network Interface link you can access the following pages e IPv4 Network Configuration on page 30 e Pv6 Network Interface Configuration on page 32 e IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table on page 33 IPv4 Network Configuration To display the IPv4 Network Configuration page click System gt
601. the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocols Only those communities with read write level access can be used to change the configuration using SNMP Use this page when you are using the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocol If you want to use SNMP v3 you should use the User Accounts menu To display this page click System gt SNMP gt SNMP V1 V2 gt Community Configuration A screen similar to the following displays Configuring System Information 87 ProSafe M5300 Switch Community Configuration Community Configuration Cc it Hece EAAS Ee N EN CELL A public 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read Only Enable private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read Write Enable To configure SNMPv1 v2 communities 1 Use Community Name to reconfigure an existing community or to create a new one Use this pull down menu to select one of the existing community names or select Create to add a new one A valid entry is a case sensitive string of up to 16 characters 2 Client Address Taken together the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access this device If either Client Address or IP Mask value is 0 0 0 0 access is allowed from any IP address Otherwise every client s address is ANDed with the mask as is the Client Address and if the values are equal access is allowed For example if the Client Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 then any client whose addr
602. the addresses in RIF are in non canonical format Upstream Threshold The number of frames discarded due to lack of cell descriptors available for that packet s priority level Received Packets Dropped including aborted The number of packets without any errors that are dropped at the time of their receive Total Packets Transmitted Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets transmitted on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization If greater precision is desired the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval Packets Transmitted 64 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 65 127 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Monitoring the System 463 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Packets Transmitted 128 255 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Transmitted 256 511 Octets The total
603. the appropriate value can be specified e IP DSCP Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point DSCP field The DSCP is defined as the high order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header This is an optional configuration Enter an integer from 0 to 63 The IP DSCP is selected by possibly selection one of the DSCP keyword from a drop down menu If a value is to be selected by specifying its numeric value then select the Other option in the drop down menu and a text box will appear where the numeric value of the DSCP can be entered Managing Device Security 447 ProSafe M5300 Switch e IP Precedence The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high order three bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header This is an optional configuration Enter an integer from 0 to 7 e IP TOS The IP TOS field in a packet is defined as all eight bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header The TOS Bits value is a hexadecimal number from 00 to FF The TOS Mask value is a hexadecimal number from 00 to FF The TOS Mask denotes the bit positions in the TOS Bits value that are used for comparison against the IP TOS field in a packet For example to check for an IP TOS value having bits 7 and 5 set and bit 1 clear where bit 7 is most significant use a TOS Bits value of OxAO and a TOS Mask of OxFF This is an optional configuration e Rate Limit Conform Data Rate Specify the allowed transmission rate for frames on the interface e Ra
604. the bridge with the Designated Port It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port Configuring Switching Information 154 ProSafe M5300 Switch STP Statistics Use the Spanning Tree Statistics page to view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units BPDUs transmitted and received on each port To display the Spanning Tree Statistics page click Switching gt STP gt Advanced gt STP Statistics STP Statistics STP Statistics 1 2 LAGS All STP RSTP MSTP MSTP Interface BPDUs gentle 4 BPDUs iieiea BPDUs BPDUs Received Received Received Transmitted 0 1 0 1 0 43128 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 1 0 10 1 0 11 o ISi o ISi o S o SI o el o o E o E o ie o i o m o ie o E o E o Re o ie o ie o E o eC RC o ie o ee o ie o eC n The following table describes the information available on the STP Statistics page Field Description Interface Selects one of the physical or port channel interfaces of the switch STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the s
605. the selected port s specify the following settings e Control Mode This selector lists the options for control mode The control mode is only set if the link status of the port is link up The options are e force unauthorized The authenticator port access entity PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized e force authorized The authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized Managing Device Security 390 ProSafe M5300 Switch e auto The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server e mac based The authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant authenticator and the authentication server on a per supplicant basis Quiet Period This input field allows the user to configure the quiet period for the selected port This command sets the value in seconds of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant The quiet period is the period for which the authenticator does not attempt to acquire a supplicant after a failed authentication exchange with the supplicant The quiet period must be a number in the range of 0 and 65535 A quiet period value of O means that the authenticator state machine
606. the stack 6 Click Refresh to update the page with the latest information from the switch 7 Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch The following table describes the non configurable Stack Configuration fields Field Description Hardware Management The hardware management preference of the switch The hardware Preference management preference can be disabled or unassigned Standby Status Identifies the switch that is configured as the Standby Unit The possible values are e Cfg Standby Indicates that the unit is configured as the Standby Unit The unit configured as the Standby switch becomes the stack manager if the current manager fails e Opr Standby Indicates that this unit is operating as the Standby Unit and the configured Standby Unit is not part of the stack e None The switch is not configured as the Standby Unit Switch Status Displays the status of the selected unit The possible values are OK Unsupported e Code Mismatch e Config Mismatch e Not Present Configuring System Information 73 ProSafe M5300 Switch The following table describes the Basic Stack Status fields Field Description Unit ID The unit ID of the specific switch Switch Description The description for the unit can be configured by the user Serial Number The unique box serial number for this
607. the system time for the time periods in which they take effect Make sure you configure the SNTP server settings so that the SNTP client on the switch can obtain the correct date and time from the server To display the Timer Schedule Configuration page click System gt Services gt Timer Schedule gt Advanced gt Schedule Configuration The fields available on the screen change depending on the type of timer schedule selected from the Timer Schedule Type menu A screen similar to one of the two following screens displays Configuring System Information 115 ProSafe M5300 Switch Timer Schedule Configuration Timer Schedule Selection Timer Schedule Name Timer1 z Timer Schedule Type Periodic x Timer Schedule Entry 1 o al Timer Schedule Configuration Time Start 18 30 Time End 23 59 z r L ___ Periodic Date Start 6 Jul 2012 Ty Timer Date End No End Date End Date Recurrence Pattern Weekly z Weekly Mode Every Week s WeekDay V Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu V Fri V Sat Timer Schedule Configuration Timer Schedule Selection Timer Schedule Name Timer1 v Timer Schedule Type Absolute Y Timer Schedule Entry 2 e Absol ute Timer Timer Schedule Configuration Time Start 00 00 Time End 06 00 Date Start 27 Jul 2012 Date End 30 Jul 2012 To configure a timer schedule Select the name of the schedule created on the Timer Global Configuration page 2 Specify the type of timer to confi
608. tics To access the Port Detailed page click Monitoring gt Ports gt Port Detailed Statistics Following figure show some but not all of the fields on the Port Detailed Statistics page Port Detailed Statistics Port Detailed Statistics Interface MSTID ifIndex Port Type Port Channel ID Port Role STP Mode STP State Admin Mode Flow Control Mode LACP Mode Physical Mode Physical Status Link Status Link Trap 1 0 1 m CST iw 1 Normal not a lag member Enable Enable Disable Enable Auto 1000 Mbps Link Up Enable Packets RX and TX 64 Octets 23471 Packets RX and TX 65 127 Octets 205514 Packets RX and TX 128 255 Octets 13332 Packets RX and TX 256 511 Octets 687 Packets RX and TX 512 1023 Octets Packets RX and TX 1024 1513 Octets Packets RX and TX 1519 2047 Octets 0 Packets RX and TX 2048 4095 Octets 0 Packets RX and TX 4096 9216 Octets 0 Octets Received Packets Received 64 Octets 25347770 18683 Packets Received 65 127 Octets 196002 Packets Received 128 255 Octets 6941 Monitoring the System 459 The following table describes the detailed port information displayed on the screen To view ProSafe M5300 Switch information about a different port select the port number from the Interface menu Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions e Click CLEAR to clear all the counters This resets all statistics for this port to the default
609. time in days hours minutes and seconds that has elapsed since the virtual router transitioned to the initialized state State Transitioned to Master The total number of times that this virtual router s state has transitioned to Master Advertisement Received The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual router Advertisement Interval Errors The total number of VRRP advertisement packets received for which the advertisement interval was different than the one configured for the local virtual router Authentication Failure The total number of VRRP packets received that did not pass the authentication check IP TTL Errors The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with IP TTL Time To Live not equal to 255 Zero Priority Packets Received The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of O Zero Priority Packets Sent The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of O Invalid Type Packets Received The number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with an invalid value in the type field Routing 284 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Address List Errors The total number of packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router Invalid Authentication Type The total number of
610. tion IGMP Query Transmitted Displays the number of transmitted IGMP Queries IGMP Report V1 Transmitted Displays the number of transmitted IGMP Reports V1 IGMP Report V2 Transmitted Displays the number of transmitted IGMP Reports V2 IGMP Leave Transmitted Displays the number of transmitted IGMP Leaves IGMP Packet Receive Failures Displays the number of IGMP packet receive failures IGMP Packet Transmit Failures Displays the number of IGMP packet transmit failures Address Table From the Address Table link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 177 e Advanced on page 179 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e Address Table on page 177 Address Table This table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information This information is used by the transparent bridging function in determining how to propagate a received frame To display the Address Table page click Switching gt Address Table gt Basic gt Address Table Address Table MAC Address Table Search By vani E Total MAC Addresses 7 00 0F FE 00 8E 76 1 0 1 Learned 00 16 9C E1 D8 00 1 0 1 Learned 00 19 E7 D3 82 2D 1 0 1 Learned 00 1A A0 1A 94 FA 1 0 1 Learned 00 C0 05 01 98 05 1 0 1 Learned 2C B0 5D 91 F6 FO 0 5 1 Management C0 3F 0E 90 29 62 1 0 1 Learned Configuring Switching Information 177 ProSafe M5300 Switch 1 Use Search By to search fo
611. tion into fields or select options from drop down menus Each page contains access to the HTML based help that explains the fields and configuration options for the page Each page also contains command buttons Table 1 shows the command buttons that are used throughout the pages in the Web interface Table 1 Command Buttons Button Function ADD Clicking ADD adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table APPLY Clicking APPLY sends the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately CANCEL Clicking CANCEL cancels the configuration on the screen and resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch DELETE Clicking DELETE removes the selected item REFRESH Clicking REFRESH updates the page with the latest information from the device LOGOUT Clicking the LOGOUT button ends the session Getting Started 12 ProSafe M5300 Switch Device View The Device View is a Java applet that displays the ports on the switch This graphic provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options The graphic also provides information about device ports current configuration and status table information and feature components The Device View is available from the System gt Device View page The port coloring indicates whether a port is currently active Green indicates that the port is enabled red indicates that an err
612. tip e trust ip dscp Configuring Quality of Service 335 ProSafe M5300 Switch 3 Use Interface Shaping Rate to specify the maximum bandwidth allowed typically used to shape the outbound transmission rate This value is controlled independently of any per queue maximum bandwidth configuration It is effectively a second level shaping mechanism Default value is 0 Valid Range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1 The value 0 means maximum is unlimited 4 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Resets the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch 5 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately Interface Queue Configuration Use the Interface Queue Configuration page to define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues User configurable parameters control the amount of bandwidth used by the queue the queue depth during times of congestion and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of all queues on a port Each port has its own CoS queue related configuration The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be configured globally or per port A global configuration change is automatically applied to all ports in the system To display the Interface Queue Configuration page click the QoS gt CoS gt Advanced gt Interface Queue Configuration Interface Queue Configuration Inter
613. tness variable 1 packet losses Valid values are from 1 to 255 The default value is 2 Use Query Interval to enter the frequency in seconds at which IGMP host query packets are to be transmitted on this interface Valid values are from 1 to 1800 The default value is 125 Use Query Max Response Time to enter the maximum query response time to be advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface in tenths of a second The default value is 100 Valid values are from 0 to 255 Use Startup Query Interval to enter the number of seconds between the transmission of startup queries on the selected interface The valid values are from 1 to 300 The default value is 31 Use Startup Query Count to enter the number of queries to be sent on startup The valid values are from 1 to 20 The default value is 2 Use Last Member Query Interval to enter the last member query interval in tenths of a second This the maximum response time to be inserted into group specific queries sent in response to leave group messages and is also the amount of time between group specific query messages Valid values are from 0 to 255 The default value is 10 This value is not used for IGMP version 1 Routing 297 ProSafe M5300 Switch 10 Use Last Member Query Count to enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report Valid values are from 1 to 20 The default value is 2 11 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 12 Click CAN
614. to collect flow samples is called a sampler sFlow agent also collects time based sampling of network interface statistics and sends them to the configured sFlow receivers A data source configured to collect counter samples is called a poller To display the sFlow Interface Configuration page click Monitoring gt sFlow gt Advanced gt sFlow Interface Configuration sFlow Interface Configuration sFlow Interface Configuration 1 2 All Go To Interface keo Receiver Poller Receiver Sampling Maximum Interface Index Interval Index Rate Header Size 1 0 11 128 10 2 128 1 0 3 1 0 4 128 1 0 S 128 10 6 128 1 Interface The interface for this flow poller and sampler This Agent will support Physical ports only 2 Use Receiver Index to specify the allowed range for the sFlow Receiver associated with this counter poller Allowed range is 1 to 8 3 Use Poller Interval to specify the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of the counters associated with this data source A sampling interval of 0 disables counter sampling Allowed range is 0 to 86400 secs 4 Use Receiver Index to specify the sFlow Receiver for this flow sampler If set to 0 the sampler configuration is set to default and the sampler is deleted Only active receivers can be set If a receiver expires then all samplers associated with the receiver will also expire Allowed range is 1 to 8 5 Use Sampling Rate to specify the stat
615. to display its statistics If no class is associated with the chosen policy then nothing will be populated in the list Offered Packets Octets A count of the total number of packets octets offered to all class instances in this service policy before their defined DiffServ treatment is applied This is the overall count per interface per direction Configuring Quality of Service 352 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Discarded Packets Octets A count of the total number of packets octets discarded for all class instances in this service policy for any reason due to DiffServ treatment This is the overall count per interface per direction Sent Packets Octets A count of the total number of packets octets forwarded for all class instances in this service policy after their defined DiffServ treatments were applied In this case forwarding means the traffic stream was passed to the next functional element in the data path such as the switching or routing function of an outbound link transmission element This is the overall count per interface per direction Configuring Quality of Service 353 ProSafe M5300 Switch Configuring Quality of Service 354 Managing Device Security Use the features available from the Security tab to configure management security settings for port user and server security The Security tab contains links to the following features e Managem
616. to retrieve the stored configuration e Text Configuration Specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration e Script File Specify script file when you want to retrieve the stored configuration Maintenance 488 ProSafe M5300 Switch Error Log Specify error log to retrieve the system error persistent log sometimes referred to as the event log Trap Log Specify trap log to retrieve the system trap records Buffered Log Specify buffered log to retrieve the system buffered in memory log Tech Support Specify Tech Support to retrieve the switch information needed for troubleshooting The factory default is Archive 2 Use Local File Name to specify the local script file name you want to upload USB File Upload Use this menu to upload a file from the switch to USB device To display the HTTP File Upload page click Maintenance gt Upload gt USB File Upload Upload File To USB Upload File To USB File Type Archive ie Image Name image1 ie USB File 1 Use File Type to specify what type of file you want to upload Archive Specify archive STK code when you want to retrieve from the operational flash e Image Specify the code image1 when you want to retrieve e Image2 Specify the code image2 when you want to retrieve Text Configuration to specify configuration in text mode when you want to retrieve the stored configuration The factory default
617. tory default is disabled If the trust mode is disabled untrusted DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules e DHCP packets from a DHCP server DHCPOFFER DHCPACK DHCPNAK DHCPRELEASEQUERY are dropped if they are received on an untrusted port e DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC addresses in the snooping database but the binding s interface is other than the interface where the message was received e On untrusted interfaces the switch drops DHCP packets with a source MAC address that does not match the client hardware address if MAC Address Validation is globally enabled If Logging Invalid Packets is enabled DHCP snooping application logs invalid packets on this interface The factory default is disabled Use Rate Limit pps to specify rate limit value for DHCP Snooping purpose If the incoming rate of DHCP packets exceeds the value of this object for consecutively burst interval seconds the port will be shutdown If this value is None there is no limit The factory default is 15pps packets per second The range of Rate Limit is 0 to 300 Use Burst Interval secs to specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purpose on this interface If the rate limit is None burst interval has no meaning shows it as N A The factory default is 1 second The range of Burst Interval is 1 to 15 Click APPLY to apply the new configuration and cause the changes to take effect These changes will not be
618. tration reminder pop up appears on next successful login e REGISTER NOW The NETGEAR Registration Server is contacted to initiate the registration process Help 504 Detault Settings This appendix describes the default settings for many of the ProSafe M5300 Managed Switch software features Table 3 Default Settings Feature Default IP address 192 168 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Protocol DHCP Management VLAN ID Minimum password length IPv6 management mode SNTP client SNTP server Global logging CLI command logging Console logging RAM logging Persistent FLASH logging DNS SNMP SNMP Traps Auto Install Auto Save sFlow 1 Eight characters Enabled Enabled Not configured Enabled Disabled Enabled Severity level debug and above Enabled Severity level debug and above Disabled Enabled No servers configured Enabled SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 505 Table 3 Default Settings continued ProSafe M5300 Switch Feature Default ISDP Enabled Versions 1 and 2 RMON Enabled TACACS Not configured RADIUS Not configured SSH SSL Disabled Telnet Enabled Denial of Service Protection Disabled Captive Portal Disabled Dot1x Authentication Disabled IEEE 802 1X MAC Based Port Security Access Control Lists ACL IP Source Guard IPSG DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Protected Ports Private Groups
619. ts 7 9 are members of the selected group Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership Group ID 1 we Group Name IPX CURRENT MEMBERS Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 8 9 vi xyi vY 25 26 27 28 To configure member ports for a protocol based VLAN group 1 Use Group ID to select the protocol based VLAN Group ID for which you want to display or configure data 2 Use Port List to add the ports you selected to this Protocol Based VLAN Group Note that a given interface can only belong to one group for a given protocol For example if you have already added a port to a group for IP you cannot add it to another group that also includes IP although you could add it to a new group for IPX 3 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Field Description Group Name This field identifies the name for the protocol based VLAN you selected It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including blanks Current Members This button can be click to show the current numbers in the selected protocol based VLAN Group Configuring Switching Information 128 ProSafe M5300 Switch IP Subnet Based VLAN IP Subnet to VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the IP Subnet to VLAN table An entry is specified via a source IP address network mask and the desired VLAN ID The IP Subnet to VLAN configurations are shared across a
620. tware The File Management menu contains links to the following options e Copy on page 495 e Dual Image Configuration on page 496 Copy To display the Copy page click Maintenance gt File Management gt Copy Copy Copy Source Image Imagel Image2 Stack Member 3 e Destination Image Imagel Image2 1 Use Source Image to select the image1 or image2 as source image when copy occurs 2 Use Stack member to select the destination unit to which you are going to copy from master 3 Use Destination Image to select the image1 or image2 as destination image when copy Occurs Maintenance 495 ProSafe M5300 Switch Dual Image Configuration The Dual Image feature allows switch to retain two images in permanent storage The user designates one of these images as the active image to be loaded during subsequent switch restarts This feature reduces switch down time when upgrading downgrading the image To display the Dual Image Configuration page click Maintenance gt File Management gt Dual Image Configuration Dual Image Configuration Dual Image Configuration Active Not Image Name Active Image Description Version Image Image 3 imagel False False 7 26 11 14 3 image2 7 24 13 12 To configure Dual Image settings 1 Use Unit to select the unit whose code image you want to activate update or delete 2 Use Image Description to specify the description for the image that you have se
621. twork ProSafe software supports IPv4 and MAC ACLs You first create an IPv4 based or MAC based ACL ID Then you create a rule and assign it to a unique ACL ID Next you define the rules which can identify protocols source and destination IP and MAC addresses and other packet matching criteria Finally use the ID number to assign the ACL to a port or to a LAG The Security gt ACL folder contains links to the following features e ACL Wizard on page 435 e Basic on page 437 for MAC ACLs e Advanced on page 441 for IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs ACL Wizard the ACL Wizard helps a user to create a simple ACL and apply to the selected ports easily and quickly Firstly you must select an ACL type with which you will create a ACL Then add ACL rule to this ACL and at last apply this ACL on the selected ports The ACL Wizard allows you only to create the ACL but doesn t allow you to modify it If you want to modify it please go to the ACL configuration page to do that To display the ACL Wizard click Security gt ACL gt ACL Wizard ACL Wizard ACL Type Selection ACL Type ACL Based on Destination IPv4 ACL Based on Destination IPv4 Mat tinati P Action SS Destination IP Mask Every Address i Deny False 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 Binding Configuration Direction Inbound Port Selection Table Managing Device Security 435 ProSafe M5300 Switch Note There is an implicit deny all rule at the end
622. u do not configure any port IEEE 802 1Q or protocol based VLANs untagged packets will be assigned to VLAN 1 You can override this behavior by defining either port based VLANs or protocol based VLANs or both Tagged packets are always handled according to the IEEE 802 1Q standard and are not included in protocol based VLANs If you assign a port to a protocol based VLAN for a specific protocol untagged frames received on that port for that protocol will be assigned the protocol based VLAN ID Untagged frames received on the port for other protocols will be assigned the Port VLAN ID either the default PVID 1 or a PVID you have specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN Configuration screen You define a protocol based VLAN by creating a group Each group has a one to one relationship with a VLAN ID can include one to three protocol definitions and can include multiple ports When you create a group you will choose a name and a Group ID will be assigned automatically To display the Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration page click Switching gt VLAN gt Advanced gt Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration croup 10 Group name Protocol VLAN ID SE 1 IPX 1 0 7 1 0 9 To configure a protocol based VLAN group 1 Use Group ID to specify a unique ID for the group 2 Use Group Name to assign a name to a new group You may e
623. u to define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class As packets are received these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets You can have multiple match criteria in a class The logic is a Boolean logical and for this criteria After creating a Class click the class link to the Class page To display the page click QoS gt DiffServ gt Advanced gt IPv6 Class Configuration IPv6 Class Configuration IPv6 Class Name E ipv6Class All To configure a DiffServ class 1 To create a new class enter a class name select the class type and click ADD This field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names from which one can be selected The switch supports only the Class Type value All which means all the various match criteria defined for the class should be satisfied for a packet match All signifies the logical AND of all the match criteria Only when a new class is created this field is a selector field After class creation this becomes a non configurable field displaying the configured class type 2 To rename an existing class select the check box next to the configured class update the name and click APPLY 3 To remove a class click the check box beside the Class Name then click DELETE Click REFRESH to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch After cr
624. ule Configuration 1 99 ACLID 10 Rule ID lo Action Permit Egress Queue wl 0 6 Deny Logging Disable Enable Match Every Disable Enable Mirror Interface 1 m Redirect Interface Src IP Address Src IP Mask Rate Limit Conform Data Rate 1 4294967295 Rate Limit Burst Size 1 128 Time Range E 2 Configure the desired criteria for the new rule e Rule ID Specify a number from 1 12 to identify the IP ACL rule You can create up to 12 rules for each ACL Managing Device Security 443 ProSafe M5300 Switch Action Selects the ACL forwarding action which is one of the following e Permit Forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria e Deny Drops packets which meet the ACL criteria Logging When set to Enable logging is enabled for this ACL rule subject to resource availability in the device If the Access List Trap Flag is also enabled this will cause periodic traps to be generated indicating the number of times this rule was hit during the current report interval A fixed 5 minute report interval is used for the entire system A trap is not issued if the ACL rule hit count is zero for the current interval This field is visible for a Deny Action Assign Queue ID Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this ACL rule Enter an identifying number from 0 6 in the appropriate field M
625. ult route Two types are supported e External Type 1 e External Type 2 Default is External Type 2 OSPF Configuration i Use Router ID to specify the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS If you want to change the Router ID you must first disable OSPF After you set the new Router ID you must re enable OSPF to have the change take effect The default value is 0 0 0 0 although this is not a valid Router ID Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable If you select enable OSPF will be activated for the switch The default value is disable You must configure a Router ID before OSPF can become operational see step 1 or by issuing the CLI command Config router router id Enable or disable RFC 1583 Compatibility to specify the preference rules that will be used when choosing among multiple AS external LSAs advertising the same destination If you select enable the preference rules will be those defined by RFC 1583 If you select disable the preference rules will be those defined in Section 16 4 1 of the OSPF 2 standard RFC 2328 which will prevent routing loops when AS external LSAs for the same destination have been originated from different areas The default value is enable All routers in the OSPF domain must be configured the same If all OSPF routers are capable of operating according to RFC 2328 RFC 1583 Compatibility should be disabled Set the Opa
626. umber does not include retransmissions Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this server Access Accepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets including both valid and invalid packets that were received from this server Access Rejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets including both valid and invalid packets that were received from this server Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets including both valid and invalid packets that were received from this server Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or signature attributes received from this server Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server Managing Device Security 362 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port
627. umber of DHCPINFORM messages received by the DHCP Server DHCPOFFER Specifies the number of DHCPOFFER messages sent by the DHCP Server DHCPACK Specifies the number of DHCPACK messages sent by the DHCP Server DHCPNAK Specifies the number of DHCPNAK messages sent by the DHCP Server DHCP Bindings Information To display the DHCP Bindings Information page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Bindings Information A screen similar to the following displays DHCP Bindings Information Reset All Dynamic Bindings Specific Dynamic Binding DHCP Bindings Information Search By Binding IP a i o co Lease Time E dna E eS 1 Choose e All Dynamic Bindings to specify all dynamic bindings to be deleted e Specific Dynamic Binding to specify specific dynamic binding to be deleted The following table describes the DHCP Bindings Information fields Field Description IP Address Specifies the Client s IP Address Hardware Address Specifies the Client s Hardware Address Lease Time Left Specifies the Lease time left in Days Hours and Minutes dd hh mm format Type Specifies the Type of Binding Dynamic Manual Configuring System Information 51 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Conflicts Information To display the DHCP Conflicts Information page click System gt Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Conflicts Information A screen similar to the following displays DH
628. unicast address and expects a reply from which it can determine the time and optionally the round trip delay and local clock offset relative to the server e Broadcast SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local broadcast address instead of a multicast address The broadcast address has a single subnet scope while a multicast address has Internet wide scope Default value is Disable 2 Use Port to specify the local UDP port to listen for responses broadcasts Allowed range is 1 to 65535 Default value is 123 3 Use Unicast Poll Interval to specify the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of two when configured in unicast mode Allowed range is 6 to 10 Default value is 6 4 Use Broadcast Poll Interval to specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of two when configured in broadcast mode Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded Allowed range is 6 to 10 Default value is 6 5 Use Unicast Poll Timeout to specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response when configured in unicast mode Allowed range is 1 to 30 Default value is 5 6 Use Unicast Poll Retry to specify the number of times to retry a request to an SNTP server after the first time out before attempting to use the next configured server when configured in unicast mode Allowed range is 0 to 10 Default value is 1 7 When using SNT
629. unning The report timer is used to send out the reports Idle member state host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer running Filter Mode The group filter mode Include Exclude None for the specified group on the IGMP Proxy interface Number of Sources The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen with latest IGMP proxy member information Routing 303 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM The Protocol Independent Multicast protocol is a simple protocol independent multicast routing protocol PIM uses an existing unicast routing table and a Join Prune Graft mechanism to build a tree PIM The ProSafe managed switch supports two types of PIM sparse mode PIM SM and dense mode PIM DM PIM SM is most effective in networks with a sparse population of multicast receivers In contrast PIM DM is most effective in networks with densely populated multicast receivers In other words PIM DM can be used if the majority of network hosts request to receive a multicast stream while PIM SM might be a better choice in networks in which a small percentage of network hosts located throughout the network wish to receive the multicast stream From the PIM DM link you can access the following pages e PIM Global Configuration on page 304 e SSM Configuration on page 305 e PIM Interface Configuration on page 306 e PIM Neighbor on page 307
630. unt The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Area LSA Count The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Area LSA Checksum The 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Type of Service This field is the normal TOS associated with the stub metric Routing 263 ProSafe M5300 Switch NSSA Area Configuration To display the NSSA Area Configuration page click Routing gt OSPFv3 gt Advanced gt NSSA Area Configuration NSSA Area Configuration OSPFv3 NSSA Area Configuration Default Information Originate Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is 1 Use Area ID to enter the OSPF area ID An Area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects 2 Use Import Summary LSAs to select enable or disable If you select enable summary LSAs will be imported into areas Defaults to Enable 3 Use Default Information Originate to advertise a default route into th
631. unters Cleared The amount of time since the counters have been reset Message Rate Interval The number of seconds between measurements Message Rate The number of messages sent in the last measurement interval Highest Message Rate The highest number of messages that have been sent in a measurement interval Configuring System Information 81 ProSafe M5300 Switch PoE M5300 28G POE and M5300 52G POE Only Copper Ethernet ports 1 24 on the M5300 28G POE and copper Ethernet ports 1 48 on the M5300 52G POE are PoE IEEE 802 3at compliant ports Each port is capable of delivering up to 30W of reliable uninterrupted power to connected PoE powered devices PD The GS728TPS can provide a total of 192W of power to all connected devices The GS752TPS can provide a total of 384W of power to all connected devices You can configure per port priority settings timers and power limits to manage the power supplied to the connected PDs and to ensure that the power budget for each switch is used effectively From the PoE link you can access the following pages e Basic PoE Configuration on page 83 e PoE Port Configuration on page 84 Configuring System Information 82 ProSafe M5300 Switch Basic PoE Configuration Use the PoE Configuration page to view global PoE power information and to configure PoE settings To display the Basic PoE Configuration page click System gt Services gt PoE gt Basic gt P
632. upports IEEE 802 1w and IEEE 802 1D The MSTP algorithm and protocol provides simple and full connectivity for frames assigned to any given VLAN throughout a Bridged LAN comprising arbitrarily interconnected networking devices each operating MSTP STP or RSTP MSTP allows frames assigned to different VLANs to follow separate paths each based on an independent Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI within Multiple Spanning Tree MST Regions composed of LANs and or MSTP Bridges These Regions and the other Bridges and LANs are connected into a single Common Spanning Tree CST IEEE DRAFT P802 1s D13 MSTP connects all Bridges and LANs with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST supports the automatic determination of each MST region choosing its maximum possible extent The connectivity calculated for the CIST provides the CST for interconnecting these Regions and an Internal Spanning Tree IST within each Region MSTP ensures that frames with a given VLAN ID are assigned to one and only one of the MSTIs or the IST within the Region that the assignment is consistent among all the networking devices in the Region and that the stable connectivity of each MSTI and IST at the boundary of the Region matches that of the CST The stable active topology of the Bridged LAN with respect to frames consistently classified as belonging to any given VLAN thus simply and fully connects all LANs and networking devices throughout the network
633. urity gt Management Security gt TACACS gt TACACS Server Configuration TACACS Server Configuration TACACS Server Configuration Co ctio Mieke TACACS Server Priority 0 to 65535 Port 0 to 65535 Key String fon 1 168 10 115 Ca C E eeeeeees C E Managing Device Security 365 ProSafe M5300 Switch To configure TACACS server settings 1 Use TACACS Server to enter the configured TACACS server IP address 2 Use Priority to specify the order in which the TACACS servers are used It should be within the range 0 65535 3 Use Port to specify the authentication port It should be within the range 0 65535 Use Key String to specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server The valid range is 0 128 characters The key must match the encryption used on the TACACS server 5 Use Connection Timeout to specify the amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS server time out The range is between 1 30 6 Click ADD to add a new server to the switch This button is only available to READWRITE users These changes will not be retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed 7 Click DELETE to delete the selected server from the configuration Authentication List Configuration The Authentication List folder contains links to the following features e Login Authentication List on page 366 e Enable Aut
634. ut for HTTPS sessions This time out is unaffected by the activity level of the session The value must be in the range of 1 to 168 hours The default value is 24 hours The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Use Maximum Number of HTTPS Sessions to set the maximum allowable number of HTTPS sessions The value must be in the range of 0 to 16 The default value is 16 The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed Field Description Certificate Present Displays whether there is a certificate present on the device Authentication List Displays authentication list for HTTPS Managing Device Security 374 ProSafe M5300 Switch Certificate Management Use this menu to generate or delete certificates To display the Certificate Management page click Security gt Access gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Certificate Management Certificate Management Certificate Management Certificate Present None Generate Certificates Delete Certificates Certificate Generation Status Certificate Generation Status No certificate generation in progress To manage certificates 1 Use None to specify there is no certificate management This is the default selection 2 Use Generate Certificates to begin generating the Certificate files 3 Use DELETE Certificates to delete the corresponding Certificate files if present Field Description Certificate
635. uting 1 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured 2 Use Area ID to enter the 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface connects If you assign an Area ID which does not exist the area will be created with default values 3 Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable The default value is disable You can configure OSPF v3 parameters without enabling OSPFv3 Admin Mode but they will have no effect until you enable Admin Mode The following information will be displayed only if the Admin Mode is enabled State Designated Router Backup Designated Router Number of Link Events LSA ACK Interval and Metric Cost For OSPF v3 to be fully functional the interface must have a valid IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length This can be done through the CLI using the IPv6 address command in the interface configuration mode Note Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router it will remain initialized until the router is reset Routing 266 10 11 12 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Router Priority to enter the OSPFv3 priority for the selected interface The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255 The default is 1 which is the highest router priority A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network Use Retransmit Interval to enter the OSPFv3 retransmit
636. uting gt Multicast gt IGMP gt Proxy Interface Configuration IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration Interface 1 0 1 E i Admin Mode Disable Unsolicited Report Interval a IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Operational Mode Disable Querier Address on Proxy Interface Number of Groups Version Version 1 Querier Timeout Version 2 Querier Timeout Proxy Start Frequency To configure an interface as an IGMP proxy 1 Use Interface to select the port for which data is to be configured You must have configured at least one router interface before configuring or displaying data for an IGMP Proxy interface and it should not be a IGMP routing interface Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of IGMP Proxy on the selected interface The default is disable Routing IGMP and Multicast global admin modes should be enabled to enable IGMP Proxy interface mode Use Version to enter the version of IGMP you want to configure on the selected interface Valid values are 1 to 3 and the default value is 3 This field is configurable only when IGMP Proxy interface mode is enabled 4 Use Unsolicited Report Interval to enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group Valid values are from 1 to 260 The default value is 1 Field Description I
637. v6 Traceroute IPv6 Traceroute IPv6 IPv6 Address Host Name Port Results 1 Use IPv6 Address Hostname to enter the IPv6 address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to discover path The initial value is blank The IPv6 Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 2 Use Port to enter the UDP Dest port in probe packets The initial value is default value The port you enter is not retained across a power cycle 3 Click APPLY to initiate the traceroute Maintenance 500 Help Use the features available from the Help tab to connect to online resources for assistance The Help tab contains a links to the following e Online Help on page 501 e Registration on page 503 Online Help The Online Help includes the following pages e Support on page 501 e User Guide on page 502 Support Use the Support page to connect to the Online Support site at netgear com To access the Support page click Help gt Online Help gt Support Support Support Please click APPLY below to be taken to the Online Support site at netgear com To connect to the NETGEAR support site for ProSafe click APPLY 501 ProSafe M5300 Switch User Guide Use the User Guide page to access the Web Management User Guide the guide you are now reading that is available on the NETGEAR Website To access the User Guide page click Help gt Online Help gt User Guide User Guide Us
638. v6 Denial of Service Max ICMPv6 Packet Size Denial of Service First Fragment Denial of Service ICMP Fragment Denial of Service SIP DIP Denial of Service SMAC DMAC Denial of Service TCP FINS URG amp PSH Denial of Service TCP Flag amp Sequence Denial of Service TCP Fragment Denial of Service TCP Offset Denial of Service TCP Port Denial of Service TCP SYN Denial of Service TCP SYN amp FIN Denial of Service UDP Port Disable Enable 512 Disable Enable 512 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable To configure protection from DoS attacks 1 Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Use Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size to specify the minimum TCP header size allowed If First Fragment DoS prevention is enabled the device will drop packets that have a TCP header smaller than this configured value First Fragment DoS prevention is disabled by default 2 Use Denial of Service ICMPv4 to enable ICMPv4 DoS prevention causing the switch to drop ICMP packets that have a type set to ECHO_REQ ping and a size greater than the configured ICMP Pkt Size The factory default is disabled Managing Device Security 382 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ProSafe M5300 Switch Use Denial of Service Max ICMP Packet Size to specify the Max
639. value of the switch Port Authentication In port based authentication mode when 802 1X is enabled globally and on the port successful authentication of any one supplicant attached to the port results in all users being able to use the port without restrictions At any given time only one supplicant is allowed to attempt authentication on a port in this mode Ports in this mode are under bidirectional control This is the default authentication mode The 802 1X network has three components e Authenticators Specifies the port that is authenticated before permitting system access Managing Device Security 386 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Supplicants Specifies the host connected to the authenticated port requesting access to the system services e Authentication Server Specifies the external server for example the RADIUS server that performs the authentication on behalf of the authenticator and indicates whether the user is authorized to access system services From the Port Authentication link you can access the following pages e Basic on page 387 e Advanced on page 389 Basic From the Basic link you can access the following pages e 802 1X Configuration on page 387 802 1X Configuration Use the 802 1X Configuration page to enable or disable port access control on the system To display the 802 1X Configuration page click Security gt Port Authentication gt Basic gt 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Configur
640. values e Click REFRESH to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics Field Description iflndex This object indicates the iflndex of the interface table entry associated with this port on an adapter Port Type For normal ports this field will be normal Otherwise the possible values are e Mirrored This port is a participating in port mirroring as a mirrored port Look at the Port Mirroring screens for more information e Probe This port is a participating in port mirroring as the probe port Look at the Port Mirroring screens for more information Trunk Member The port is a member of a Link Aggregation trunk Look at the Port Channel screens for more information Port Channel ID If the port is a member of a port channel the port channel s interface ID and name are shown Otherwise Disable is shown Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree The port role will be one of the following values Root Port Designated Port Alternate Port Backup Port Master Port or Disabled Port STP Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or Port Channel The possible values are e Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this port e Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this port STP State The port s current state Spanning Tree state This state controls what action a port takes on
641. vate VLAN Host Interface Configuration Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration Private VLAN Host Interface Configuration 1 2 LAGS All Go To Interface Host Primary VLAN Host Secondary VLAN Interf oO ti I VLAN RE A r to 4093 a to 4093 akan s Cs 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 To associate one or more ports to host private VLANs 1 Select the check box associated with each Interface to configure or select the check box in the header row to apply the same settings to all interfaces 2 Inthe Host Primary VLAN field specify the VLAN ID of the primary VLAN in which the selected ports are members 3 In the Host Secondary VLAN field specify the VLAN ID of the secondary VLAN in which the selected ports are members 4 Click APPLY to send the updated configuration to the switch Configuration changes take effect immediately 5 Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen Field Description Operational VLAN s Indicates which VLANs associated with the port are operational Managing Device Security 410 ProSafe M5300 Switch Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface Configuration Use this page to associate a port with a promiscuous primary VLAN An endpoint connected to a promiscuous port is allowed to communicate with any endpoint within the private VLAN Multiple promiscuous ports can be defined for a single private VLAN domain To display the Private VLAN Pro
642. ved Specifies the aggregate of all interface level statistics for received messages Total DHCPv6 Packets Received Specifies the total number of Packets Received DHCPV6 Solicit Packets Received Specifies the number of Solicits DHCPv6 Request Packets Received Specifies the number of Requests DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received Specifies the number of Confirms DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received Specifies the number of Renews DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received Specifies the number of Rebinds Configuring System Information 65 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description DHCPVv6 Release Packets Received Specifies the number of Releases DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received Specifies the number of Declines DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received Specifies the number of Informs DHCPv6 Relay forward Packets Received Specifies the number of Relay forwards DHCPv6 Relay reply Packets Received Specifies the number of Relay Replies DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received Specifies the number of Malformed Packets Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded Specifies the number of Packets Discarded Messages Sent The aggregate of all interface level statistics for messages sent Total DHCPv6 Packets Sent Specifies the total number of Packets Transmitted DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted Specifies the number of Advertisements DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted
643. ver Configuration Use the RADIUS Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for the current RADIUS server configured on the system To access the RADIUS Server Configuration page click Security gt Management Security gt RADIUS gt Server Configuration link RADIUS Server Configuration Server Configuration Radius Server IP Address Radius Server Name Current Port SEREA Secret kisaa TOA aaa Configured Server Authenticator Type Yes E 192 168 10 100 radius1 Yes Enable Netgear Statistics Radius nas Access Access Access Access Access ras Bad Pending sia Unknown Packets Server z p Requests Retransmissions Accepts Rejects Challenges Authenticators Requests Types Dropped Time Responses 0 0 o 0 o 0 0 0 0 192 168 10 100 0 00 0 0 To configure a RADIUS server 1 To adda RADIUS server specify the settings the following list describes and click ADD e Inthe Radius Server IP Address field specify the IP address of the RADIUS server to add e In the Radius Server Name field specify the Name of the server being added e Use Port to specify the UDP port used by this server The valid range is 0 65535 e Secret Configured The Secret will only be applied if this option is yes If the option is no anything entered in the Secret field will have no affect and will not be retained e Use Secret to specify the shared secret for this server e Use Primary Server to
644. ward packets while the control and management planes restart as a result of a power failure hardware failure or software fault on the management unit A nonstop forwarding failover can also be manually initiated by clicking the Initiate Failover button on the NSF Summary page Traffic flows that enter and exit the stack through physical ports on a unit other than the management continue with at most sub second interruption when the management unit fails To prepare the backup management unit in case of a failover applications on the management unit continuously checkpoint some state information to the backup unit Changes to the running configuration are automatically copied to the backup unit MAC addresses stay the same across a nonstop forwarding failover so that neighbors do not have to relearn them When a nonstop forwarding failover occurs the control plane on the backup unit starts from a partially initialized state and applies the checkpointed state information While the control plane is initializing the stack cannot react to external changes such as network topology changes Once the control plane is fully operational on the new management unit the control plane ensures that the hardware state is updated as necessary Control plane failover time depends on the size of the stack the complexity of the configuration and the speed of the CPU The management plane restarts when a failover occurs Management connections must be reestablis
645. were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received 1024 1518 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets Received gt 1518 Octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Total Packets Received Without Errors The total number of packets received that were without errors Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Total Packets Received with MAC Errors The total number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Jabbers Received The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS
646. whether the address for the SNTP server is an IP address IPv4 or hostname DNS Address Specify the address or host name of an SNTP server the device can use to synchronize the system time If this address is a DNS hostname then that hostname should be resolved into an IP address each time a SNTP request is sent to it Port Enter a port number on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent The valid range is 1 65535 The default is 123 Priority Specify the priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of servers to which SNTP requests will be sent The client continues sending requests to different servers until a successful response is received or all servers are exhausted This object indicates the order in which to query the servers A server entry with a precedence of 1 will be queried before a server with a priority of 2 and so forth If more than one server has the same priority then the requesting order will follow the lexicographical ordering of the entries in this table Allowed range is 1 to 3 Default value is 1 Version Enter the NTP version running on the server Range 1 4 default 4 Configuring System Information 38 7 ProSafe M5300 Switch Click ADD Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers You can configure up to three SNTP servers To removing an SNTP server select the check box next to the configured server to remove and then click DELETE The entry is re
647. will not send ICMP Destination Unreachables By default Destination Unreachables mode is enable Use ICMP Redirects to enable disable ICMP Redirects Mode The router sends an ICMP Redirect on an interface only if Redirects are enabled both globally and on the interface By default ICMP Redirects Mode is enable Use IP MTU to specify the maximum size of IP packets sent on an interface Valid range is 68 bytes to the link MTU Default value is 0 A value of 0 indicates that the IP MTU is unconfigured When the IP MTU is unconfigured the router uses the link MTU as the IP MTU The link MTU is the maximum frame size minus the length of the layer 2 header Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click CANCEL to abandon the changes Click DELETE to delete the IP Address from the selected interface Click REFRESH to refresh the web page to show the latest IP information Routing 199 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID for the interface Link State The state of the specified interface is either Active or Inactive An interface is considered active if it the link is up and it is in forwarding state OSPF Admin Mode Displays OSPF admin mode of the interface The default value is disable Secondary IP Address To display the Secondary IP Address page click Routing gt IP gt Advanced gt Secondary IP Secondary IP Address Routing Interface Interface 1 0 5 x Seco
648. wing tasks e Filter harmful DHCP messages e Build a bindings database with entries that consist of the following information e MAC address e IP address e VLAN ID e Client port Entries in the bindings database are considered to be authorized network clients The DHCP Snooping folder contains links to the following features e DHCP Snooping Global Configuration on page 415 e DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration on page 416 e DHCP Snooping Binding Configuration on page 417 e DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration on page 418 e DHCP Snooping Statistics on page 418 Managing Device Security 414 ProSafe M5300 Switch DHCP Snooping Global Configuration Use this page to configure the administrative mode of DHCP snooping on the switch and to enable DHCP snooping on VLANS When enabled on a VLAN DHCP snooping forwards valid DHCP client messages it receives in the VLAN The message is forwarded on all trusted interfaces in the VLAN To display the DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page click Security gt Control gt DHCP Snooping gt Global Configuration DHCP Snooping Global Configuration DHCP Snooping Global Configuration DHCP Snooping Mode Disable Enable MAC Address Validation Disable Enable VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration 1 Use DHCP Snooping Mode to enable or disable the DHCP Snooping feature The factory default is disabled 2 Use MAC Address Validation to enable or disable the validatio
649. wing settings and click ADD e Action Specify what action should be taken if a packet matches the rule s criteria The choices are permit or deny Managing Device Security 438 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Assign Queue Id Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all packets matching this ACL rule Valid range of Queue Ids is 0 to 6 e CoS Specifies the 802 1p user priority to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid range of values is 0 to 7 e Ethertype User Value Specifies the user defined customized Ethertype value to be used when the user has selected User Value as Ethertype Key to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid range of values is 0x0600 to OxFFFF e Source MAC Specifies the Source MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is Xx XX XX XX XX XX e Source MAC Mask Specifies the Source MAC address mask specifying which bits in the Source MAC to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is XX XX XX XX XX XX e Destination MAC Specifies the destination MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format is xx xx xx xx xx xx The BPDU keyword may be specified using a Destination MAC address of 01 80 C2 xx xx xx e Destination MAC Mask Specifies the destination MAC address mask specifying which bits in the destination MAC to compare against an Ethernet frame Valid format iS XX XX XX XX XX XX The BPDU keyword may be specified using a Destin
650. witch PIM SSM Configuration While PIM SM employs a specially configured RP router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners Protocol Independent Multicast Source Specific Multicast PIM SSM does not use an RP It supports only source route deliver trees It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs The SSM service model can be implemented with a strict subset of the PIM SM protocol mechanisms Both regular IP Multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router and both can be implemented using the PIM SM protocol A range of multicast addresses currently FF3x 96 in IPv6 is reserved for SSM To display the PIM SSM Configuration page click Routing gt IPv6 Multicast gt PIM SM gt SSM Configuration PIM SSM Configuration SSM Configuration To configure SSM settings for IPv6 PIM SM 1 Use SSM Group Address to enter the source specific multicast group ip address Use SSM Group Mask to enter the source specific multicast IPv6 group prefix length Click ADD to add a new source specific group Click DELETE to delete an extant source specific group a gt N Click CANCEL to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Routing 315 ProSafe M5300 Switch PIM Interface Configuration To display the IPv6 PIM Interface Configuration page
651. with the LAG The possible values are e Disable Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG e Enable Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG Use Static Mode to select enable or disable from the pull down menu When the LAG is enabled it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs i e the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it may receive are dropped The factory default is disable Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes Click DELETE to remove the currently selected configured LAG All ports that were members of this LAG are removed from the LAG and included in the default VLAN Configuring Switching Information 185 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description LAG Description A description string attached to a LAG LAG ID Identification of the LAG LAG State Indicates whether the Link is up or down Configured Ports Indicate the ports that are members of this port channel Active Ports Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port channel LAG Membership Use the LAG Membership page to select two or more full duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group LAG which is also known as a port channel The switch can treat the port channel as if it were a single link To access the LAG Membership page click Switching gt LAG gt LAG Membership The following figure shows LAG 1 with ports 6 7 and 8 as members LAG
652. work protocol which inter operates with Cisco devices running the Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP ISDP is used to share information between neighboring devices ISDP software participates in the CDP protocol and is able to both discover and be discovered by other CDP supporting devices From the ISDP link you can access the following pages e ISDP Global Configuration on page 109 e Advanced ISDP Configuration on page 110 ISDP Global Configuration Use this page to configure global ISDP settings for the switch To display this page click System gt ISDP gt Basic gt Global Configuration A screen similar to the following displays Global Configuration Global Configuration Admin Mode Disable Enable Timer 30 Hold Time 180 Version 2 Advertisements Disable Enable Neighbors table last time changed 2 Days 05 10 48 Device ID ng2xn1225lf0014 Device ID Format Capability Serial Number Host Name Device ID Format Serial Number To configure global ISDP settings 1 Use Admin Mode to specify whether the ISDP Service is to be Enabled or Disabled The default value is Enabled 2 Use Timer to specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets The range is 5 to 254 seconds Default value is 30 seconds 3 Use Hold Time to specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits The hold time specifies how long a receiving device should store information sent in the ISDP packet before disca
653. y 402 ProSafe M5300 Switch Static MAC Address Use this page to add and remove the MAC addresses of hosts that are allowed to send traffic to specific interfaces on the device The number of MAC addresses you can associate with each interface is determined by the maximum static MAC addresses allowed on a given interface To display the Static MAC Address page click Security gt Traffic Control gt Port Security gt Static MAC Address Static MAC Address Configuration Port List Interface 1 0 1 Static MAC Address Table E Static MAC Address VLAN ID To configure static MAC address to interface associations 1 When adding a static MAC address entry use the Interface menu to select the interface to associate with the permitted MAC address Interface Select the physical interface for which you want to display data Static MAC Address Accepts user input for the MAC address to be deleted Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID corresponding to the MAC address being added Click ADD to add a new static MAC address to the switch Click DELETE to delete a existing static MAC address from the switch gt O N Managing Device Security 403 ProSafe M5300 Switch Private Group The Private Group feature provides Layer 2 isolation between ports that share the same broadcast domain Ports can be grouped together as members of the same private group The Private Group folder contains links to the following features
654. y a single route whose Mroute table entry Group IP The destination group IP address Incoming Interface The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source group arrive Outgoing Interface s The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source group are forwarded Up Time hh mm ss The time in seconds since the entry was created Expiry Time hh mm ss The time in seconds before this entry will age out and be removed from the table RPF Neighbor The IP address of the Reverse Path Forwarding neighbor Protocol The multicast routing protocol which created this entry The possibilities are e PIM DM e PIM SM e DVMRP Flags The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIMSM The possible values are RPT or SPT For other protocols an is displayed Routing 287 ProSafe M5300 Switch Multicast Global Configuration To display the Multicast Global Configuration page click Routing gt Multicast gt Global Configuration Global Configuration Global Configuration Admin Mode Protocol State Table Maximum Entry Count Protocol Table Entry Count Disable Enable Non Operational 256 No Protocol Enabled 0 Use Admin Mode to set the administrative status of Multicast Forwarding in the router The default is disable If you change the administrative mode click APPLY to update the swit
655. y this authenticator To display the Cable Test page click Monitoring gt Ports gt Cable Test Cable Test Cable Test 1 2 All GoTo Port Oca Cable Status Cable Failure Location 1 0 1 Normal 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 1 0 10 1 0 11 1 0 12 1 0 13 No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable No Cable im im Cable status test failed Cable status test failed Monitoring the System 467 1 ProSafe M5300 Switch Interface Indicates the interface to which the cable to be tested is connected 2 Click APPLY to perform a cable test on the selected interface The cable test may take up to 2 seconds to complete If the port has an active link then the link is not taken down and the cable status is always Normal The command returns a cable length estimate if this feature is supported by the PHY for the current link speed Note that if the link is down and a cable is attached to a 10 100 Ethernet adapter then the cable status may be Open or Short because some Ethernet adapters leave unused wire pairs unterminated or grounded Field Description Cable Status This displays the cable status as Normal Open or Short e Normal the cable is working correctly e Open the cable is disconnected or there is a faulty connector e Short there is an electrical short in the cable e Cable Te
656. y to enter the RIP Authentication Key for the specified interface If you do not choose to use authentication you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple or encrypt the key may be up to 16 octets long The key value will only be displayed if you are logged on with Read Write privileges 7 Use Authentication Key ID to enter the RIP Authentication Key ID for the specified interface If you choose not to use authentication or to use simple you will not be prompted to enter the key ID If you choose encrypt the key ID may be in range from 0 to 255 The key ID value will be displayed only if you are logged on with Read Write privileges 8 Click APPLY to update the switch with the changes 9 Click REFRESH to update the screen with the most recent information 10 Click CANCEL to abandon the changes RIP Status Field Description Interface Displays the interface for which data is configured IP Address Displays the IP Address of the router interface Routing 228 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description Send Version Displays the version of RIP control packets the interface should send from the pull down menu The value is one of the following e RIP 1 send RIP version 1 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 1c RIP version 1 compatibility mode Send RIP version 2 formatted packets via broadcast e RIP 2 send RIP version 2 packets using multicast The def
657. ys Specifies the Number of Days of Lease Period This field appears only if the user has specified Specified Duration as the Lease time Default Value is 1 Valid Range is 0 to 59 Hours Specifies the Number of Hours of Lease Period This field appears only if the user has specified Specified Duration as the Lease time Valid Range is 0 to 22 Minutes Specifies the Number of Minutes of Lease Period This field appears only if the user has specified Specified Duration as the Lease time Valid Range is 0 to 86399 Default Router Addresses Specifies the list of Default Router Addresses for the pool The user may specify up to 8 Default Router Addresses in order of preference Configuring System Information 48 ProSafe M5300 Switch Field Description DNS Server Addresses Specifies the list of DNS Server Addresses for the pool The user may specify up to 8 DNS Server Addresses in order of preference NetBIOS Name Server Addresses NetBIOS Node Type Next Server Address Specifies the list of NetBIOS Name Server Addresses for the pool The user may specify up to 8 NetBIOS Name Server Addresses in order of preference Specifies the NetBIOS node type for DHCP clients b node Broadcast p node Peer to Peer m node Mixed h node Hybrid Specifies the Next Server Address for the pool Domain Name Specifies the domain name for a DHCP client Domain N
658. z usec e Received response for Seq Num 1 Rtt abc usec e Received response for Seq Num 2 Rtt def usec e Tx Count Rx Count Min Max Avg RTT xyz abc def msec To access the Ping IPv4 page click Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Ping IPv4 Ping Ipv4 Ping Details IP Address Host Name Count Interval secs Datagram Size Ping To configure the settings and ping a host on the network 1 Use IP Address Host Name to enter the IP address or Hostname of the station you want the switch to ping The initial value is blank The IP Address or Hostname you enter is not retained across a power cycle 2 Optionally configure the following settings Maintenance 497 ProSafe M5300 Switch e Count Enter the number of echo requests you want to send The initial value is default value The Count you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Interval secs Enter the Interval between ping packets in seconds initial value is default value The Interval you enter is not retained across a power cycle e Datagram Size Enter the Size of ping packet initial value is default value The Size you enter is not retained across a power cycle PING displays the result after the switch sends a Ping request to the specified address Click CANCEL to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the latest value of the switch Click APPLY to send the ping The switch sends the number of pings spec
659. ze 128 KB e Confirm Action Send e Violate Action Drop For more information about this screen see Class Configuration on page 343 From the Service Configuration screen select the check box next to interfaces g7 and g8 to attach the policy to these interfaces and then click APPLY See Service Interface Configuration on page 351 Configuration Examples 517 ProSafe M5300 Switch All UDP packet flows destined to the 192 12 2 0 network with an IP source address from the 192 12 1 0 network that have a Layer 4 Source port of 4567 and Destination port of 4568 from this switch on ports 7 and 8 are assigned to hardware queue 3 On this network traffic from streaming applications uses UDP port 4567 as the source and 4568 as the destination This real time traffic is time sensitive so it is assigned to a high priority hardware queue By default data traffic uses hardware queue 0 which is designated as a best effort queue Also the confirmed action on this flow is to send the packets with a committed rate of 1000000 Kbps and burst size of 128 KB Packets that violate the committed rate and burst size are dropped 802 1X Local Area Networks LANs are often deployed in environments that permit unauthorized devices to be physically attached to the LAN infrastructure or permit unauthorized users to attempt to access the LAN through equipment already attached In such environments it may be desirable to restrict access to the services

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PLP-052 - Plasma Physics at West Virginia University  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file